Audio

110: How To Source Anything From China And Establish Good Vendor Relationships With Dave Bryant

110: How To Source Anything From China And Establish Good Relationships With Dave Bryant

Today I’ve got my buddy Dave Bryant on the show.  Dave and I met when he randomly reached out to me via email and we’ve kept in touch ever since.  And what’s cool is that we finally met face to face at the Ecommerce Fuel conference last year.

Dave runs several online stores selling boat equipment but I think his most successful site sells boat anchors of all things:)   Big and heavy boat anchors that he imports from China.  Talk about niche.

Dave also runs the popular blog ChineseImporting.com where he teaches others how to import goods from China.   He’s been importing since age 16, he’s written a few books about the topic and what’s cool is he works with his wife just like me.

Today, we are going to discuss his businesses and some more in depth topics on importing that go way beyond your typical find a product to sell on Alibaba stuff that you’ve heard in the past.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Dave got into the boat anchor business.
  • Why Dave decided to sell the heaviest, most unwieldy items possible.
  • Where Dave finds his vendors.
  • How to find Chinese vendors outside of Alibaba.
  • Which sourcing services Dave recommends.
  • Dave’s opinion on Alibaba vs Global Sources vs Canton Fair vs using Panjiva and Import Genius.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagramers people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical, whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes you can get famous YouTubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as $50. The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators.

Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I have got my buddy Dave Bryant on the show. Now I’m actually not 100% sure how we met Dave, but he randomly reached out to me one day and we’ve kept in touch ever since. And we finally were able to meet face to face at the Ecommerce Fuel conference last year.

Now David runs several online stores selling boat equipment, but I think the biggest business that he has sells boat anchors of all things. Big and heavy boat anchors that he imports from China, so that’s pretty niche as far as niches go. Now David also runs the popular blog Chineseimporting.com where he teaches others how to import goods from China, he’s been doing this since age 16.

He’s even written a couple of books about the topic, and what’s also cool is that he works with his wife just like I do. Today we are going to discuss his businesses and some more in depth topics on importing that kind of go beyond your typical find the products on Alibaba stuff that you’ve probably heard on other podcasts. With that welcome to the show Dave, how are you doing today man?

Dave: Good and I’ll clarify this because my wife is on maternity leave and the government of Canada would not like to hear about her working for me. She does not currently work for me, maybe in the future.

Steve: Everybody works for their wife Dave; it’s cool to admit it.

Dave: That is true, I only work for her, but she does not work for me.

Steve: I have always been curious how does one get into boat anchors of all things, like they are the heaviest most unwieldy things that you can possibly sell in my mind?

Dave: The lucrative world of boat anchors, so it’s kind of funny, way back when I was in university I was kind of a globe trotter, and I was always in the back [inaudible 00:03:53] crazy parts of the world. One of the things in my bucket list is — one of the countries to visit was North Korea, and the only way to get to North Korea is through China. Believe it or not there is no direct flight from Canada to North Korea.

I had to go through China to North Korea. I was – decided obviously while I’m in China I might as well travel around a little bit. And while I was there I decided to visit a couple of trade shows. I had always worked — I had worked with a family friend working for his import company actually. He was selling boat anchors himself. I was over there and I kind of split off with him, I didn’t talk to for a couple of years.

I was kind of familiar with the business itself, so I attended a trade show while I was in China, a boat trade show. I met a supplier there and I kind of hit it off with the supplier and he had this one product that I was really interested in, and it was boat anchors. I asked him if I could bring one of these samples back with me to Canada and he said sure no problem.

I took this boat anchor and there is actually a couple of other products with me, and I had this huge box of products I carried around me for the next 3 weeks all throughout Asia. And I was like going on trains and I was going on buses, and I was going on…

Steve: With the boat anchor?

Dave: With the boat anchor and actually people I’m sure said all things. Anyways long story short I made my way back to Canada somehow all the products arrived safe and sound. I put them on eBay even though I got the products for free; I knew the cost was about $50, sold them for I think around 200. Of course I went back to the supplier, I asked him, hey can I can buy some more products off you, of course he agreed, he sent me some more products, again had a similar success. And fast forward about 7 years later and the supplier to this day is actually our largest supplier.

Steve: Amazing, so wait you sold things on eBay, did you have the intention of creating this business at the time or no, you were just testing?

Dave: I mean it was a test to me. I knew like I said, I had worked with a friend, our family friend way back when he was actually doing something similar to boat anchors himself. And I kind of split off from him, and he had gone on his own way doing different things. I was kind of testing the water more than anything.

Steve: Do you own a boat?

Dave: I do not.

Steve: You do not own a boat, but you went to — okay you went to a boating…

Dave: My family has been in the boating their entire life, so I think that’s probably part of the reason why I don’t own a boat myself. I have grown sick of the [inaudible 00:06:14] over the years. It’s a great clientele to work with, but by myself, or I myself, no real interest in boats.

Steve: Okay and then you are based in Canada, right?

Dave: I am.

Steve: Okay, so for the listeners what’s kind of interesting about Dave and I get a lot of questions about this. He is in Canada, but he actually makes most of his sales in the United States, is that right?

Dave: Yes, absolutely true.

Steve: Do you ship to any other countries besides the US?

Dave: The way we work is we don’t — we actually don’t inventory anything in Canada really, everything is inventoried in the US. We ship anywhere in the world like pretty much any congress country. But even if we are shipping something in Canada, we actually ship from the US to Canada. We sell something to the UK the same thing going from the US to UK.

Steve: That implies that all of your goods when you make a shipment goes straight to the US and you don’t actually see it or?

Dave: It’s kind of a backwards way to do; we do it through the port of Vancouver and what they call your shipping in bond to the US. Meaning that it comes through Canada, we don’t pay any duties or taxes on it. It pays all the US duties and taxes, and then it goes directly to the warehouse in the US. But we never touch — we never put our fingers on it.

Steve: Okay so wow, okay I was going to talk about this later, but let’s try to talk about it now, what do you do about quality control?

Dave: We work with– I do travel to China once or twice a year kind of do a little bit of QA there. It’s a little bit tough to do it if you are not permanently situated in China as you might have experience with. Other than that we’ll use a third party inspection agency, pay $300 or $400, have them check it out kind of according to our checklist.

Then once it arrives in the US, then obviously we’ll have our warehouse down there do some QA there, take the [inaudible 00:08:00] we need it, and just kind of get an idea of the overall I guess quality of the products. And what was I going to say here? Yeah, we have such long lasting relationships with our suppliers where we haven’t really had any huge quality control issues, and when it has come up they’ve been pretty good at addressing it after the buck.

Steve: Because you told me earlier that you sell over 300 items, 300 skews, is that right?

Dave: Yeah, it’s about 300 skews. A lot of those are variations, so I would say it’s closer to probably 75 if you get rid of size and color variations.

Steve: Okay, and then for each one of these items you have a separate quality control checklist for each one of these?

Dave: I mean certain things you don’t necessarily need to have the stringent quality control checklist. So something like an anchor I mean more or less there is not a lot that can go wrong in an anchor, some of the…

Steve: Okay.

Dave: Some of the other things obviously yeah, you do need to– we have a certain checklist that we go through for example something like a rope. We’ll have a checklist, and basically asking them if it’s supposed to be happening throughout, we’ll have the third party inspecting agency or the supplier measure it, physically measure it to make sure it’s actually happened. We have a whole bunch of different criteria we use for all of the different products that we just kind of have either the supplier check, or have a third party inspection agency check, or have a warehouse checked after its been received.

Steve: In terms of sales you have your own website and you are also selling on Amazon, but if someone places an order on your site do you — like how does the communication go to your warehouse to — the shipment is from the US, right?

Dave: Yeah, so if somebody places an order on the website, it goes through our automatic — our auto management software. We have an order taker here, she basically just checks it over and make sure it’s all good, and then she emails it down to the warehouse and they ship it out. It’s kind of, it’s an old school way of doing it with this email and back and forth just a PDF invoices.

Steve: Interesting.

Dave: We are trying to get a little bit more automated, but a lot of times when you are working with these third party fulfillment companies especially some of the smaller ones, their automation schemes aren’t exactly up to today’s standards, so they prefer just the old PDF invoices even faxing them sometimes.

Steve: What about returns? Do people return anchors?

Dave: They do believe it or not, a lot of times they are on their boat. So it’s a pretty low return item, but people do return it like anything. A lot of gifts that people return and returns are a bit of a pain in the butt just for the fact that it’s hard without us really having any eyes and ears on the ground to handle returns.

But our third party fulfillment company that we work with, I kind of consider them almost one of the girls there, almost one of our employees because she’s been handling our orders for God almost five years plus now. She knows the products pretty much inside out, she can decide if it can be resold, it should be disposed off or whatever.

Steve: If it can’t be resold you just junk it?

Dave: Yeah pretty much. Well at times a lot of the products that we deal with are metals, so stainless steel items and they can actually be scrapped, and we can actually get a little bit of money back, I mean from when they are scrapped.

Steve: Interesting, so you said you sell over 300 items maybe 70 unique items, and you source all these from China, right?

Dave: Yeah, most of them are coming from China. We work with a few local distributors and manufactures in the US, a couple companies in Taiwan and even the guy in Canada too, but 90% of our sales are coming from Chinese made products.

Steve: I want to talk a little bit about kind of how you found these vendors. Now everyone who kind of listens to podcast and has been doing this, everyone talked about Alibaba, but let’s talk about some of the other things outside of Alibaba today.

Dave: Yeah, so I mean Alibaba is one of those things, it’s — You can’t really escape. And it’s like if you want to buy something online even if you don’t actually buy on Amazon, at some point they are probably going to be on the Amazon website. The same thing if you are looking for a product at some point you are probably going to come across Alibaba. But Alibaba is probably not the most ideal place to find a supplier, basically 99% of importers, that’s the first and only they go to is Alibaba.

If you find a supplier on Alibaba and a really good product and you are selling a ton of them on Amazon, somebody at some point in time is going to come along and see that, hey Dave is selling all these products, I want to buy the same thing. I’m going to go to Alibaba, try to find the supplier that Dave is using and just import the exact same product from the exact same supplier. If you can find the supplier not advertised on Alibaba, you’ve basically cut down 99% of your competition.

Steve: Good point, I think you are pretty safe with anchors though by the way Dave.

Dave: You would be surprised Steve.

Steve: Really, okay?

Dave: I think the nature of kind of the whole private labeling boundary now; I think there is competition in absolutely every single niche. Now obviously some niches are well guarded than others, but every niche out there is you have some degree of competition.

Steve: What’s funny is we never had used Alibaba until relatively recently I guess within the last few years, because we just always went to trade shows to find our vendors.

Dave: Yeah, and that’s how I found our top supplier like I said we meet the trade show too, and the great thing is they don’t advertising on Alibaba, so…

Steve: Yeah same with ours, none of the vendors that we use actually today pretty much they are not advertising on Alibaba anymore.

Dave: Yeah absolutely and it’s kind of weird, not every supplier wants to advertise on Alibaba. Alibaba is kind of like internet dating for Chinese suppliers, and if you ever talked to a girl that’s on an internet dating site, they get dozens of enquires a day, people messaging them all types of creepers and only a small selection of actually serious incredible guys.

For Chinese suppliers I get the impression it’s kind of the same way with Alibaba where they might get dozens of enquiries a day, and only a really small fraction of that actually turn in to sales. And the sales that they do get tend to be kind of picky really cheap buyers who are typically ordering pretty small orders.

Steve: Right, yeah, actually I asked our vendor the last time we were there why they weren’t on Alibaba. And they said that — in so many words that they didn’t want to deal with the riffraff.

Dave: Yeah, I think that’s absolutely right, but I mean it’s a lot of work I think for these guys actually managing all the leads that they get on Alibaba, and some which are obviously not the greatest quality.

Steve: Do you use Alibaba for any of your stuff?

Dave: Yeah, I mean again like I said, like Amazon if you want to buy something online you kind of go to Amazon. If you want to find a supplier you kind of go to Alibaba, and I would say about half of our suppliers I found through Alibaba. Those products don’t make up a huge percentage of our sales, but they are a lot of our recent products that aren’t necessarily a huge part of our sales yeah, we use Alibaba to find source.

Steve: In general do you go there first, or do you hit some of the other places we are going to talk about here first?

Dave: I mean it depends, if there is a product which I think that — I just know that our customers are going to buy it, they going to buy an anchor and they need this product as an ad on, and they really not that pretty sensitive, absolutely I go to Alibaba and just try to find it in the lowest price there and import it.

If it’s a product that I really want to be kind of considerable portion of our business which I — yeah which is not going to be an ad on or an accessory product, then I’ll try to reach out to some of our current suppliers, or like I say I’ll use a couple of the other tools available which I don’t know if you want to get to now or later to try to find a supplier.

Steve: Okay, well let’s talk about the way that you guys find vendors right now first, so outside of Alibaba.

Dave: Yeah, so first thing we do is go to trade shows. And every year I try to go over there and I try to attend a big one for instance obviously boat trade shows. Like I said the great thing with the trade shows is that you will find a lot of suppliers not advertising on Alibaba. The great thing with China is a lot of people know about Canton Fair. The Canton Fair is great, that’s a huge massive trade show, it takes place twice a year in Guangzhou, China.

The only problem with the Canton Fair is that it tends to be just such a huge fair and it has a little bit of everything, but it doesn’t really specialize in anything. In China there is a specialized trade show for absolutely every single niche that you can think of. Going to these specialized trades shows, there’s really a network; you’ll find some of the best suppliers for your products. Again the Canton Fair is an okay place to start, but there are a lot of trade shows outside of the Canton Fair.

Steve: How did you find these trade shows?

Dave: I believe Chinaexhibiton.com; I just goggled China trade shows, it has a huge list of all the trade shows. And again once you’ve kind of learn your niche that you are in, you just kind of get a feel for what the most popular trade shows are. It’s kind of a — it’s a long process to learn a niche, but once you do, you do this just intuitively through speaking to various people. You kind of know the big trade shows.

Steve: What is your process from when you get to the trade show, like what preparation do you do prior to going?

Dave: Ideally I’ll go through the website of the trade show, go through the supplier list, and kind of try to get a feel for anyone’s that I would like to speak to in particular. So go through — most trade shows will have exhibition or exhibitor list, go through those exhibitors, kind of browse their website, and get a feel for who is there. Make kind of a hit list for people that I want to talk to, and then when I’m there talk to them.

Then at the same time while I’m there maybe some other companies catch my eye which I never even knew about browsing the exhibitor list and talk to them. And more or less so I do kind of when I go to these trade shows, I want to kind of have an idea of various products I am interested in importing. I don’t really go there and get surprised by new products that I even never even thought about.

Steve: Is there a lot of overlap between these companies, do they go to both that fair and the Canton Fair?

Dave: Most of our suppliers especially in our niche they don’t go to the Canton Fair.

Steve: Okay, probably because you are in boating, right?

Dave: Yeah, I mean there is a boating section in the Canton Fair. There is a boating section at the Canton Fair, but again I think it’s maybe six or seven suppliers where a boat show would probably have like 300 suppliers. It’s the same thing for anything; I mean there is a popcorn trade show in China. There is a trade show for everything.

Steve: Interesting, okay, yeah, I have only been to the Canton Fair myself and some of the ones in Hong Kong too, but…

Dave: Yeah, I’m surprised with you because I think linens, handkerchiefs; there must be a natural specialized trade show for that I would think.

Steve: Interesting, yeah I’ll go look after this, not that that would really excite me, but yeah, I’m sure — at least with the Canton Fair there is variety like, if you are bored you can go off and see some of the other cool stuff.

Dave: I know, I mean it’s overwhelming. I mean I have only been there actually once in my life, and it’s — you definitely need quite a few days to actually go through it. And I think that’s almost the predicament people are getting into, there is so much selection there, it’s almost too much selection. If you have a more narrow idea of what you want to import, it’s a lot of times you can deal with a more a little bit more efficient.

Steve: Yeah, I don’t actually recommend going there without a plan, because otherwise you’ll just wonder aimlessly. Okay so trade shows, what else you got?

Dave: The other way, so another actual good way that we reach out to a lot of suppliers is we’ve got put on these Chinese spam lists. And somehow if you ever give your card out to any trade show in China, you get put on any email list. First pity you and second you are going to get a lot of emails from a million different suppliers every day.

The only funny thing is aside from your traditional spam which nobody is ever interested in, when you get put on these Chinese spam list, actually quite a few credible suppliers will email you. They’ll say, “Hey Dave, we noticed that you are selling boat anchors. By the way we sell boat anchors. You may be interested in our products.” It’s actually, responding to those spam emails is kind of a nontraditional way actually to find suppliers.

Steve: We’ve actually found two legit suppliers that way now that you mention it.

Dave: I think talking before you; you met a guy in India out of all places?

Steve: Yeah.

Dave: So, it’s kind of funny. I will never reply to a spam email from a US company, but Chinese company for whatever reason, it’s pretty well directed spam.

Steve: Yeah, exactly and actually that one person even showed his photos of stuff that was similar to what we sold on our site, and so that’s what caught our attention.

Dave: Yeah, they do a lot of due diligence.

Steve: Unlike the US companies which just …

Dave: I know, it’s just a mass of email to everybody.

Steve: Okay, so we’ve got emails, what else?

Dave: The other thing is you can public import records. This might not be news to all of your listeners, but probably news to a lot of them that whenever you import something to US, at least if it was coming via ocean freight, the information contained on the shipping records is public information. If I’m importing boat anchors, you can actually, and you know that company name, you can go find what supplier we are using and what products we are importing.

The US government releases its public information. I think they do it on the premise that’s it’s free information, and can be used to predict economic indicators, but long story short it’s public information. To get access to this information, you either have to pay the US government a fee, or you can use one of the websites out there. There’s free websites out there and you can actually access this information, and you can type any company name, and basically type in Dave Bryant company import records, and it will return a list of some of the products that we’ve imported.

But some of the paid services like Import Genius and Panjiva, what they will do is they aggregate the information a lot more nicely. So you type in the company name, and it will really give you an itemized list of all the suppliers that my company or any other company is using, and it will give you a list of the products they are importing and a list of all the supplier names.

And why this is really good is that you can use one of these import tools, you type in the company name that you are kind of snooping on, and normally what I like to use, I do pick a big retailer who is probably less products I know they are private labeling themselves. Type in that name of that company and maybe take for example [inaudible 00:22:30]. I will type into Import Genius and they will give me a list of all suppliers that [inaudible 00:22:34] is using to import from China.

Then I will get that list of suppliers and I’ll search for them on Google, and I will reach out to all those suppliers, and only a small fraction of them are actually going to reply to you with cost sheets and spec sheets. And the ones that do, typically they are going to have really good high quality good products, because they are selling to the bigger brands, and they are going to have pretty low prices as well.

Steve: What I actually didn’t know is that, you mentioned that there are some free services that do this? Do you happen to know what they are off head?

Dave: Yeah. I think there’s, Port Examiner is one of them. I think if you go to them, you’ll kind of get my point of what I mean is that they don’t aggregate information very nicely. So they’ll give you I think, if there’s 30 different import records from my company, they’ll give you 30 different HTML pages, where some of the paid services, they’ll actually export to a nice excel worksheet for you.

Steve: Okay.

Dave: There’s [inaudible 00:23:25] and then there’s paid services.

Steve: In terms of ordering, or when you look for suppliers, do you tend to go this route first, second, third, last?

Dave: It’s pretty aware now, we have such a– we have a nice typing group of maybe ten to 12 suppliers that we kind of rely upon. When it comes to actually finding new suppliers, first thing I will do is actually I would go through kind of my list of various companies that I’ve bumped into tradeshows, and see if there’s anybody there that might be selling the products I’m interested in.

Second, I would see if one of the big box retailers is selling the products, because the big box retailers they tend a lot of times especially in small niches like boating, they tend to sell for really high prices. So I will go on to Import Genius or one of the other tools, find the list of the suppliers that they are using, get that list of suppliers, find the ones who are selling the products I’m interested in, see if there– and reach out to those suppliers directly. Then as kind of a last resort, I’ll go on Alibaba.

Steve: Okay, okay. What about Global Sources?

Dave: I think, I’ve heard good things about Global Sources and the fact that you can kind of refine your search criteria a little bit better, but my impression has always been Global Sources more or less is kind of Alibaba 2.0.

Steve: Global Sources, from what I understand is, the vendors are more vetted and they tend to cater to – they are like more established players, whereas Alibaba seems like a hodge purge [ph] of a lot of different types of vendors.

Dave: Yeah, I’ve heard really good things about Global Sources. Just my experience using that I always find it more or less a lot of overlap between them. Like said, I know people that swear by them.

Steve: Yeah, I just actually had Peter, I don’t know if I added the episode yet, the CIO of Global Sources here. I was just curious what your opinion was.

Dave: Yeah, I’ve actually never used them, but I’ve heard good things about them.

Steve: Okay, so that, today at least that’s the order it seems like you go to Alibaba, kind of like a last resort so to speak today?

Dave: Yeah, like I said the only problem with Alibaba, and you can actually find good suppliers, the problem is I know if I go to Alibaba, I find a supplier without a product I know if it starts to take off, somebody is going to rip me off probably within a year.

Steve: Okay. Let’s just assume now for a sec that you’ve kind of found a potential vendor, what I was going to talk with you about today was kind of more along the lines of establishing relationships with vendors, negotiating and that sort of thing. You’ve gotten in touch with a vendor, what are some steps to kind of ease the relationship so to speak? Do you start negotiating on a price, do you talk about MOQs, what do you do to ensure quality?

Dave: I mean, I think one of the bigger mistakes that new importers make is that, I don’t know how to say it, they tend to be a little high maintenance. So they’ll send a million emails back and forth with the supplier on a really small order. So I think one of the first thing that you can do to kind of start building that relationship is be to the point, be efficient with your communication, don’t hug all over pennies on a crazy off, you should have an idea if you are importing a product. You got to have an idea of more or less what the fair price for it is.

So if you know the fair price for an anchor is $100, don’t try to get them down to $50. Get a whole bunch of quotes from different suppliers, figure out what the fair price for it is, and just make sure you get a fair price, but don’t be a haggler, nickel, and diming the supplier. Be efficient with the communication. Don’t– if you get your products and you order a thousand widgets and one of those widgets is defective, don’t make a bid deal of it. So I think just being really efficient is a really good way to kind of get your relationship with the supplier off on the right foot.

Steve: I actually don’t ever negotiate on price in the beginning. Instead I just do a shot gun, and just go with the range of prices and kind of wrap up the highest and the lowest. Do you do that too?

Dave: Yeah, absolutely. I think time is changing quite a bit in the last few years where the prices you get tend to be a lot more firm. I don’t know about your experience too, but the negotiating room there isn’t quite as high as it used to be.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously, keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online book keeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated book keepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials, and turn them into nice concise financial reports, so no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches. Plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is that you can get 20% off of your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: In fact my prices have been going up.

Dave: Yeah, except up until recently with the price of oil and everything has really been dropping prices.

Steve: Okay, so your tip was be low maintenance.

Dave: Number two, it’s scary for a lot of people this idea, but actually travelling to China and meeting your supplies, because China still is a very relationship oriented country. So actually going over to China and going for beers, going for dinner with your supplier, you can’t really duplicate that relationship building and trust building the same way that you can through email and even Skype.

It’s scary I know travelling over to China, and eating a bunch of weird of food, but if you can go over there even once and meet a supplier that you’ve been working with, I guarantee you, you are going to see a huge improvement in your relationship with that supplier, and so certain benefits that you don’t get. Obviously your lead time will go from 60 days to 30 days if you let the supplier know that your order is urgent. They won’t be self [inaudible 00:29:23] on minimum order quantities with you. Overall the quality of products that you get will tend to be a lot higher if you kind of have that good relationship with your supplier.

Steve: I think that a lot of suppliers that you find, at least on Alibaba, they give you a high MOQ just to kind of weed out like the riffraff, but if you actually fly over there and visit them, they know you are serious and they are probably much more willing to work with you and be more flexible.

Dave: Yeah, absolutely, I mean our main suppliers; MOQ is not really an issue. Obviously they are not going to sell you one, but we want to import ten or twenty as a sample, no problem. The minimum order quantity doesn’t really come up all that often. Again, that’s kind of one of the things that’s important about building that relationship with your supplier, because getting low MOQs is probably one of the most important things when you are importing from China. You have that relationship and you can kind of make it. So MOQ is not really an issue. You are going to have quite a leg up on your competition.

Steve: Let’s say you can’t go to China, what are some of your strategies for lowering the MOQ at least in the beginning?

Dave: Yeah, if you are just working with a supplier, professional off the butt, first thing you can do is again just be low maintenance. So a lot of times, take for example I was working with a new supplier this year. I think that an MOQ 250 pieces, I only wanted to order 50. They said there’s no negotiation on the MOQ. I said, okay, we can only do 50, but we will pay entirely upfront not 30% deposit and 70% upon shipment like normally, and will make payment right away tomorrow.

And they said okay, fine, fine, fine. Yeah, we made the payment in full and upfront, real quick and we never really hag all over the price too much. Again, paying upfront and just offering to pay 100% upfront a lot of times will– a lot of suppliers will be a lot more open to that low MOQ.

Steve: Also just asking for their bank number, so you can wire the money over right away does wonders.

Dave: Yes absolutely. Yeah if you start asking for something like a PayPal account, where you can escrow the money to, they are probably not going to be as receptive. Again, just be straight to the point like you said ask for the bank information, and a lot of times money talks. It’s hard to say no to money.

Steve: Okay. What are some other things because we were talking prior to the recording here, what are some of the other things that you kind of talk about besides price and MOQs, some of the more obvious things. What else do you negotiate?

Dave: When I’m negotiating with the buyer, I kind of figure, price is kind of the last thing I always negotiate. I figure these five things that I kind of go to order trying to negotiating. Kind of every order I try to negotiate with that supplier on a new item. The first one is obviously minimum order quantity. I think for most importers, that’s always going to be the first thing they need to negotiate, because it’s pretty rare that a supplier gives a minimum order quantity that you are completely comfortable with. So it’s kind of trying to negotiate that minimum order quantity.

Then the second thing that you can negotiate is shipment terms. Again, I’ve seen so many importers get burned on this. Supplier will get them a really low price, but will have shipment terms of EXW their factory, and I get the impression that you … Have you been burnt?

Steve: I haven’t been burned, but some of the students who just didn’t do their research, they are like, this is so cheap and then they realized they had to pay everything from the factory all the way to their warehouse.

Dave: To give some background of EXW you basically normally people or suppliers are going to quote you on FOB Shanghai or FOB Beijing, and that basically means supplier pays everything to get it to the port. If you’ve been quoted EXW, chances are you are going to pay at least $500 to $1000 more in extra fees, basically customs, brokerage to export the products, getting the products from your supplier’s factory on to a track and load it to the port, and a bunch of other mysterious fees. EXW adds a lot of money to the price. So if you get quoted EXW, that’s another negotiation point. Try and negotiate it to get FOB terms.

Third thing that you can negotiate is actually the cost of freight. Again once you are ordering big enough, your supplier might not be receptive to say a 5% price cut, but if you ask them hey do you think you can cover the cost of freight to Vancouver, for whatever reasons, suppliers tend to be a lot more receptive to covering the cost of freight to your country rather than actual price discount.

Steve: Interesting. I have not tried that before.

Dave: Our two biggest suppliers right now, one of them pays all the freight, every order to Vancouver, and the other one pays half bill.

Steve: I wonder if it’s just all the same though. They are like wamping that into the cost of the goods.

Dave: I’m sure it’s being locked in to the cost to some degree. The one that obviously pays for all of it I’ve no idea what they are charging. The other guy, where we pay 50%, I mean our prices haven’t changed in four years.

Steve: That’s impressive. Okay.

Dave: When we first started working with them, they weren’t paying the cost of the freight, so I get the impression that they are actually just eating that cost now.

Steve: Okay.

Dave: Yeah, obviously if they agree to cover the cost of freight and they jack up your prices, $2 per unit then you are not really saving. The third thing or the fourth thing you can negotiate is packaging. Again it’s something that a lot of new importers forget about is packaging. Your supplier, when you are importing, their default is going to be to give you the cheapest ugliest packaging possible.

Steve: Yes.

Dave: Depending on your product, I’ve ordered products before, 100 different widgets. Assuming that they are going to come individually boxed, instead they just give you 100 widgets in one massive box. Of course you will be selling online, that means that now you have 100 widgets which you need to buy boxes for. That can actually be a pretty sizable sum.

So either getting something as simple as what they call an inner box for each item, or actually have them pay for the cost of all color packaging. Because even if you are selling online, look in what somebody gets when they first get an amazingly design package, it does result in a lot better reviews on places like Amazon. Packaging does matter even if you are selling online. That is something to keep in mind, negotiate with your supplier especially once you start getting orders which are, have the bigger variety.

Steve: So you guys have a box for your anchors, or is it for the other stuff?

Dave: No we actually don’t, we don’t have – actually it’s not true, some of our anchors do have boxes off. It’s a long story. Most of them do not, but all of our other products do.

Steve: So I’m just curious, this is kind of a different topic, how do you find the suppliers outside of China since prices are kind of increasing?

Dave: We don’t actually– we work with suppliers in like say Vietnam, United States and Canada, but that’s pretty much it. I haven’t actually gone looking for boat anchors anywhere else in the world yet. Maybe in the future that will happen. I do notice for a lot of suppliers, the suppliers in China, they are outsourcing a lot of their manufacturing to different countries.

Take for example I was getting a quote recently for some life jackets, just like [inaudible 00:36:51] that you wear them on the boat, and they were having a lot of production done in Vermont. So it seems to be kind of the way Chinese suppliers tend to be outsourcing their production now.

Steve: Yeah, that’s kind of what I’ve noticed as well. They have like teams in like Pakistan or Vietnam.

Dave: I don’t know if we’re ever going to come to a point in history where we have such a big country of cheap labor that’s barely professional and they can barely high quality goods. India and Pakistan and those countries, they are trying to compete, but still in terms of price and quality, it’s really hard to compete with China even today.

I know prices are going up in China, but it’s still ridiculously cheap and like we kind of touched on before with the price of oil and kind of the Chinese economy not going down right now, they are not doing as well as it was in the past. Prices due seem to be stabilizing in China. I’m not an economic forecaster, but I think it’s probably going to be stable for at least a couple more years down.

Steve: Prior to the recording we kind of talked about some of these cool online services that you use for importing. What are kind of your go-to services?

Dave: So important doing this like I mentioned Duty Calculator is definitely your importing product, that’s what you should kind of always, that should be one of the first places you go to is figuring out what the duty on your product is. And Duty Calculator does a really good job of kind of classifying goods.

You can type in a pretty broad definition of your product. So running shoes and it will give you a fairly accurate duty rate for that product in your country. That should definitely be one of the places that you check. Make sure that you don’t get burned, because you can get burned pretty easily importing various products.

There’s personnel mastermind group for importers. The guy was importing pencil crowns from China. It turns out that pencil crowns have been plagued like antidumping product by the US government. Basically he gets charged like 110% duty on pencil crowns when he imports them, and he had no idea until the shipment actually arrived in port. Make sure you actually get an idea of what the duty rate on your products is.

Steve: Pencil crowns?

Dave: Yeah, for some bizarre reason, the US government what they call antidumping they think China is really affecting supply of pencil crowns in the United States, and they’ve now decided to tack on 110% duty on pencil crowns.

Steve: Interesting. What is your go to place in terms of finding out whether there’s any special rules and regulations for selling a product in the US?

Dave: Yeah, I know it’s a tough one, I mean that’s one of the reasons why you should try to work with a customs broker. If you work with a customs broker and you kind of build that, again that relationship they will likely tell you for free if you say, “Hey I want to import pencil crowns. Is there anything I should be aware of?” They will probably tell you for free, “Hey Dave, watch out, there’s a 110% duty on that product.”

Or if I’m considering importing a product that’s heavily regulated, they might say, “Hey Dave you got to be careful that you need to have such and such testing done.” A customs broker is a really good place that you can start. After that, there’s definitely certain categories of products which you always have to be aware of, and that you can eat or drink, anything for a kid, and anything really that’s inherently dangerous.

Steve: What is your go to place for finding a customs broker? For us, we just kind of went with the first one and we’ve kind of stuck with him ever since. But do you actually have a go to place that you recommend.

Dave: No, I’m kind of the same way; we’ve worked with our customs broker for years. I mean, I’ll just pick the biggest one in your area. I mean there’s quite a few of them. I think every city probably has at least a handful of them. Pick the biggest one, preferably the one that we work with they also have a freight forwarding division, so they can do everything for our shipment, by the time it comes in the port they can pick up their shipment, they can pay the various different local companies that need to be paid, they can pay the ports; they can absolutely do the customs for us.

Look for a customs broker that kind of has a few different services branched together. You might even be able to find one where they can actually arrange for pick up in China from you and ship it all the way to wherever you need to have it shipped. It’s really; it’s a really nifty feature to have if you have a customs broker who has a few different services that they offer.

Steve: It’s worth saying that the freight forwarding is pretty important because otherwise your goods are just sitting there at the port. What’s funny at least for me at least is getting the goods from the port to our warehouse often times cost as much as or more the shipment over.

Dave: Yeah, absolutely. We have something coming in the port right now. Overall cost was $9000 on the container. I think after the container fees, customs and all that, I think the fees were nearly $4000. It’s almost 50% of the overall cost was just on customs, freight and all that money stuff.

Steve: Cool. So what are some of the other services?

Dave: Aside from that, another fun little one is seafreight.com. Seafreight.com, what you can do is you can track basically any boat in the world, and track it where it is in the world. Why that is kind of fun is if you are importing something from China, you are going to get a bill of rating, and on that bill of rating is going to be the name of the ship that your products are on. It might be the Korea 123 Express.

You simply go under seefreight.com, type in the name of that ship and you can actually find out where your products are in the world. I don’t normally have some practical use, but there is something about seeing your shipment of products sitting in the middle of the Pacific Ocean, I don’t know, something bad about it.

Steve: Okay.

Dave: I think that’s pretty much the big three that I would recommend. Import Genius, Duty Calculator, and searates.com, sorry.

Steve: Searates.com yeah. I want to switch gears a little bit because I want to talk, since you are kind of unique in that you are from Canada and you sell into the US, but you don’t have like a US entity, right?

Dave: We don’t have US entity per say. I will get into that after the only thing that we do have to have.

Steve: Okay, but you do have like a three PR I guess in the US.

Dave: Maybe an easier way I will give a brief overview of how we do things. We are a Canadian company through and through. We don’t have a US company. What we do have, if you are– wherever you are warehousing your products in the states, if there’s a state sales tax there, you are going to be responsible for paying that state sale tax.

If you are– in our case, we warehouse our products in Washington State. We have to collect sales tax on any Washington State order. We have to be registered with the State of Washington. We collect sales tax of any Washington order, but in terms of actually US business, paying US income tax, we don’t do that.

Steve: And in terms of just selling on Amazon, you pretty much just need a bank account, right?

Dave: To sell on Amazon yes you only need a bank account. FBA is a whole another [inaudible 00:44:03] of legal issues when it comes to the tax ratio. But in terms of the selling on Amazon, yup, absolutely I believe that is right now all you need is just a bank account. That bank account, it can be a Canadian bank account. The only crappy thing is if you are a Canadian company, or a UK company or whatever, Amazon will only pay you in your local currency. For us if we had a Canadian bank account, Amazon would only pay us in Canadian dollars which kind of sucks, because when you are paying your Chinese suppliers you are paying them in US dollars. What happens is you are changing money from basically US to Canadian back to US.

Steve: Right, right.

Dave: It’s kind of a in-depth answer, but…

Steve: I’m also kind of curious what avenues you use to kind of market your store. First of all, I was just curious; do you make more money on Amazon or on your own site right now?

Dave: Every year you get maybe you can just speak to this. It seems every year Amazon is chipping away 10% on all the other channels. I don’t know if that’s kind of been reflective of your experience?

Steve: I haven’t been doing on Amazon as long as you have, so I have less data to work with. I mean our site is still by far more lucrative than Amazon. But that’s probably going to change this year.

Dave: Yeah, with Amazon taking more and more. For us right now Amazon– our website sales are about 25% of our sales, eBay is about 20%. 5% is just miscellaneous tradeshows, selling direct and 25% is selling directly on Amazon as a third party seller. The other 25% is selling on Amazon what they call through the vendor central platform. That’s basically them buying our products and selling them directly on behalf of Amazon.

Steve: They asked you to join that program, right?

Dave: It’s an invite only program. I get the feeling if you hit a certain threshold on Amazon in terms of your private label products; they will send you an invite because we’ve gotten a couple invites after we’ve been enjoying this program. They think that we are different company than we really are, but I do get the sense that after you hit a certain point on Amazon sales, they’ll pretty much automatically send you the invite.

Steve: Is that basically like an invite where you join or else they’ll find someone else to replace you?

Dave: No, they seem to do it. I think every– basically Amazon’s goal is to have every product in the universe. So once they kind of categorize you as a fairly large seller, they’ll say, okay we want to have your products. You can decline the invitation, but there are already lots of parts to it.

It seems that Amazon when they buy your products, they’ll tend to outsell you 2 to 1. We might have been selling 100 boat anchors as a direct seller on Amazon, when they start to buy our products; they were selling maybe 200 boat anchors. So it’s seems to be you are going to move up to 50% to 100% sales increase by selling directly to Amazon.

Steve: Outside of just the volume of sales, in terms of margins though, how far did they go down once you started…

Dave: That’s the crappy thing. They take more or less about 25% off your margins.

Steve: Okay, but they make up for it in volume.

Dave: Theoretically.

Steve: Have you ever had any…

Dave: You got to be careful. We got burned our first year of not watching the margins quite as well as we should have, and I’ve heard that from other people too.

Steve: Okay. I mean, is there any– what are the pros and cons of doing—like would you have declined? What would have happened if you declined? They probably would have found someone else and then lowered your visibility, right?

Dave: It’s hard to say. I mean, you’re always going to wonder with Amazon what kind of punishments they inflict on people. It’s kind of hearsay what they would have done. We agreed to it more or less. We don’t sell every product to them. We over the– they really wanted us to sell the product to them, but some of the time the margins just, we can’t do.

Steve: Didn’t make sense, right. Okay, and then you do a combination of that and you do FBA also or no?

Dave: I try to stay away from FBA just for some of the sales tax issues. I know it’s– FBA is becoming such a monstrous zone on behalf, but sometimes I try to avoid.

Steve: Okay by avoiding FBA, you are only covering sales tax in Washington.

Dave: Yes, and that’s one of the things, I mean, every seller, no matter where you are, if you are selling an FBA you should theoretically be collecting sales tax in nine states, or however many states that Amazon has warehouses in. Truth of it is that probably no one is doing that, but technically you should be. Again that’s a talk for another day.

Steve: Okay, no I was just curious because if you had that attitude, then FBA probably would have boosted your sales regardless, and are they going to go after you in Canada, maybe less likely than someone in the US.

Dave: In terms of Amazon and trying to find our competitors?

Steve: No, in terms of the US government going after you for taxes.

Dave: Yeah, yeah, I figure they’ll go after you before me.

Steve: Yeah exactly. Actually can we comment on what you just said though, Amazon like just going by passing you and going straight for your supplier?

Dave: Yeah, I don’t know. I mean, they are definitely doing that. There’s actually one product that we sell which is not a huge chunk of our sales, but they’ve actually are now sourcing it under what do they call private label brand, I forget. That was on basics I think. They have actually are sourcing now directly from China for that product. I think boat anchors and that type of product is going to be pretty low on their packing order, but I think it’s something everybody else is going to be aware of. They do seem to be reaching out more and more directly out to Chinese suppliers.

Steve: So given that they are doing that, when you are actually finding products to sell, do you have criteria more along the lines of random products, or like more niche products like boat anchors.

Dave: Again, that’s something I always try to recommend to people that the more niche you can get, the more successful you are going to be. Me and you, like you’ve mentioned in the intro we were at the Ecommerce Fuel live conference. One of the striking things attending this conference, it was basically a whole bunch of sellers just like me and Steve, and the crazy niches that were all in from boat anchors to handkerchiefs to pencil crowns to coloring books. Everybody seems to be…

Steve: Air filters.

Dave: Air filters. Everybody seems to be in some crazy little niche. I guess that’s one defining criteria to pick a product to sell. The crazier the niche probably the better protected you are going to be.

Steve: I also want to– every other person I talk to there seems to have been hijacked, or had problems with Amazon in some shape or form. That was one of my key take away from the conference session.

Dave: In terms of Amazon and kind of stealing their products and…

Steve: Either stealing their products or other suppliers just hijacking, similar to what you said, they found it on Alibaba, someone else just went on Alibaba and decided to either hijack or piggybacked a listing or sell something exactly the same.

Dave: It’s a check we do every month. Now we actually check all the listings to make sure nobody is piggybacking our brands, because you can’t, if you are selling our branded products, you can’t theoretically hijack that listing, you shouldn’t be able to. Normally just send an email to them saying, “Hey, you are probably not aware of what you are doing, but it is not allowed and could you please stop.” So that’s kind of a monthly check just to make sure nobody is piggybacking any of our products. Again we probably find five people every month doing it.

Steve: Going forward, just curious, are you spending more effort on your own site or Amazon and if it is your own site, what are some things that you are trying to do to increase sales?

Dave: I wish I could say it’s more of our own site, but Amazon– even people that go to our site, they are ultimately ending up on Amazon it seems. They might start this search and they might end up on our website looking for a product, but they are going to simply go to Amazon and see if they can find our branded product on Amazon. They have that trust I guess with buying through Amazon. It seems people sometimes joke about best buy being the display room for Amazon. I think in a lot of ways our websites are display rooms for Amazon.

Steve: Interesting. Even for boat anchors, amazing.

Dave: I know, it’s crazy. We are putting a lot– we are still continuing to put a lot of energy into our website, but not necessarily for direct sales through the website. If anything, just as kind of a display room for the products on Amazon.

Steve: Given that you are saying that, why not just have links directly to Amazon product listing.

Dave: Well, hopefully people buy through our websites; we don’t get charged 15% commission that Amazon does. I mean, ideally they don’t click through to Amazon, but like I mentioned, still about 25% of our customers do buy through our website, but a large portion of them are going to Amazon. Hopefully they buy through our website, but still a lot of them are going to Amazon ultimately.

Steve: What is your primarily traffic source of sales for your own website?

Dave: Definitely AdWords. And AdWords again is becoming more competitive. Just going through our yearly profit and loss kind of per campaign like our cost per clicks it seems like 50% higher in 2015 than they were in 2014. Again, everyone is getting squeezed there, so AdWords isn’t quite as profitable as it once was, but you can still definitely run some pretty profitable campaigns on there.

Google shopping is really where all the money is in terms of our ROI. So Google shopping is just becoming a huge avenue in some regards. I think if anybody was kind of trying to sell their own products through their website, first thing I would do is make sure you are on Google shopping.

Steve: What about organic search?

Dave: Again, it’s one of the things where all the big brands Google tend to be favoring more and more. We still get probably half of our sales are through organic search, but like everything, it’s becoming more and more competitive even for boat anchors.

Steve: Amazing, boat anchors.

Dave: I know.

Steve: Do you guys do anything on Facebook or…

Dave: Facebook, because of our audience we tend to be kind of an older clientele, they don’t tend use Facebook a lot, so we don’t use a lot of Facebook, compare to some shopping engines, things like Nextag and…

Steve: Does that work for you?

Dave: And [inaudible 00:54:29] and Shopzilla.

Steve: Shopzilla.

Dave: They actually, they bring quite a bit of traffic.

Steve: Do they really for boat anchors? Okay.

Dave: Yeah, again it’s just– I think again because of our older clientele, it’s just, if they have a search and maybe Shopzilla is their default search engine. So that’s how they find it.

Steve: I stopped using Shopzilla because I was getting really high volumes of fake clicks.

Dave: Yeah, it’s hard to say. I mean there’s some products where we make a killing on, and there’s other products where they are outnumbering Google in terms of clicks and you get to wonder how is that possible.

Steve: Well, I actually stalked a few of these people and they are clearly butts.

Dave: Really?

Steve: Yeah because I was annoyed, because I contacted them and I said, “Hey these are clearly boughts, and I have logs to show for it.” He was like, “No, we do a great a job of filtering out clicks.” Anyway that’s why I stopped using them.

Dave: Yeah, I know. That’s been our experience. You really have to monitor the campaigns, because you can dump a lot of money on a product, get out so there’s no conversions from it. But if you do monitor, you can actually get some pretty profitable campaigns.

Steve: Cool. Hey, Dave, we’ve actually been chatting longer than I was planning. I understand you got a pretty cool website. Where can people contact you? First of all, what is the website and where people can contact you at?

Dave: Yup, so the best way is chineseimporting.com, we get a lot about how to use [inaudible 00:55:57] and importing from China. So it’s a really good way if you are a beginner import, a lot of useful information there. If you are even a more experience importer there’s a lot of good information there for you too. On Facebook, facebook.com/chineseimporting.

Steve: And you have a book, right?

Dave: We do. It’s Importing is Easy: How to Make a Million Dollars Importing from China. You can buy that through the website chineseimporting.com, or you can find it on Amazon.

Steve: Awesome. Thanks Dave for coming on the show.

Dave: Yeah, thank you for having me.

Steve: All right take care.

Dave: You too.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Dave is the perfect example of a business that does extremely well in a very narrow niche. Like boat anchors would probably the last thing that I would think to import from China, but Dave makes it work. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode110.

Once again I want to thank FameBit for sponsoring thing episode. As I mentioned earlier, FameBit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagramers, and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. One of my podcast guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. It cost as low as 50 bucks to start. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off.

So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products online. And finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100,000K in profit in our first year of business, so go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

109: How To Make 7.5 Million Per Year Selling On Amazon With Will Tjernlund

109: How To Make 7.5 Million Per Year Selling On Amazon With Will Tjernlund

Today I’ve got someone really special on the show, Will Tjernlund. Now I met Will at the StartupBros conference and I’m really glad that I did.

He and his brother Andrew made about 7.5 million dollars from Amazon and their own stores last year making him one of the most successful Amazon sellers that I’ve had on the podcast so far.

And the best part is that his business is just a 2 man operation with him and his brother. Today, we’re going to go into depth on how he got started.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Will got into ecommerce and what made him start selling while he was still in college.
  • How many products Will was selling in 2014 to achieve 7.5 million in revenue
  • How Will came up with what to sell.
  • How he got his start
  • Will’s strategy is for entering new markets
  • Will’s main criteria for selecting a product to sell

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain tractions for their businesses.If you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100,000K in profit in our first year in business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini-course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I also want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. FameBit is the number one market place for influencer marketing, with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagrammers, people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it be beauty, tech, gaming, pets, and more. Yes, you can get famous YouTubers and Instagrammers to promote your business for as low as $50. The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators.

Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code “my wife” at famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off our first campaign. Go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products. Now on to the show.

Welcome to The My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’ve got someone really special on the show, Will Tjernlund. I met will at the StartupBros conference and I’m really glad that I did. He and his brother Andrew made about $7.5 million from Amazon in 2014 in their own stores last year making him one of the most successful Amazon sellers that I’ve had on the podcast thus far.

The best part is that they are basically a two man show with just he and his brother. Now you might be wondering how that is even possible. Well, Will sells his own private label items, buys from manufacturers in China, and then sends his products directly to Amazon for fulfillment using FBA. And today we are going to go into great depth on how he does it. With that welcome to the show Will, how are you doing today?

Will: I’m doing pretty good. How are you doing?

Steve: I’m doing good. It’s good to hear. We chatted a little bit before the interview started. There’s a lot of stuff going on with you. I did want to, I was very curious on how you kind of got started in ecommerce, because I understand you did this while you are still in college, right?

Will: Yeah, even kind of before that. I’ve always been kind of looking for gaps in the market and always looking for different ways to make money ever since I was in like high school even. Me and my buddies were doing black [inaudible 00:03:29] out of my basement the whole grade, every Friday that kind of thing, always finding a way to make money. And I actually started selling online when I was still in high school.

I worked at Target and I would buy all the Nintendo Wii and Xbox 360s when they were in high demand, and sell them for about 30% more on eBay. That’s when I first started selling online. But then from there, my brother graduated high school in 2003 and soon after that he started private labeling from Alibaba and selling on eBay. And so even when I was only 13, I saw it was very possible to import and make money selling online.

Steve: So your brother was the first one that kind of got to get you into this?

Will: Yeah, at a grand scale like I could not believe it the first time even when I was 13, when he showed me Alibaba and saw the prices on there, because this is way before any kind of private labeling and stuff people were doing now, and a classic example will be like if you just saw Alibaba today and you saw like the price of tablets on there. You go, wow you can get like a android tablet for $12? This is crazy. They go for $200 in the stores, because we just didn’t know back then like what kind of quality assurance and all that kind of stuff that factories were doing.

Steve: What was like the first product that you imported over to sell?

Will: The first one I personally imported all by myself was like my sophomore junior college and it was actually a marijuana vaporizer pen.

Steve: How did you come over that Will?

Will: No, seriously though, it was one of those things where I was just constantly doing the one tab Alibaba, one tab Amazon and just looking for random crap. And I got on the tobacco products, and then from there they all qualified themselves as tobacco products. But I saw that they were charging $100 and I go, well that can’t cost $100 from Alibaba. It ended up costing like $7. So that was like one of my first big products.

Steve: So you were in college, where did you store the stuff. I assume you had– you shipped it to yourself.

Will: Yeah. I would just have the stuff air freighted or myself. Then from there I was– I was even doing FBA when I first started doing like my sophomore year in college. There’s actually a post office on my campus. So I would just have a backpack full of vaporizer pens that I would drop off on my way to class.

Steve: I see. So was this for eBay or was this for Amazon?

Will: Both.

Steve: Both?

Will: I was even doing a little Craigslist.

Steve: So can you kind of describe why you decided to use both platforms?

Will: I just kind of– it’s the– I always think in terms of why not? I knew that eBay sold well, and I knew Amazon sold well. For me to just– I was pretty much create the listing once, then copy and paste all the descriptions and photos and all that stuff over. So for an extra whatever 10 minutes of time, the potential value could be thousands of dollars.

Steve: What’s your take real quick on just Amazon versus eBay, the type of customers and selling on those platforms?

Will: I hate eBay more than anything. I hate the all the customers. They are all terrible. Etsy is like the anti-eBay. Where in eBay you deal with every single individual customer, they are always asking for tracking information, and they are always bugging you about the kind of intricacies of your product, where on Etsy, the customers are always overly nice, they are super optimistic.

You tell them I’m sorry, the shipping is going to be three weeks, they go, “Wow, that’s great. I’m just happy it’s not four,” kind of thing. If I sold 1000 items on eBay in one day, my life is going to be miserable trying to flip through all those orders. If I sold 1000 times in one day on Amazon, I don’t even notice.

Steve: Yeah, I mean I had the same experience in eBay. Everyone there tends to be cheaper buyers.

Will: I compare to people who shop on eBay are more Wal-Mart shoppers, and people who shop on Amazon are more Target shoppers, where the Amazon customers are willing to pay maybe that 10% more to get like the automatic two-day shipping and have them more quality experience, where the people on eBay are shopping more for deals and they are wiling to deep dive and try to find those diamonds on the raft.

Steve: Do you still sell on eBay today?

Will: No. we sold over a million dollar in 2014 on eBay, and we quit even though it was all automated through our fulfillment and everything. My brother and I quit selling on eBay in 2015, because we were spending just as much time on eBay as we were Amazon, but selling 7 times as much on Amazon.

Steve: Okay. Amazon is it all FBA or do you do any merchant fulfilled?

Will: The only merchant fulfilled I do would be most likely if I’m like drop shipping.

Steve: Okay, okay. And you pretty much only drop ship when you are testing the product or?

Will: Either when I’m testing it or say like, I sign up a deal with a distributor where their catalogue has a thousand products. I only want 50 of their products, but the other 950 I have available for me to drop ship. So I might as well throw up a merchant fulfilled listing for all those to see if I can get anything. Even if those things sell maybe one unit a day, it’s still an extra thousand units a day.

Steve: Yeah, I know, that totally makes sense. So, I know the listeners out there are very curious on how you actually come up with stuff to sell. If you can just kind of talk about your strategy for finding stuff that will make you a profit.

Will: All right, so I can go all day about this. Cut me half when you need to. But basically I’m just looking for items that have high proceed value with minimal down sides. I make sure that the product can always be liquidated. Example, say if I’m buying a set of four drink coasters for a dollar, and I usually sell for $20, if I sell them for $4 and break even, they will fly off the shelves and at least I know I can get rid of say 100 units I order as a sample.

I always make sure they can be liquidated, and I always try to have minimal moving parts and minimal electronics in it. So like my perfect product is the drink coaster, because nothing can go wrong with it. I’m not really worried about quality assurance or anything like that. It’s just going to be a square piece of say wood, and there’s not going to be anything else to it. I really like kind of products that just nothing can go wrong and products that are super simple where I’m either selling a hunk of rubber, metal, wood, or plastic.

Steve: So when you say liquidate, do you mean liquidate on eBay or Amazon?

Will: Either or, just liquidating in general where something where I can charge such a low price that people can’t help but buy it type of thing. Whereas I give everyone selling a product for $30 and I’m just trying to sell for $4.50, there’s no way that I don’t at least just get rid of my inventory.

Steve: Okay, so that implies that your margins, you require something on the order of 8X then?

Will: Not necessarily 8X. It’s more kind of a proceed value type of thing. It’s different per each product category. When I’m selling something that’s like more home and industrial, that kind of product has a lot less price fluctuations than maybe say like a fashion item. And so that one I can only charge maybe 20% below market price, and still liquidate it pretty quickly because everyone has the same exact price, as opposed to drink coasters where some might be five dollars, some might be $100.

Steve: Okay, and so can you give us an example of your ideal products. So with coasters, I mean, I don’t know that’s like a real product that you just mentioned?

Will: Yeah, exactly. That’s a perfect product where I’m walking through Target, and I see some men drink coasters a four pack of them for $25. And I go, that doesn’t make any sense because a cinder block cost like a dollar. So I go and look that product up on eBay, I mean on Amazon real quick.

And I go wow, they are selling concrete drink coasters and they go for about $20 for four pack. That still doesn’t make sense to me. Then I look it up on Alibaba store, and I go, wow, those things are four pack cost a buck. Well, if I order 25 packs, it’s really hard for me not to at least just get my money back kind of thing.

Steve: Okay, do you use any sort of tools to find these products, or do you just go through and flip through Amazon.

Will: Yeah, I don’t use any tools. I feel like when everyone uses the same tools, it draws the same conclusion for everyone. It’s hard with these analytics tools, and an example I always use is the drone landing pad, and still no one sources yet even though I’ve used that example a million times, but there is two listings currently on Amazon. If you throw a drone landing pad, you’d be the third one on Amazon. It’s just like there are certain products like that where you would be shooting and fishing a barrel not to source that product and try it out.

If you looked it up on one of Amazon’s softwares it would say that there’s a very low sales velocity and that you shouldn’t even try it, but that’s because not enough people are offering quality product yet, because the only drawn mini pads are like one foot by one foot landing pads and not like what the customers really want. So the software can be kind of deceiving because it won’t show sales for products that aren’t there yet.

Steve: So how did you find like a drone landing pad for example?

Will: I just continuously click the also bought with button.

Steve: Interesting.

Will: And so I will go and I will see – I was looking at drones just to buy one myself just to see what kind of price they are at, and then I see like also bought with XYZ and I’m like, weird. I didn’t think about drone accessories. Then I looked up drone carrying cases, and then after looking at the shipping and the pricing it’s like, oh, there’s no money to be really made there and it’s like okay how about drone spare parts.

I was like no money will be made there. It’s like, oh what about a landing pad. Then I looked it up, and there’s no one selling it and it’s merchant fulfilled with reviews. It’s like, wow, I could just come in here and just dominate this market if I wanted to.

Steve: Are you worried at all that if there’s not that many people selling it that the demand might not necessarily be that high for it?

Will: No, because I know the demand is going to keep going up with drones just in general if you look at Google trends. Also, I love the idea of products that fly under the radar, instead of selling the silicon baking mat and try to sell a hundred units a day, and constantly finding a few people piggy backing on your listing and fighting off all these competitors.

I love the idea of selling say a 50 dollar drone landing pad that I get for ten dollars that I make $25 a unit, and I sell for a day. I’m sneakily making a hundred bucks a day, 36 grand a year off of this drone landing pad, and people look it up and go 4 a day, that’s not worth my time.

Steve: Okay, so I was just curious then, so for your seven and a half million revenue that you did in 2014, how many products was that?

Will: 1700.

Steve: 1700? Holy crap! When you sell these products, do you ship them direct to Amazon, or do you ship them to yourself first and analyze them or look at them?

Will: Ship them to myself first. I still don’t fully trust any of my Chinese suppliers to do everything correctly, and I would hate to have a container get denied at Amazon. It doesn’t cost that much more like an insurance policy for me to have it stop it at my place beforehand, or my pre-fulfillment place beforehand.

And then with my wholesale suppliers I think a lot of them don’t know I’m selling on Amazon. I don’t want them just to send straight to Amazon, because then basically I’m teaching them how to cut me out of loop.

Steve: 1700 products and you use the same strategy you are trying to fly under the radar with these products.

Will: Yeah, it’s way easier to sell a thousand products once a day, than to sell one product a thousand times a day.

Steve: Interesting. So then it doesn’t really matter I guess when you look on Amazon you don’t see that many listings, you just go with your gut is what it sounds like.

Will: Yeah, with my gut and like very small low risks moves over and over again. Where I’m not sitting there going and buying a crazy amount of inventory right off the butt, I’m sitting there ordering 20 units, then 100 units then 200 units, then 1000 units kind of thing where I never get caught with like my foot in my mouth, because I ordered too much and I don’t know what to do with the inventory.

Because it’s all about basically once you get product selection down, which is not– it’s like one of the more difficult parts, the whole entire Amazon game basically just comes down to cash flow, and how can you hold the perfect amount of inventory where you have enough cash on hand to keep growing, but at the same time you have enough cash to replenish your current inventory.

Steve: What are some of the price points that you like on Amazon then? Do you have any guidelines there?

Will: No real guidelines. More times than not, I tend to lean towards more expensive products, because I like the idea of knowing like I’m getting a size more cash every time I sell a unit. So instead of me saying, oh I did a thousand dollars in sales doing 20% profit margin after everything, I’ve become more and more tuned to saying, I sold four units and I made a hundred dollars. I put a hundred dollars new in my pocket from those four units, as opposed to saying I did 400 in sales at a 25% margin.

Steve: Does that imply then that your price points is in the order of hundreds of dollars then?

Will: Yes, my brother and I our average price point was like a $130. But it was the kind of thing where, that kind of skewed as I explained earlier because of say they had those thousand skew catalogues we would get, and we’d only source a 100 items, and then have 900 items or whatever as an example drop shipped.

More times than not we are drop shipping those one because we don’t want to tie up cash in them because there are hundreds and hundreds of dollars. My brother and I we are selling some products that are like $2000 each.

Steve: Oh, wow, and you’re fronting the inventory for that?

Will: Yeah basically we are just sitting there having a merchant fulfilled and say as soon as we see a sale come through we just email the supplier and say we have a drop ship to this address. And so we only spend the money once we’ve already made it.

Steve: Oh sorry, I meant like the ones that you actually store at Amazon using FBA. Like what’s your price point?

Will: Oh we try to be lower. It really comes down to like you prefer under a hundred dollars. But at the same time it really comes down to sales velocity. So how fast can I get that dollar 20 back in my bank account after I spent that dollar. If I sell say, some of my products were selling like say 15 units a day. I don’t mind that it’s a more expensive product because I know I’m flipping my inventory quickly, where if I know I’m only going to be selling five units a week, then I’m probably going to back off on ordering so many units of that if that makes sense at all.

Steve: Yeah I know. It totally does. And so if you can, can you just walk me through a typical example of how you proceed from product inception all the way to the sourcing process?

Will: Yeah, I will give you an example of a product we used to sell. We used to sell knee scooters. When someone injures their foot, and they scoot around, if you’ve ever seen those instead of scratches.

Steve: That sounds like an oversize product.

Will: It is. It’s like a 3 foot by like 1 foot by one and a half foot box.

Steve: So you don’t care about that either.

Will: No, because the thing is that they are such low competition in margin. So these things were going for like 200 to 300 dollars on Amazon, and we can get one for 60 dollars landed. So like there’s plenty of margin we made there. Even after everything we were only making 40 bucks a unit, it’s like that’s still a pretty good margin.

With the knee scooter was my cousin broke his foot, and he had to get a knee scooter. And he emailed my brother and I since he knows we like buy stuff online for a living and said, “I’m having trouble finding this knee scooter for anything cheaper than like $200 to $300 anywhere online. Do you think you guys can find anywhere cheaper online?”

And so we went and looked all over online and couldn’t find a cheaper, and we go, that’s kind of bizarre because it’s just like less moving parts like a child’s bike, and a child’s bike doesn’t cost that much. Again it comes down to perceived value, like why does this cost so much for no reason?

So then we looked it up on Alibaba and saw that after shipping and everything we can get them for 60 backs landed. It’s the kind of thing where we go, well crap. We only have to sell maybe half of a 20 foot container to break even. That’s not going to be too difficult.

And so we ordered I think it was a 20 foot container which was 210 units, and what got tricky was we sold 5 units that very first day between eBay and Amazon, and so then it took us 60 days from us ordering to getting the items in stock at Amazon. We are looking and we go wow, we ordered 210 units, five units a day for 60 days, that’s going to be X300 units. Even though we only sold five units of that container, we had to go buy another container already which was kind of an annoying thing to do.

Steve: So what are your guidelines then when you are sourcing? You mentioned before you like to start out with really small quantities. It sounds like here you start out with a 20 foot container?

Will: Yeah, that’s the thing where it’s hard for me to give guidelines, because I do something different almost every time where with these knee scooters I looked and I go this is a product people need not want. This is a product where we can just kill people price wise, where we can go, oh you are selling this for 300, I’m going to sell the same exact quality one for 160 bucks. It’s like, what are they going to do about that?

It’s like, when I show up and then two it’s a low velocity item. After I get like two sales in a review I’m already on like the first page. And so when they see mine for 160 bucks with good reviews, everyone else selling for 300 bucks, I just knew that people couldn’t help themselves. They’d had to buy ours, because it would literally make zero sense for them to buy anyone else’s. Also ours came in different colors, and everyone’s else’s in back.

It’s like I just knew there was like four different ways that we were going to just knock the competition off the pack. So I was willing to do a bigger order right off the butt, where if I’m using concrete drink coasters, they might be more competitive and I’m not really sure what the sales velocity is, and it’s a product that people want, not need. I’m going to order maybe 20 units because I’m not sure about it.

Steve: Okay, with these scooters then, that’s like a pretty large outlay, but you were confident– how were you confident that the quality was the same as the others? Did you actually buy the competition and compare the two?

Will: No, we did get one– we did bite the bull and get one air freighted to us very quickly. I was like, test driving it around like a little warehouse and that kind of stuff, and beating it up pretty bad, nothing happened to it. I was like trying to like rough house it and everything seemed fine. It seemed like a great product. But this is why we don’t source them anymore, is because everyone needs a new scooter for about 3 weeks. And so everyone returns it when they are done, and gets their money back.

Steve: Okay.

Will: We had about zero negative reviews, but 75% of them got returned. What does that say, kind of thing?

Steve: Right. I’m just curious. Are you only selling in Amazon or do you have your own site?

Will: I have my own sites, but for like a different private label brands. They are basically there for legitimacy. They don’t really make any money. It’s kind of thing where I don’t know that much about SEO or like social media marketing, or any of that kind of stuff where the amount of time I’d have to spend to the returns is not worth it to me.

Steve: Okay. So let’s go with your coaster example, because that seems like something that is more obtainable for someone who doesn’t have a whole lot of money to invest. So let’s say I only have like $500 or $1000, how would you proceed?

Will: Okay, if you had say 500 dollars, I would go and I would try to find lower competition products and that’s something that’s like in a top 100 BSR or anything, I would try to find lower competition products for anywhere from one to four dollars on Aliexpress. And buy these items for one to four dollars, will sell from anywhere from 15 to 25 dollars on Amazon. You are going to be looking for stuff on Aliexpress with a big price discrepancy. You are going to be looking for stuff with free shipping and shipping that’s in 15 days. If you can find products like that, you can basically undercut the price enough that you can make yourself competitive no matter what.

Then I would go and order with that $500, I would order say 20 units of five different skews. So say in that, like say that can be at five dollars a unit landed. That’s even on a high end. From there you send in those five different skews, 20 of each unit into Amazon, set up the Amazon PPC and sit back and wait for two weeks. During those two weeks, you are just trying to see if, if you flip a generic sample with no reviews, and you get any traction at all on Amazon, you know you are on to something.

Like a typical example is I put up a listing of a new product I’m trying on Aliexpress. I sell maybe two or three units the first week, and in the next second week, I end up selling seven units, and I go, “Wow, I sold ten units in two weeks and I have zero reviews, a crappy picture and a crappy product?

Now that I know that there’s demand for the product and I know that I can compete, I’m going to start keep continuously flipping my Aliexpress product while I start working on my Alibaba order. Because of the time zone difference with Alibaba, it takes forever to go back and forth which is prior and takes forever to get all the details ironed out, and so you might as well keep selling and making cash from Aliexpress while you go through that whole process.

Once you are done with the Alibaba process and you actually have your order in hand, say two months later. You can go back to that listing from Aliexpress, you can reupload the photos, reupload the title to a new private label title, and have this listing with reviews and with sales history to launch your new private label product from.

Steve: Okay, so the five skews then, you just run with the winners and then you just liquidate the crappy guys that don’t sell.

Will: Yeah, and then repeat that process every month. So, this basically came from– My brother and I had 1700 skews at Amazon, and we kind of looked at it and go wow, it’s an 80/20 rule to the max where the top 100 units make up 90% of our sales. Then our top ten units make up like 65% of our sales. It’s like, wow, wouldn’t it be sweet if we only had like ten skews and we are still making millions of dollars.

This would be like the easiest job of all time and it would be so easy to manage. The only way we found only those ten skews is through testing all those products. And so once I started working by myself this past May, I’ve started just testing tones and tones of products from Aliexpress trying to find my ten true winners out of the 1700.

Steve: So you guys sell 1700 and it sounds like to me that you want to reduce that number to just a handful.

Will: It was more than 1700 if you include all the drop shipping. But yeah, it’s the kind of thing where 1700, it’s an easy way to build up a bunch of revenue and make a bunch of money easily, but now I’m spoiled enough where I can focus more on my lifestyle than the cash flow. That’s where I’m more worried about. So it’s cool making all that money with my brother, but it’s not cool working in a factory over 40 hours a week. And so I’d rather make 100 grand working an hour a week than ten million dollars a year working 100 hours a week.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worse aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online book keeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated book keepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all your financials and turn them into nice concise financial reports, so no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches.

Plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off of your first 6 months if you get to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: So back in 2014 you guys were still a two man show, right. I would imagine to house all these products, like four or whatever five million dollars worth, that’s a pretty big warehouse and you have to go through each product?

Will: Not necessarily, because we were really efficient about it. We could get a container in and have it out the same day.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So we would get a container in and then me and my brother would just mad men unloading this container, labeling it, making sure everything looks legit, stacking it out on pallet, wrapping the pallets, weighing the pellets and having all the weights and pellets and everything labeled by later that day where then we could call the freight company, the third party whatever freight company, and they could pick it up and bring it on its way to Amazon later that day if we got it early in the day. So the longest our inventory ever sat at a warehouse was like 20 hours.

Steve: Oh wow, okay, you guys are sick. I think I saw a picture of your warehouse. It’s pretty big.

Will: Yeah, we have like a – it’s kind of confusing, I was worked out, but my family owns a manufacturing company. So they have like a manufacturing type of warehouse where it’s like we don’t go anywhere near for like safety reasons. But we got our own little section because they moved over to lee manufacturing and had a bunch of extra space. We use their extra warehouse space and knocked down a couple of walls to add some more loading dock doors for ourselves.

Steve: I’m just curious, you are doing all these products, have you ever had any problems with quality control and dealing with vendors?

Will: I haven’t really had much to deal with quality control. The only kind of issue I’ve ever really had is when I either get like a few samples and they just suck, and I just basically throw them away. It’s a price of doing business. Or I once get a container of these products where the two sides didn’t fit. But I had already ordered say four containers in the past year from this company, and I was a good customer and I told them that “Hey, you attached the wrong part to it. It doesn’t fit properly.” Without question for free, they air freighted out the right part and we got it all fixed and everything was fine.

Since I had a past history with them, and I would spend tens of thousands of dollars with them, they had no problem just to admit that they are wrong and just air freight the stuff out there. I have very good relationships with all my suppliers. So I have no problem asking them to bend over backwards for me at this point.

Steve: Do you think the reason for that is because you pick really simple products like your coasters example, right?

Will: Yeah, that’s the main, main reason is that I really try to go out of my way to perceive any problems ahead of time. Then when I don’t perceive the problem ahead of time, it’s something stupid like the knee scooter where people just return them like in 30 days which I just had no idea. I didn’t think about that.

Steve: Did you end up liquidating those knee scooters then?

Will: We ordered a second container, sold all those and then we thought about ordering a third container and said F it, we don’t want to waste our time anymore.

Steve: Okay, and so with your vendors then you mentioned that you start out with like 20 units and that’s like from Aliexpress, right?

Will: Usually. Yeah.

Steve: Then for your second order, you said you graduate, I think you said like a hundred units or something like that.

Will: Again, it’s a really case by case kind of thing where say, if there’s $100 a unit, I’ll probably just order another twenty again and just keep ordering 20 every week, because I don’t want to tie up my cash flow. But if they are a dollar a unit, then I might just order 500 because it’s like I just don’t want to waste my time ordering again.

Steve: Have you ever run into any problems where the vendor like after that small initial order that they want you to order like 500 units for example?

Will: Well not on Aliexpress, because you don’t really talk to the vendor at all. You just …

Steve: Oh, this is all in the context of Aliexpress.

Will: Yeah, I don’t order from Alibaba and tell them I’m going to order a large quantity, that I’m going to actually private label and do like a little bit customization to it and all that stuff, because that process takes long. I hate wasting two months of emailing back and forth. I want to make money now kind of thing.

Steve: Okay. You mentioned before I asked you this whether you had like your own store for your own website. You made it sound like those are just place holders I guess or brand pages?

Will: Yeah, they are basically there if I ever want to make an ecommerce site, like it’s indexed on Google for a certain amount of time, so it looks better and two if anyone ever like searches the brand name, something at least pops up and it looks like a semi legit website and stuff. It’s something like my business partner and I will make a square space site in the afternoon, and then that’s good enough for us. It’s not like we are spending a bunch of time on it.

Steve: Are you showing your products on there with links to Amazon listings at all?

Will: Yes, that’s exactly what we are doing. We are doing like the add the cart button and the add to cart button links to our Amazon listing through a super URL.

Steve: Here’s one thing I was always curious about. Are you worried about Amazon kind of pushing you out and going direct to your manufacturers at some point?

Will: I don’t think worried is the right word. I know it’s going to happen. I’m just ready for it. I have grown up in a weird time where I was born in 1990. And so I’ve seen like [inaudible 00:32:08], like Yahoo, AOL and Myspace like go out of business over night. I’ve seen a bunch of tech companies come and go, and that’s basically how my whole life has been.

I’m so very used to the idea that like Amazon might just come in and wipe everyone out and take away all the third party sellers, and then ten years from now Amazon is going out of business because the rejects is going crazy or something. And so it’s kind of thing where I’m always have the kind of mind frame that this is probably not going to be there tomorrow, so make as much cash as you can today.

Steve: Are you doing anything to kind of prepare when that happens, or are you just prepared to gradually lose this over time and come up with new things?

Will: Well, if you can’t beat them join them. I’ve been selling a lot to Amazon.

Steve: You mean with the vendor program?

Will: Yup.

Steve: Can you just describe that real quick for the listeners who don’t know what that is.

Will: It’s basically you just sell to Amazon instead of on Amazon. It’s a little bit more annoying because they place like multiple purchase orders a week and you kind of have to have the inventory ready to send to them or to back order it. But it’s a very wise thing to do if you have a very hot selling product and you are competing for the buy box, because if you sell to Amazon, Amazon will basically control the buy box, and yes you will make a smaller profit margin, but controlling the buy box 100% is pretty sweet. Amazon will buy a lot from you. They will pay you fairly fast, so it really clears off the cash flow issue.

Steve: Can you talk about like the decision making process or was it just clear cut decision to sell to Amazon for you?

Will: It just kind of like…

Steve: Because there’s pros and cons I would imagine, right?

Will: Well there’s definitely cons, but it’s how do you take advantage of Amazon’s greed. Do you know what I’m saying? And so you think and they are going, okay, Amazon wants to have every skew possible, and they want everything for like low prices. If I see a product that’s not on Amazon yet, and I can get like a wholesale say account with them, I can take that catalogue of a thousand products and upload it to Amazon saying, “Hey I had these thousand products and you want to buy them for me.”

And if Amazon even looks at them and goes “Wow, we don’t have any of those products yet. Yeah, we want to add to our catalogues, can we get three units of each?” Those sell out probably instantly within like a week, because Amazon promotes its own stuff a lot more than third party sellers. Then I sold 3,000 units to Amazon that week kind of thing, and I did nothing besides copy and paste like a spread sheet over to them.

Steve: Let’s say you said to Amazon, “Hey, I don’t want to use– I don’t want to sell direct to you,” and then they go with someone else, are you pretty much screwed at that point?

Will: That’s why if you have like a legitimate private label brand, there’s really nothing they can do about it. So that’s basically the only time you wouldn’t want to sell to Amazon is that you have a legitimate private label brand, you are the only one on the listing and you are selling 30 units a day.

If you sell to Amazon, you may go up to 40 units a day, but then you are going to lose your profit margin. You are going to make any money in that. If they go and they try to source any of your competitor’s products to try to like run you out of business, there’s nothing you can do about that. At that point, if you are competing with Amazon like that, then I would just sell yours to Amazon too.

Steve: So by legitimate you mean something really unique that no one else is offering.

Will: Yeah, if you are just selling some crappy yoga mat with just like your logo on the corner, or you are selling something like meat cloths, or like barbecue gloves or something like that where you are adding zero value and there’s nothing unique at all about your product, then yeah, I wouldn’t blame Amazon for taking down all those similar listings and just having a few barbecue gloves. But if you actually have something somehow unique, then yeah, I doubt they are just going to [inaudible 00:35:39] your listing because you are competing with them.

Steve: Can you give us an example of something that you are selling direct to Amazon or?

Will: Yeah, I’m trying to think of something on top of my head. Because it’s like we were selling like those knee scooters directly to Amazon. Once we kind of like things started slowing down a little bit, and we thought that might boost sales, but also with mostly like my brother just signed a big contract with a wholesale company that has 10,000 skews. He uploaded those 10,000 skews to Amazon, and Amazon first order from him was for 500,000.

And so my brother made basically like 100 grand of that being a middle man. That 500 grand is already sold, it’s not like you are sending 500 grand in the inventory and to wait to sell it for months, its already sold because Amazon bought it from him. It clears the whole cash flow issue.

Steve: So here’s a question on that, a perfect example, why don’t they just list their stuff on Amazon and instead go through your brother?

Will: Because, this is where it gets kind of slimy. Have you ever read “The Everything Store.” It’s Jeff Bezos’ biography?

Steve: No, I haven’t read that.

Will: He explains in there a story about wood stove knives. Have you ever heard of wood stove knives?

Steve: Yes, of course.

Will: Okay. Most people I tell this example to have never heard of it which is like okay, I know you’ve heard of it.

Steve: Are they not married? I mean the real one registers for those.

Will: Exactly, so Wood stove knives was contacted by Amazon. This is back like 2008 or 2009. They were contacted by Amazon saying, hey we want to sell your knives. They say– say wood stove buys 10,000 knives to a knife store for $100 and then they are supposed to market it for $400. They sold their knives to Amazon for $100. Amazon went around and sold them for like $101 on Amazon.

Wood stove just freaks out and goes, “What the heck are you doing? You are screwing over like a hundred year history of our family selling to all these different brick and motor shops, you are screwing up our whole entire supply chain, all our wholesale accounts, we are not selling to you anymore Amazon. Amazon goes, “I don’t care. There’s a million Mom and Pop shops already have contracts with you who will sell directly to us.”

And so all these Mom and Pop shops sit there and sell all their stuff to Amazon, wood stoves are trying to contact these 500,000 distributors they had throughout the world, saying who is selling to Amazon. They can’t figure out who it is. Amazon is still selling them at break-even prices. Most more times than not, big large manufacturers and distributors don’t want to sell to Amazon, because they are afraid of them undercutting mat pricing, and they don’t want them to screw up all the distribution channels. It’s basically, you are sitting there being kind of like a middle man for Amazon to make sure they can get inventory, they can’t get their hands on personally.

Steve: Interesting.

Will: Again it’s taking advantage of Amazon’s greed.

Steve: Do you see like the Asian manufacturers selling direct on Amazon?

Will: A little bit. I don’t know. It’s like no offence to anyone anywhere, but like from a lot of Chinese businesses I’ve dealt with, they are a bunch of idiots. Like they would never– they are very good at following very strict directions, but I don’t think a lot of them are like good at thinking outside the box and thinking about like, “Oh look, we are selling a crazy amount of these products and he’s having us label them for Amazon.

Maybe we should cut this guy out of the chain and just sell these directly on Amazon, because it’s easy enough for them.” It’s not blocked in China, Amazon is in. they just look it up in Amazon and go, “He’s getting $40 a unit? We are selling to him for $4 a unit. Why don’t we just cut him out of loop? He already showed us how to label it for Amazon.”

That’s happening to maybe 1,000 different suppliers throughout China and not one of them has just skipped the step, and instead they put up these super crappy listings on Amazon that are merchant fulfilled with like 70 day shipping. It’s like obviously they don’t understand how Amazon works, how the customers work, how prime works, anything. It would take them a half second to look it up, but they just don’t think that way.

Steve: No, I agree. They are actually really good at copying stuff, not so good at—but here’s the thing, whenever I get on the phone and I notice someone has perfect English, that’s when I get worried.

Will: Oh yeah, that’s for sure. I even thought about is a consulting job just doing my rounds around Shenzhen and Guanghou and just teaching everyone on how to sell on Amazon, and just making billions of dollars and screwing over everyone, because they just like shooting fish in a barrel.

Steve: Yeah, totally, yeah. Let’s take a step back. I want to talk a little bit about this before we go. Do you have like strategy for getting your first sales on Amazon? Do you use any strategies and reviews services when you launch a product, or do you just let it ride?

Will: I use it as PPC and just let it ride. I’m usually going after super low competition products, or very specific products where I’m selling each HP190SL, which is like a specific model of someone. You know what I’m saying where’s it’s like someone is going to search HP190SL and even if mine has zero reviews, it’s going to be the first one that shows up because it’s such a specific search.

Steve: Okay, so all of your products that you sell in your store, kind of follow these guidelines so that you don’t actually need to do like a zone blast or something like that for example?

Will: Yeah, I don’t really believe in zone blast or a lot of those give away services. I’d rather, like I was saying earlier, fly under the radar and sell a thousand products once a day. Those are kind of my ways, it’s dumb really kind of trying to grow my business quickly, because it’s just the easiest way with the least amount or work on my end.

Steve: So on that note then, when you are doing your research, how many sellers do you like to see on Amazon for a given product?

Will: It really depends. It really depends on their price because– they is going to be a thousand sellers if they are all selling for $100, and if I can make money at $50 then I don’t really care if there’s a thousand sellers. I go compete with them. Like my wooden sunglasses, I sell just because I can go in there and totally undercut everyone’s price, and so that’s why I’m luring not because of my style. But then another one is where it’s I know I can’t cut the price down as much. I need to make sure there’s not as many sellers out there, so it’s a balance.

Steve: What is your strategy going forward assuming that Amazon is going to push everyone’s prices down to like the minimum?

Will: Strategy moving forward is I’m going to start my kick starter most likely in 2016. I’m also going to build out a few of my brands and actually try to do some legitimate marketing for the ones that are really selling. I’ve also looked at selling some of my private label items to brick and motor stores, and all sorts of different things. I’ve just been looking at every single thing I can, and listening to every business podcast I can that’s not about Amazon, and trying to use outside business tactics and apply them to Amazon.

Steve: I guess what I was trying to get with that was, are you going to try to invent your own unique product that’s kind of tangible?

Will: That’s what the kick starter. That’s what I think about with that is I’m going to take some products that has already been made on Alibaba, just add a few quick little things to it, and say I’m coming out with a brand new product. If I can create say 20 to 40,000 dollars, and pay for that first container, I’m just going to make a killing, because once you can get up to the sea freight level, you pay so much less per unit.

Steve: It sounds like you feel like that’s kind of like the way to create a lasting business going forward, right?

Will: Yeah, it’s no way you are going to be able to have a business where you are just slapping your brand name on it ten years from now.

Steve: Okay, to prepare for that– so it obviously requires a much larger investment, that’s why you are mentioning kick starter.

Will: Yeah, the kick starter is not only the investment, but it’s also the proof of concept. It’s also that I get everyone’s emails from kick starter. So as I come out with more products in that brand and that niche, I can sit there and spam out to say a thousand people who funded me over and over saying, hey now we are coming out with this version of it, now we are coming out with the waterproof version, and just doing that over and over again because now I have actually a built in base.

Steve: That was actually my next question. Do you do any marketing for your Amazon products outside of just Amazon’s visibility?

Will: No, I don’t at all. It’s something I’ve done in the past. I’ve done something like Google PPC and that kind of stuff, but it’s too expensive. But if I actually had like an email list of people who are interested in my products, I think it would be a totally different thing.

Steve: Do you try to gather any emails or having people register for your products? Do you have any inserts in your products?

Will: No, well not really inserts. I have like I go and visit print and I get a bunch of really high quality stickers that have like a logo on it, have our website and have like our Instagram and all that accounts. I stick those outside the packaging, so it looks like it’s actually part of the packaging.

That sticker also has like a UPC coat on it. It’s like a super nice glossy looking like sticker that’s maybe the size of a deck of cards. Yeah, it has our logo, it has our UPC, it has everything on it. And so like we can label that one fell swoop and then two, Amazon can’t get mad at us for like us trying to drive traffic to our website instead of Amazon, because it’s actually a part of UPC label we have to have it.

Steve: So let’s say people do go to your website, are you doing anything special on your website like do you offer coupons in response for emails or anything like that?

Will: No, honestly. The amount of traffic we get say like four visitors a day or whatever, it’s not something that I will really spent too much time on.

Steve: Okay, so it is literally just a brand website, and so even if you were to drive traffic there, it doesn’t really matter that much.

Will: Yeah, if they got ten thousand visitors today, I don’t know if our sales can go up on Amazon really, because it’s like – they are really not that awesome at all.

Steve: Here is kind of a question that I have been curious about since we’ve been experiencing with our store. Prices in China have been increasing pretty dramatically from year to year. Are you looking in other countries to source besides China at this point?

Will: Yeah, I only do China usually because it’s the lowest price I find in Alibaba. If someone says they can give me a higher quality lower pricing in Vietnam or in Canada, or anywhere, I don’t really care, I’ll just buy the lowest price at the highest quality. I can care less what country I do business with.

Steve: Yeah, but are you– how would you find those other vendors like in Vietnam or Pakistan for example?

Will: Alibaba does have a bunch of other countries on there. But then to go into like the different trade shows and all that kind of stuff and just through my networks now that I know enough Amazon people, and I know people who have designed their own products enough times that it– I can go and I know people I can contact who’s like, “Hey this guy has made back pack before.” I can go to this guy about back packs.

This guy has made cosmetics before. I can go talk to him about the natural cosmetics. I’ll go talk to someone like that and kind of pick their brand and see what they know about the industry and say, “Oh no, yeah, you definitely want to go to source it from Vietnam.” You don’t want to source it from China. Then I will go with that. So it’s just kind of– I’m totally open to it, but I don’t have any specific way how I target non Chinese countries.

Steve: Have you traditionally then just used Alibaba and trade shows for your vendors then?

Will: Yeah. Like 99% Alibaba and then for like the wholesale accounts I get, that’s just stumbling upon them on Amazon where I see something selling for 200 bucks, has 200 reviews and it’s isn’t fulfilled by Amazon. It’s like I should probably source that and take over the buy box.

Steve: I see, I see. Just to kind of close this interview, we’ve been talking for a while, if you were to give some advice to people who want to try this, just to get into ecommerce and Amazon, give them a couple of pieces of advice.

Will: Don’t over think things. Don’t try to anticipate too many problems before they happen. It’s just going to make you freeze, you don’t move forward. I had someone email me today saying, “Should I start on Amazon Canada because I’m afraid I might sell too much out of the gates and on Amazon US, and I’m not prepared for it.” These are the kinds of problems that you do not need to worry about. It’s just a total waste of time, worrying about what if I sell too much and I can’t get my account under control. Figure out once you get there.

But these are the kinds of things where people try to sike themselves out, and smart people try to over think things. One of the biggest benefits I had was that I was young and dumb when I first started and I wasn’t worried about if I find LLC on [inaudible 00:47:38] and I wasn’t worried about if I was paying the exact custom fees, or any of that kind of stuff. I just got started and didn’t think about it. It sounds like that would be terrible advice, but honestly, until you sell 10,000 worth of stuff on Amazon, just don’t think about anything. Just get selling. And then once you hit that five figure plateau, then you can actually start systemizing and actually figuring out how to actually run your business.

Steve: In terms of timeline, minimum investment.

Will: Minimum investment, the more the better. At least five to ten thousand dollars, is you are going to be able to move a lot faster than if you only have say 1000 dollars. If you have 1000 dollars, you can maybe expect to be doing five thousand dollars in sales within six months, but you start with $5000, you can maybe be doing 20,000 dollars in sales in the six months.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of timeframe, how quickly can you make your first sale?

Will: That day. Like I do it all the times where I’ve thrown up listings and sold something maybe 20 minutes later.

Steve: Oh, you mean when you don’t have products?

Will: When you don’t have products?

Steve: I mean the whole process from start.

Will: You are starting from scratch? The fastest I’ve ever done it was from, with these glowing sunglasses, but they were from me ordering hitting buy now on Aliexpress to be in stock in Amazon and my first pair sold was ten days.

Steve: Wow.

Will: It was very first in China. It was like 6 days from China, and then I immediately later that day got it sent it to Amazon and it was like 3 days until I was in stock in Amazon and sold later that day.

Steve: So you can literally get started in two weeks, it sounds like.

Will: Exactly. That’s why it really discourages me when people spend two weeks just doing research, because they can already know whether something sells within two weeks.

Steve: It sounds like if I can just put some words in your mouth, you like to go with the shot gun method so to speak. You just put a bunch of stuff up, see what sells and just ride the winners?

Will: Yeah, and I’m not a detail oriented person. I’m not a marketing type person. I’m a type of person who likes to take action and see results after the fact. The shock and effect works great for me where I can go try a million products, and if none of them work, whatever, if they all work, great. It’s kind of thing where if you test a product and you have to liquidate it, a looser looses once and a winner wins forever.

Steve: It sounds like the minimum investment, I mean you are not putting down large amounts of money to test each of these products either, it sounds like.

Will: No, I am. I had this, like I was mentioning, I had this marijuana glowing sunglasses I was selling that were for like when you grow in indoor rooms, and they are basically sunglasses with a key word marijuana growing in front of them. I bought 20 pairs for $70 landed and I sold them out within two weeks and did $400 in sales. I turned $70 into $400 in two weeks. So it’s like you can’t really beat that kind of…

Steve: I kind of like your strategy actually. Less thinking, more action which is what a lot of people lack actually.

Will: Exactly. That was the whole entire reason why I kind of came up with this. It’s between what my brother and I what worked. From same people go, okay, I spent X amount of money in software, I’ve ordered two samples, I’ve been talking to suppliers for three months and I still haven’t sold anything yet. What should I do? It’s like, well, by three months, you should have already tested twenty products, you should already know what sells, what doesn’t and be on your way.

Steve: Interesting. Hey, Will, where can people find you if they have questions?

Will: You can email me, just my name WilliamTjernlund@gmail.com, also Twitter at @Wtjern add me on Facebook, I’m pretty easy to find because of my last name. Besides that, yeah, that’s the easiest way to get in contact me.

Steve: Awesome Will. Thanks for coming on the show. I learned a lot and it was kind of refreshing to hear a different Amazon strategy actually.

Will: Yeah. There’s– I’ve made money about a million different ways on Amazon between drop shipping, private labeling, wholesaling, everything and it seems everyone is kind of stuck in the same ark of chambers. So I’m happy you gave me an opportunity to kind of express my opinions.

Steve: Well thanks for coming on the show. I really appreciate it.

Will: Thank you.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode, Will’s story is awesome, and it just goes to show that you don’t need a large stuff to run a seven figure ecommerce store. Now imagine just making 7.5 million dollars with just two people. Obviously it can be done. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode109.

Once again I want to thank FameBit for sponsoring thing episode. As I mentioned earlier FameBit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagrammers and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And it costs as low as 50 bucks to start. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous YouTubers to promote your products.
And finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

108: How John Rampton Lost His 7 Figure Amazon Business

How John Lost His 7 Figure Business By Getting Banned From Amazon

Today I’m thrilled to have John Rampton with me on the show. John is someone who I met at FinCon 2 years ago and he’s got an amazing story to share with you today.

In fact, his story is almost unreal. 10 years ago, he was working in construction when he had his legs crushed in a freak accident.

He didn’t think he could walk again and during that time when he was bed ridden, he studied business, marketing and selling online 16-20 hours a day.

Fast forward to today, he’s started a bunch of 7 figure companies. He writes for Forbes, Entrepreneur, Huffington Post and he the founder of his current company Due.com which provides simple online invoicing and time tracking for freelancers and businesses.

Anyway, the reason I decided to have John on the podcast is because 1, he’s awesome and 2, I wanted him to talk about his former 7 figure Amazon business.

That’s right. John used to sell on Amazon and made a lot of money doing it too until one day he was banned and lost it all.

What You’ll Learn

  • Why John got his Amazon account banned
  • How he could have prevented getting banned
  • How he tried to get his account back
  • What he did with all of his inventory.
  • Recommendations for Amazon sellers on how to avoid getting banned.
  • Whether John recommends creating an Amazon business today
  • How he bounced back with his new venture

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.If you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100,000K in profit in our first year in business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page and I’ll send you the mini-course right away via email.

Before we begin I’m happy to announce that I’m holding my own ecommerce conference on May19th in Miami Florida this year called the Sellers Summit. Instead of the large crowded conferences that you are used to hearing about, mine will be small and intimate with a focus on learning. So picture a small round table workshops instead of large auditoriums with a focus on actionable strategies that will grow your ecommerce business. For more information go to sellerssummit.com and watch the video.

Now before we begin, I also want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. FameBit is the number one market place for influencer marketing, with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagrammers, people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it be beauty, tech, gaming, pets, and more. Yes, you can get famous YouTubers and Instagrammers to promote your business for as low as 50 bucks.

The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code “my wife” at famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. Go to faembit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your product. Now on to the show.

Welcome to The My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here’s your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have John Rampton with me on the show. John is someone who I met at Fincon two years ago, and he’s got an amazing story to share with you today. In fact his story is almost unreal. But ten years ago he was working in construction when he had his legs crushed in a very freak accident. He didn’t think that he could walk again.

During that time when he was bedridden, he actually studied upon business; marketing and selling online pretty much 16 to 20 hours a day, and fast forward to today he’s started a bunch of seven figure companies. He writes for Forbes, Entrepreneur, Huffington Post. He’s the founder of his current company due.com which provides simple online invoicing and time tracking for freelancers and businesses.

The reason I decided to have John on the podcast today is because one, he’s awesome and two I wanted him to talk about his former 7 figure Amazon business. So that’s right, John used to sell on Amazon and he made a lot of money doing it until one day he was banned and lost it all. With that, welcome to the show John. How are you doing today man?

Rampton: Hey doing very well? Thanks for having me.

Steve: Tell us about your back story. I mean I kind of glossed upon it in the intro, but how did you become the serial entrepreneur that you are today, and how did that freak accident shape who you are?

Rampton: I’ve always kind of been an entrepreneur. From a young age, I really loved money. I like making money. I like what it can do, but more importantly I kind of like when it just builds up in your bank account, and you could see that number just growing.

Steve: It is fun.

Rampton: Yeah, it’s a lot of fun seeing that number grow. From a young age, I started the candy stand, did this and working. After and I guess during college as you mentioned I got in a freak accident. I was working at a construction site. I got ran over. It crushed my right leg, completely just crushed it. The doctor said I’ll never walk like ever, ever walk again.

I spent the next however many years it was. It was about a year I spent in bed. I had to be– I mean to the point of I was sponge bathed and had– I couldn’t get out of bed for nine months. During that time, you still have bills to pay even though I was a college student. At the time I was with my parents living there. I still had a car payment, I still had this payment, I still– you still have bills. So I had to find a way to make money from my bed. That’s kind of when I got in into the whole marketing thing is I had no other choice. That’s what I had to do.

Steve: Amazon wasn’t your first venture then, right?

Rampton: No. I originally worked at real estate startup. We were helping people, helping real estate agents sell their homes online and…

Steve: This is from your bed or?

Rampton: Yeah, I was working pre bed and post bed. I mean if you can imagine that. So I got hurt. I was working a side job on the side, and decided I was going to make some extra money on the side, that’s when I got hurt. Basically what happened is I worked at this job and every time I made a sale I got paid like $8. I found this, when I got hurt and even while I was at my job, you can only call so many people every single day as a sales person. There’s only so many calls you can make. So then I started doing other things. I got into affiliate marketing. I got into tax marketing. I started finding there are better ways to sell than to just sit and call people on the phone.

I went on Craigslist and I said for $6 per sale, I will pay anybody who can sell what this is for $6. I was making a $2 cut. I was the top sales rep at the time, and I was getting like ten sales a day. Then I started having other people sell for me, and just playing the middle man and that, and I started getting really good at people and getting to know people and having men sell for me. My top sales day there was 540 sales, and the next higher sales rep was like 11.

Steve: That’s crazy.

Rampton: I was– one I was making great money, but two, I really learned how to sell online. And if you are going to get in to like ecommerce and selling on Amazon, and doing that type of stuff, you need to find what works and find ways to make money online. And as a business owner, you can’t just be like, “Oh I’m going to sell this way, or oh my customers are going to come to me.” You have to go out there and find those ways.

Steve: Okay, and so how did you transition from this real estate company to selling physical products on Amazon?

Rampton: That was kind of a weird transition. I actually left that company that I was working at and I started a competitor about a year and a half or about two years. Technically we launched like two years to the day after I left there. So we launched this company. It went very, very well. We sold it. We made some money. We ended up taking that money and pouring it directly into an ecommerce company located in Southern California called organize.com. We bought organize.com…

Steve: That an amazing domain by the way.

Rampton: Oh yeah, it was a great domain, and had existing sales. We had this very, very large warehouse with about 56,000 skews. We were selling pretty decent amount of things, of product. Had a little team and I came in there and I was like you know, I’m really good at this online stuff. I can triple the sales. We came in and I started applying my methods and stuff. We started really getting into ecommerce.

Some of the things that you can do in ecommerce and especially on Amazon, there’s a couple different tools you can use that for example they go on Amazon and they say, “Hey here’s your product, and here’s” — there’s twenty other products on Amazon just like yours. So you can say, “Hey I want my product to be 8% lower than the lowest price, but here’s the lowest I’m willing to go.” We went and did that for most of our products. Immediately we started, we almost doubled our revenue in a couple of weeks. We were selling a lot more. We weren’t as profitable, but we were selling just massive amounts. I mean …

Steve: Can we back a little bit. Why did you think you could triple revenues as soon you went in there? What things were the companies not doing when you got there?

Rampton: Well first of all, I analyzed the numbers and I’m like, man first of all traffic perspective. They were only converting at about a half a percent.

Steve: Oh my goodness, okay that’s really little, okay.

Rampton: So I look at that and I’m like man, there is one way I can triple. Second I went in there and most ecommerce companies have this problem. What happens with large ecommerce companies that have been around for a while is they are not up to date on current methods and practices. For example, when an order came in for us, we printed off a piece of paper. That paper then was taken over and manually entered into our system.

Then another then taken, they stamped it, take it back to the warehouse where the person would pick the stuff, ship it, mark right on there the shipping address, and then we would have to manually go enter that into Amazon.

Steve: Oh my goodness.

Rampton: Once that was entered into Amazon we take the reference number and enter it into Quick Books. That sadly is how a lot of ecommerce companies today are.

Steve: Was this a purely Amazon business when you got there or was it…

Rampton: It was Amazon. Their own website did about 10%, 12% of all things and there were a couple of other things, but it was primarily Amazon.

Steve: So it wasn’t FBA, it was self fulfilled Amazon?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: Okay got it.

Rampton: Yup. When you have that many skews you really can’t – it’s really hard to do FBA. FBA for those who don’t know is fulfilled by Amazon where they fulfill the orders for you. If you’re– FBA has to have a good profit margin for them. You pay them a lot more and the skews have to sell very, very quickly. They don’t like inventory sitting on their shelves. Most of our things were ones to two Zs. We did have a lot, but we wanted the actual profit margin.

Steve: So these were other people’s branded products or were they your own branded products?

Rampton: They were other people’s products. All we did was sell other people’s products.

Steve: Okay, and so the margins probably weren’t high enough to make FBA worthwhile?

Rampton: I mean, they were, but the problem with FBA, and if you have somebody else’s products is – I mean one reason why we left FBA is if they are not your products, they will find the original person, and take you out of the equation. Amazon did that several times, and that’s how they ruin a lot of companies, middlemen, like ourselves. If you are going down that route and FBA will– if you put in there, they’ll go direct.

Steve: Okay. So this business was already there when you had acquired it.

Rampton: Correct, yeah.

Steve: They were selling organizational products?

Rampton: Correct. Like picture the container store online. We are probably their largest competitor online.

Steve: I see. So what was the differentiating factor? Were you just selling similar products in container store, or did you kind of have like a — what was your value preposition is what I’m trying to get at?

Rampton: I mean one the trust. I mean people just go online and they say what’s the lowest price, and we were usually the lowest price. So that was our biggest value differentiator. We sell the exact same products as container store. All container store is us with a different marketing. There’s a million other stores out there too that have these products and sell them online.

Steve: Okay and then so you went in there and you found I guess in the fulfilling side, there were a lot of inefficiencies, but how did you increase your sales on Amazon? You mentioned you used some automated pricing tool where you reduced prices by X number of percent. Was there anything else that you did to kind of scale this?

Rampton: I mean instead of like when you direct people to Amazon, there’s a couple SEO techniques. For example if your emailing out a list and you are saying, “Hey, buy this product on Amazon.” We usually say, “Hey go search this specific name,” and we direct people through the funnel instead of directing them to the end of the funnel. It doesn’t help you out as much on direct sales at that moment, but if you can direct people down the funnel that you know the majority of people are doing and everybody goes to you, Amazon’s algorithm is set to make it so that you come up a little higher in their search results.

We did this on two or three different occasions, one for example on a Christmas tree storage box. We said go type in Amazon Christmas tree storage. We were on page two. At the time we sent like– our email list was like 600,000 customers. We had a very, very large email list, but we directed probably like 50,000 clicks, people going towards this. They all typed in Christmas tree storage and they wanted the lowest price, and they know that ours is the lowest price because they could search it really easily.

They search that, and then they go to page two and they find us and they purchase us. Well over the course of one week we went from page two to page one, and that increased our sales on that one product by like 2000% because all of a sudden anyone who types Christmas tree storage is now, we are number one. And we are the lowest cost, so they are always going to purchase that. So we got– I mean we had one day where we had almost 6000 orders of that product.

Steve: Let me ask you this, how did you develop that 600,000 email list when Amazon doesn’t give you emails?

Rampton: Those were actually from our own site. We do get significant orders. We do have a lot of people ordering from our own site. Amazon also used to give you the email addresses. They don’t anymore.

Steve: Okay, what year was this by the way just for context?

Rampton: This was in 2014.

Steve: Oh, so it was just last year?

Rampton: Yeah, 2013, sorry.

Steve: Okay. So you were building emails based on your website sales which were about 10% of the over all.

Rampton: 10%, maybe 15% of the overall.

Steve: And then at the same time Amazon was giving you emails which you added to your part of your email addresses.

Rampton: Correct, yeah.

Steve: And then just to summarize for everyone listening, you’d have someone do a search and then you take that URL with the search term in it, and then drive traffic to that.

Rampton: We would actually drive them to Amazon and say to like Amazon.com, or to the category page, and we would say search this term. Like look for us.

Steve: Oh I see. You would have them do the search.

Rampton: Yeah, we would have them do a search. We won’t direct them through the search. We would direct them to the search. Again we lost a lot of money doing this, because we are directing people to our competitors. But we found that whenever we did this, people would search out our product, and find that one, we were still the lowest price. That’s in most worlds that’s the most important thing is having the lowest price. But we would direct them and we would say here is how you find us, here is how you do this and it worked, very, very well.

Steve: That’s interesting, because I’m just curious what the math look like, versus directing that traffic directly to the buy button on your own site, and I imagine your margins are a lot higher.

Rampton: We did a split test where we sent 25%. We originally started with 50-50, but then we switched. We always did 25% to our own website. The rest to Amazon, but on our own site people would do that, and we got usually a very high significant, literally when we sent that email out, we probably of the 25% versus 75%, we probably made equal revenue between the two.

Steve: Oh wow, okay.

Rampton: I mean it hurt us a lot. Having, from it taking us from page two to page one, or– we didn’t tell people what to type in either. We just said, whatever, and people used their own keywords, their own prices. We did say, type in Christmas tree storage or whatever you are looking for on the storage and find us there, because we have lots of products. People– so all of our search terms, now you type in that, and we were number one on all of them.

Steve: That is interesting. So that was just like a long term…

Rampton: The short term result within seven business days, they broke even, both of them 50-50. The longer term thing is we noticed the week after, like our sales improved by like 10, 15% a week.

Steve: That’s crazy.

Rampton: Like Intel was like, holy cow, we are getting– like I said we had one day where we had like over 4,000 or 5000 orders of one product.

Steve: That’s interesting. Do you recommend that strategy today?

Rampton: Yeah, it works. I mean don’t like bet all your chips on that, never put all your chips in one basket. We will get into that a little bit later.

Steve: Yeah we will.

Rampton: But like that was a very, very strong technique that worked very, very well for us. Again it hurt us in the short term; it helped us in the long term.

Steve: So can you talk a little bit about FBA, because you didn’t have the prime monitor next to your product, right?

Rampton: Correct, no we did not.

Steve: Were there any competitors with prime that were competing against you?

Rampton: We still beat them. The prime versus non prime, it still comes down to a pricing issue. If they can get it, if a person has to wait one additional day, they are already waiting– online shoppers are actually really, really good shoppers. They know what they are looking for and they are willing to wait. If they are not willing to wait, just go down to WalMart and buy it, or go down the container store and buy it.

Those are for people who have to have it now and impulse shoppers. Online shoppers are typically online impulse shoppers, but they are willing to wait. They are willing to wait a couple of days. The difference between getting the package in two days versus getting a package in three days is not that big of a deal.

Steve: Interesting. Okay and you still think that holds true today?

Rampton: Oh yeah. I mean, did it hurt us? Yes. I’m sure it hurt us. I’m sure there’s a percentage of people that say effort. I want in two days or I’d rather pay a $1.50 more to get prime. Overall I would say the majority of online shoppers are really, really, like price conscious, that’s why they are going online and not running over to WalMart. It’s a price issue for them.

Steve: So I was going to ask out this question, if you saw an FBA you said Amazon would seek out the true supplier. Did that imply that you do not recommend selling FBA for products that are non-branded to your own name?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: Okay, so anyone selling other people’s products you don’t want to use FBA and sell much and fulfill to take advantage of the actual profits.

Rampton: Correct, if you are selling others, I don’t recommend it. Again if it’s small and you are doing ones and twos numbers, it’s just fine. If you are a stay at home mum and you are making $3,000, $4,000 a month, they are not going to go after you. But when we were making–when we were doing– I mean we had one product that netted us probably $2 million in one month. They are going to go after that.

Steve: Okay. And when you are selling other people’s– okay, so you basically out strategize all your competitors by getting it to rank in Amazon?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: Okay, got it. I want to transition us a little bit, did you ever have any problems with Amazon going forward. I mentioned earlier that you got banned, was this just like a total surprise, or did you see it coming?

Rampton: Amazon is a little hard to work with. It’s a good thing and it’s a bad thing. What happens with Amazon is Amazon wants you to have a certain satisfaction rate and shipping rate and on time rate. When you are selling other people’s products and for example we did some drop shipping, which a lot people listening to this are probably going to be drop shipping.

It’s really, really hard if the drop shipper runs out of products. So you are last on the totem pole to get that. For example, that one product that we sold 5,000 in one day, we preordered 100,000 units in our thing. But within about 30 days we’d already blown through almost 100,000 units.

When we were selling those and when you are selling things, if you run out of something all of a sudden your shipping date gets kind of screwed, which forces you to fall below. They have a very high, I think it’s 96% customer satisfaction, 94% shipping rate, and 95% on time shipping. So you have to ship it by a certain day, and it has to be received by a certain day.

Then all the customers have to be happy. Around Christmas time and in high demand times, that’s very hard on any company. During that time, we were getting again, a minimum of a 1,000 orders of a couple of products a day, and when somebody runs out and you– we got probably on average like 3,000 orders a day.

Steve: Crazy.

Rampton: Yeah, we were getting massive volumes. It was great. Whatever that is, if you are getting 3 orders a day and one of those three orders is behind, that all of a sudden causes all your numbers to be skewed.

Steve: You can’t just cancel the order?

Rampton: Well, that hurts your customer satisfaction, because that is not good customer service to cancel orders.

Steve: I see.

Rampton: You can’t cancel up to like 3% of orders without it hurting you– but after that, for every like 1% of your total volume, I’m not sure what the exact is, but I’m kind of mixing this up, but for everyone 1% of your total order volume that you cancel, you go down 1% in customer satisfaction.

At the time when they canceled that and they told us, so they told us two days after they run out. And we’d run out as well. They are like it’s going to be a week and a half. And we are like all my work. By that time, by the time we paused that, we had 7,000 pending orders.

Steve: Oh my goodness.

Rampton: When you are only having 3,000 orders a day, and you have 7,000 pending orders I mean even for an entire month, that’s 10% of all your orders. You are screwed.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online book keeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated book keepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice concise financial reports. So no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off of your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: How big is this operation, how many employees did you have?

Rampton: At the time we had like 14.

Steve: 14, that’s it. Okay. This kind of…

Rampton: We had most of our things were dropped shipped. 70% of all of our items were drop shipped. 30% were in-house.

Steve: So given that inventory is so crucial when using merchant fulfilled, you really had to have a very strong tie to your drop shipper’s databases.

Rampton: Correct, yup.

Steve: Okay, and so you had this one…

Rampton: For all of you wondering, that’s called EDI.

Steve: Yes, I think that’s a little advanced for the listeners, but yeah.

Rampton: Yeah.

Steve: So this one order basically screwed you guys over or this one product?

Rampton: This one product screwed us over. It was actually a combination. We had this a couple of times. This actually happened twice. So what happens in Amazon is you’ll get paused and then you’ll say, oh sorry we are improving this, then you have 30 days to make it better. But if all those orders are still like screwed, I mean it kills you overnight.

We got turned back on and then this happened again like three months later, whereas if somebody didn’t turn it off and it really, really hurt our company, and we ended up getting shut off permanently by Amazon. The first time they’ll kind of get back with you, the second time, like we tried everything. We contacted every person. I know every person I knew at the company and LinkedIn friend request them, everything. They would not turn us back on.

Steve: At this point you had a track record of doing lots of business with Amazon, right? It’s not like you were some pull down seller.

Rampton: Yeah, we had hundreds of thousands; I mean we had 100,000 reviews.

Steve: Crazy. And so that kind of implies that Amazon doesn’t really care even if you are making them a crap load of money. You fall below their standards and they’ll ban you.

Rampton: Correct. They just look at it as, oh, that product was making us a lot of money, but there’s still three other people selling that. Oh well. Or even if it’s your own product, they are like we are willing to take that, because we don’t want this perceived bad reputation.

Steve: I see. Could this have been prevented in your eyes looking back?

Rampton: I mean, automation, if we would have automated like if a person has a certain amount of orders that are outstanding, we automatically shut them off, but it’s really hard when you are getting massive amounts of orders for things. We could have preordered more. I mean we did preorder 100,000 or so units of one product. You figure that’s enough, but it’s not. In my eyes, there are little things we could do here, little things that we could do there, but overall there wasn’t much we could do to get over that problem.

Steve: I’m just thinking like this business model that you had doesn’t seem– it seems like you are going to get banned sooner or later.

Rampton: Most people, I would say yes. If they’re not your own product, yeah.

Steve: Just looking back also do you kind of still think that drop shipping this way is still a viable model?

Rampton: Yeah, I mean, I think it’s a very, very good model as long as you have good products that you can market that you know will go out, and you know your suppliers are not going to run out of.

Steve: Let me ask you this, the drop shippers, what’s their incentive not to list their own stuff on Amazon?

Rampton: Sometimes they just don’t want to deal with it. I mean we did have, we had like 4 or 5 customer service people. At times people from the warehouse and like our office staff had to come in and we had 8 people in customer service on the phone.

Steve: I see.

Rampton: A lot of companies don’t want to have to deal with that. They’re like hey, we make this product; we make a 20% margin on it no matter who we sell it to. Let’s just be good at that and sell that product, and there’re thousands of companies like that. They just don’t want to deal with it. To make an extra like 15% would increase their cost significantly; versus we have a thousand other products that we’re selling, so we can do that customer service.

You have to figure 1 to 3% of all orders will be coming back to you. It doesn’t matter if you have the best product in the entire world. 1 to 3 are going to be coming back, and most of the time the ones that come back are damaged or broken and problems like that. Again a lot of people don’t want to deal with that.

Steve: Even with FBA these companies– because you’re essentially outsourcing all that.

Rampton: I experienced the exact same thing like especially when you’re shipping containers and organizational stuff, like breakable items, a lot of these things just get broken in the mail and sure like, okay, it’s FedEx’s fault, or it’s UPS’s fault, but you still have a customer service, you stop to send out a new item, you still have to file that request. You still have to do all that. That requires a human body. For a $20 item, it’s going to take a person 20-30 minutes of time to get a refund on that item. Does that make sense?

Steve: It does, it does, so I’m thinking these people as like pure distributors. They don’t want to deal with anything consumer-facing, right?

Rampton: Correct. We are the consumers, the resellers.

Steve: I’m just curious logistically, when you got banned the first time,, were there any special steps that you took to get reinstated that first time?

Rampton: They make you go through a very, very strict process. Usually when you get banned you’ll get an email, you’ll have to log on, you’ll have to put together a reconsideration letter and send that back to them. It’s very process-driven and process-oriented. They do that because I’m sure they ban a lot of people.

Again we were a major account for them, but it wasn’t major enough to really have any direct people. I think that they could up their game in that, and really improve their company 10 fold by really caring about people like us, but again they don’t.

Steve: How long were you down for that first time?

Rampton: The first time we were down for 18 hours.

Steve:Okay. Oh okay, that’s not terrible.

Rampton: No, it wasn’t bad at all. I mean that still is a day, and a couple of hundred thousand dollars in sales, but yes.

Steve: Then the second time it was permanent. You were expecting that to happen then?

Rampton: No. We weren’t. We kind of got shut off. I mean we were tittering the line, but at the same time it was during our peak, peak, peak season. We were like okay, we understand this. We understand that we’re tittering the line, but we were a little bit over on the line towards the positive side. We were actually doing well.

Steve: You get that letter and then what happens?

Rampton: We got the email and our [inaudible 00:34:44] came in and she’s like, ah expressitory word, and I was like, well let’s get it back on. She’s like, okay I’m trying. I’ve already done this, this, this. The next day they didn’t respond, and the next day we submitted something and they were like we’ll be back to you within 24 hours. 4 days later we were like, okay. We started adding every person. We started calling every person, trying to make it work.

Steve: Did you shut down after that point?

Rampton: Yeah. It was like 2 weeks later, because I mean, our site sustains a lot, but it doesn’t sustain that many people, and in the ecommerce business we’re used to playing the numbers game. We have at any given time we had half a million dollars out like in accounts payable. We did have at the time like $180,000, maybe $200,000 in accounts receivable like coming from Amazon, coming from a couple different places, but that doesn’t make up for the half a million plus a good $50,000, $60,000 in payroll.

At that point I was like, we got to just nip this in the bud. There were a few little factors in there. I don’t really want to get too much on this, because it gets into details a lot more like on the thing. There were a bunch of other factors where we were just like, man this isn’t worth it to keep this alive.

Steve: Because I was just thinking, what I want to ask you was looking back would you have focused more efforts on your own site in marketing, or would you have still done the same thing and gone more or less selling on Amazon?

Rampton: I would have focused around, towards the end when we got cut off by them, we had never gone on Overstock, or [inaudible 00:36:50], eBay or other places. We put all of our skews on eBay, and we started selling like 200 units immediately. Then we put them on Overstock and we’re selling another 100 units a day. We made up for about 20 and maybe even 30% of that within a week, and we were like okay well damn it, why didn’t we do this originally, because that would have improved our margins and had us a lot more profitable and made us been able to sell more and stuff like that.

My recommendation for people getting into this business is don’t have 100% or 90% or even 80% of your revenue all from one place. If 50% plus of your revenue is coming from one source, you need to start working on other sources to get in revenue. If we would have done a lot earlier– eBay limits you in the beginning to how many products you can sell, same with Amazon, same with all of them. If we would have focused on that a lot sooner, we would have had a lot better of an ability to make a lot more profit earlier on which would have helped us through this time.

We were two and half, three weeks after Amazon shut us off before we were at actually live in Overstock. House was another one. They were another market place and we were selling like 10-15 units a day on their thing. If we had had all these other things along the way, and we’d been shut off, we would have been like, oh shoot there goes 40% of our revenue. We’ve got to lay off a couple of people, but not close down shop because it doesn’t make sense. We just didn’t have the time at working at those to really make sure that it would work.

Steve: Basically there wasn’t enough cash in the bank to kind of pay all the bills for a couple of months. Is that correct?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: Okay. You decided to shut that down may be like a month later it sounds like?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: What happened after that? Did you immediately start your next venture?

Rampton: Yeah. I started my next venture a little while after that, again kind of going back to the other thing that actually ended in a lawsuit. It was with the previous owner so part of us closing it down was it didn’t make sense knowing that a couple of things were not disclosed when we purchased the business a year prior. We actually ended up filing a lawsuit and winning that lawsuit about a year and a half later. It wasn’t that long ago.

Those were other reasons and any person needs to make sure that they weigh all their options. Like I wasn’t everyone to be like, oh my word I just want to shut this business down next. Like there were so many factors in this where I’m like, it doesn’t make sense for me and my family to do this, so we shut it down. I kind of tucked my tail, lost tons, and tons of money, but you know this happens in life. You have successes, you have failures.

I then went back to marketing which is my thing. I started advising some companies, I started building my own personal brand. I got a couple odds and ends jobs. I got a couple of consulting gigs where I was helping different companies in search, and I was paying my bills. I started basically building up that cash flow. My wife and I live very, very humble lives. We don’t spend so much money. We pay for cash for like everything.

These are things that helped us the couple of crashes that we’ve had in our lives. To know that like, sure like I live in Palo Alto California, one of the most expensive places in the world to live. What most people don’t realize is I rent out my basement. That covers all my expenses. My entire living expenses is covered by me airbnbeing [ph] my basement every month, literally everything, the entire mortgage covers it. We do things like that and that allowed us to get back on our feet and start saving up money for the next venture.

Steve: Which is dew.com?

Rampton: Which is dew.com. About a year and a half after that collapsed, I was able to go purchase dew.com. Dew.com is an online invoicing thing. Firstly we kind of did the same thing. We found a really good URL and I purchased it and then I went and I was like well I need something to do with this. I went and bought an invoicing company. I was just like, hey here’s a good invoicing company, and I put it on Dew.com.

Steve: I’m just curious; you seem to like purchasing existing companies as opposed to starting them from scratch. Is that just a personal preference?

Rampton: Yes. I realized that I am not the best product person in the world, but I’m an amazing marketer. I always say that nobody can market products better than me out there, nobody. I can market products better than anybody else out there. But actually building a good product that people like, I’m not the best at. One tip for people is know what you’re good at.

If you find what you’re good at, don’t try and be good at something else. Be really, really good at one thing and okay at everything else. I realized I’m really, really good at marketing, but I’m okay at products, so I went and bought a good product, a really good product. Now I can market the hell out of it.

Steve: I’m just curious, is there a reason why you avoided ecommerce the second time around?

Rampton: I was really burnt out and I hate Amazon right now, like I still hate them. I think eventually I’ll get back to that, but right now, I just haven’t.

Steve: The things that you learned about marketing you learned while you were in bed during your injury?

Rampton: I learned a lot while I was in bed during my injury, but I learned a lot along the way, like just trial and error. I’m the guy that takes chances on everything. I’m the guy willing to jump off a cliff, and see if I can build a parachute or build the wings on the way down. That’s my experience. It’s trial by fire.

Steve: What I wanted to ask you was, when you’re a brand new online store and you sell physical products, what would be your first steps on the marketing side to get your first couple of sales?

Rampton: My first steps on a marketing side is probably research. I would research and make sure that you compete. There are a lot of other people out there who have been doing this for a long, long time, and if you can’t compete with them and you don’t know, you’ll never go anywhere.

If you want to sell a product, even if it’s your own product, if you go to the market place just saying, here’s what I’m going to charge, because somebody said online that they’d pay me that much. It’s great, but if you’re an ecommerce store and there’s other people that are a lot cheaper than you, you’re never going to sell anything, or it’s going to be onesy twosies. I would say a lot of research. That’s the first thing I would do to market my product, it’s research online.

Next find tools that can different price matching thing, so you’re actually when people search for a product you are the lowest price. Start getting a reputation for yourself. After you start getting a reputation you can up that price a little bit.

Steve: It sounds like in our conversations a lot of what you’re talking about is price-based, which seems to imply that brand and quality don’t factor as much if you’re not well known. It always comes down to the lowest common denominator which is price. Is that …

Rampton: I would say that is pretty true. I would say in that I was never selling a bad product, or a non-reputable product. I have always sold very, very high end products; I’m just the lowest priced of the high end.

Steve: I see. If you were to do an ecommerce thing all over again, would you sell other people’s products, or would you try to develop your own at this point in time?

Rampton: I would sell in mixture.

Steve: You’re saying you’re in drop shipping as well?

Rampton: I would just make sure I get in bed with the right drop shipping partners, and make sure that I take priority.

Steve: How do you get into bed with a good drop shipper if you have nothing, if you’re a beginner?

Rampton: Trial and error, trial by fire. Go find 20 of them and start working with them and start selling, and really get to know– I would really find a company that works on EDI, because that means their inventory is live updated. You want to find people who are online, who know what their inventory is.

EDI updates on like a true second, every one to two seconds. Like it updates your database, their database and then in turn updates Amazon, eBay, all the other places. You know what your live inventory is, and that would eliminate the problem all together.

Steve: Unless someone screws up on their end?

Rampton: Unless somebody screws up on their end, but the likelihood of that happening with EDI is very, very hard, because they have to physically scan in every product, and when products go in, unless they’re defective which is one thing, but when products are purchased somewhere else or by another vendor, that’s automatically taken out of the system, so you don’t have to worry about that.

Steve: I also want to give you an opportunity to talk about due.com, and what some of your value propositions are for your new business.

Rampton: We are due.com. We’re an online invoicing and time tracking company. Some of our competitors are FreshBooks, Xero, Cutlass, there’s a lot of them. Some of our value propositions; one you can bill people online, you can get paid online. We’re trying to make it a lot cheaper for people. You can integrate it with your own site, so you don’t have to go to a third party site to bill. It can basically all be done internally on your own site. When somebody gets your bill, they’ll come to your site to pay it. Those are some of the things…

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. John’s story just goes to show that you should never, ever depend on a single channel for all of your income for your business. If I lost a seven-figure business overnight, I’d probably go and start crying in the corner and swear off entrepreneurship forever. What’s incredible though is that John has bounced back and has created another successful business, because he is the man. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode108.

Once gain I want to thank FameBit for sponsoring this episode. As I mentioned earlier, FameBit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagrammers and other influencers to promote your products online, and it works. One of my podcast guests, Emmanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as $50 to start. And the best part is if you to use the coupon code ‘mywife’ at famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. Go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products.

Finally, if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over $100,000 in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

107: How To Make 17 Million Dollars Selling iPhone And iPad Cases Online With Kai Klement

How To Make 17 Million Dollars Selling iPhone And iPad Cases Online With Kai Klement

Today I’m thrilled to have Kai Klement on the show. Kai is someone who reached out to me with an incredible story and I knew that I needed to have him on the podcast.

Kai and his partner Jorg(yerg) are the co-founders of Kavaj (kavai), an internationally top-selling leather case manufacturer for phones and tablets. They’ve sold over 500,000 cases generating over 17 million in revenue.

They both started out as former Amazon employees with zero knowledge of manufacturing, or product creation and ended up creating this awesome ipad and phone case company. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Kai came up with the idea to sell iPad cases
  • Kai’s motivations for starting his business.
  • Why Kai decided to manufacture his own cases
  • Kai’s product creation process
  • Where Kai found his vendors and how he designed his cases

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 Youtubers, Instagramers people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes, you can get famous Youtubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as $50.

The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous youtubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Kai Klement on the show. Now Kai is someone who reached out to me with an incredible story, and I knew that I needed to have him on the podcast. So Kai and his partner Joerg are the co-founders of Kavaj, an internationally top selling leather case manufacturer for phones and tablets.

Now they’ve sold over 500,000 cases generating over 90 million in revenue on a span of about four years. Now they both started out as former Amazon employees with zero knowledge of manufacturing product creation, and they ended up creating this awesome iPad and phone case company, and with that welcome to the show Kai how are you doing today man?

Kai: Thank you very much for the nice introduction Steve, I’m very well thank you, how are you?

Steve: I’m very good; I’m really excited to hear your story here. So give us the quick background story about Kavaj, how you kind of came up with selling genuine leather cases online?

Kai: Yeah, it’s very easy actually, so in 2010 when Apple launched the first iPad, Joerg — he wanted to have one, he was very, very keen on it. And by the time this case was only available in the US and as we founded our company in Germany, so we had to get it somehow. Joerg asked a friend who was a pilot at Lufthansa during the time to get one in New York. And once he had his iPad obviously he needed a case. So we both were looking around, checking out Amazon in particular what was available, because Joerg and he had his dream case already in his mind.

His dream case was a thin genuine leather case. And by the time nothing like this was available online and nothing available on Amazon nor somewhere else. This was like the turning point, then we thought okay let’s do it. We will produce our own case and we — yeah first we do it for us, and then second we do it for everyone else, because there was nothing around we liked. So it’s like the story how we came up with the idea.

Steve: It was — your primary motivation was because Joerg was looking for an iPad case?

Kai: Exactly, this is a private motivation, so it’s the passion for — we needed first ourselves and then yeah let’s do it.

Steve: Were you guys both working at Amazon at the time?

Kai: Yes, exactly this was the background, we both we used to work Amazon before we started Kavaj and yeah.

Steve: So did you start this while working on Amazon, or were there any rules about that?

Kai: Yes, exactly we started while we were working there; obviously it was not allowed like to build your company besides working there. So we did it like everyone else was doing it, who has this entrepreneurs [inaudible 00:05:19] like we used a company which was led by my wife, and then we were kind of advisors for her obviously we were running it all.

Every morning we were like we met at seven and discussed like our project, and before we started like producing genuine leather stuff, we did a trial. We took a little bit of everyone and then we did a trial in order to test the whole system like how to source stuff, how this stuff works, how Amazon…

Steve: This first case was not leather though, right?

Kai: Yeah, exactly we just took like simple case and then yeah created…

Steve: So before we get into like the product creation, I was just a little bit curious since you mentioned that you formerly worked at Amazon, did working there actually help you guys at all, and what did you learn from Amazon that kind of gave you the courage, or helped you sell this product?

Kai: Yeah, definitely it helped us. This was our idea in the first place to get into cooperate business for 2 or 3 years in order to learn as much as possible about business, about running businesses. And one of the most important things I think we learned even while working at Amazon is like to be so customer focused is one of the key factors of your success. Like this was the first reason in the first place I used to work for Amazon because I was such a happy customer.

Okay, I said, I have to work for this company because they are so customer centric. And while working there we recognized they really lived this kind of customer philosophy also internally. Every project, everything is like, on the top as the customer. If you have a reason why the customer will love this or will hate this, we will always get the project through management.

Steve: Okay, but in terms of any sort of insights and contacts inside of Amazon to help you launch, did you guys take advantage of anything like that?

Kai: Unfortunately not, I would even say we had a kind of disadvantage …

Steve: Oh why is that?

Kai: Because like all the people we used to work with, they said, okay, they know everything; they don’t need an account manager. So basically — imagine obviously we had the advantage to see all the internal figures, internal data of other people or other sellers working there.

This advantage, everyone has this, so during coffee breaks, stuff like this everyone was talking about okay, I would do this, I can do this. But Steve it’s one thing to have all this knowledge, it’s completely different to use it and do your own thing, so…

Steve: Sure, I was just wondering if you guys got by like sat around the water cooler and saying, hey, these leather cases are really hot, we need to get into that, because you have access to that data.

Kai: No.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: But there are a lot of products we have access to, but as I said it’s not the access to data or the information that’s really the use of it and really doing it.

Steve: Okay, so let’s start from the beginning then with your cases, you just mentioned to me earlier that you didn’t start out with a leather case; you started out by testing something, a plain old case. So was this just a generic case that you sourced from China or something like that?

Kai: Exactly, we started out with a simple plastic case we sourced on Alibaba, because we just each didn’t have $1000 and yeah. In order to get enough products, we put the money into the product and then just sourced via Alibaba and via email.

Steve: And what was the purpose of this test because it wasn’t anything close to your final product, right?

Kai: No, exactly it wasn’t like our dream case, the purpose was really to set up like all these background systems we needed in order to scale the business basically. So meaning first how did we get the products to Germany? How do we get the products to Amazon warehouse, so we…

Steve: Okay, so the logistics basically?

Kai: The logistics, so then the second part was what do we need company wise, which company do we have to establish? What kind of taxes do we have to pay, where? So the second biggest part and the third part obviously was how do we get the product to sell on Amazon. Obviously we had all these figures, but we didn’t– yeah, we hadn’t been like the seller so far, so we didn’t know how did we do this.

Obviously I was in working in this department, so I told people what to do, but I didn’t see what they actually did. We built up our own system and like promoting the product and generating traffic and marketing the product, so these 3 big things we basically set up with our test.

Steve: Okay and in that first vendor selling the plastic cases, they weren’t the ones that manufacture the leather ones, are they or?

Kai: No.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: This is what we recognized, we had one, it wasn’t a factory by the time it was an agent on Alibaba.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: When we started our real business with Kavaj we met this agent in China, and recognized we cannot talk, because we only communicated via email so far, and she was not able to talk in English. The boss of the factory of the agency wasn’t able to talk English either, so our relationship was finished once we met in person.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about these plastic cases first.

Kai: Yes.

Steve: You listed them on Amazon how did you– it seems like they were just generic cases right that all the other guys were selling as well, so how did you get rid of those, or how did you move those in the first place?

Kai: Exactly, it was a generic case, we just proto did a simple generic name on it and RAR14, and then we listed the product. The first one we did is really we listed the product, we optimized like the whole product detail page.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: And we named all these information which are for free on Amazon on the detail page, first the title, the bullet points, the product description, the search key words, and the images is one of the most important parts, is the images. This is where we really had like the lack of founding a company very early, because we tried to find someone who took images like for our budget. We emailed 20 people around our city in Munich, and they all offered us images of like $1000.

It’s a very high price for one, the shooting of high professional images. The other day one guy came back with a really cheap like $200 offer, and we first couldn’t believe it and in the end it was really a very professional photographer who used 2 or who’s doing photos for BMW and all these big machines, and he said he really like our inquiry. He was starting a business also like 30 years ago, and he decided to help us out if we come back again. He wanted to test our inquiry if we were serious about it.

Steve: I see.

Kai: Then we got to him and we got really high, very, very high quality images, and I would say this is one of the key elements on Amazon. If you have really high professional images, you are way better than a lot of other of your competitors.

Steve: From what I understand you stood out from the rest of the park because of your product photos at the time?

Kai: Yes exactly, this was…

Steve: This is probably almost 10 years ago then right or no not that long?

Kai: No it’s like 6 years ago I would say.

Steve: 6 years ago, okay.

Kai: Yes 6 or 6 ½ years ago we did this, yeah.

Steve: Would that work today like going back and trying to sell a generic case, I’m just curious what your opinion is on that?

Kai: Yeah I think it still would work as a one shot, it still would work with this strategy, because it’s something a lot of people are doing like this one shot opportunities in several niches, because Amazon is such a huge market place. It’s going like when we used to work there like Amazon had 80 around 88 or something million customers.

Today I just checked the favor it’s like they have 295 million customers worldwide. They’re just growing this so huge that I would say it would still work, and but what we did after that is what works much better is like to build a brand on Amazon.

Steve: Right.

Kai: Because this is like the ultimate thing, we had to learn, we almost messed up with this but…

Steve: Are you still there?

Kai: Yes.

Steve: The tendency– so you had this one successful product in the beginning which was just like a rebrand of an existing product. How did you decide that that wasn’t good enough and that you actually needed to create your own branded product? Because a lot of people will just take that money and they go hey great, let’s keep this going?

Kai: Yeah, the thing is this case was as you said it was just a generic product with not designed anything name on it, and just a weird kind of name. There was no brand strategy behind it, not at all, so…

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Fortunately our designer by the time he convinced us hey if you want to really be successful in the long-term, build the brand, and do this consistently through all your channels, you’re using your brand, so…

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We decided to do this first, in first place we decided to do this in design and in naming process. The naming process I would say also with our cases because we have all got a city name, so…

Steve: Okay.

Kai: People nowadays after 4 years like they really look for our brand and the city combined. Then they find our case, this was of course like by chance, it wasn’t really planned out like this well, but now we have experience. We say okay, have you just started? The best way you can do this, build the brand from the start out, think about all your elements you can put into this.

Steve: Just curious, you said you had no practice or any experience, how does one go about designing a leather case from scratch?

Kai: Yeah. This is also pretty simple, because what we did is we took two weeks of our vacation at Amazon, and then we checked out okay, where can we go out to get ideas about a simple and genuine leather thin leather cases, where can we go? Then we checked out the fairs in Hong Kong and in China.

Steve: Which ones, the Canton Fairs…

Kai: Yes.

Steve: Did you go to Global Sources also?

Kai: Exactly we went to Canton Fair, Global Sources.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: And where all these suppliers meet 2 times a year and we went there to get ideas, so what was possible, and what exists. Then we met with a couple of– we did like our due diligence with the suppliers. After deciding which supplier would be suitable for us we went to the suppliers, and actually checked out their factories and met with the designers in house, because every factory basically has like the tech guys and designers in house, who are producing their design for the local market usually, and then we just talked as like as I said we wanted the case basically for us for ourselves.

Steve: Right.

Kai: We saw what they can do, and then we asked okay we want to change this and this and that, can you do a sample for us? So and then we…

Steve: Did you specify measurements, how specific were you when you…

Kai: No, we didn’t specify any measurements because for the devices like the iPhone, the iPad, stuff like this, it’s all like you cannot change the dimensions, they are all given so to speak.

Steve: That’s not what I meant, like if you wanted to put a little pocket on there, did you specify the dimensions, or did you let the designer give you?

Kai: No, we didn’t specify the dimensions, we iterated. We said okay we want like, we want the following like this, or we want to add something here and then they gave us a sample, and we checked it out with a real device. We said okay, no we don’t like this, we don’t like that, can you please change this, so…

Steve: Were you in China the whole time during this iteration, or did you shift things back and forth?

Kai: No, we were during our first order where we were in the first, we were in China all the time, so it was like a very fast process was kind of this, we did this.

Steve: Wow okay. Did you, I’m just curious, did you commit to a large order before they were willing to do this for you, or did they just make these samples for you?

Kai: They made the samples for us before committing to the core [inaudible 00:19:57].

Steve: How much did you have to pay for each sample?

Kai: Nothing actually, because we decided … I think because we tried to build relationships, like really from the start. They also had the feeling, okay these guys are serious. They are here, they ask us for samples which nobody really does in this … Because we would spend, really, hours and then days there. I think they were like also sure that we would definitely buy something if they just deliver what we asked for.

Steve: Yeah. That’s just a quick tip for the listeners out there. If you actually go to the fair and meet the vendors face to face, they’ll take you a lot more seriously. We found the same thing with our stuff. Clearly that’s something that Kai experienced with his case.

Kai: Yeah, definitely, much, much, much more seriously. We’re going to China basically 3 to 4 times a year just to foster these relationships, and do it face to face.

Steve: You’re iterating over these designs. For anything custom, what was your minimum order
quantity for your first design?

Kai: It was always 500 for every design.

Steve: 500 units?

Kai: 500 units, yes.

Steve: Okay. Did you start out with one particular model? Was it just for iPad and when did you decide to branch out to some of the other devices?

Kai: Yeah, this Steve actually was one big mistake we made, because we actually knew that we had to focus on a few models or a few designs in order to be successful, but once we were there in China, we took vacations, and was first time order and all these hundreds and hundreds of suppliers and millions of people.

We were kind of overwhelmed during the first days. Then we made the mistake to do 10, I think it was 11 designs for our first order. 11 X 500 different designs, and then also 3 different suppliers. Once we were back in Germany and we tried to build our system, we build with our test case; we recognized it’s impossible actually to get 11 different designs on page one of your main search keywords on Amazon, because this is the ultimate goal.
Your listener should listen closely, this is your ultimate goal for all you do on Amazon is to have your main keyword, and to get this main keyword, your product, on page 1 of Amazon search results, and in the best case, 1,2,3, because this is where the magic basically happens. This is not possible with 11 designs.

Steve: Right. Did you drastically cut back then, and only do a couple of designs per keyword I guess?

Kai: We drastically cut back. Unfortunately we had to remove quite a lot of these first designs. We didn’t sell all of these. We cut back to maximum 3 designs per device, so we can claim slot 1 to 3.

Steve: When you say 3 designs do you mean designs and colors, or do you just mean designs?

Kai: I mean designs, and we do 2 colors, so basically we have maximum six products per device.

Steve: The minimum order per color, per device is 500, right?

Kai: Yes, nowadays are down to– we can basically order what we want, because we have really, really good relations with our main supplier, so it’s possible to get way below 500.

Steve: Okay. Yeah. It’s like that with ours too, but I am curious when you’re talking with these guys … First of all what were your margins early on?

Kai: On the test case or on …

Steve: On your first leather case.

Kai: On the first leather case like it’s always around 50-70%.

Steve: Okay. That’s interesting. I would expect it to be a little higher than that. Basically you were making around 3X it sounds?

Kai: The thing is with genuine leather you cannot compare it to these cheap plastic cases. We have to buy at a much more higher price. In order to sell really big numbers you cannot price it higher than like $50-$60 on Amazon, because that’s like the matching price for on Amazon. After that it is just impossible to compete against the $10, $15 on the first page.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most? Bookkeeping. Seriously, keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in.
Bench is an online bookkeeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice, concise financial reports. No more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches. Plus, it’s reasonably priced.
And the best part is that you can get 20% off of your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Steve: How did you guys know that you were getting genuine leather?

Kai: We tested everything. Basically we asked a testing company to test all the stuff for is it genuine leather using no chemicals which could be possibly dangerous.

Steve: You did your first production; let’s just say you did 500 units. Once you got those 500 units, did you have any defects? Did you have any issues, or did you just kind of list those on Amazon right away?

Kai: No, we had like– not with the genuine leather cases we had no issues, but with two cases from the other designs we had issues because they were not packed properly. They got damaged. Almost half of them got damaged. Fortunately by the time we did the QC ourselves in Munich, we spent almost a day looking through 700 cases, and just throwing 350 away because they were just compressed, so we couldn’t sell them anymore. The thing is they just forgot something to insert into this case, so during transportation they just made the mistake.

Steve: I see, so an inspection company probably would not have helped in this case?

Kai: No, I don’t think so.

Steve: Okay. Your first batch, it sounds like you had to throw away half almost?
Kai: Yeah, half of one design. It was really one case … I don’t know how they forgot this, but it was this one supplier who forgot to insert something so that the transport wouldn’t harm the cases.

Steve: You went through everything and then you just listed them on Amazon. You hired a photographer to take professional pictures?

Kai: We still used the same photographer we had for our first test case. He was helping us out the second time, and the third time he said, okay, now you’re in business and I’m actually much more expensive. Please find another one. He was like really was time constrained and we found another really good one.

Steve: What are your steps to getting the top 3 spots on Amazon search, because iPhone and iPad cases are an extremely competitive area?

Kai: Yes, exactly. What we do right now is we have iPad, and obviously we expanded to iPhone and iPad mini and all other Apple devices. The key is there are 2 main aspects to this. First thing is really optimize everything on your product detail page you can do. Like I mentioned, like the key words, the title, the hidden keywords, and the images, and …

Steve: Let’s go to that in a little bit more depth before you go on. How do you figure out all the keywords and make sure that you’re getting all of them? Do you use any tools or …

Kai: Right now we’re using tools. Back when we started we didn’t use any tools. We just thought okay, what are the top 3 main keywords our customers would search for? Only during our time we made this process better, meaning one thing like you said buy a software that can help you with this, but the easiest thing you can do, or your listeners can do is really check out what Amazon is suggesting when you type in your best keywords, because Amazon automatically fills in your search.

For example if you type in iPads, you will definitely see iPad case as one of the suggestions, and these suggestions are like the main search terms in terms of volume, what is currently running on Amazon. If you do this like for example iPad case, you would see there’s iPad case and there’s very high volume search terms ‘iPad case leather’.

If you type in iPad case leather, you will see iPad case leather and very high volume is iPad case leather black, iPad case leather brown. Only by checking out these automatic search suggestions, what Amazon is doing there, you can find your top keywords very, very easily.

Steve: You mentioned you use tools today. Do you suggest any keyword tools to use?

Kai: Yeah. We use MerchantWords.

Steve: MerchantWords, okay.

Kai: Yeah, we use this to just like search volume, and it’s basically our primary search tool. Another one we use is FreshKey, I don’t know if you have heard of it.

Steve: FreshKey. Yes I have.

Kai: These are basically 2 tools which can kind of automate this manual work to check out the Amazon Keywords.

Steve: You’ve got your keywords down; can you describe the process of putting together the bullet points on your listing?

Kai: Yes, of course. What we do is optimize first title, because this is like priority number one on Amazon, and second is bullet points, and we use … All keywords we’re not using on the title, we try to use in the bullet points because priority number two when you search on Amazon is bullet points. Most current information is that Amazon is currently changing its algorithm, and probably ranking the search keywords higher than the bullet points, but we’re just trying to figure out if it’s already happening or something like this.

Until today we’re really optimizing the bullet points as the second step, meaning we put the keywords, we’re not using in the title. The second is we answer the five questions a customer would ask us in the store, in an offline store. Imagine you were an offline store and a customer comes in and asks, okay, what can I do with this case? We try to use customer language, and combine it with the keywords we found for product.

Steve: Interesting, so what are the five questions that a customer asks about iPad cases?

Kai: First, what can I use it for? Do we have stand functionality? Does it support auto wake up function? Can I access all ports? Does it match your other Kavaj products? It’s [inaudible 00:33:57] and that’s the good thing of building a brand.

Steve: yeah, definitely.

Kai: People right now, they really want like sets. They want Kavaj iPad, iPhone, iPad mini and now we started doing wallets, and they just combine everything and they just look for the brand, and then next product.

Steve: You have your bullet points down, trying to use the customer’s language, answer commonly asked questions, what about your details, the product description?

Kai: Yes. Product description, we also value this very, very high. We take the same approach basically. We try to use really customer language. We get this customer language before using and reading the reviews. What we did is we called a couple of customers and did quality interviews in order to hear what we’re really talking about our cases.

What language do they use, and then we put together a product description and also stating the main benefits and really what the cases can do for them and help them in. For example they can use it for watching videos and doing presentations very nicely and to type on the case. It’s something like this, what Apple is also really doing nicely. Not putting out all features, but to really state, what can I do with this in real life?

Steve: Just curious. Do you find that a lot of people read your descriptions and that it makes a huge difference?

Kai: Yeah. You really have to specify. We think so but it’s the whole package of your detail page. If it really looks totally aligned, like images, everything looks professional. I think this is which makes the difference, because then people are checking out. It’s very hard to specify on Amazon, because we don’t have hard facts, hard data.

I think in the long term, the customers will really check out the whole feature page, if it makes sense, the number of reviews, and the bullet points and they will come back and check out this. What we see a lot is really in the seller feedback ‘Product as described.’ This is like the best feeling you can get. If people are writing this or giving you this feedback, then they’re obviously reading it.

Steve: Just curious in the very beginning, let’s say you have your listing down and everything is all good, how do you get it to rank? Did you start giving away products for reviews? What was your early strategy to get sales?

Kai: No, we didn’t do like giveaways or something. What we knew from the beginning is we had to drive all traffic we can possibly get to our Amazon detail page, because we had these tests with one product. We obviously had only one product. Then we really tried everything. Every channel we can get and in the early days we even used Google PPC.

We bought ads on Google, and then we built our own website and like putting the professional images there and building like a detail page for the test case already. Then we bought the PPC ads on Google, got the people to our website, and then we sent them to the Amazon detail page.

Steve: That’s interesting. You’re paying for ads and you’re not taking the sale for yourself, you’re instead giving the sale to Amazon where you have to pay Amazon’s fees. So the rationale was that you want to rank on Amazon over your own site?

Kai: Exactly. The rationale is really, we want to get our products into this magic page one of Amazon because as I said, Amazon, there are already 295 million customers who are searching there. The traffic you can get on Amazon on page one is all for free, because the people are searching there for free.

If your product is on the first page of Amazon search results, you will get the traffic automatically. You just have to get there somehow, and then the magic will happen all along.

Steve: Was this an issue of PPC traffic? Was it profitable despite the fact that you’re …

Kai: No. No PPC traffic is profitable in the first place for us right now, I would say. It’s really, we spent– it’s really our strategy to spend there, and then get the sale and get ranked. Once we are ranked, like the sales of page one are coming in and supporting this initial spending on PPC so to speak.

Steve: How do you correlate the two, because it’s not like you can put a conversion pix on Amazon site. How do you know that the sales are actually coming from PPC?

Kai: We don’t know, but in the early days when you don’t have a ranked product, or if you put in a product in a category like iPad cases, you have one million results, no one will find your product if you don’t do any kind of either PPC, or getting all the traffic you can get from other sources to your products.

It must be from somewhere. What you do doesn’t matter actually, but if it’s PPC, or if you like have an email list, or if you have YouTubers, bloggers talking about your product, but it must come from somewhere else in our category.

Steve: Interesting, okay. What were some other ways that you drove traffic to your Amazon listings early on?

Kai: Early on what we did is we got in touch with YouTubers and bloggers through influencers basically, and gave them samples for free. They did a review for our products, and then like posted these on their channel, and obviously linked on their channels to our product.

Steve: On Amazon?

Kai: On Amazon exactly. This was one very, very good way to promote it.

Steve: How did you find these people? Did you use any services, or did you just reach out to people on YouTube?

Kai: Exactly. We just reached out to people on YouTube, and basically what happened was like they reached out to us. Somehow they found us later. It wasn’t kind of that we put this much effort into it, but we would recommend to do this much more right now. I know that there are even services nowadays who can connect you with famous influencers. I think you even had one guy on the show who was very successful for this kind of strategy.

Steve: Yes

Kai: We didn’t use the services, but we definitely will look into this. I hope this information– this could be a very good strategy.

Steve: Can you comment on driving all that traffic to Amazon where you have to pay the 15% fee on top of FBA fees as opposed to taking it on your own website, saving that 15% and having Amazon for full regardless?

Kai: Yeah of course. Our strategy is really the thing to get ranked. Your sale on your website is one sale on your website. The sale on Amazon is one more sale than your competitor, and this means Amazon will rank you higher, because sales and traffic is the most important you can get on Amazon in order to get ranked. In the long run, or we see it with our products, this will benefit your products in terms of ranking.

Once you’re ranked on Amazon, you will just get the sales, first of organic traffic on Amazon instead of the sales on your website where you always have to drive the traffic to your website, and will always cost you money to drive this traffic to your website. On Amazon, once your products are ranked, you will get all this organic traffic from Amazon and these organic sales, which makes a huge difference, because you will never get 295 million customers on your website so to speak.

Steve: Interesting, so do you collect emails, like how do you, do you do any marketing outside of Amazon then?

Kai: Yes, yes.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We started this way too late actually.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: This whole email thing, nowadays when we last priced we use email as one of a big external traffic drivers as well, so we would recommend to use email very, very early on and try and start building a list so in order to spot your launches.

Steve: How do you entice people to give you their email because you can’t get it from Amazon right?

Kai: Exactly.

Steve: I assume you’re doing some sort of promotion outside on your own site?

Kai: Yes exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We just give them like a $5 coupon code, once they give us their email address, and this which is valid for all Kavaj products.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Exactly and we place this very prominently on our website, so like nowadays.

Steve: I see and then you send out an email and then you drive those people to the Amazon listing, and that in turn boosts your Amazon rankings, because that leads to sales?

Kai: Exactly.

Steve: I see so you’re going all in on Amazon basically?

Kai: We’re going all in on Amazon, all in.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: 100%.

Steve: Have you had any problems with Amazon?

Kai: Obviously yes.

Steve: Can you just go through some of the common problems that you faced?

Kai: Yeah, we have problems, first problem is for example someone else will hijack our listing, so basically…

Steve: Okay, how do you deal with that?

Kai: Basically I just describe what happens, we have 2 colors for example one iPad case black and brown, and then from one day to the other there, well there’re like 20 color variations like red whatever, blue something like this. It’s a different seller we didn’t know who cannot connect; it’s just hijacking of our listing, and benefiting from our sales rank probably.

What we do is we registered our trademark and our Amazon brand very, very early on, and we contact Amazon either the support team or the service performance team, and just proving that we are the manufacturer of these products. We are the only seller of these products, we have the brand registry, we have the trademark, and we have the EAN code on our website which only shows that we are selling black and brown cases. Then we ask please remove the seller, please correct the listing and this usually works within 24 hours.

Steve: You in this regard you mean they put up a different listing, not sharing your Amazon number, right?

Kai: Yes exactly, they are just extending our listing variation to more colors, yeah.

Steve: I see, but what about the ones you piggy back on your exact product number, how do you get rid of those people?

Kai: We didn’t have this kind of thing so or so to speak, we have our sellers who try to sell these products, but are only very, very limited number, and it’s not a problem for us basically.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Because they’re usually either selling like used or something, or they are selling higher prices.

Steve: I see.

Kai: And they are not, they cannot do FBA because we don’t sell them so.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Yeah this is basically it, second problem is, or any question to this or?

Steve: No, no I’m good yeah.

Kai: Like the second very common problem is that Amazon is just removing our product from the platform from one day to the other without noticing us. And this usually happens during Christmas season.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Like just one week ago again, so it happens all on all platforms in UK, Germany, US, I don’t know if you’ve experienced this, but…

Steve: No, you mean just a complete removal of your product you mean?

Kai: Yes.

Steve: No, we haven’t seen that yet.

Kai: Okay and this can happen pretty easily because Amazon has a process called [inaudible 00:47:35] court. Which means if one customer either one customer is complaining about the same issue twice, or if 2 or 3 customers are complaining and talking about the same issue in a very short time period, like the Amazon guideline is pull [inaudible 00:47:55] and take the listing off line and to protect the customers, or basically the future customers in order to experience these kind of issues.

Then okay once this listing is offline you can inform the seller, and you can ask the seller to yeah, provide feedback on this issue, and a system to get the product online again. But the communication is very difficult with Amazon regarding this. The solutions also because basically, most of the time it’s obviously by chance that this happens that really one customer has the same problem twice without notifying us. Usually the people come to us and ask, hey what’s the problem? Can you help me? But there are customers who just don’t speak to us, but first to Amazon…

Steve: Right.

Kai: They know obviously and…

Steve: Do they, does Amazon at least warn you that this has happened, or did you have to just notice yourself?

Kai: No, well yes.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We have to notice it ourselves, so Amazon like we didn’t really fully understand how this works, sometimes they notify us, sometimes they don’t, so this is why we always recommend to monitor your listings very well on Amazon to also keep an eye is everything online. Especially your top sellers are they still online, because as I said it can happen pretty fast.

Yeah if just two customers are saying, okay I have this issue and the next comes I have this issue, like there’s a red light internally yeah on Amazon. The solutions also contact the Amazon support staff and then the Amazon service performance team and explain what happens. The best case you know what happens if they notify you. If you don’t know you have to just guess what happens.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We had one example story from our products was we used to wrap all our cases into a wax paper, and at the beginning we only used black wax paper also for our coniac [ph] brown cases. People got these coniac cases, but saw okay they look black; I ordered brown, why does it look black. They just didn’t unpack the case, so they just saw the black wax paper, and figured okay this must be a black case, it’s a mistake.

They made it like Kavaj made it. They just reported us to Amazon that we shipped the wrong case, and if you ship a lot of cases during Christmas time, it’s very likely that two customers are not unpacking these cases, and then they’re just complaining at Amazon. This happened actually three times to us, and we always explained please check the bin, please unpack the case, the customer just had forget to unpack the cases.

Steve: I see, okay.

Kai: After three times we learned the lesson the hard way, we changed the packing material and now we wrap everything in their respective color brown or black.

Steve: Okay, that’s a good story. Hey Kai we’ve been chatting for quite a while, I understand you have a couple of other projects on the wing that I thought that you might want to mention.

Kai: Yeah definitely yeah, we got a lot of questions during our time during last couple of years because we built like Kavaj only in only 4 years, and we build a global brand in UK, US and in Germany, and people came to us saying how did you do this actually. We quite, we had quite a lot of people already in Germany and the UK and US and helping us out with explaining, just explaining what we did.

Then we figured okay we can share our knowledge like our experience from working in Amazon and building a brand, and what we did is we wrote a book and we put our whole story together. Steve for your listeners they can just go to kavajacademy/book, and they can get our book for free there.

Steve: Awesome.

Kai: We’re building like a whole Kavaj Academy around this topic selling on Amazon, because we saw there’s huge demand really how to sell on Amazon. We really love to get the feedback we already received from this book, and what we did with Kavaj Academy already.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: This is the second biggest thing we do currently besides Kavaj and expanding Kavaj internationally.

Steve: If any of the listeners have any questions for you Kai, where can they reach you?

Kai: Yeah, obviously as I said they could just go to Kavaj Academy, and we have a Facebook group, or a Facebook profile already for Kavaj academy, this will be probably the easiest way to get in touch with us or working.

Steve: Okay, sounds good. Well Kai thanks a lot for coming on the show.

Kai: Yes, thanks a lot.

Steve: I must say I think you are the first person who I’ve interviewed who drives all of their traffic from their own page to Amazon for ranking, so I found that very interesting.

Kai: Yeah, it is definitely very interesting, and it’s working, and all countries we use to do the strategy.

Steve: Yeah, awesome well thanks a lot.

Kai: Yeah, thank you Steve for having me and thanks for the interview.

Steve: All right take care.

Kai: Thank you.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Kai’s story is truly amazing, and it just goes to show that you don’t need any business experience whatsoever to start a 9 figure business. All it takes is some initiative, a lot of hustle and a strong desire to learn and adapt. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequiteajob.com/episode 107. And once again I want to thank famebit.com for sponsoring this episode.

As I mentioned earlier Famebit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagramers, and other influencers to promote your products online, and it works. One of my podcast guests Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in 4 months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks to start. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off. Go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products online.

And finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I manage to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

106: How To Design A High Converting Website With Chase Reeves

How To Design A High Converting Business Website With Chase Reeves

Today I’m thrilled to have Chase Reeves on the show. Chase is someone who I met recently at the FinCon Expo in Charlotte and the face to face meeting was a long time coming.

If you don’t know Chase, he is the creative director for Fizzle.co, Corbett Barr’s awesome online business training course which was mentioned back in episode 45.

And he’s also the goofy white guy on the Fizzle podcast where he’s frickin hilarious. You should check it out. But the main reason, I decided to have Chase on today is because is he is great at design.

Here’s the thing. He’s not a developer in the traditional sense, but he’s just really good at designing websites that clearly convey a site’s true purpose and value proposition. He’s designed countless websites for entrepreneurs like Corbett Barr and Pat Flynn and I’m really excited to have him on the show to talk about how he does it.

What You’ll Learn

  • When you should redesign your website
  • The main things to consider for your design if you have an ecommerce store
  • The pain points that Chase tries to address in every site design.
  • Chase’s target design metrics
  • Design guidelines that your site must follow to increase conversions.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 Youtubers, Instagramers people on Twitter and Vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes you can get famous Youtubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as $50.

The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous youtubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m happy to have Chase Reeves on the show. Now Chase is someone who I met recently at FinCon I think in Charlotte, and the face to face meeting was a long time coming to be quite rank. If you don’t know Chase he is the creative director for fizzle.co, which is Corbett Bar’s awesome online business training course, which was mentioned back in episode 45 when I had Corbett on the show.

And Chase is also the goofy white guy on the fizzle podcast where he is freaking hilarious, and you should definitely check out that podcast. The main reason that I decided to have chase on the show today is because he is great at design. So here is the thing, he is not a developer in the traditional sense, but he is just really good at designing websites that clearly convey a site’s true purpose and value preposition.

And he’s designed countless websites for famous entrepreneurs like Corbett Barr, Pat Flynn, he did nerdfitenss.com. I’m really excited to have him on the show to kind of talk about how he does it in the process, so with that welcome to the show Chase, how are you doing today man?

Chase: I’m doing good Steve; really pumped to be here, thanks for having me, you are right in that meeting each other at FinCon was long overdue.

Steve: Have you gone to previous FinCons before?

Chase: That was my first FinCon and I was impressed, I liked it. I really liked PT Money, the guy who puts on the show, I met him at WDS a few years back, and he just seemed like just as a cool dude. So his event lived up to my expectations.

Steve: Cool man so maybe I’ll see you there next year?

Chase: I think so.

Steve: So give us a quick overview about how you started out designing websites and kind of how you ended up at Fizzle. And feel free to explain what Fizzle is by the way just in case people don’t remember.

Chase: Sure, yeah, so Fizzle is a membership site, I think that’s kind of crapy way of putting it. What it is, is there is a lot of people who want to figure out how to start their own business. Steve have you’ve ever met anybody who is like this before, somebody who wanted to start his or her own business or something?

Steve: I don’t know, it’s rare, it’s rare.

Chase: So what we’ve been doing for a long time is teaching people how to start their own businesses. The truth is that a lot of people love to waste time learning everything that they can, and that’s kind of a natural path is you got to go learn everything to kind of feel confident enough to get started. But the thing that we’ve learned is that the only real learning happens once you get started. So what we’ve developed is this nine stage road map, plus a bunch of other courses that are what we call just in time learning.

Everything is broken down into bite size chunks so that you can learn, how, hey, I need to grow my email list, okay, boom take this quick course on that, grow your email, and now you’ve got everything you need to know to do to grow your email list. Same thing with the road map, there is these nine stages every business goes through. So just focus on the stage that you are in right now and what’s next instead of trying to be an expert in the whole can get brutal.

So that’s what we do at fizzle, we are constantly improving that and alongside the courses and the training is the community of entrepreneurs that won’t let you quit. We just locked out really early on probably due to that I think a lot of the design and copy writing that we did on the site, and just which is always — which is of course due to who I am and who Corbett is as entrepreneurs and what we care about.

We just somehow locked out that a bunch of great people started finding us and becoming members. Now it’s one of the liveliest online business communities that you can find, and more than that it’s zero douchebagary. It’s like not douche at all, like we — the headline on our home page is honest online business training, it’s something that we’ve really built our whole business on.
It’s just this idea of like I want to build the business that’s going to last, that’s sustainable, not something that’s like a flash and a pen, get a bunch — get a million email address, just try to take advantage of old people who are wondering what to do with their money at 3 PM in the afternoon, in between televangelist spots. You know what I mean, like I’m sick of internet business being associated with that. So we kind of got started to help people find the real route to honest success, and so that’s what we teach.

Steve: So you designed that website, right?

Chase: Yeah.

Steve: How did you end up there, like what was your early web design history, before Corbett yeah?

Chase: Where that started from was I got a computer kind of younger, I wasn’t like, Corbett got like a real old computer like way back in the day like learnt out code as the first thing. I got a computer like in high school I think, and started obviously beside like playing doom on windows, playing some silly video games. I just kind of started like fiddling with like Microsoft paint and like making things — trying to make like funny stuff, I was always like, I was always the funny guy, I always like to make people laugh.

That turned into to having a computer, knowing how to use it, and then I got into music a lot, I started recording a lot of music which kept me using the computer. Then I got into college and we needed like a dorm shirt made, and I had a computer and I knew how to pirate software from the internet. So I was like, I got Photoshop now, we can make our shirt. So I did that and started like making silly things for our dorm room shirts or something.

Now this kind of kept going, band, concert, posters and things, all the things that I was associated with, that I was like, oh my band’s playing, and I knew let’s make a silly [inaudible 00:07:37] poster and so we did it. So it kind of started there and then it turned into like I got really — like my dad says, like, men are so good at computers. I just got good at computers do you know what I mean?

So like I could add a video, I could design things, I could — in Photoshop I could manipulate images, I could make music and record it, and then add it and play it back and all of these things. That honestly was the foundation on top of — that I built my whole career on. Because what happened is my taste developed and maybe that was there before hand.

Like your taste is the thing that let you go like, no, that’s not very good, I don’t feel comfortable putting that out, that’s embarrassing. That just kept getting stronger and stronger, and then my skills started getting stronger trying to like make things up to the level of taste. Soon as the long way is…

Steve: So Chase real quick, sorry so there is a difference between designing something that looks great and designing something that actually converts well too. So did you pick up those skills at a job or apprenticeship or something like that?

Chase: No, no that’s all software lessons, so for me it really came to a T when I learned how to design websites and that was — like I respect writing a lot, adds up few personal blogs and I just wanted it to look a particular way. So that’s where I started fiddling with all the stuff about 10-11 years ago I guess. So you bring up a good point, so in design it’s very common founders people start to do their own business, they really want their site to look good right? We all want that, we want it to look good.

Okay we want it to feel kind of fancy right? We want to feel quality, we want to create that — what design does is it creates trust. Right, imagine that you are learning — you are searching Google, you are going across the internet a million miles an hour, you land on billions of websites or whatever, and it’s like you — how are you going to stand out from the noise, all the old crap that’s out there?

Like design is one of — is this brutal split second trust factor thing, it’s the first step in the door all right, you don’t seem like a total piece of crap, I’ll read your headline, you know what I mean? So it’s just this sense of — it’s almost like this intangible sense really, beyond that there is a lot of functional parts of design as well. Like you are getting into it what is the difference between sort of a good looking design and a very effective design.

And what you are talking about there is the effectiveness is direct result of what your goal is on the sight. If you want your site to have a lot of people to it and they just spend a lot of time there, well then that’s one goal. Another goal is to get them on your email list. A different goal is for you to get them to buy a product.

A different goal will be to get them to not only buy one product, but then up sell them by the time you’re going to let their shopping cart right, and now they’ve bought multiple products. It’s like there’s all of these goals you can bring in to your design, it matters immensely which one you choose to design for it, does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah, totally just hey by the way Chase I’m going to just going to cut it real quick. Your mike is creating some back ground noise.

Chase: You’re getting background noise?

Steve: It’s like this scratching noise, I can’t describe it.

Chase: That’s probably online on my shirt, then what I’ll do is this.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: I can fix that, just like that. Okay. There we go how is that, is that a little better?

Steve: Yeah that’s better, okay.

Chase: Sorry about that.

Steve: Yeah no problem okay so hey…

Chase: I’m saying I like this thing and walk around so I’m kind of like I’m mobile.

Steve: I still here the scratching noise actually.

Chase: Okay you still can hear it now; you can still hear it now. Can you hear it now, am I still making…?

Steve: Yeah you’re good now, yeah maybe it’s only when you move.

Chase: Okay I’ll try to stay still.

Steve: Okay, all right so Chase one fundamental question that I always think to myself is when does a website actually need a redesign, and when are things just okay as is?

Chase: It depends, obviously it comes back to that idea about your goal right, so if your goal is to sell more products, up sell more products across your site, I’m speaking specifically to in ecommerce terms here so that because I understand most audience is doing ecommerce stores, is that correct?

Steve: That’s correct yeah.

Chase: Say you wanted to start up selling more things, well that could be a design goal, that could be a business goal that design helps you do, right? Other times you might just feel like way out of step with the competition, you might just feel like dude I look like it’s 1992 and everywhere else is playing in 2015. I really need to update my brand.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: Another time might be when your business has changed direction, kind of changed focus, and you’re like actually this doesn’t feel like, I’m still using last year’s strategy in my design when I have a new strategy that I really want people to understand and resonate with, right?

Steve: Right.

Chase: Those are all perfect examples of when you might want to redesign something.

Steve: When someone comes to you with like a Pat Flynn or a Collin and says hey I need my site redesigned. There’s probably some sort of process that you go through right to figure out what their goals are and where you even start, because everyone’s different right?

Chase: Yeah.

Steve: How do you proceed?

Chase: Yeah absolutely, so perfect example is when Pat Flynn of Smart Passive Income needed to have a site looked at. Actually what happened was a long time ago I emailed Pat and I just thought the design, I’d probably, I had kind of gotten to know him a little bit. I was just like dude your site looks really lame, this is back in the day. He was under the impression that it was really the coolest site; he’s said what do you mean? Everybody loves my site, it’s working really well, what are you talking about?

I’m like listen here, I’m just saying, I took some screen shots like this is gross, that’s gross, all of this is out of line. You don’t have any great typography, like it all just feels a little sort of 1992 to me. He was like okay I guess whatever, and then like a year later he finally got in touch with me and was like, dude I really want you to design my site, come on let’s talk about it.

What happened is Corbett and I flew down to San Diego and we did a weekend down there just doing all these preliminary things and actually packaged this all together in a course within Fizzle called “The essentials of design for none designers,” okay.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: It’s just for business builders, for people who aren’t designers and there’s kind of like, in making the course I really sliced and diced my process into a few different things and then I call it craft C-R-A-F-T. Okay, so the C stands for a clarity of purpose, all right it takes a lot, this is that goal that we were talking about previously. What’s your goal and it’s not just what’s your goal, it’s what’s your goal right now, because your goal is going to change.

Your goal might eventually be to be at the level where Pat Flynn is or what Steve Chou is or who knows where right, but right now what’s your goal, what’s your goal right now. I’m trying to get to X amount per month or this year is the year that I something, something, something. That’s why it’s important not to go like I’m going to be Dave Ramsey, yeah okay.

I mean you can have a sight that looks like Dave Ramsey’s, it doesn’t mean that your business is performing like Dave Ramsey’s business right? The idea is where are you going right now, what’s your purpose right now and that always comes from who are the people I’m trying to attract, and what are they looking for that I can help them with right, it’s always comes…

Steve: These are like more broad based goals as opposed to specific ones like build an email list for example?

Chase: Totally.

Steve: Okay yeah.

Chase: Because that all very specific to, I mean to build an email list might not be relevant in 5 years, it might not be at all, but having a clarity of purpose, knowing what people in your audience rally want. Knowing the kind of wants you want to attract to your website, that is always necessary, that is always essentials right, and that’s where everything starts, so that’s you have this clarity of purpose that’s the C, then the R is a ruthless…

Steve: Can we focus on the C a little bit more; I know you’ve got 5 letters to go.

Chase: Yeah no, I mean…

Steve: But so for the C does that mean you have to have your target customer avatar in mind for that C potion also?

Chase: Totally.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: Now this idea of the avatar or your customer profile or whatever, I come from, I was in the web agency world for a while, advertising world for a while and that’s very prominent in a lot of different places and it’s also the world of advertising, the world of design is split on that. Especially also the world of the startups this idea of like who’s our ideal customer is very important, but a very common thing that happens is we turn these avatars, these become like not real people in our brains.

These become — and we don’t get to use the biological, like honest to God intuition that you have about someone for instance that you really know. One this is in we have a free guide at Fizzel on defining your audience, defining your ideal customer, and one of the tricks in that is this idea that who is one real person that you know who is a part, who is like an ideal customer for you.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: Then because getting to the idea of, getting to the real person, now all of a sudden you know, you could call them up and go like listen Bob, here’s what you’re struggling with, here’s what’s going on, here’s what, here’s the limiting believe. Here’s what I wish you could do right now, and here’s the product I think that’s best for you where you are right now, because it’s going to give you this result that you really want.

It’s that kind of stuff that like that when you actually have a real person verses like a paper, that’s like my, this is Sally. She is my ideal customer avatar; she sells the whole this and has to [inaudible 00:17:23]. She is really neat; do you know what I mean?

It gets unhelpful doing that, because now you’re like I guess Sally would like this, I don’t know, Sally is not real. Whereas you know Bob in real life, and you’re like actually I would feel cheesy to Bob, actually Bob wouldn’t be able to find that. This is helping you make actual real life decisions about your conversion and design and copywriting on your site.

Steve: These people does it matter how many of these people there are out there, or do you just focus on one real life situation first?

Chase: That’s a great question, and you go with your gut. My experience I’ve been doing this for a while I would say I pick like one, it just happens naturally that’s seasonally, I pick one, one at a time, and then that might change in three months or two weeks or 6 years or whatever, but I’m checking in on myself. Okay we’re still making this for Joe, is that what this is still for, or is she already moved passed that and now we should go back to someone else, do you know what I mean?

Steve: Okay.

Chase: So having that real person that you can actually talk to, super, super valuable.

Steve: Okay, got it okay.

Chase: Does that make sense on the clarity of purpose?

Steve: It does yeah, let’s move on to R.

Chase: Okay so with R again this all still all stealing a craft because I’m a crafty little minx, R stands for this ruthless focus, all right, so…

Steve: R stands for ruthless?

Chase: Ruthless man.

Steve: Ruthless okay.

Chase: Ruthless focus. There’s a famous quote about writing, it says that in writing you have to cut out your darlings, you kind of have to murder your children. These little bits in your article that you really love, but they just don’t support the point of the article. You know what I mean, you have to cut those out because in order for the article to make more sense to more people.

Same thing with your website, the more crap you have in your website, the harder it is for someone to understand what the hell they’re supposed to do there, right. You don’t want to treat your website like some vest ad, like a TGI Friday, one of the waiters there that has got the flare all over the place and they’re leaning down at the table. They’re like hey guys really excited that you’re here are at TGI Friday. Can I tell you about our Apple Zilla, smash? We’ve got a great news or something or rather.

That’s not what your website is, your website isn’t this big convoluted messy bunch of buttons and Instagram feeds, and all of that sort of stuff. It’s focused, why? Because you have a clarity of purpose, you know who’s out there, what they’re struggling with, how your product solves their problem, and now you have to edit. You have to remove things so that that’s what they understand about it. It’s not just knowing what your purpose is, it’s effectively communicating, and that means you don’t say other crap on your website. Does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah, so one thing I teach in my class, is for example if you are on ecommerce store on a product page, the whole purpose of them going on that product page is to hit the “add the cart” button. Is that something similar to what you are saying?

Chase: Exactly, exactly. That actually gets to the next one which is A, which is you get to choose one action per page, one action per page and yeah, for that product page. For example, guess what the action is, you nailed it. It’s click the button, add to cart. It’s not – and actually in some ways the insight there is not that it’s just that, it’s how do I get them to — how do I get that experience to feel like they are more prone to complete the cart.

Because anybody in ecommerce knows that like cart abandonment is a really big deal, because people are adding things to carts, because it’s easy to do so. It’s just this virtual little click. It doesn’t cost me anything. But then, “No, maybe I want it. No maybe I will come back here later.” And they never do.

I don’t know how — there’s ways and designs that you could sort of make that feel a little more substantial, they click it, the cart goes from 0 to 1 and gets bigger, and you have a message that goes, “Awesome. Just think of what it’s going to feel like when you get your good new gismo, and you put it on your thingy, and everything is amazing, and your life all of a sudden has meaning and purpose.” Whatever it is that you have to try to tell them or something, but the action idea is that there’s one action per page.

I would — most of the people, a lot of the people that we help coach are bloggers and podcasters. I kind of have this idea that I’ve always stuck to about there’s basically one action across your entire website, because you can treat things progressively over time. You can be in a relationship with your customers over time if you pick the first right action. If your first action is just “purchase,” ecommerce is a little different than blogging, because in blogging world, you kind of want your first action right after them reading something or acting on something and like it, you want it to be like getting on the email list.

Now you can have a second action. Yeah, maybe follow on social networks somewhere, but like we all know that’s not nearly as effective as email. If you everywhere across the site you are getting people on your email, now you can justify a second point of contact hopefully, if you don’t just go straight to …

Steve: Does that imply that you remove all the other buttons except for …

Chase: Go on. Keep on.

Steve: Except for an email sign up when you can. I actually haven’t looked that closely at the Fizzle blog, but do you not have social media buttons or anything.

Chase: We really don’t have social media buttons or anything. We make those a part of the first email that goes out to people. Basically the big action across the site is, we are kind of split right now, because we’ve also got a lot of people coming to the site for the second, third, fifth, tenth, a millionth time.

We have like a 150,000 uniques on the site every month. There’s many different customer segments there that we kind of have to serve. This is what happens when you site gets bigger, bigger, and bigger. When it’s smaller, when you have a more pointed niche kind of focus, a lot of the sites I design, have been like that.

When I designed Pat’s site, when I designed Nerd Fitness for example, Steve Kamb’s website, the conversation went up by 80%. When we redesigned, traffic conversion went up by, it was either — it double, went up by 100%. When I designed Small Passive Income, which was a bit bigger than think Traffic, actually not Demo Traffic and conversion stayed relatively similar, but one of Pat’s goals was to get a lot of people over to the podcast page.

I had — his podcast listeners went down because a lot of people were listening wherever in the blog before. I had changed how some of that works for the sake of being way more focused and focusing on one action. And what happened is he realized how much of a goal was for him to keep his podcasts listeners up. We had to go back and make some changes. Design is that iterative thing like that.

When you have big sites, you kind of have to do the work to identify those different user groups to be able to serve all of them. But as you are saying, for the most part, you got, if you pick one action across the site, it’s going to perform well on that action. You will have to do some testing over time, see how it’s doing. Maybe that’s the wrong action, who knows. That’s where you get to use like sort of like your intuition on this stuff, right?

Steve: Yeah. I’m just thinking about all these blogs that I look at and a lot of them have these really cluttered side bars and a whole bunch of buttons everywhere, social media buttons. Somewhere buried in there they have the email sign up form. I was just curious maybe we can talk about some examples later on once we get through your framework.

Chase: Yeah, definitely. That’s C claritive purpose, R is the ruthless focus, A is the only one action per page, and F is for your first time visitor. This is, you want to design your site for growth. Maybe in an ecommerce situation you are designing your site for impulse buyers in somewhat, which in the same way, that’s a first time visitor. But when you design it for your first time visitor, instead of for your over and over and over again visitors which always is going to happen. They are going to find tier way around over time if you keep putting up great content, if you have new products etcetera.

But this first time visitor, what I find is that if you can do the work to sort of slip into their skin, and think about what it feels like to land on your site just another ecommerce site that they are landing on. Because they don’t give a crap, they don’t care who you are. They don’t care about the product, they don’t care who you are. They are busy. Their mum is sick. Their kids are yelling in the background, who knows where they are.

They seriously don’t care about you or your website designer or anything like that. What are they interested in? What do they want? What do they want that brought them to your page? What’s their intention? Then, how can your site perfectly line up with that intention?

Steve: How do you figure out that sometimes? Do you use any tools to figure that if you don’t really know?

Chase: Honestly my favorite tool for this is customer interviews.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Chase: For developing more content businesses, customer interviews are great. You can obviously use search stuff, looking through Google’s key word, tracker thing. You can look through Moses tools to understand how people – with obviously Google analytics looking where are people searching that they are landing on this product page. How can you infer like the intention from that thing.

But for me, I’m often times, I find and a lot of people find this. You can be really intuitive about that and sometimes you hit the nail on the head. But often times you think it’s this reason, but really it was totally different, it’s this reason over here that’s why. And if you knew that before hand, you could totally have — you would totally change the design or the copywriting on this page.

One great example of that is, there’s a framework called jobs to be done. This milkshake stand every morning filled up with people. What the heck is this all about? They hire –meaning people just do like pack, get buying milkshakes like crazy in the morning. It doesn’t seem like a very morning kind of thing for me to do. That seems strange.

They hired these business consultants to check out what’s going on here. They started talking to customers and realized everybody that was there was a commuter. They were driving a long a distance to work. They needed to get breakfast, but something that they could hold on one hand while they are driving. And they needed it to kind of keep them filled up at least till lunch time.

The milkshake weirdly fulfills all these rules, but there was no merchandise or marketing of billboards out saying like, “Have a milkshake for breakfast.” It’s just something that a lot of people started figuring out on their own. That changed the idea of how you can present what’s available to the people during the morning time at the milkshake stand. It’s one of those weird, like you could have been intuitive about this, now that we are going backwards. But it took talking to customers to really understand where it came from.

Now I understand talking to customers actually is kind of a nightmare for most of us entrepreneurs. Honestly, it still is for me. I’ve done a lot now so I sometimes get a little excited about it, but most of the times, it still feels like work. In an ecommerce business, it can feel really kind of weird.

Steve: It’s actually not so bad. So earlier on, whenever a customer actually called us, I would interrogate them so to speak. I did a lot of that earlier on. I don’t do it anymore obviously, but it was quite helpful. We found a lot of bugs with our site that way.

Chase: Yeah, it makes tones of sense because when you get to — the whole point of conversion and design, the whole point of this craft frame that they develop is how do I get you out of your skin and into an actual potential buyer skin, not only just a potential buyer but like that ideal customer?

How do I let you know what it’s like for Bob to land on your website after they’ve been on hundreds of similar websites? How can you really grab Bob’s attention and resonate with them by saying, “Bob, I know who you are. I understand what you care about and this is the thing.”

A great example of this is like, comic t-shirts or Giki culture of some kind. The kind of place that has that t-shirt and that highly curates hilarious comic books inside joke type t-shirts or knickknack and things like that, all of a sudden I feel like these people know who I am, because they are getting — I get these inside jokes from world of Warcraft or Minecraft or something like that.

It’s that kind of like “You are speaking my language. Holy crap, I found — these people know who I am.” That’s where I always loved those smaller sort of niche sites even though you might have less people to your site, you might be more profitable in the end.

Steve: How about if it is aesthetics versus copy, because I’ve seen some really heinous looking websites that convert super well.

Chase: Yes, that’s a good point. This is one of the first points in the design course that I made. It’s this fancy effectiveness thing we kind of touched on the beginning. But the truth is your website’s most important assets are its words. And that doesn’t mean that just because it’s on the page it’s working, you have to tell me which words are important to pay attention to. And there are literally words I can’t unpay attention to for lack of a better term.

For instance if you go to, like a site that’s very clean like Medium, if you read any articles on Medium, pay attention to how it feels to land there. There’s a big headline right centered, like in some image or something like that, and then there’s no distractions on the left or the right or even on the top. You just fall directly down into the copy and you start reading. If it’s well written, if they are talking to you, then you kind of like keep going and now they are — now they are convincing you of something. Do you know what I mean? That’s the beauty of good sales copy.

A great example to look out for that is also Base Camps home page. Unfortunately it changes all the time. But if you go to basecamp.com, you will be able to see like right now, there’s a very simple homepage; one column of text just saying here’s what we do. It’s super effective for them. To answer to your question, the words are to me the most important part. Your headline has one job and that’s to get them to read the very first sentence, which has one job to get them to read the next sentence, which has one job to get them to read the next sentence. You are drawing them in to this kind of relationship.

And so if your headline sticks out, it’s eligible, it kind of set nicely in some good fonts, it’s not gross and weird and some crazy cuss of handwriting font thing, even though you think that looks cool man. That is like neat and pretty. It’s all of these kinds of simple things. All of that details of that stuff I get into in the course. I’ll keep going on the craft process if that’s good for you.

Steve: Do you do an Asian accent too by the way? You are doing southern accent the whole time.

Chase: No I can’t listen. I mean, I think it’ll just be two item in [inaudible 00:32:46]. I can’t see. I’m not going to. How could that not be offensive? I’m trying — I do a lot on the physical shows, I do a lot of voices. I really like for instance I really like doing the Indian voice, these certain Indian voice, but I try — I’m trying to keep myself from doing anything that is not done by a Caucasian man, just for the sake of like not offending somebody.

I don’t mean any harm by it. I literally love these accents. I love the way they sound and I love making them, but I have to try and keep it to like just, I can tell you a little bit of this you know. It’s a white dude in London, is a bit of a Christ Stoker accent really. It’s not like I kind of want to go full anything else I guess.

Steve: We are on T, right?

Chase: Yeah, so F was for the first time visitor because they don’t give a damn about you. They don’t care about who you are. They have their own story in their own life going on. Either you have a product that solves their problem or you don’t. Do you know what their problem is? Can you focus on that and ruthlessly focus down on that?

Then T is the last part. It’s the testing over time. Because one of the big mistakes I see people make as they start conversion optimizing AB testing stuff, is they can actually crank down too hard on converting this time at the expense of someone trusting you to buy next time.

The idea is you want a sustainable long term business. You also — that competes sometimes with I want to make as much money as I possibly can right now. Do you know what I mean? I can slam you hard with the bill sales message, and all this crap and pop ups and things that don’t let you quit — you just try to quit the page and the job description button goes, “Are you sure you want to do this?”

You can slam people really hard with stuff which all that does now is it goes like, “Oh clearly you are desperate. I don’t trust you. You clearly don’t have a great product.” That’s becoming more and more common as more people come on to the market place savvy about computers and things.

This long term view is not looking at your business just this week or this month, but over the course of the next five and ten years, how can you keep tweaking this in a way that makes it feel more like a relationship, that makes it feel more like you are providing value for people who have an honest need, and all this everything that’s going back and forth here is totally human, it’s total like actual connection and interaction.

That’s my fantasy about business. I know it can happen that way. I’m ruthless about promoting that way of doing business instead of just like, scorch to earth policies, steal money from everyone kind of thing.

Steve: The problem with that though is it’s a little harder to quantify, right?

Chase: Yeah, it is hard to quantify. To be honest, it’s a big mistake that I see people — the first big mistake that I see people make is focusing on fanciness instead of effectiveness. Then the other side of that coin is when you focus on effectiveness too much, and have no sense of relationship in there.

There is no magic number you are trying to get to that I can tell you once you get to this kind of conversion rate, then you are a real business. It’s all has to be felt. It all has to be felt. It’s like, it’s art. It’s literally a kind of a soulful artistic way of going through the things. The truth is you could probably try to tweak a bunch of stuff on your site to increase the conversion and stuff, and you are not going to see a tone of change.

There are some places where you are going to see change and that’s going to be your headlines, that’s going to be your copywriting, stuff that’s easy for people to read, your product photos, and how enticing those kind of things look. And all of that stems from, how well do you know your buyer? How well do you honestly know your buyer? That’s going all the way back again to this clarity of purpose.

Steve: You keep mentioning conversion rate. I was just curious, you mentioned like you increased Corbett’s conversion rate, Steve Kamb’s and then Pat’s. What was the conversion metric?

Chase: Conversion metric for them was always email, so a visitor to an email subscriber. For contents like that’s the big thing because now you’ve trusted me enough to give me your email, I gave you this free book or something in return, now over time can I walk the balance of capping you with an email and making you feel like there’s some value in this, reminding you of our relationship, is it worthwhile to keep intact without you going like, “All right you are bugging me. Unsubscribe.” You know what I mean? It’s just like being at a bar and trying to woo a person of the opposite sex. It’s this delicate sort of balance. That’s the artistry and the stuff that I really love.

Steve: Yeah, it definitely it is an art. Unfortunately art is often hard to describe in words, right?

Chase: Yup. No actually it’s not. For me, I’m becoming really like — because I’ve thought a lot about that. I live more in this like sort of the fancy artist designer musician world than I do kind of in the business world most of the time even though my work is in the business world. I actually from Stephen Colbert [ph] I was learning a lot about faith and art and the things. He says things very succinctly and concretely because he’s so smart. These were in interviews not in a show or anything. Just in interviews with him out of character.

All I know for sure is that art gives you a feeling. That’s the art I’m interested in. I’m interested in the art that make me feel something. I think business is like is the thing that can make us feel something, that can remind us of our humanity, that can make us feel more connected to each other to the earth to the things, rather than just being someone who is just unconsciously consuming whatever comes in your own mouth. You know what I mean?

I want to live better. I’ve bought products that made me live better [inaudible 00:38:55] there’s a donut here in town, not voodoo donut, I live in Portland, Oregon, but this little donut called [inaudible 00:39:02] is the most delicate little [inaudible 00:39:04] bar Steve. I swear to god, it’s the donut that made me want to be a better man. I swear to god.

I believe that product, that there’s something about a great product that’s well designed, that’s thought through, that meets my needs, that kind of like, it makes me feel like, “Yeah, maybe I’m not a piece of crap. Maybe I can live well. Maybe I can stay married. Maybe I can be a good dad.” Do you know what I mean? I need all the help I can get, because that sounds really hard.

Steve: I need to get some of this donuts man. Let’s take a look at the fizzle.co website because you designed that, and obviously you were there and now, I’m just curious about some of the design elements. I notice right when you land on the page, it’s basically just a video and then the headline. It’s not even like long form copy. You got like maybe five paragraphs with the verbation and stuff free trial. I was just curious how you came up with that landing page.

Chase: We tried a few different things. We didn’t try a million things; we just tried a few of the different pages. Originally we had a long page that was really well designed, all these customer testimonials, all this part, and the other. But honestly the story of our product, of our service lives in this video. So we wanted the headline to be extremely simple and clear with a little bit of style and then you come right down into the video where in the first 15 seconds — I won’t give away the joke in the first 15 seconds, but in the first 15 seconds it was this little great like wait what!

This is, what am I watching, and them it just tumbles straight down into this little letter from Corbett our CEO. And it works really well for us because to be honest we can’t — I don’t know we could fiddle a lot with a lot more stuff, but this works really well right now.

And because it’s so simple, because it’s kind of so human and honest, because on video and the audio and the video like you hear our voices you get the reflection you kind of get know us a bit. And also in Corbett’s simple letter there, you kind of get to know our point of view just a little bit more and just the tone and things like that; it’s really effective, so it works really well for us.

Steve: Would you say that most of the people who land on that page already know who you are, or do mostly cold people land on that page?

Chase: It’s a good question. I think most — like I don’t, I couldn’t tell you for a fact one way or the other, I could probably go look it up in the analytics at some point. Or have one of my spreadsheet guys do that, we have these spreadsheets guys. Yeah, he is actually our head of growth, so he does deal with a lot of that stuff. The truth is there is going to be a lot of both, there is going to be a lot of both, I bet most that convert it’s not their first time landing on our site or the home page.

Steve: Because I’m curious for you guys, I wonder if you get a lot of podcast people come in right.

Chase: We do, we do get a lot of podcast, so we have — on the podcast we have a sort of little some tiny advertisement for Fizzle there with a special link that people go to. And that takes them to a different page that just — that gives them a special discount for people listening to the show, right?

So we do see a lot of people converting from that especially after they listen to several episodes, because what happens with people right now who are listening to you Steve, they are listening to you because they trust you. They trust your point of view, they know you have experience, and so if you recommend something to them they are going to listen to you right?

And I feel like with podcast way more than any medium, honestly even more than video, there is something trustworthy about it, because I’m listening to you while I walk the dog or I commute or I go on a jog, or I’m walking around or doing the dishes, I can listen to you anywhere. I’m rarely listening to a podcast when I’m just sitting on my butt listening to a podcast. I’m always kind of doing something else right?

So when your ear, your voice is in my head all the time, I don’t know, I feel like you get to know someone all the time through just hearing their voice kind of like when you used to have those girlfriends or boyfriends in junior high. And you were calling them on the phone and you go like, no you hang up, no you, no you hang up. I don’t know if you remember talking to people on the phone like and like your dad was like, get off the phone, I need to call someone.

Steve: I would just hang out because I was too cheeky to even talk to them so…

Chase: I just settled from x-tapes, I just…

Steve: Yeah x-tapes those were the days man, yeah.

Chase: Totally.

Steve: Okay so this page I guess then you kind funnel people through the podcast, this landing page in which case they’ve…

Chase: And the blog, I mean the blog is a different design, right? So the blog if you land on any of these posts from the blog, for instance if you give content away will anyone pay? It’s sort of one of our related episodes of the podcast where we talk all about like sort of the balance there. And you have this — where there is content, a couple of quotes, you have actual podcast player.

So this is just content, everybody is used to looking at a blog page, an article. Then there is nothing too sexy or crazy about it, I feel like if there was something crazy about it you would be like wait how am I supposed to proceed? You know what I mean, like it’s supposed to just be a blog page.

But then on the right side this is where it’s like okay we have some interesting links over here, we have a free trial sort of promotion, and then asks for the — get on the email list there at the bottom of the page as well as on the top.

Steve: Yeah it’s very minimalist, I’m looking at it right now actually, so I guess these are all the main goals that you want someone to click on. And I notice you don’t have any like previous posts, you have popular posts, but you don’t have a whole bunch of links on the sidebar.

Chase: No, I kept the sidebar super clean and minimal and just kind of like it’s like to me it’s like you get here, you land on this particular episode, if you give content away will anybody pay. If there was a longer article or shorter article, I don’t care I want you focus totally on that. If that’s interesting enough to you hopefully the call to action at the bottom or the very top will get you.

And go like, oh, well, I trust these guys, I like their voice, I’ll just go back to the blog and see what else they are talking about. Oh I can subscribe to the podcast, oh because you know what there is a lot of those little touch points, you got to see the same person at the bar maybe a couple of times before you get enough confidence to talk to him.

You know what I mean? Because very few of us are like brush enough to just dive right in, and it feels like it’s something similar in the way that a regular user person — a regular person just browses the web, finds content, and looks into stuff, you know what I mean?

Steve: So I’m looking at one of your blog post right now, and it seems like obviously that getting an email sign up is the primary purpose because those buttons are like orange right, and they stand out. So I’m just curious I didn’t notice any pop ups or anything either, and I was just wondering where your philosophy was on that?

Chase: Well I mean so to me I hate pop ups, I just hate pop ups, so I don’t do them. And I feel like I can make a big [inaudible 00:45:50] argument about how…

Steve: It’s just a philosophy thing then, right?

Chase: Disrespectful to the people, they don’t trust, to be honest they can be really, really effective tool. This is one of those situations where it’s like I have faith in humanity that I don’t have to do a pop up to get as many people on the list as possible. One of the things I just had a cruise event speaking to a bunch of podcasters, and one of the things a handful of other speakers like Chris Brogan was saying is how his favorite thing is like deleting people from his list. Like he goes through and finds everybody that hasn’t clicked any links or opened anything on his list, he sends them all an email and says, if you are not — if you want to stay on the list click this link otherwise I’m removing you. And he loves calling his list down, down, down.

Steve: I do that once a month actually.

Chase: Do you really?

Steve: Yeah I do.

Chase: What’s it like for you, do you like it?

Steve: I don’t mind it because like if they are not clicking I don’t want to be paying for those people on my list right? That’s my philosophy at least.

Chase: Yeah, I mean it’s something I haven’t done, but this is like the front end of that right? It’s almost like, if you don’t put a pop up there you are not going to get a bunch of crapy unwanted people on your list, unqualified people.

Steve: So for a blog for an ecommerce site what would you say you would — how would you populate your sidebar and that sort of thing? If making a sale was your ultimate goal?

Chase: It totally depends right, because what you have, you have the potential in some systems you have the potential for a lot of intelligence. So someone lands on your site because they were searching for rollerblades and you are selling rollerblades, and they land on this one particular rollerblade, the K2 fatty and they land there and then…

Steve: Sorry go on.

Chase: That’s a real rollerblade.

Steve: I noticed yeah.

Chase: Yeah, so then they go like, oh, this kind of interesting, but I’m not ready to buy right now and they go up to the blog. Some sites it’s very easy to have the kind of intelligence that goes like you were looking at the K2 fatty, let’s make the sidebar sort of special to someone who is looking at that. Which could be another sort of like offer for the K2 or some or who knows what right? Like wheels or any other little things, the kinds of things that you could sell.

But ultimately for a blog, this is where the difference between like I have a bunch of products for sale, and I want to create an audience for people, who believe in this kind of thing, or who care about this kind of thing right? If I was building an audience of people who care about rollerblading, I would have a kind of freebie to give away to them with like quotes from my favorite rollerblades.

Or like the top 10 rollerblade wheels or bearings revealed by someone that you know. That’s free, get on the list, will send it to you, and then you just have the responsibility to keeping that relationship good. Keeping that relationship honest and fresh too, right? So that when they do want to buy some K2 fatties they come straight to you. Because in one of the emails you are like listen, as a reader we just want to make sure that you know that we value you, the attention and being a rollerblade yadi yadi yada, here is a discount for 5% off anything in the next 30 days.

Steve: Chase this is funny yeah, I just recently wrote a post about this, I think this is the direction ecommerce is taking because you got these amazon.coms out there, where people are selling similar products, and it’s just the race to the bottom right? And the only way you can really stand out is by building a community that really appreciate you as business and they’ll buy from you just out of loyalty.

Chase: Yeah, and that to me is a massive difference, because to be honest it’s like you can sell products without a community, and you are totally in business, you are like partnered with wherever your traffic sources are which is probably going to be Google, or links from other sites, or who knows where, buying advertising, things like that. Then you do have a race at the bottom because if your prices are more than somebody else, then I’m going to go somewhere else, because guess what I could find that at the tip of my finger, like I just opened up another tab and I just search.

And frankly I’m just searching on Amazon which has the lowest prices I can find, right? So why would I buy from you? Now a good example of this a great example of an ecommerce store that the design is extremely good is Need. It’s called neededition.com, N-E-E-D edition .com, and its men’s clothing for that like sort of like 30 to 40 year old men thing. There is nothing, you don’t get discounts here, there is no discounts. But I want to buy everything on that site because he so nails who I am. Do you know what I mean?

He is like this is who you are, and he writes a little story about each of the article of clothing for sale. These funnel clothing he sells some low price items there too sometimes socks or ties or like magazines, like specialty magazines or whatever, and he nails it. And he actually he is a friend of mine, he just switched over to Shopify actually, from a totally custom built thing, now everything is running on Shopify which is pretty fascinating. Even more so then the custom thing, he is like no I would just go to Shopify after they had already spent a bunch of money making the custom thing, it’s pretty cool, that Shopify has got so many functions.

Far so much functionality rather, but that’s a great example of he is built a community and they are open rate — here is what he does, every month there is a new edition, right? So there is new articles of clothing for sale, and he’s built a massive email list, because you only get notified about the edition by email. His open rate is like 80 something percent, I don’t remember what.

Steve: That’s ridiculous.

Chase: It’s ridiculous, okay, so it’s just fascinating edition way of doing an ecommerce site. Obviously the design, what’s the design here? The design doesn’t get in the way you understand? Like the point of design is to not get in the way of what the customer wants and what the business wants. You want to facilitate that interaction as well as possible.

The message that the business has, that’s the message you are helping the audience resonate with. And the design can only amplify that or turn it down. So the whole idea is that in amplifying that, you are always going to become more minimal. You are always going to become more sort of essential, unless like flair on a vest at TGI Friday restaurant, you know what I mean? So he does that really well at Need Edition.

Steve: So people don’t comparison shop, they just buy straight from his email is what you are saying?

Chase: Yeah pretty much, so the email that comes out is just a short little bub about the spirit of this issue, of this edition basically. And then you click the link and you go over there and you see all the articles. And then I mean half the time I just read through, I have no money to spend on this stuff right now, my wife would kill me.

But I just read through it, because it’s funny, and then I really want that $130 shirt, like I really want it. Because I just read the story of the person who makes it, and the designer and the silly English guy talking about like why this shirt other than other shirts, and it’s this relationship based community based kind of thing.

Steve: And it’s not his product brands right, it’s other peoples brands, and he still…?

Chase: No, totally and now they’ve become so big that a lot of other brands have started doing collaborations with them, they’ll do a shirt that’s just for Need, which is kind of fascinating.

Steve: Awesome, yeah, I’ll definitely link up that site, it sounds really interesting.

Chase: Yeah it’s a very good example.

Steve: Cool Chase hey, we’ve been chatting for like 50 minutes man, so let’s close this with some facts about yourself. Where can people reach you if they have any design questions, do you still design websites, I imagine not anymore, right?

Chase: I don’t, no, yeah, I’m so on the — I’m full time Fizzle now. So where you can find us is at fizzle.co. And actually I went through the course on the design steps to try to just like think through what exactly to share with you guys. And I found a handful of worksheets that I’m totally good with sharing with your audience. There is one on how to visualize and do some worksheets on your first time visitor, there is also another one on like questions such as like a long term view, how do you set up your thing for a long term view, as well as another one just like the overview of this craft conversion and design system.

So what I’ll do is I’ll make those available for everyone who wants it at fizzle.co/chouchou. And I know that you said that that’s something that they might have teased you with in junior high school?

Steve: Elementary school but yeah, so it was my last name right it’s not chouchou as…

Chase: It’s your last name, yeah, so chouchou, I just wanted to have a unique URL that wasn’t too long, and I was like I just couldn’t get chouchou out of my head.

Steve: I’m sure I’ll find some way to get you back because it is my blog and I’ll be posting your graphic, so we’ll see how.

Chase: Perfect.

Steve: All right man, hey thanks for coming to the show, I learned a lot today man.

Chase: I’ll do well, thanks for having me, thanks for doing the work you do man.

Steve: Cool all right, take care.

Chase: Bye, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, designing a high converting website is both an art and a science, and Chase is an expert when it comes to funneling site visitors to their desired destinations. For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode106.

Once again I want to thank Famebit for sponsoring this episode, as I mentioned earlier Famebit is the best place to YouTubers, Instagramers and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. One of my podcast guests Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in 4 months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks to start.

The best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. Go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products and get $25 off with coupon code my wife.

Finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

105: How To Run Profitable Facebook Ads To Sell Physical Products Online With Miracle Wanzo

How To Run Profitable Facebook Ads To Sell Physical Products Online

Today I have Miracle Wanzo on the show. First off, isn’t that the coolest name ever? When I first met her, I had assumed that it was her pen name but nope, her name is really Miracle and she is one of the sweetest, most down to earth person you’ll ever meet.

Anyway, I met Miracle at the Ecommerce Fuel Live event in Nashville a few months ago and I’m glad that I did. Miracle runs HipUndies.com where she sells women’s undergarments and lingerie.

Now normally, I tend to think that selling clothing or anything that has to do with fashion is very difficult and challenging. In fact, I tend to discourage the students in my class from going this route because it’s extremely competitive.

But Miracle has pulled it off and does extremely well with her fashion line. And today, we’re going to find out exactly how she uses Facebook ads to drive traffic to her business.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Miracle got started in ecommerce
  • Why she started this business
  • The main drivers of traffic to her ecommerce store
  • HipUndies’ unique value proposition
  • Where Miracle sources her products from.
  • The strategy that Miracle uses to run profitable Facebook ads
  • How she picks an audience
  • How she creates a high converting ad and landing page

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I also want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagramers, people on Twitter and Vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes you can get famous YouTubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as $50. The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators.

Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous YouTubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quite Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have Miracle Wanzo on the show. Now first off isn’t that the coolest name ever and in fact when I first met her I kind of assumed that that was her pen name. But no her name is really Miracle and she is one of the sweetest most down to earth people that you’ll ever meet. And I met Miracle at the Ecommerce Fuel live event in Nashville just a couple of months ago, and I’m really glad that I did. Now she runs Hip Undies.com which is a store where she sells women’s undergarments and lingerie.

And normally I tend to think that selling clothing or anything that has to do with fashion is very difficult and challenging, but — and in fact in my class that I run, I tend to discourage the students in my class from going this route, because it is in fact extremely competitive. But Miracle has pulled it off, and she does extremely well with her fashion line. And today we are going to find out exactly how she has done it, and so with that welcome to the show Miracle, how are you doing today?

Miracle: I’m doing great, how are you?

Steve: I’m very good, now I know you’ve been doing this for heck of a long time like over 15 years just on ecommerce. But can you give us a quick background story just kind of how you got started, and tell us how you ended up starting Hip Undies.com?

Miracle: Yeah, I got started on eBay, and I was selling off price designer clothing on eBay for a couple years way back when, and it got to the point where I felt like I was spending enough money on eBay to justify having my own website. And I started playing around with building websites and I have back then, I mean I used so many different platforms back then to build a website, because I built one and not quite like it, then go find another solution and start building a website on that. And eventually after a little bit of time I actually found software that I liked which probably isn’t even around anymore. And I built my first ecommerce site which was selling the clothing.

And the issue that I had with that was that I was selling actual clothing as opposed to under garments, and I felt like for where I was at that point and time it would have required too much for me to keep up with all of the trends and the changing out of inventory. Because that’s one of the issues that you deal with in fashion is that you have to constantly have fresh inventory coming in to keep up with what’s on trend and the seasons. And I wanted to find a way to not have that much change happening with my inventory. So I pulled back from that website — oh hold I have to cough. Sorry and started playing around with drop ship sites, so I could still stay in ecommerce while I figured out what to do.

And back then I was on a couple of mailing lists and a couple of forums for ecommerce merchants and there was this one guy who was talking about selling jewelry, and how it was one of the perfect things to sell online. He wasn’t selling high end jewelry; he was selling things like 30, 60 bucks. And he said because he could fit all of his inventory into a trunk and travel. And they just hit the road, travel all around the country, and they would stop wherever they were and they would ship out all his orders and get back on the road, and I thought oh my God that’s awesome, I got to find a way to do that in clothing.

And that’s how I ended up in lingerie because it’s so tiny, that it fit within his model of being small and not taking up a lot of space, light weight, easy to ship, small packages, nothing heavy and bulky. But still having a reasonable enough price point to [inaudible 00:05:56] our average order value is over 50 bucks.

Steve: So are you still selling clothing today, or is that completely gone?

Miracle: No I do not sell clothing; there are some things that sometimes I pick up with Hip Undies, like yoga pants or lounge wear, things like that but not real, real clothing.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of just fashion do undies — do they not go out of style as quickly I guess?

Miracle: There are two sides in the lingerie industry. Well this is in the contemporary kind of designer branded industry, because there is also the sexy side, and I’m not really in that niche. But in the branded designer industry there are two sides, there are fashion lines that come up with new collections all the time just like apparel, but then there are basics. And those are the things that women wear every day, that they buy repeatedly because they like to fit, or they love the fabric or it’s just like their go to piece, and they’ll stuck and wear it. So there is a side of it that changes rapidly as apparel, but then there is also a big group of it that doesn’t.

Steve: Okay and that’s the side that you focus on?

Miracle: Yeah.

Steve: Okay and so are your products — are they under your own label or are you selling other peoples brands?

Miracle: Both. I have what I call house brands which are brands that I have made up and manufactured. I also bought someone that I knew that had a line, and she was winding it down to go back to work as a custom designer. And I bought out all of her assets, all of her patterns, all of her designs and things like that. So I have a few house brands, but the bulk of it at this point is brands that are found in department stores or specialty stores or boutiques.

Steve: Interesting, so if you are selling brands that can be found in department stores and that sort of thing, so what is Hip Undies’s unique value preposition, and how do you actually get customers into your store?

Miracle: I know, and people ask me that, and I have a really good friend who’s been a sales rep in lingerie on the other side, selling manufactures brands to retailers, and she is been doing this for 20 years. And after I came back from Ecommerce Fuel, because people ask me that a lot, and we talked about it because I felt like we just didn’t see it through that lens, and we still don’t see the industry through that lens, because I’m not sure if it’s a matter of the customer having a different perspective on it, or if it’s that we just didn’t look at the industry that way. When you think about it with all of these brands, any brand that I carry if there in Nordstrom, [inaudible 00:08:46] some of them are in Macy’s, Bloomingdales, not so much Macy’s, but sometimes you find a few.

And they are in these department stores yet still there are all of these independent boutiques that still carry those same brands and they co-exist. So when I looked at it, I didn’t see what I was doing as being any different than having a boutique other than the fact that my boutique was online instead of a brick and mortar store. So I didn’t see it through that lens of well if Nordstrom has it, I really need to have a unique value preposition to be able to sell something. Because I mean that’s just what it was offline and I didn’t see online as being that drastically different. I think with customers it’s just a matter of what they want, and then being able to get what they want.

And they’ll buy it from whomever, and with Hip Undies considering that I started in 2003 and it’s 12 year later, so a lot has changed. There were — initially there were a lot of advantages that I had that bigger companies weren’t doing at that time, especially when it comes to servicing people who are Americans, but who’ve moved to somewhere else because a lot of the other websites still don’t really make it all that easy for international buyers.

Steve: Interesting.

Miracle: Then also there’s a matter of selection, offering certain things that other stores don’t, because a big company is not going to necessarily buy across a collection. They’re going to maybe stick with some of the best selling items and not carry the rest. I think more than anything it wasn’t the large retailers that were an issue. It was really as the manufacturer started to get into ecommerce, that really changed things, because they can offer everything they have to offer versus a retail like myself or any large company not wanting to carry an entire product line.

Steve: Do you find yourself selling more of your own house brands, or more of other people brands?

Miracle: There’s two sides. There’s search, and of course with search-based traffic most of them are looking for brands that they know. Then there’s paid advertisement. With paid advertisement, then it’s more advantageous to me to advertise the brands that I own.

Steve: Let’s talk about paid search for a little bit, because I know you do a lot of paid search. For the listeners out there, Miracle posts on the Ecommerce Fuel forums, these really long and detailed posts which are really awesome. You mentioned Google search. Is it hard to rank for brands?

Miracle: It is harder now definitely after Panda and Penguin, it is much more difficult than it was before, absolutely.

Steve: Do you have any tactics that you use to rank in organic search, or have you pretty much focused more of your efforts in to just pay-per-click at this point?

Miracle: I gave up, so I think last year, it was either last year or the year before, at one point I was really having SEO and I spent a lot of effort and money into developing all of the resources to really handle Search Engine Optimization, and there came a point where I was kind at a fork on the road. I said, okay, I either can go this SEO path and invest more in it, or I can really try to figure out paid traffic. I made the decision then to just go the paid traffic route, and kind of let the SEO stay where it was. Not to really focus on it, but to put my time and my resources into learning pay traffic.

Steve: If you break down your traffic and your conversions today, where are most of your sales coming from? Is it paid traffic or organic traffic, or direct?

Miracle: At this point, there is organic search, there’s search for the domain name and stuff like that. At this point in terms of where it’s going, it’s on the paid side, and also probably because for me personally it’s easier to have a direct correlation between money spent, and growth on the paid side as well.

Steve: Absolutely. I know Ecommerce Fuel Live you talked about Facebook. Is Facebook your primary paid source at this time?

Miracle: Yes because for me I find it hard to keep growing Google product listing ads, and I’ve gone around and asked all the merchants like, you know? It seems to be that with the catalog of products you have eventually you kind of hit a little bit of a ceiling with that.

Steve: Yeah, there’s only so many searches that are out there right? Do you use generic Adwords or is it just listing ads?

Miracle: No. It’s product listing ads. I probably have a few generic Adwords campaigns, but not so much with what I have just because of the people who bid high and bid a little bid broad. It’s tough.

Steve: Yeah. I know. It totally is especially when you’re selling other people’s brands and that sort of thing. One of the reasons I wanted to have you on the show is because you have had a tremendous amount of success with Facebook. In terms of my store I’ve had success too with Facebook ads, but mainly from a combination of email marketing and backend funnels. What I found interesting about your presentation at Ecommerce Fuel was that you’ve managed to run profitable ads that pretty much directly result in sales. I was hoping that you would be able to share some insights with the listeners from the perspective of a smaller shop on how to run some of these campaigns.

Miracle: Yeah. I will also say that I should learn how to set up a photo and I’m trying to learn how to do that, because I think that at some point it will start to tap out what you can do with selling direct. The way that I got into this was because I started focusing on Facebook ads. I was managing ads for another company, and at that point in time the only groups that I could find that were really going hard with Facebook and making sales of products were the people who were selling T-shirts on sites like Teespring and other crowd sourced type of print-on-demand apparel sites. I started getting involved in those groups and learning from those groups.

They really, really figured it out. I mean seriously figured it out. The great part about it was that because Teespring was almost solely depends upon these marketers for their revenues, they had to make the adjustments that the marketers needed to help them convert better. Teespring kind of took care of the heavy lifting of conversion optimization and split-testing, and they take all the marketers’ feedback and they keep tweaking and refining everything to get to the point where they built a platform that converted really well on desktop and most importantly mobile. All the marketers had to focus on was just driving traffic and tweaking that side of it. Go ahead …

Steve: No, I was just going to say, if you can go into a little bit more detail? Let’s talk about Hip Undies. Let’s say you want to start … Let’s consider one of your most successful ad campaigns. A couple of questions right off the butt. You create an ad and then you have it point directly to a product range. The thing about Facebook is that a lot of people are on there just to hang out, and not necessarily there to buy. I was wondering if you could just provide some of the guidelines that you’ve used to create your most highest converting ad.

Miracle: First I will say that I think everyone who’s come before us has made it such that people on Facebook are now used to seeing things that they want to buy and buying those things from the newsfeed. I think that they’ve done such a good job with marketing and because they were … And for product sellers and they sold it to all these other people and these other people have also done it.

To the people who purchase, not in Facebook in general, because we have to keep in mind that out of all of the people on Facebook maybe only a small percentage of them are active shoppers from ads. Of those people at this point, the idea of being interrupted in their newsfeed and going to buy something is not foreign to them at this point. What you find … I need to put you on hold for a second. I’ve got to grab an inhaler. Hold on real quick, okay?

Steve: Sure, absolutely.

Miracle: Sorry about that. I’m going to start after what you fired. Among those people who shop from Facebook is that they actually shop from Facebook. I even spoke at one point when I was interviewing for [inaudible 00:18:23] that there are Facebook boutiques and there are Facebook buying groups. There are groups of women who group-buy things, and then one of them is responsible for shipping it out to all of them. I think at this point, it’s a thing now. It’s a thing where a lot of people are into finding things On Facebook and shopping and buying those things.

Even on my ads where I have posts you’ll get comments that say I bought one or I bought one like this and I bought one of these last week. It’s the thing now, I think. I don’t think it is that foreign any more. It’s just a matter of there being this huge, broad Facebook audience, and when you run ads you have to figure out how to get more of the buyers in the group of people who see your ads.

Steve: Let’s talk about that. It sounds like targeting is the key here.

Miracle: Yeah, pretty much. Of course you’re going to have products that just don’t work, no matter how good your targeting is, but yeah.

Steve: Let’s say you want to sell one of your undergarments, and let’s just again take your most successful ad. What did the targeting look like, and how did you actually come up with that audience?

Miracle: Trial and error. I’ll say that honestly because there are times when I go in and I think I know what’s going to work and it doesn’t. I’ve tried a whole bunch of different things, and it’s hard for me to say that it’s the most successful ad, because even within the campaign I will have different ad sets. Those ad sets target different groups.

First it’s a matter of making sure that the product is going to work, because sometimes you have the right targeting, but the product just isn’t appealing and that can make you think that your targeting is wrong, but it’s not your targeting. It’s just that the product didn’t work. You have to keep trying things. Sometimes I feel like it’s just a matter of hitting the right thing at the right time.

Not necessarily because my ad was great or my targeting was great just like everything combined at that moment to find that audience and to pick up momentum, because that’s one thing we know for sure about Facebook is that it builds off of momentum. If you get momentum, most of the time you keep momentum, and if you don’t have it’s really hard to get it. It was trying a bunch of different things really, trying a lot of different things to target. It’s targeting brands sometimes. It’s targeting other online shopping destinations. Sometimes I’ll try QVC or HSN or …

Steve: Interesting. Let’s just do a hypothetical situation here. Let’s say you have this new product coming up. You mentioned yoga pants earlier, I‘m just more interested in the process here. Let’s say you want to sell these yoga pants. Who are you going to target first, what’s your creative going to look like?

Miracle: Sure. First I’m definitely going to split the ages. Facebook works I think it’s like 35-44, 45-54, 25-34. I’m definitely going to split the ages. I’m probably not going to expect much out of the 25-34 range. When I set up that ad set they’ll get the least budget.

Steve: Is there a reason why? Is it because you looked at your audiences who shop on your site already, and you’ve determined that that age group doesn’t spend as much?

Miracle: No, it’s not from looking at the audience. It’s from looking at the ads reporting. A lot of times in my experience just from what I’ve been doing, the 25-34 they’re very highly engaged with Facebook so they’re very clicky and they do a lot of comments and shares, but when you run the report and you break down your conversion by age, it tends to take a lot of money to get a conversion in that age range.

Steve. Interesting, okay.

Miracle: I don’t know why. Maybe it’s other factors, you know. They have less disposable income.

Steve: Sure, absolutely.

Miracle: Typically, I’ll split apart the ages for once. If they were yoga pants, then I would start looking at things like … I just did one for yoga a few days ago. I think I have in there stuff like yoga journal, and other yoga websites and yoga terminologies for yoga pauses, and just let it go and see how it goes.

Steve: You’re using only interest based targeting at this point?

Miracle: For something like that, yes. If it’s yoga pants. If I were looking at something a little more general like a bra, but not really because I wouldn’t do it with a bra, but just say I was. Then I would do something broader or I’d do a lookalike audience. If I were trying to sell yoga pants, I would start going for … I’d look at it like, this brand, when it’s in a store, it’s merchandized this way. It’s with these other brands, or it’s at this type of store. If I want to find the kind of person who would buy that, that’s where my mind thinks to look for that person.

Steve: Okay. Yeah, that makes sense. You’re running a variety of different ads I would imagine at this point, how do you evaluate the ads. What are some of your metrics to determine what to continue running and when to stop?

Miracle: Right. Usually when I sort of fine testing, like I said I just started something with yoga in it last week. I will look at that early on and see if I’m getting a click-through rate that’s reasonable. Like if I get a less than 1% click-through rate then I know I’m just way of the mark with the targeting. I’ll look at that early on, and if the click-through rate looks good, like it’s 3%, 2% and above, then I’ll let it run for a couple of days to see what happens with the website visitors and how expensive or inexpensive they are because on Facebook a click is a click. It’s not necessarily a visit to the website.

I’ll start to look at, is it being added to the cart and if it’s converting. If it’s being added to the cart and it’s converting then that’s it, I’ll let it go. If it’s converting well enough, like cheap, then I’ll start to look for other interests to target, and add another interest to target, and another ad set to that campaign.

Steve: It looks like you’re looking at a click-through rate that’s greater than 1% and preferably in the 3% range?

Miracle: Yeah, early on, early on.

Steve: Early on, right. Is this just … are you looking at this like after a day or 2 days?

Miracle: If I’m trying something that I haven’t done before, then I’m looking at it … I’m starting the ad earlier in the day like in the morning, then I’m looking at the click through rate in the late afternoon or evening, if I’ve not done that before. If I’ve done it before, then no.

Steve: Okay. It’s like a one day thing and then you make a judgment after one day whether to continue running that.

Miracle: Well, I make a judgment if I feel like I really bummed, because sometimes I’m way off. Just way off and it’s like, this click-through is so bad. I’ve got the wrong audience here, because again, on Facebook it’s hard to get momentum if you don’t have it. It’s hard to turn something that’s not working into something that’s working, and it’s much easier to just go back to the drawing board than to just sit there and cross your fingers and hope that it works.

Whereas if you’ve got some momentum going, your click-through rate’s good, the engagement is good, then just let it go and the algorithm will do its work. It’s kind of like a car. If the engine’s running smooth it’ll run smooth, but if it’s having a hard time getting started. You’re in for trouble.

Steve: I just want to take a moment and thank for Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most? Bookkeeping. Seriously, keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online bookkeeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice, concise financial reports. No more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches. Plus, it’s reasonably priced. And the best part is that you can get 20% off of your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Steve: How much do you put on an ad, and what is the size of the audience when you’re doing these experiments?

Miracle: Sure, ultimately more than 100,000 people. Sometimes I can’t get there with what I’m targeting and again, because I said I break the ages out into separate ad sets. Really honestly if I’m just starting something I haven’t done before, no more than $10 a day in that ad set.

Steve: You typically run multiple of these ads, and then you look in the late afternoon after running for what sounds like a day, and you pretty much iron out the obvious losers.

Miracle: Yeah, the obvious losers. That’s a good way to put it.

Steve: What do you do with the guys that are the click-through rate is like one and a half percent? You start looking at the shopping cart ads percentage you said, right?

Miracle: Right, the next day though, because if my click-through rate is that low, then I’m not … You know I only have $10 a day budgeted. I’m not getting that many visitors to the website yet. I’ll look at the next day and start to see where I’m at with adds to cart, or with conversion.

The adds to cart is a back up to conversions, right, because if something hasn’t converted but you see a healthy enough adds to cart, then it’s just a matter of time before people start to complete those purchases, but if it’s not converting, and you hardly have any adds to carts, then it’s just not going to happen.

Steve: What’s a typical good adds to cart percentage?

Miracle: I don’t know. I don’t have a thing that looks at the percentage. It just has the number and I just kind of eyeball it. What I look at … This is how I do it, because I don’t like to bring all my reports into Excel all the time, because it takes too long then. I look at, how many people … Do I have enough people that have visited the website for me to start expecting to see adds to cart and conversions?

Then I look at, do I have enough people adding it to cart for me to expect to see conversions, like kind of eyeballing. What I look at is, if I only have 2 adds to cart and I spent $20, $10 a day for 2 days, and I only have 2 adds to cart then I’m like, okay, well that’s probably not going to get me where I want, because by the time I get a conversion out of this, I’ll be probably 30, 35 bucks in. This one doesn’t have any momentum here. I can try it again. Sometimes you can just restart that same ad and get better momentum just because you’ve hit better timing, maybe it’s pay day, a bunch of other factors.

Otherwise I look at, let’s say that I spent $20 but I have like 10 adds to cart, then I’m like okay, I only got to see 2 of those convert to sales before, I’m okay with keeping this ad running. I kind of eyeball it. It’s not all that specific, because if I bring it in to Excel, then I’ll never get it done, and I have to make a report and make a decision based on what I see in the Facebook interface.

Steve: I think I see where you are getting at and really determine — it really depends on how much profit you are going to be making per sale also right? You know how much profit you are going to be making, and so you just eye ball to see if the ad will potentially be profitable right that’s what you are saying okay?

Miracle: And even if it’s kind of not really all that profitable let’s just say it’s an item that’s like 30 bucks, and I’m up to $15 per sale right? Even if I’m out of number like that or arguably the 15 is my margin. I’ll still keep that going just because there are obviously a lot of people who buy more than one.

And then there is also the impact of the people who come through on organic click from Facebook which is that someone saw it as a pain impression, and then because of their engagement someone else saw it organically. And they clicked through and that’s not reporting in the ads interface. So that also brings in traffic and in some of those people who don’t come in right away, they come in a little bit later.

If a person saves your post, if they see it as an ad, but they save it, then they come back later and click through later, that’s also not going to show up in the ads reporting because it wasn’t a pain impression at that point. There is a lot of traffic that’s not recorded in the ads interface.

So even if I’m not all the way profitable on that specific campaign or ads set, I’ll still keep it going because it’s bringing in more sales for more items than it’s being recorded there. And while I could go looking Google analytics and I could run the reports. Again I need to be able to make a decision off of what I see in Facebook; otherwise I’ll never make these decisions.

Steve: No that totally makes sense, and I was just curious how does retargeting kind of factor into your calculations?

Miracle: I run the retargeting in a separate campaign. I build custom audience, I build custom audiences based off of products and collections of products, so like brands or groups, or I’ll have a custom audience for one type of garment versus another type of garment. So I have a bunch of custom audiences in there, and I will set up retargeting camping sometimes for specific products.

Sometimes they are dynamic products we are targeting that Facebook feature that has that where Facebook matches up the products. And then sometimes I cross promote something, so I’ll take one product and promote it to a group of people who’ve either looked at or added to cart, or purchased a completely different thing.

Steve: I was just curious though, so you have these experiments and let’s say you have one ad that has like a huge click through rate, but not that many ads to cart. But on the flipside maybe some of those people are coming back through your retargeting ads and actually making a purchase. Is it just kind of a gut feel whether you want to continue with that ad?

Miracle: No, I learn because — like I said I got involved in these t-shirt groups and this is how I learned how to do this, and I have had different people help me out. And one of the guys I respect so much whose name is Glen Williams. And he published this article basically saying you need to have a system.

And this is the only way you’ll make it work consistently is if you keep making the same decisions over and over. If every single time you see something you have to think about it, and you have to decide in context, then you don’t have a system. So I really took that to heart and my system was if three days in a row, three consecutive days I don’t see a conversion, then in cut it off.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of the actual creative, what is your ad actually look like, and what does the landing page look like?

Miracle: The landing page is the product page and the ad looks like the product. It’s just the product shot that’s in the 12 — if it’s a link post; it’s the 1200 by 600. So in a lot of times because that’s the rectangular post in items and a [inaudible 00:34:13] can be toll up there more than one item in that picture, I’ll just – it’s nothing fancy, I’ll just put them together in Photoshop like two three pieces.

Steve: Do you put any text in the image?

Miracle: No, the only time I’ll put text is if it’s promotional, but I try to stay away from that, because, and it just was more than anything, it was probably a factor of having something very consistent that I could hand over to a VA to just make the ads, and not have to think what ads to go on each one.

Steve: Interesting, okay, and so there is no text, you don’t like to use promotions it sounds like?

Miracle: I do sometimes, but then — but here is the thing right, because sometimes if you’ve put a promotion on a post, and you’ve done something that restricts you and you get super good engagement, and you want to reuse that post in another campaign at a later time, then you can’t, your hands are tied, because you’ve restricted it.

I try not to put text on the image, I think I’m going to start putting though the logo on some way like where it has maybe a stroke around it, so it stands out on all of the images, I’m probably going to do that. But outside of that probably not much, because I just won’t be able to have a VA make all of these images without having to think about matching up words to pictures.

Steve: Interesting when you are running these experiments how many do you typically run at a given time? So if you are doing yoga pants for example how many variations would you try?

Miracle: How many variations, so typically if I were doing yoga pants I would start off with one set of targeting, split by age, and then the next day — I have to cough, sorry. I would go in and based on the failure or success of what I had already done, I would start another group of ads or ad sets with different targeting. If it’s working I want more, and if it’s not working I have to try again.

Steve: You start out with age groups and interests, right?

Miracle: Right, so I’ll pick a group of interest like I said like yoga journal and yoga pauses and maybe a couple of famous yoga sites, and a couple of brands. And then I’ll just split those into different age groups and that’s three different ad sets and I’ll let that run. And then the next day either way it goes, I’m probably going to have to do something right? Because if it’s not working I’ll have to try something else, and if it’s working I’m going to want to find more groups to target, more groups of people to target.

And then after that’s gotten a lot of traffic, let’s say we’ve run it for a week or more and I have got a lot of visitors and some ads to cart and purchases, then I can go for the look alike audience, and see how that does.

Steve: Interesting, so you don’t go to the look alike until alter?

Miracle: Well if it’s something like yoga pants, right? If it’s a broader general item from my site like a robe, then I’ll go for the look alike based on the audience that I already have from the website. But if it’s something like yoga pants, I’ll collect an audience based on the targeting that I have done right? Because I’m sending them to a specific part of page and even if there are people that have seen that product that didn’t come from that ad, it’s not that big of a deal for me. And I’ll collect a look alike audience for people who visited that page. And I’ll also collect a look alike audience for ads to carts and purchases. Then I’ll go ahead and run an ad to that look alike audience, I also use look alike audience, because before you said, how big are your audiences.

And let’s just say I can’t figure out how to target something, and I have wrecked my brain and the biggest audience that I could come up with is like 70,000 people. Well I’ll also I’ll just run that ad, and once I get enough people in a custom audience, then I’ll create a look like audience off of that with the hopes that that look alike will bring in more people that I couldn’t figure out with my targeting.

Steve: Interesting, so do you do all — one thing I don’t really like about Facebook ads it is kind labor intensive. Do you primarily outsource this stuff?

Miracle: No, no and I have gotten really fast with it. My biggest issue with Facebook is that it’s so buggy that it’s time consuming. And I think at some point I’ll probably go and find something that I can use that’s third party. But most of the ones I have tried haven’t really hit the spot.

I have a blank ad set like — well it’s just a generic campaign, I have a generic campaign that already has the ad sets set by age, they just don’t have any interest in them in the current reset. Then the ads where the pixels and everything are just set up, but there is no ad in it and there are no interests in it. So I can just copy that pain and just pop into …

Steve: You got it stream lined?

Miracle: Yeah.

Steve: I was just curious you separate up by age, and you’ve already told me that the younger crowd doesn’t convert as well, yet you still run the ads, do you just bid last on those ads?

Miracle: Yeah, I allocate less budget, sometimes they convert, but consistently I have found that the cost for conversion for them is kind of high. But they do help, because they are engaged, they do help boost the social proof on the ads which I think impacts other people in the other target ages getting to it. Sometimes I exclude them altogether, like if I really feel like maybe based on price or something else that it’s just not going to work or that group, I’ll exclude them all together.

Steve: Okay and can you just give us an idea of the copy for one of your ads, just any generic ad that you’ve written?

Miracle: Yeah, it normally says I’m not a copy writer, so it’s not going to wow you. It normally says the first thing is a question like do you like something, or like if its pajamas and maybe the pajamas have puppies on it, love dogs, be sure to check these out. I believe it says tag someone who would love this year if you would wear it, click here to get yours. It’s really not fancy.

Steve: Okay and then the ad and then just the product photo?

Miracle: Yeah and but I do ask them to tag someone or to share it and I do, and I got that tip from someone else, and I found that that does make people do what you ask them to do. They will tag people, even on some of my ads almost 50% or more of the comments are them tagging other people.

Steve: Interesting, so you’ll always point this add directly to the product that’s in the photo as well, right?

Miracle: Yeah I haven’t found as much luck with sending them to like a category page or a group of products, and I think part of that is probably because so much of that traffic is mobile.

Steve: Okay.

Miracle: I haven’t had much luck with that. I have played around with different landing pages for the products. Like cleaning it up, not having as much navigation on it, things like that to keep them a little more focused, or honestly really cleaning it up for mobile. Not so much for desktop, but for mobile like getting rid of the extra navigation, getting rid of some of the other stuff that maybe you’d put over to the side, like your related items and rearranging the product page for mobile, not so much for desktop.

Steve: That was my next question actually, so do you; you always show your ads on both mobile and desktop?

Miracle: Yes, always.

Steve: What about on the retargeting side?

Miracle: Yup.

Steve: You retarget on mobile as well?

Miracle: Yup.

Steve: Okay, so would you say then that most of your transactions are mobile transactions?

Miracle: They’re not that far apart. I mean I posted in Ecommerce Fuel; they’re not a percent a whole percentage point apart. They’re maybe a half a percent apart in terms of the conversion rate on mobile and desk top. It’s pretty close and tablet is up there with desktop of course, especially Ipad. Ipad’s really good, iPhone’s really good too, but it’s when you start to break down your audience by device, it’s hard to get a large enough people in it unless you’re going for a really big group in the first place. But yeah, but they’re very close in terms of conversion rate on desktop and mobile.

Steve: That is fascinating, because when I do it I only retarget on the desktop because for some reason our people like there’s a big gap between desktop and mobile use, or smart phone I should say, but yeah. That’s interesting, so in terms of mobile then is there anything that you do to make the check out process smoother?

Miracle: At post PayPal app oddly though most of them are still putting in their credit cards which I still find fascinating, but whatever. I change the buttons, the order of the buttons, and I have … So the software that I use it’s interesting. It’s old nobody uses it, but what it does is it allows you to run concurrent template sets for the same site. It was really built that way for people who were going to translate them. But what it allows me to do is to actually, outside of having something that’s over a mobile responsive, it allows me to set up a completely different template set, and just run traffic to that template set without having to really change the underlying software of the site.

There are a couple other things that I’ve played around with that I’m not sure how I’ll go forward with, but I’ve also played around with not having not asking for as much information right. There’s a down side because the less information you ask for on a credit card transaction the more you can get fraud.

Steve: Right yes.

Miracle: But reducing the amount of information that you ask for to make it easier for them to fill out. Reducing the amount of required fields to make it easier for them to check out, defaulting to more of a one step check out as opposed to the multi set, but also keeping the linking to allow people.

One of the things that I have to do is I found that I was getting a lot of ads to wish list, so I’m going to have to have a program or like let the wish list feature on my site go through Facebook connect, so that if they’ve come from Facebook and they see something and they add it to the wish list, instead of them signing up on the site they can just connect to Facebook and then that would drop in their name and email address and stuff to kind of make it easier.

Steve: Interesting yeah.

Miracle: And that’s another thing that I actually want to play with, I don’t know if I’ll do that until next year, but playing around with like, grabbing some of that persons information through Facebook connect. But it’s little things like that, it’s tweaking things to make it less cumbersome. I also tested doing the Google maps feature, where you can use that in you check out and as they start typing in their address it will pull up suggested addresses like Google maps does, so it’s a bunch of little things like that that I’ve tried.

Steve: Yeah that a great tip.

Miracle: But mostly it’s just, it’s taking away things that you don’t need to ask them that are default in most ecommerce checkouts, so that they have fewer fields to fill in when they check out.

Steve: Excellent, and I also I forgot to ask you this earlier how often do you rotate your ads, like what is the time to stop an ad and refresh it?

Miracle: When I get three consecutive days with no conversions, then that’s typically when I’ll start to get rid of them. If they are converting just not as inexpensively as they were before, I’ll let them go, because that you can control with the budget, right. If your conversions are dropping, then you can drop your budget accordingly. Sometimes what I’ll do is just start something new same post, different, like a little tweak on the targeting just to try to see if I can jump start it again, because I think like I said so much of it is going off for that momentum.

Steve: Right.

Miracle: In a worst case scenario like say none of that’s working, I’ll use the same pictures; I’m a little bit lazy on that regard. I’ll just change the type of post, so if I was running a link post, then I’ll try a carrousel [ph] the ones with multiple pictures and see how that goes.

Steve: Sure, so by momentum you mean likes and shares, right?

Miracle: All of it because…

Steve: Okay.

Miracle: You just start to see that the little graph at the top of the screen when you look at the ad set, you just start to see a little decline where you’re just not gaining as much out of it, so yeah. Then if I had a carrousel post I’ll try a link post, if I had a link post I’ll try a carrousel post.

Sometimes I do a photo post, not so much, they do get grade engagement, but the problem is very, very few people relatively speaking when compared to a link post or a carrousel post that I actually click through to that website. You don’t build as much of a customer audience with the photo post, but they get really good engagement, and you can get a lot of organic traffic from a photo post.

Steve: I was just curious so once you’ve found an ad that works, how much money do you actually put behind it because in my experience if you add a lot of money to your ad it doesn’t necessarily mean you’re going to get a whole lot more conversions?

Miracle: Right.

Steve: Like it’s not linear.

Miracle: No, you have to bump them bit by bit which is frustrating, so if you were to go and look at all the people who run a Facebook ads and what they suggest, most of them are in the 20 to 50% range in terms of an increase. To increase it is close to mid, like don’t do it in the middle of the day, because what happens is whenever you change an ad set the algorithm has to re-optimize. If you change it in the middle of the day, then you’ve interrupted whatever optimization was working to push it back a few hours while it re-optimizes, so most people will do them at the end of the day close to midnight.

Or if they’re in a different time zone they’ll do them super early in the morning since facebook runs off of the Pacific Time zone. They’ll do them super early in the morning when they’re not really messing anything up, but yeah you really can’t boost that budget way up, because all you’ll end up doing, if you look at your numbers, all you end up doing is sky rocketing you CPM cost. But you still have the same kind of clicks and all that going on, so then everything just tanks, it just gets more expensive, so yeah.

Steve: Yeah that’s totally what I’ve noticed, so you just gradually up the bid 20 to 50% a day till…

Miracle: Yeah I do like 50%.

Steve: 50% okay.

Miracle: If that’s in I’ll go to 15 maybe 16 and then the next day if it’s still working I’ll go 50% in that and so forth, yeah.

Steve: What’s a typical life time of one of your ads?

Miracle: That’s interesting. I have some right now that have been running for over a month.

Steve: Really wow, okay.

Miracle: Yeah, I have some that are older than that and then I have some old ones that were running maybe in June for like 4 to 6 weeks that I’ve restarted and pretty much now this month I’m going to restart a bunch of old ads. Because they’ve already got the social proof, I’ve already got the targeting, and we’re moving in a holiday season…

Steve: Yes.

Miracle: All that really happened with it was that it fatigues, so I’m just going to restart it now that more people are shopping.

Steve: One of your keys it sound like is to reuse these ads that already have a whole bunch of social proof on them, right?

Miracle: Yeah.

Steve: They naturally go viral?

Miracle: Yeah I use the ones that already have a lot of social proof on them, because it looks good right?

Steve: Yeah totally.

Miracle: When you already have got a lot of shares and likes and comments, it looks better than starting new, so yeah. I’m going to restart a bunch of old even probably I’m going to start some campaigns from last year, because I still carry some of the same stuff from year to yeah, so yeah. I’m probably going to go back all the way into like summer 2014, and start picking that stuff and then restarting it.

Steve: Cool, so Miracle yeah, that was a great, that was a lot of detail you just gave on how you run your Facebook ads. We’ve already been chatting for almost 50 minutes, so I want to be respectful of your time. If anyone is interested in undergarments I guess, or I mean questions for you where can they find you?

Miracle: Yeah mostly on Facebook, if someone wants to hop on Facebook and ask me a few questions I’ll be happy to answer them.

Steve: Also you have miraclewanzo.com.

Miracle: I don’t monitor that though.

Steve: You don’t monitor that?

Miracle: I just did it, because I wanted to make sure that my own website showed up in Google.

Steve: Okay and where was that one resource that you were talking about with; was it Greg about having a Facebook strategy, or being consistent with your Facebook strategy?

Miracle: Gosh, I don’t remember.

Steve: Okay, well maybe offline if you can, if you end up finding it, then I’ll link it up in the show notes.

Miracle: Okay cool.

Steve: Cool, well awesome, hey thanks a lot for coming on the show Miracle, really appreciate your time.

Miracle: Thanks for having me.

Steve: Take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I’m always interested in how people structure their Facebook ads, because it seems as though there’re just so many different ways to it and still make money. For example my Facebook strategy is a lot different than Miracle’s, and I’m anxious to give her strategies a try. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode105.

And once again I’m starting my own ecommerce conference this year. It’s called the Sellers Summit, which is going to be held on May 19th in Miami Florida. If you’re interested in learning about ecommerce, or talking your existing ecommerce business to the next level, then you must attend. Go to sellerssummit.com for more information.

Now I also want to thank FameBit for sponsoring this episode. As I mentioned earlier FameBit is the best way to YouTubers, Instagramers and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. One of my podcast guests Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in 4 months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks to start. The best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. Go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products and get $25 off with coupon code my wife.

Finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

104: How Tony Horton Started P90X and Sold Over 7 Million Workout DVDs

How Tony Horton Started P90X and Sold Over 7 Million Workout DVDs

Today I am honored to have the one and only Tony Horton on the show. If you’ve never heard of Tony, he is the creator of the incredibly popular P90X home exercise program. Now the personal exercise industry is EXTREMELY competitive and to give you an idea how big time his video was, it ended up selling over 7 million copies.

Ridiculous! Since P90X, Tony has released P90X2 and P90X3 with awesome success as well. Not only does Tony look great but he’s quite an entertaining guy as well.

Enjoy the interview

What You’ll Learn

  • How to stand out among the crowd and create a popular workout video.
  • The challenges associated with growing a physical fitness business.
  • How Tony generated sales early on with P90X.
  • The challenges Tony faced during the early phase of his business
  • Tony’s primary marketing channels
  • Tony’s key mistakes
  • How Tony motivates people to become fit

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I’m happy to announce that I’m holding my own ecommerce conference on May 19th in Miami Florida this year called The Sellers Summit. And instead of the large crowded conferences that you are used to hearing about, mine will be small and intimate with a focus on learning. So picture small round table workshops instead of large auditoriums with a focus on actionable strategies that will grow your ecommerce business. For more information go to sellerssummit.com, and watch the video.

Now before we begin I also want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor o the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 Youtubers, Instagramers, people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical, whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes you can get famous Youtubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as 50 bucks.

The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous Youtubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m honored to have the one and only Tony Horton on the show. Now, if you’ve never heard of Tony, he’s the creator of the incredibly popular P90X home exercise program. To be quite frank, the personal exercise industry is extremely competitive. And to give you an idea how big time his videos have become, they’ve ended up selling over 7 million copies which is ridiculous.

Since P90X, Tony has released P90X 2 and P90X 3 with awesome success as well. Not only does the guy look great, but he’s actually quite entertaining as well. With that, welcome to the show Tony. He’s actually flexing right now, you can’t see him.

Tony: Yeah, you can see me, but I can’t see you. I showered today, so I figured out why not do a video thing just for you.

Steve: I didn’t shower, so that’s why we are not doing a video today.

Tony: That’s right. It’s about the information man, it’s about the content. They don’t need to see you.

Steve: I noticed you are really pumped, so did you do pull ups before this interview, or is that just natural?

Tony: Actually my work out is tonight. I have a routine tonight where I do a lot of Plyo boxes and core and functional stuff on stability balls and med balls and BOSU balls. That’s tonight’s work out. I’m not– this is standard pomp, right there.

Steve: That is impressive.

Tony: No, no it’s okay. It’s okay.

Steve: So what I didn’t actually know about you before I started doing my research on you, is that you actually used to do standup comedy, you are an actor, you are a go-go dancer, you are Chippendale dancer which is pretty cool.

Tony: Dude, you went deep.

Steve: I did. I did. I want to hear all about that stuff in a little bit, but I also heard, and this is just a rumor that you were kind of a terrible athlete also?

Tony: That is the truth, the absolute truth. I was a wannabe athlete. My father was a phenomenal athlete. He was a three sport captain, football, basketball, baseball. But his job was such, when I was a kid and he was gone Monday through Friday, and so I didn’t have sort of a weekly father-son baseball, football, basketball games and instruction and mentorship. So I was kind of left learning on my own.

I played football in high school. Let me put it this way. I was in the football team [inaudible 00:04:57] it tackled on me Monday through Thursday, and then on the game on Friday nights I took stats. I didn’t even know what I was doing wearing pads and helmets. I had no use for them.

I was an okay tennis player. I was an okay basketball player. I was a middle of the road skier. I loved skiing, I loved hockey. I was this smaller kid, the weaker kid, the kid without endurance, the kid without the skill, but I wanted to do it. I loved watching sports. I was a big fan, but I was kind of a dork. I mean I’m much more athletic and stronger and fitter and more flexible and faster in athletic now than I have ever been at almost 60 years old.

Steve: I was really curios as I was like doing my research. How do you kind of go from standup comedy to go-go dancer to Chippendale dancer to fitness? Like what’s the path there?

Tony: That’s a security’s route, wouldn’t you say. It’s only a forty minute conversation; I don’t know whether or not to cover it all. Yeah, I mean the go-go dancing thing was fine. I used to love to dance; I used to love to watch. A lot of your listeners are probably younger, but there was a show called soul train. They had a lot of disco and funk. And they had this little soul train line. And I would just get up in family room looking at my victroller, my [inaudible 00:06:20] victroller, and I would try to pop and lock and do the robot and walk in place and Michael Jackson walk in the wind.

One thing that I was pretty good at that was physical was how to dance. I mean I could see a dance move and pick it up. Years later, moving out to California, I would go to clubs and I would just dance, every Friday and sometimes Sunday night. I just loved going to clubs and grabbing a girl and getting out there and just sweating and dancing. I was in a club one night at a dance contest, and I won the dance contest and the girl, another girl was there, was sent by her friends and she happened to work for Chippendales. She said, “We are looking for go-go dancers, do you want to audition?” And I did, and I got the gig.

Now I’m on a three by three box in a Para Dolphin show and [inaudible 00:07:07] and tiger socks doing the robot, making– and I was making like 32.50 an hour, which was…

Steve: That’s not bad.

Tony: As a young kid in his 20s that was a lot more money than I was making as a carpenter. I had all kinds of jobs. I was a handy man, a carpenter, a go-go dancer. I used to go down to the pier in UCLA and when I was completely out of money, I would put my hat down and I would do mime, so I could make like $25, so I could live on churros and yoghurt for three days. Those were tough times. I mean it was a big transition coming from New Ireland as a young kid to go out to California to make my way.

I wanted to be an actor, a movie star. Doing standup was another one of those things where people said, “Tony you are funny. You should get on stage and tell some jokes.” Storytelling and joke telling are not the same thing. There’s a formula to it like anything else. I had to learn that formula. You have to do your set up and your act up your punch line and your tag. Learning about a list of three, something called call back. These are all little tricks that comedians use. Just like a magician, or mime.

When I would go down the pier, I did mime for two years in college. It was all about survival. I’m in California, I’m not going back to the east coast, so I’m going to figure out how to survive. These are all the things. I was a statue during the academy awards. I put like gold lame spandex outfit on and stand …

Steve: I know what you’re talking about.

Tony: For an hour. I would just stand there motionless like a giant Oscar, so whatever it took baby.

Steve: The fact that you became a Chippendale dancer kind of applies that you had a good body before then, right? Did tennis come first or?

Tony: Well, you know the fitness came when I first came here to LA. I mean, east coast, fitness training was for athletes. Everybody else didn’t care. I mean there were people on the stands and people on the field are core. So you had two different groups, people watching, and people participating. The people who were watching were forced to do gym class. There wasn’t a fitness culture.

There wasn’t … You come out to LA, it’s 72.5 and sunny most of the time, that’s the reason we have a drought. When you came here, “Oh wow, there’s a body building gym and there’s an aerobics gym, what the heck is aerobics?” You know what I mean, like “Wow, let’s go to aerobics class because it’s all women, sign me up. Or yoga, more place for these all women. I don’t know why the dudes aren’t in here.”

I just really gravitated to the culture and partly because as a young actor at that point who was out of work my agent said, “Hey look here, you’re a little purgy around the waist; you’re a little scrawny shoulders and arms. If you want to get more work in this town, you might want to look a little better.” I had an agent, oh my god. I was like I’m going to watch Johnny Carson show and these big-time actors, they are talking about their agent, and I had one.

I just thought she was a goddess, so I just did what she said. I started changing physically and little did I know at the time that I was changing physically, I was also changing mentally and emotionally. I didn’t really realize then, there was a connection, a kind of a biochemical reaction inside of my brain as a result to working out four, five, six days a week. That’s how the fitness thing came in.

I was exercising and training, maybe three or four times a week. I wasn’t eating very well, but I was young so I had crazy metabolism. I was still eating hot dogs and pizzas and burgers and drinking beer three, four times a week. I had a good enough physique that I could get up on a box and dance.

Steve: So how does that kind of lead to exercise videos. I’m sure there is a long path. Whenever people think of people successful like yourself, they think of like overnight successes and that sort of thing. P90X wasn’t your first gig, right?

Tony: No, I mean…

Steve: If it was, I hate you.

Tony: What’s that?

Steve: No, P90X, if you scored a big hit on your first try, I hate you, but…

Tony: P90X is the one that people know about, but there were a few beforehand that did okay. They were like, they weren’t home runs, they were a good sell off the wall double that kind of thing. My on camera experience came as a result of having two careers. One career, when I was done being a Chippendale dancer, being a carpenter and a bar tender and being a statue during the academy awards, eventually I fell under training people. People saw how I changed physically, and so they would say, “Hey, can you do that for me?” I wasn’t certified. I didn’t know anything about training people. I knew how to talk to people and I knew how to show them to do what I was doing.

All of a sudden, I was — one of the last jobs I had before I was able to make a big switch was I was a production assistant over at 20th Century Fox. So I started training my boss, this guy Harlan Goodman was also in the music industry. Harlan made a tremendous physical change. He and I used to train, I didn’t have a gym. His apartment was pretty small. There was no place to train him.

My buddy had a converted garage, it was a gym, and we would just drive over to my friend’s house and start training Harlan in his backyard three days a week. One day he ran into Tom Petty, and then I got a call from Tom Petty and I hung up, because I thought why the hell is Tom Petty calling my house. Then he called back. “Hey, it’s Tom Petty. I think you hung up on me. My name is Tom Petty.” I mean, Tom Petty?

So I got Tom in great shape before a tour, and then my phone just running off the hook. Now I was officially a trainer, but at the same time I began to start my standard career then. I mean I had been a trained mime for years, so I knew how to perform. I knew how to– when you are performing to try to make money to feed yourself, you’ll push the envelope to get people to kind of people laugh and to participate in the whole process of street performance. On one side I was training Tom Petty, then Billy Idol, then Annie Lennox from the Eurythmics, and then Usher in the Ewan McGregor and then Sean Connery.

Steve: That’s crazy.

Tony: I had Bruce Springsteen. I had all these rockers and stuff, but then I was doing standup and I already had an agent that point. I was doing commercials. Now, I got a show called 360 which run on the playboy channel. It was like the Entertainment T4onight, but without the black line for women’s breast, I mean it was a little bit lustier. They were trying to break in to more legitimate TV with two co-hosts. I had a co-host, I was reading the teleprompter. I would start on camera one, I’d look at my co-host, I go to camera two and I go back to my– I mean learning these tremendous skills, how to do voice over for the first time. That was another great skill.

Steve: Can we take a step back. So you got Tom Petty. How did you get the other guys? Was it all word of mouth at that point?

Tony: When Tom Petty got ripped, no one ever saw Tom Petty rip before. That was a complete anomaly. He went on a huge summer tour, I think it started in late spring and went all the way through almost the end of the year. Tom Petty and Billy Idol had the same management company, East End management. They said, “Hey, you know, Billy is in from New York,” is when Billy moved from New York to LA. “Can you start working with Billy?” Then I got Billy ripped, you know what I mean.

Tom Petty introduced me to Anny Lennox. My day started out when I go to Tom Petty’s house, I drive around the corner and go to Annie Lennox house, and then from Annie Lennox I went to Stephen Stills from [inaudible 00:14:05]. I couldn’t do anything for him. And then I go– Tom, Anny, Steve and then Billy Idol and then some mornings I’d get Bruce Springsteen or Sean Connery in there or Sean McLain in the afternoons.

I go to Melbourne, I train [inaudible 00:14:20] in the little studio. That was kind of my routine. I would have regular doctors and lawyers and other folks too. I mean, I was getting up at the crack of dawn getting up at four, five am. My first client, it was still dark outside when we were finishing. Then I would go all day, and I would drive my old beat up mustang convertible and survive on power bulbs all day. I was making a few bucks and wearing down my old car, and thought I was on top of the world. Then I get a call from my agent, “We got a Lori Brown commercial. You got to an [inaudible 00:14:50] commercial, whatever. That was …

Steve: So you weren’t advertising. This is just all word of mouth.

Tony: All word of mouth. There was no advertising whatsoever, none whatsoever. I had business cards. I had business cards made up, and I’d hand them out and like maybe get a gig or two from that. But it was just that when you get a celebrity, a rock and roll person, super fit and no one’s ever seen them like that before, there is a lot of conversation that starts up within their community, it’s a very tight community.

And the reputation that I had back then was that I was good company, that people enjoyed and I mean obviously the workouts were hard, and I was giving them, great results, but I wasn’t the traditional drill surgeon guy. I didn’t treat the stuff really, it wasn’t dry, just like my workouts, if you get my workouts, I’m a bit of a clown.

Steve: Yeah, I love it.

Tony: So because this is the formula, it’s the formula giving people the variety. So when I had a client they would do yoga, they would do martial arts, they would do weight training, they would focal and functional stuff, they would do trimetrics. And a lot of the trainers that they had had in the past were just weight lifting or just all cardio. And they would get bored, they would get hurt, they would stop seeing results after a while. And with me they would continue to improve over time, and they actually enjoyed the process, and so that’s how my client list just grew as big as it did.

And the boomer was there is only so many hours in a day, and you have to drive your car from Venice to [inaudible 00:16:07] to Hollywood, to Kansas [ph] city. It’s just this; there is a lot of dead time in a day just getting from one or the other. But now with the job I have now I mean I can access millions of people.

Steve: Yes so was that the primary impetus for doing the exercise videos?

Tony: No, I mean it was pure serendipity that I actually ended up where I am. I mean I at that stage in my life having moved from Connecticut and Rhode Island and being a fairly depressed overwhelmed procrastinator, I kind of fell in into the very LA, California, personal development world.

A lot of Deepak Chopra, a lot of Don Miguel Ruiz, a lot of Tony Robins in his heyday, a lot of doctor Thierry Zukoff and Andrew Weil and all these and Wayne Dyer. I mean had them all, I had all the books and all the tapes. I listened to them, and I go okay, 80% of this is crap, but this 20% that I can use, you know what I mean? And I did that, I would go to these weekends down by the airport; down by LAX you know what I mean?

You would do all the S seminar and you do a terminal seminar. I had this change in my thinking patterns, because I wasn’t — I mean I had a high school and college education that were designed to help me get a job, so that I can make money, so that I could have a house or a car, and a wife and some kids, but I wanted more than that, I wanted to be able to inspire and motivate and educate people. But I needed the Intel and the information for myself first.

I needed to get it, I needed to apply it to my life and then I was able to disseminate it to other people. So I was in the middle of all of that when I was training these celebrities and these rockers, and they thought, this guy is not just a muscle head. He is somebody who is thoughtful and creative, and wants to have a life outside of just driving all the time and training people.

So the gig– so I had all this going on, and then a friend of mine in Minneapolis said, hey I got a job out in Minnesota with Nordic Track, you had some experience on camera, you are a fitness expert, you’re training celebrities, they want to audition you. After the first audition they said, great and so I went back and forth to Minneapolis and did some Nordic Track stuff, kind of their own camera guy, their infomercial guy.

Then I got the show on Playboys, I had that in on camera time. And then one day just a mutual friend introduced me to a guy named Carl Daikeler, who was this young entrepreneur out of Philadelphia, who had had two nickels throughout [inaudible 00:18:34]. He had all these great ideas, he was sort of a visionary, and so I get this idea for great body guarantee, this is little infomercial, a 15 minute workout. 99.9% of most people who know all of my stuff have never even heard of that workout program, but it did well, it made money.

So investors came around and said what’s the next thing? So I talked to Carl and I said how about a full 90 day program, we’ll call it Power 90? This is when everything was on a half inch tape, there were no DVDs yet, there were no cell phones, the internet was brand new. And we did this thing called Power 90 in six days, and we couldn’t eat right? Everybody in the industry said you are wasting your time, but that thing we sold about a million and half of them.

Steve: So how did you do that, can we walk through that first product, like how did you get the word out, how did you market it?

Tony: Well Carl worked for a company called Guthy-Renker, Guthy-Renker at that time was probably the biggest infomercial company in the world. Infomercials are for folks who don’t know how this works; there is a long form and short form. Long forms are the ones that are full half hour, short form are anywhere from 30 seconds to two minutes right? So the — I’m being told I have to sign something, hold on. This is the life of [inaudible 00:19:43] oh an agreement with China?

Steve: Oh that would be my agreement.

Tony: Yes, that’s cool okay, well maybe we could do that one, Steve you and I. So the way it works is like, anybody and I can’t tell you that if there is 100 people with an infomercial idea. Some kind of retractable cap or some kind of ad machine or workout program that I do, out of that 100 people that try probably two or three succeed, and because it’s one of the most difficult industries to get into.

But Carl had that background back in Philadelphia; he had a couple of little things out of Phili where he had some success that were not fitness products. But the one that he did get well before he came to California was eight minute ads, and that’s like eight minute ads, for a guy out of Phili who didn’t live in LA that was pretty impressive.

So they brought him up to LA, Guthy-Renker did. And he came to me and he said I want to do this thing; I had some great success with eight minutes ads. So you basically come up with what it is, like why is this thing unique, why does it stand out in the industry, what else — why isn’t this like everything else. We thought a little 15 minute workouts with another trainer named Debbie Siebers and I. And I had three of them and she had three of them, we packed them together. And then you have to cross, and then you have to go, make all your phone calls to find out who can make it the cheapest, who can press in, who can package them, then of course it’s all happening in China. You have deals with various media buy, it’s like different companies that buy media for local stations and also national.

You got ABC, NBC, CBS, and FOX those are big national, then you got all the cable ones as well. We made these things, we manufactured these things, and then the marketing people started making phone calls. Hey, yeah, can I have a 3 AM slot on NBC for next Friday? Can I have — and they called the Miami affiliate, then we called the Buffalo New York affiliate. Because the New York City, LA and Chicago ones are too expensive, and you would spend like five grand you know what I mean? And you sit there and then you wait for the numbers to come in and the…

Steve: So you pay money to get on these infomercials, okay.

Tony: You pay to buy these minutes, two minutes, or full half hours. And it’s not — you buy in half an hour for an infomercial. That is not cheap. So you might get — this is, I’m talking about people who are first starting out, or new in the business, who don’t have deep pockets like Sony or other companies. So every time we would spend 5000 bucks, we make eight, we spend six we make 12, we would spend 10 we would make 20 and that’s how it went.

So investors saw that after great body guaranteed, and so we made Power 90. Power 90 was sort of like P90X junior. Power 90 did so well that I got to move out of my three bedroom apartment after 21 years to buy a beautiful home in Bradwood. So I had kind of a cartoon like upgrade from living at the poverty level to living in a pretty beautiful house.

Steve: And this is all through infomercials?

Tony: All through infomercials. I was still training people; I wasn’t training as many because I didn’t have to. But I mean I was getting these royalty checks every month, the kinds of money that I never made as a — I might make 20 or 30 grand as a actor in a beer commercial over the course of a year. I was getting checks like that per month, and then I was getting twice that and then three times, then four times, then five times. And then I mean I was getting checks — I don’t want to get to read the numbers, it feels sort of not…

Steve: No that’s cool, no numbers aren’t important, I was just curious though how does even one get on an infomercial, like let’s say I want to have my own infomercial, who do I call? I mean you had the contacts, right?

Tony: You can Google infomercial companies, and so Guthy-Renker would come up, Beach Party would come up. And they aren’t that many, there is probably about 10, and then you just have to — for me it was a different route. Mine was that I happened to know a guy who worked for one, and he liked my technique as far as exercise and fitness, and so I was just a paid gun. I mean I got paid $2000 for being in that very first product called great body guarantee. And to me at that time that was a big chunk of money to have to only workout three days.

But it sort of evolved over time, but the average person and the average person is like one of the philosophy is build it and they will come. So and for a lot of people who are entrepreneurs whatever their idea is, they have to have a ton of passion, they’ve got to probably trade market, they’ve probably got a patent because they don’t want people to steal it, right? Then you got through that process and that’s several thousand dollars just to do that.

And then you have a couple of prototypes made, and so one of my prototypes for me as an entrepreneur I had — every time I went to a gym, or every time I went to a retail store, I was trying to find some decent push up stance. But they were really rickety, and made of metal and handles were sort of narrow and they dug into my hand, and the platform wasn’t really good, and they didn’t use good rubber, the rubber would always peel away.

So I thought — I called a buddy who worked for a fitness company and this is sort of an example to help the average person who wants to do this. And he called a guy who manufactured ladders in downtown LA. And he said, hey, and so I made it dry and he made this thing and each one of these hands — push up stands weighed about 5 pounds each, nothing that you could ever ship, but they were functionally awesome.

And they had a round base and had a really wide handle, and the handle was declined from the back to put pressure off the wrists, this was just like sort of my idea. And then after I got the patent and trademark, I went over to Beach Party and I said, hey do you think you guys would be interested in what relatively would be– and since I did all the due diligence, since I did the manufacturing and the prototype and I had patent and trademark, they didn’t have to do it. I got a much bigger royalty than if they had done it from scratch and they just wanted me to wrap it or something. And still to this day I get royalties on my power, and so that was [inaudible 00:25:42] every month yeah.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here is where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online book keeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice concise financial reports, so no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches. Plus it’s reasonably priced, and the best part is that you can get 20% off of your first six months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob.

Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months, now back to the show. So that was actually one of the other questions I wanted to ask you, so you had P90, and then P90X was the one that like get it out the park right?

Tony: Yeah and both Power 90 and P90X didn’t do very well at first, because they were so different. It would be like you walking up to your friends 15 years ago with a Smartphone. They would have said what, that isn’t a thing, that isn’t real. And that’s the reason why I think it did so well. I think the reason why — if you can find a niche that is — I mean I have like a list of 15 things that haven’t been invented yet, but eventually I hope to have invented.

And you can come up with a way to get it manufactured at a reasonable price and it’s like Henry Ford. They first said, why are you creating this thing, the horse and buggy are fine. People aren’t asking for this because they don’t know what to ask for, but I’m going to show them why they need it. It’s the same thing with Steve Jobs. It’s the same thing, he just said, yeah, people don’t know they know it yet, but I’m going to show them why, and of course now look all of us have phones and laptops and iPads now.

Steve: So P90X was primarily through infomercials that you got the word out, did you guys do any other sort of marketing or?

Tony: Very little social media stuff then, this is even way before Instagram and Twitter and Facebook, and stuff like that, it was all through infomercial. And the original Power 90, the original P90X didn’t do well. The original Power 90 we put it out there, we put out the offer, and it was crickets, you know what I mean?

Well then and everyone went, oh well I guess it failed like we all predicted in our CEO cross fit, no now all we have to do is just change the offer a little bit. Don’t make it three easy payments, make it four for less. But the beautiful thing that happened which no one else had done before prior was, the few people that bought Power 90 and P90X were submitting there and before after pictures, their day one and day 90 pictures.

And they were also submitting their own video, because now this was the early time when people could kind of – they didn’t need a big recording device on their shoulder, with tape anymore. They could record their process on their phone, and they were sending this stuff to us. And it was gold, we didn’t need to use fitness models anymore, we didn’t need to use people on test groups anymore. We were just using regular folks who were submitting their stuff.

And we just injected that into the infomercial and people saw that stuff and went, oh my God there is my uncle, there is my father, there is my brother, there is my aunt, there is my sister. There is people I can relate to, they seem like me, and Power 90 nothing and then the following year this crazy checks were coming through the mail. So now it was time– and I had a good three, four year run, and then Carl came to me and said what’s the next thing? And I said I don’t know, we both agreed on taking it to the next level.

So he gave me a year to research P90X and everybody said, okay, you got lucky with Power 90. I mean if you are going to go even more extreme, I mean forget it people aren’t professional athletes, you are going to kill them with that thing. Same thing, nothing at first and about a year later after all the before and afters guys like Jeremy York who had had 180 pounds to lose did it and lost 180 pounds, as well as Catherine MacDonald who I know tried everything.

And she told everybody her story, tried this, tried that, then I did this extreme program and I lost 150 pounds. Richard Neal, I mean he didn’t know he was going to be one of the greatest ways to advertise this product, losing 242 pounds doing extreme fitness program. On top of that, professional athletes, famous actors, Sheryl Crow goes on the red carpet at the Grammys and says, “Oh my God, you look amazing.” “I’ve been using P90X.” I mean that was happening with congressmen like Paul Ryan, who was vice presidential candidate.” It was just that regular folks and big influences were all using it.

Steve: But it took a year for it to catch on.

Tony: Yeah, it took a year before it really exploded.

Steve: So let me ask you this, as you were doing this, what was your time frame in which you would have declared it a failure?

Tony: Any other company other than Beach Body would have killed it after about anywhere from 5 weeks to 4 months. They would have killed it. But when you got something that is extraordinary that is helping maybe only a handful of people, because seeing these extraordinary results, sometimes you just have to kind of re-work the offer, and really begin to interject the people who are using it, and getting the great results.

I feel really fortunate, I mean the one lucky thing is the company that I work for really believes in what I do, and they bend over backwards to make sure that they find a way out to get it out to more people. Now the advent of on-demand, we’ve got Beach Body on Demand, now did a 30 day offer which is really great, so it’s another way to … You don’t have to make a phone call anymore.

You just go to Beach Body on Demand, you hit a couple of buttons and you have instant access on your phone, on your laptop, on your iPad, wherever you go, even on your TV now, without having to call, wait, the mailman delivers [inaudible 00:31:38] machine. That’s archaic compared to how it’s done now. But with people, that transition it’s like what happened to tapes and the DVDs, there was that…

Steve: yeah totally.

Tony: We had to go for a while and I don’t know how many other people have tape anymore. That’s kind of a transitional phase around it, but you want to make sure that people have access either way.

Steve: That’s one of the things that I was going to ask you. One, what are you working on now and how has the marketing changed? Are you still doing infomercials, or are you focusing on YouTube. I noticed your YouTube channel; you’ve got a lot of videos on there. How has your marketing evolved?

Tony: We’ve try to evolve with the rest of the planet. Not everybody is doing infomercials, people still try to get into that genre, but we’ve got that down. We’ve got tremendous relationships in the industry with all the networks and stuff. They know us, they like us. We’re very consistent with buying media with them. It’s funny week-to-week, it’s not like you pay, if it’s 3:00am on ABC week 1, it can change the following week depending on how many other people are buying media.

We’ve got that stuff all figured out, so we’re never going to lose that. That is a formulation that works. We’re doing more short-form stuff. We’re doing a more 30 second, a minute, two minute stuff and maybe not spending it all on full half hour. We’re using Instagram, and Twitter and Facebook and social media. We’re using YouTube. We’re using our website; we’re using my website Tony Horton Live as well.

The thing about social media, you’ve got to be careful because that’s usually typically for free content, and people don’t like to be advertised to. They like great advice, they like great content, but stop selling me stuff. It has to be done in a very subtle way, in a very respectful way, and we haven’t quite figured that formula out yet. There’s nothing worse than posting something about Shakeology and I see more unsubscribes than I see subscribes. That’s not my plan. I don’t want to piss off my fans.

At the same time if you really like something and you really [inaudible 00:33:38] I’m a huge believer in our performance online and our boost line. When we first started doing supplements and stuff, it wasn’t very good. We were not very good at that. We were good at infomercials and fitness products and diet programs, but we didn’t have our supplementation stuff down, so I didn’t promote them.

People say how come you don’t promote the bars? Because the bars suck, that’s why. Our bars are terrible, so I’m not going to talk about our bars. But shakeology itself, it’s a phenomenal product. It’s helping people, and I like talking about it, but at the same time you have to be careful.

We’re using every means possible to get the word out. For example yesterday in the Beach Body and I shot two Beach Body on Demand workouts, a brand new yoga routine and a [inaudible 00:34:20] sequence, which are really important. When it comes to people who are getting older, you need the tricks of the trade. If you know more you can last longer and be less vulnerable and more durable than if you were a tennis player, or a skier or whatever. This is for on-demand subscribers only; you can’t get it any other way. We’re just trying to build that kind of content.

But generally the company is about, we got a problem, and we’re not selling you some, excuse my French, bullshit diet program that works extraordinary, so you can look good and dress in front of your friends at your re-union. We’re trying to look at the big picture here. The big picture is obviously, anybody with a brain, exercising where you will enjoy doing and you can be consistent with, and by the way, eat more vegetables. We’re going to give you a recipe so vegetables don’t taste like wax, that you think they usually taste.

Steve: Let me ask you this Tony, if you were to start all over again from ground zero in today’s day and age, where would you focus your efforts?

Tony: I would focus my efforts on figuring out the latest ways to connect with as many people as possible. That is through a YouTube channel, what you are doing, what you and I are doing, this is a credible way to get information out. I think if you’re starting out right now infomercials are not the way to do it. There’re so many huge YouTube stars, it’s these kids that were working out in their apartment in the middle of …

Steve: They have billboards in LA for YouTube stars, right?

Tony: I know. The thing is you want to probably spend as much time as possible where everybody else is, mostly where people in their teens and 20s are spending their time. There are a lot of people who are just kind of stuck in the old school stuff, and it’s time to move on. At this stage in the game, I would have an electronic press kit, I would have a ripping website, I would have a great presence on all the social media platforms.

All I would do is just copy people who are killing it, like who has 5 million subscribers? Duplicate that, just go [inaudible 00:36:22]. Everything that I’ve done, every push-up, every pull up, every jump knee tuck, every cool and functional thing that I’ve done is a combination of some other version of it. The only reason why I’m successful is I can kind of give them goofy names and I can upgrade them.

Steve: I can tell you why you’re successful Tony. I watched a bunch of those videos prior to this interview, and if I might say, you’re kind of like a goofball in these videos, but it’s really entertaining at the same time. I just called Tony Horton a goofball.

Tony: I am! I did standup comedy and look, it’s about our attention span, it’s all about raising attention span. If your delivery is dry, and boring, I don’t care how informed you are, I don’t care if you had a 4.0 all the way from grad school. If you can’t figure out a way to communicate, then you’re not going to …

How do you think people are elected? Why is Donald Trump popular? Because he’s a freaking train wreck, and nobody can take their eyes off it, there is no opinion about his policies or anything there. It’s just that he’s extraordinarily entertaining, and that alone, is a reason for people to go, “Yeah.” If you look at Barack Obama, same thing, there was a certain style, a certain panache, a certain sort of charisma, regardless of whatever his policies are. It’s sad, but it’s true. It’s the delivery system. It’s an absolute delivery system.

That’s how people learn and that’s how people grow. That’s how people change. If you’re in the middle of an exercise routine, and it’s trimetrics or yoga, something you would rather eat [inaudible 00:37:52] than do one of those two things, there better be a delivery system that makes it so that you come back over and over again. That’s all I’ve ever done. I just said, exercise kind of sucks. We are going to have a couple of yucks along the way so that this thing is doable.

When you’re asking people to do something for 90 days, which is what most of my programs are. The brand new one ‘22 Minute Hard Corps’ is 8 weeks. It’s boot camp; it’s all boot camp training. But it’s still a long period of time and it’s every damn day, and if you don’t have variety, and if you don’t have modifications, and if you don’t have a decent delivery system, then you’re going to be like everybody else and you are going to have a much smaller audience.

If you want to build your audience … Like you, you have a tremendous audience. A lot of people like what you do, they like your guests, and the reason being is you figured out a phenomenal formula with a great delivery system. And that’s why you’re popular, and that’s why I am too.

Steve: Let’s talk a little about motivation. Just a brief background like I’d always wanted six pack abs, and then 2 years ago I decided to just do it. I ended up not just eating carbs, and I ended working out, and I cheated after 5 months, and then I felt so good that I decided to keep that diet up. It was a lifestyle change for me.

The problem is a bunch of people– I wrote a post about this and a bunch of people started asking me about it and how I did it. I told them how I did it and they were like, I can’t do that. There’s no way I can do that. So I’m just curious, what is your method of motivating people to follow through.

Tony: My reasons and it’s changing because I’ve been handling this now for a long time, I think more and more people begin to get it. My reasons for doing anything are much different than what most people’s are. Most people want to eat and exercise because they want some sort of aesthetic, hypothetical aesthetic change sometime into the future. What they do is they start doing something; let’s say it’s one of my programs.

They start on day one and all they’re thinking about is that photograph on day 90. They’re constantly on the scale, they’re constantly pulling out the tape measure, and they’re constantly taking pictures with the hope that they’re going to have some sort of aesthetic change that is really all ego. Like you wanted six pack abs?

Steve: It was ego, yeah.

Tony: It was ego. That’s all ego and that’s all, “Hey, look at me.” But in the end, you were able to sustain and maintain it because it wasn’t about ego anymore. It was more about lifestyle. I say to people, why don’t you start out with lifestyle, initially? There is going to be a greater propensity to be able to survive it, and hold on to it for the rest of your life.

You can train your ass off as much as you want, but there’s sort of that fear and anxiety and frustration that comes with the unknown, of not knowing, really truly, what you are going to look like in 90 days, unless you’ve got somebody standing over you looking at every morsel that goes into your mouth and making sure you’re pushing in the envelope with every one of your workouts.

Everybody is different; everybody has different levels of pain threshold and work stress and lack of sleep and lack of access to really healthy, tasty foods, because of cost or whatever. It really does require … When you see how many people are successful, who lose their weight, who change their lifestyle even though they start out with ego first, it’s incredible.

What I would say, and I say to people, like you train today you’re better today. You might not change aesthetically, but you’ve taken care of business. You’ve pumped the oxygen and the blood into your brain. You’ve released [inaudible 00:41:17], all these things that change your outlook about your life. It’s your life. It’s your joy. It’s your happiness. It’s your connection with people. It’s your sense of adventure. It’s your level of energy. All that stuff gives you the day that you want to have and it comes from exercise first, and also making it happen with decent food choices.

If you make horrible food choices and you decide not to move, then life is a struggle. Fitness and eating is the foundation, is the platform to have all the other things that you want. There’s a pyramid, at the bottom is, number one, if I exercise today and eat right today I change my brain chemistry. When my brain chemistry changes, it’s like John Ratey talks about in his book ‘Spark,’ then you have a greater potential to have a better day and then you just repeat, repeat, repeat.

After 30 days and 60 and 90 and you repeat it for the first year, the second year, the third year, all of a sudden you’re one of those people who go to dance class at 95, still skiing at 82, and taking gymnastics for the first time in your 50s, and then you’re a person who looks back at your life and goes, that’s the story. Because the story is not, oh I had another bottle, I banged through a bottle of vodka this week while watching re-runs of ‘I Love Lucy’ and [inaudible 00:42:30] Island. That’s not a life. That’s not a story. If you’re not exercising and eating, then you’re just … and by the way time keeps on ticking. It keeps moving on, moving forward. Your body is aging, your brain is aging. The only way to slow that down is to move and to eat things that fuel you properly.

And of course there’s supplements as well. If you’re working out really hard, and you’re not getting the perfect amount of sleep and you still have a certain amount of stress because of work and stress and family and traffic and everything else, it’s going to be really hard for your body to recover. You’ve got to do the multi-vitamins, you’ve got to do the creatine, you’ve got to do the CoQ10, you’ve got to do the [inaudible 00:43:03], you’ve got to these different things.

“Oh, supplements don’t work.” You don’t need them if you don’t do anything. If you show me one collegiate or professional athlete, or Olympic athlete who doesn’t supplement just right to be able to perform at their highest level, because they’re training 2 hour days, or 3 hour days, they’re genetically gifted. It’s a formula, and when you learn the formula– in my book, ‘The Big Picture,’ it’s in there. It’s not so much a fitness and diet book as it is a lifestyle book to show you what to do so that … I mean, I’m 57.

Steve: You look great.

Tony: Thank you. I did shower. And I still [inaudible 00:43:40]

Steve: Although there is a reading glass you got on.

Tony: They are. I’m lifting them up and my screen is a [inaudible 00:43:46].

Steve: Here’s the thing. I think motivation and business are all intertwined. Once I started getting in shape, I found myself having a lot more energy to actually work more on my businesses and that sort of thing. I almost think that getting into shape is fundamental to anything else in life that you want to do, I don’t know.

Tony: The bottom-line is healthy in-shape people eat right, have bigger lives than people who don’t. There are people who have a lot more money, maybe a lot more stuff, maybe they don’t exercise or eat well at all, and they are successful because they are very smart and they inherited a business or they are just sort of super ambitious or very smart. Let’s say, you didn’t have all of those things. Maybe you don’t have a college education. Maybe you don’t have that sort of family help, or you are not part of an industry where you can make some decent money and have a great life.

If you exercise, start to exercise and start to eat right, the two things you can control, those are the only two by the way. Most people don’t realize that. I’m going to exercise today, I’m going to eat right today. Traffic, I don’t have control of that, family I wish, work I don’t– my boss got me cohunes, weather, none of it, none of it. All that stuff that kind of creates all these conflicts in our lives are more easily dealt with if you make a dietary shift, and you begin to exercise, everything kind of falls into place. You have more patience. You sleep better. Your sex drive improves; your memory in cognition improves. There are so many things that are more mind and emotion about exercising and eating right than even the physical.

Too many of us are exercising because we want to look better, and none of us are exercising because we understand it completely alters our mental and emotional state. The second the workout is over, I don’t know of anybody who finishes a work out and says, “Oh my god, that was a horrible idea.” They just– but it’s making the decision to do it. The worst part of the exercise is the ten to five minutes before, and the first five to ten minutes at the beginning of it. It’s like, “Oh I don’t want to be here. I’m tired. It’s early. I’d rather be sitting down with a cup of coffee and a dash.”

But when you fall into the pattern, I gave up sugar four weeks ago. Now I was eating healthy breakfast, healthy lunch, healthy dinner, working out five or six days a week, but I still had my little sugar addiction. But I noticed that I was moodier. I thought, am I just a moody guy, am I just moody. Is it genetics? I mean, my whole family is moody because everybody eats sugar, everybody eats fried foods, everybody eats soda pop. I was cutting out everything except for the key lime pie, and a chocolate, eat cookies and the chocolate mousse, chocolate mousse.

Steve: I love chocolates mousse.

Tony: I just thought, you know what I’m going to experiment for 30 days. It was the most brutal 30 days. I felt like, I would stand in front of a pantry for ten minutes at a time just looking at the things that I couldn’t eat. But man I won’t eat a cookie or a donut or a brownie or a pie, and it was hard. It was like getting off a crack. I mean– and that’s what happens inside the temple low. The dopamine, it is that huge flash of dopamine which makes you feel good in the minute, but in the end if you look at the sugar that you eat, you will also—it’s like you’ll make a graph of the sugar, oh I had sugar at this hour, and then my mood went down. Like your mood and sugar and process curves go hand in hand.

I’m a pretty upbeat positive guy anyway, because I have a pretty awesome life and I have a job that I love and I’m married to the woman of my dreams. So even with the sugar, I was a pretty happy guy. Now that I’m without it, I just feel like I have a little bit more energy. I sleep a little bit better. I have a little bit more patience, all these little things that have been altered as a result of getting off. Same thing with alcohol, I haven’t had alcohol in years, so I wouldn’t even know.

Steve: Interesting. Yeah, I’ve been off sugar for two years also. It’s been great.

Tony: Yeah, it’s fantastic. And so when it comes to how does it all relate to business, you want to build a foundation. You want to make some basic changes on behavior. When your behavior changes, so does your productivity and energy and that goes up and as that goes up, so sort of that helps your business grow. Why not have that advantage if you can have it? Ultimately it’s about longevity and quality of life too. I mean these are things that everybody wants.

If you’ve got hypertension and diabetes and the potential for stroke and high blood pressure, all these things, and you are working your ass off, and you have all these physical mental and emotional problems, is it worth if you can’t enjoy it. You know what I mean. So you clean up the diet and you start to move. It doesn’t have to be one of my program, I mean heck I love … So I can buy a new couch. But it’s not really about– it’s really about, decide, “Hey I’m a Pilates guy. I’m a yoga person. I love body building.” Figure it out, but add some variety too, because you don’t want to get bored on a plateau, you want to make sure you have variety. When you do that, life is but a dream.

Steve: That’s a great philosophy. Hey, Tony, you rattled off a whole bunch of your products. I just want to give you some time to talk about all the things that you are working on, and where people can find you online.

Tony: Thank you. If you just want my stuff, you know my general stuff, and you are still using kind of old school DVDs and stuff like that, you want to go to beachbody.com. If you want a particular product, it’s pretty basic. You can go to P90X.com or P90X2.com or P90X3.com that’s where you get the products that create beach body which is great. But if you want to learn more about me and the things that I’m doing outside of that, like events, I’m going to be at the Omega Institute, and I do a lot of travelling in Europe. I go to Hawaii and do events. I go to the Orient, and do a lot of stuff in South Korea and Japan.

If you want to know where I’m going and what I’m doing and you want my free newsletter, then you go Tonyhortonlife.com. That’s my website, it’s brand new, and we’re always sprucing it up. The weekly newsletter kind of gives you a lot of the things that you don’t get from the book, because I’m always learning, I’m always growing, I’m always stealing other people’s really good ideas and making them my own. And where I learn something I think, “Oh my God, this is making my life better. It’s making it less complicated.” Here’s the thing, you have to– just like your phone, everyone gets a new phone every once in a while, you have to update your own personal Intel, and I’ve learned that.

This comes from somebody; I used to hold on to stuff for so long. I used to put on the blinders, I used to hope for the best and hope it’s all going to turn out okay. I’m not doing that anymore. I’m still– I’m always learning and growing. When I find something that really, really matters to me, then I make sure that I put it up for everybody once a week. It’s all about motivation, it’s all about diet, it’s all about learning how to do a particular exercise or how to exercise on the road. It’s part of the same basic things that come up all the time that people struggle on. I’m always looking on new angles on which to kind of help people get better.

Also, you can get the book. You can go to Amazon, the big picture. It’s my most recent book. Then of course, my original, my first book Bring It, my second book which is a little audio video book, called Crush It which is a lot of fun. There’s a lot of humor there, and of course the YouTube channel.

Steve: Yes, I was going to say, you are missing the YouTube channel which is my favorite part.

Tony: I was going to get there Steve. Tony Horton fitness and we’ve been kind of stagnant for a little bit on that. Those of you who are listening saying, hey I haven’t seen new content in a while, that’s going to change pretty quickly, because we had this switch over to the on demand stuff. For those of you obviously that just want convenience and access to my entire library, all of my stuff, go to beachbodyondemand.com, which is Beach Body on Demand or BOD.com it will take you there.

The first 30 days are free, free, free, and so that way you can work out ten times a day, it doesn’t cost you a penny. At that point, the cool thing about that is that you can kind of look all the content and go, “Oh, all right.” Then once you sign on, I think it’s $38 a month which is crazy, I mean you have access to all my stuff, Shanty stuff, Chalene stuff. I mean there are hundreds, and hundreds, and hundreds of workouts, and the beautiful thing is you don’t have to buy the entire program; you can just buy– for 38 bucks you can do whatever workout you want. It’s just– I mean it’s the future. That’s where most people are. It gives you tons of access and tons of variety. So you can avoid the boredom and the injuries, and I can tell you will see results even as you get older.

Steve: I’m going to link all that stuff up so you guys don’t have to remember everything that Tony just said.

Tony: People are jotting it down. What was that Tony Horton fitness, oh crap. Thank you for that, thank you Steve for hosting me.

Steve: No problem. Hey, I really appreciate your time Tony. Thanks a lot. This is a great interview. It’s great to hear your philosophies on life and on business. I think these are going to be really valuable to my listeners.

Tony: Steve thank you for having me on. I’m a big fan of yours. I love the work you are doing and I’m very honored to be here today. Hopefully we will change a few minds on how to behave, and how to eat so that the people can become more productive and build their businesses the way they want as healthy happy human beings, not stressed out and people sick and depressed human beings.

Steve: Yeah, it’s all that eating right.

Tony: Exactly right. Thanks man.

Steve: All right, take care Tony.

Tony: Thanks Steve.

Steve: There you have it, Tony Horton of the legendary P90X fitness program. How awesome is that? And what’s even cooler is that Tony is totally down to earth and really entertaining as well, and I hope you enjoyed his story. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode104. And I want to thank fame bit for sponsoring this episode. As I mentioned earlier fame bit is the best place to find YouTubers, instagrammers and other influencers to promote your products online and it works.

One of my podcast guests Emanuel Eli used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. It costs as low as 50 bucks to start. The best part is if you use coupon code “my wife” at famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous YouTubers to promote your products with $25 off using coupon code “my wife.”

Once again I also want to remind you that I’m starting my own Ecommerce conference this year called the Sellers Summit, which is going to be held in May 19th in Miami Florida. So if you’re interested in learning about Ecommerce or taking your existing Ecommerce business to the next level, then you must attend. Go to sellerssummit.com for more information.

Finally if you’re interested in starting you own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I manage to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to The My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

103: How To Go From 0 To 130,000 Instagram Followers In 6 Months With Daniel DiPiazza

103: How To Go From 0 To 130,000 Instagram Followers In 6 Months With Daniel DiPiazza

Today I have my buddy Daniel DiPiazza on the show. Daniel is someone who I met recently at the Import Summit in Orlando and I’m really glad I did. He’s the owner of Rich20Something.com where he teaches young people how to start their own freelance businesses.

And to be honest, the content he puts out comes at great time where kids graduating from college are having problems finding high paying jobs. His site is crazy popular and what’s cool is that he’s built it up in an extremely short period of time.

In addition to Rich20Something.com, he’s also successfully launched a test prep company and bootstrapped a web development firm. He’s worked in marketing and copywriting for well known influencers like Ramit Sethi and his brother Maneesh Sethi who I had on the show back in episode 69.

And finally, he also regularly contributes to publications like Under30CEO, Entrepreneur Magazine and the Huffington post. In short Daniel does a ton of stuff and he’s killing it online with a large email list and over 130,000 followers on instagram in a little over 6 months.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Daniel’s site makes money.
  • How Daniel generates traffic to his site.
  • How Daniel has amassed 130K instagram followers in just 29 weeks.
  • How to use instagram to market your site.
  • What people with very little money to invest can do to make money online.
  • How to get freelance gigs and make money immediately.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin. I’m happy to announce that I’m holding my own ecommerce conference on May 19th in Miami, Florida this year called the Sellers Summit. Instead of the large crowded conferences that you are used to hearing about, mine will be small and intimate with a focus on learning. So picture small round table workshops instead of large auditoriums with a focus on actionable strategies that will grow your ecommerce business. For more information go to sellerssummit.com and watch the video.

Now, before we begin, I also want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagramers, people on Twitter and Vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it be, beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes, you can get famous YouTubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as 50 bucks. And the best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing.

And the best part is if you use coupon code “my wife” at famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I have my buddy Daniel Dipiazza on the show. Now Daniel is someone who I met recently at the import summit in Orlando and I’m really glad that I did. He is the owner of rich20something.com where he teaches young people how to start their own freelance businesses, and to be honest the content that he puts out comes at a great time, because kids are graduating from college right now and they are having problems finding high-paying jobs. Now his site is crazy popular, and what’s cool is that he’s built it up in an extremely short period of time. And in addition to rich20something.com, he is also successfully launched a test prep company and bootstrapped a web development firm.

He has worked in marketing and copywriting for well-known influencers like Ramit Sethi and his brother Manish, who I had on the show way back in episode 69. And finally he also regularly contributes to publications like under 30 CEO, Entrepreneur Magazine and the Huffington Post. And sure Daniel does a ton of stuff, and he is killing it online with a large email list and over 130,000 followers on Instagram in a little over six months. With that welcome to the show Daniel, how are you doing today man?

Daniel: Wait a minute your wife quit her job?

Steve: Yes she did, I just met your wife too, did she quit as well?

Daniel: She didn’t quit, she is the one supporting me actually.

Steve: Is that right.

Daniel: Now that was [inaudible 00:04:02] get you, thank you so much Steve.

Steve: Yeah no problem man, so tell us about rich20something.com, how it got started. I like the story that I heard at the conference, about how you got started and all the stuff?

Daniel: The information is about story. You know what and this is one of those things where Sarah is like you don’t — I mean I guess you could probably know how mad and sick she is with that story at this point. Like I think every great story teller or entrepreneur, comedian, entertainer, everyone has like a collection of like five to seven stories that become their like Joseph Campbell, hear all these Johnny type things.

So you develop like a unique cadence for how you tell them, and you’re like the details while they are very like intriguing details or the same every time, because you want to like find what part of the story hit and repeat them, right? So this part of whole thing is like — it’s a true story and I love talking about it, but man Sarah, she used to hate it more time she is like I hate this, don’t talk about it anymore.

Steve: I’m pretty sure that a lot of the listeners haven’t heard it yes.

Daniel: I know.

Steve: You will be doing them a disservice.

Daniel: I know so they haven’t listened to this anyway, but I’m happy to tell them. Basically the story takes us back to when I was working at this restaurant; it’s called LongHorn Steakhouse which was in Atlanta. And we only have 20 LongHorns in California, I think their sister company is like our garden, red box, so it starts at the restaurant if you can imagine that. I remember it’s like five years ago now, I graduated school a few years before in 2009 and I kind of had worked pretty much every job that was conceivable, assuming that I didn’t want to go back to school to get a graduate degree, and I didn’t want to go into the like the corporate, like cute little things. So essentially I did everything that I could do to kind of make ends meet. I worked in retail; I was the guy holding the sign, flipping the sign up that thing. I worked at UPS with the brown little shorts which I look amazing in.

And one of my last jobs or my last job actually was at this restaurant. And for everyone who’s never worked in food service, you should probably do it because it gives you a new kind of respect for whoever that’s bringing your food. But one of the things that most people don’t know is that you don’t actually get paid for any work that’s not serving. So tipped employees get like $2 and somehow change an hour. Not in California, California has a decent minimum wage. But in every other state basically it’s like 2.14 an hour. And what ends up happening is you have also other work to do on the restaurant. Cleaning up the restaurant, pat the stupid low sugar packets in order, I mean loads of whatever the thing is, you get paid like two bucks dollar for that.

And then taxes and social security which we’ll never see, take away all that money and sometimes you actually end up owing the restaurant money, because — sorry owing the like government money, IRS money, because of like the negative balance you have from all these taxes, right? So it’s pretty crazy and I remember specifically the day kind of I had the light bulb go off, I was scoping these butter balls. For me that was the thing they liked to put me on, that was the station they liked me to be on, I don’t why, maybe it’s my cute face.

But they laid out like ten trays of butter for me to scoop or ten like serving trays and each tray had 50 little ramekins which are these plastic dishes, and I was scoping the butter in there. And I get to the end, and I’m like two little ramekins away from finishing so do the math, it’s 498 butter balls not exaggerating. I’m doing the stupid butter balls, and my manager comes up behind me, he is a tall guy, six foot three, his name is Scott, big blonde hair, I think that’s called a towhead right?

So he comes up behind me and he inspects the butter balls, he looks at them, he kind of turns up to the light as if he is really doing something valuable, and he looks at these balls, he says you know what, these balls suck, do them all over again. He starts to take the balls and he dumps all the butter from all 400 plus balls back into this big bat that we had. I guess they were round enough for him; they were maybe too chunky or uneven, whatever.

So at this point he is undoing all the work that I already did get paid for, and I know this sounds like a stupid or maybe like frivolous reason to get mad, or maybe someone’s grandparents would say, oh well that’s just you paying your dues. Me fine, but for me it really pissed me off, and I was like you know what I had to find a way — I had to find a way to get out of here.

I know that I don’t want to go back to school, because there is nothing that I want to pursue at that level of an education like for graduate degree. I didn’t want be a doctor or a lawyer or engineer, so that was out. I didn’t want to go back to work where [inaudible 00:08:49] I saw my friends, but I knew I had to figure something out, and that was the time I had the light bulb and I’m like, okay I got to figure out how I can make something out of the skills I already have. And that was the impetus that got me rolling into starting my first business which we scaled to six figures, and that was the test bulb company.

Steve: Yeah, and we’ll go into a little bit more on that later on when we talk about some advice that you can give to people who are looking to just make a little bit extra money on the side. But I did want to focus initially actually on how you kind of built up rich20something.com. At the conference we kind of shared a couple of numbers and you got this gigantic email list and Instagram. So first off how does your site make money right now?

Daniel: That’s so great — I think my parents should be listening to this because they still don’t get it, they don’t understand.

Steve: Neither is my mom either man.

Daniel: That’s the cool thing too, you never really know who’s — I mean you look at websites you never really know how much money they are making, it’s not always obvious. So rich20something.com if you go to the home page, it’s just a landing page right now, there is a blog as well. But the site makes money through a couple of the products that are developed, and those products are only available if you join the email list.

Even after you join the email list like we don’t initially just sell you stuff, like we give you a lot of free content based on some of the stories I just told you, where I give you exact actionable strategies and tips. And then at the end of that if you feel like it’s a good fit, then I can share the information with you, we can go a little bit deeper with some of the step by step program I have developed around these experiences and tested information.

Steve: Okay so it’s just courses, are you doing any sort if advertising, or affiliate revenue or anything like that?

Daniel: So just courses right now. I have done some affiliate stuff on my side, like other people promote my stuff. I brought in [inaudible 00:10:33] stuff right now and I don’t know when is the time to do that, or if it’s the right time to do that, I don’t know when that’s going to happen, but I probably eventually will. But it’s essentially only courses right now, we do periodic launches, we do — we have some stuff that’s running ever green, but for the most part it’s just courses that is very subtle, it’s not something that piss people all over the head.

Steve: Okay and then so in order to sell these products so you still have to get people onto your site and onto your list, right? What are some of the different ways that you actually generate traffic to your site, like let’s say you got a brand new blog?

Daniel: That’s a great question, so first of all one of the things that are bringing traffic and one of the reasons why I don’t hate talking about it, but always like—I’m always afraid when people ask me about, oh how do I build an email list? The reason I cringe is because I feel like everyone has done it a slightly different way, and I can tell you exactly how I have done it, and you can try the exact thing and it might not work.

Then you’ll get mad, you’ll be like I did exactly what you said, it didn’t work. And I think there is a lot to do with the content — I will answer the question by the way, I will tell you how I do it. But I just want to preference it like anyone who is like — I just want you to know that email — by building an email list, and getting traffic to your site is a very individualized thing, and you could follow a formula, but like you got to find out where you fit in.

So that being said I use three ways by the way, first way is via syndication partners. So over the last few years, and we could dig into this if you want to, but over the last few years I built relationships with a bunch of different — like I guess brand name publishers. So in addition to the ones you named like Huffington Post, Entrepreneur, I also have a column in Time Magazine, Fortune, Forbes, we are working on Ink and Esquire right now. Other CEOs want, but like I did columns in a lot of different highly frequented sites, and they allowed me to write content and write up things that resonate with my audience or resonate with their audience, and then I can include links back to my site. So it took me a while to build those relationships, but that’s a big part of my traffic.

Steve: Can we talk about that real quick on how you even start building those relationships in the first place?

Daniel: Yeah, I would love to. A lot of times it’s not really a secret, the first thing you got to remember about syndication or about getting bigger sites to like pay attention to you and like promote your stuff, is that a lot of these sites, especially sites like Fortune, Time, well they are prestigious names, they are also content course basically, like they need content and there is never enough content.

So well there is like this whole prestigious like essentially like this wall that you can’t surpass, or you can’t surmount, really they need your content and if you know how to approach them you can get to them. What I like to do, I like to think of it a pyramid, and I think of the syndication partners at the bottom as the ones that are easier to get into, and I use those to leverage my way to the top.

So an example of that might be Huffington Post. Huffington Post is a brand name, but it’s quality isn’t perceived as high as Entrepreneur, typically speaking right? So to get into Huffington post, I mean to be honest with you I’ll tell you what I did. I just cold emailed Howe [ph] in Huffington, I’m like hey let me in. Yeah, I said let me in and I’m not the one only one that’s done, I have several friends who have cold emailed her, they are like sure.

So I guess that’s just her way of giving back. But you could easily find the editors at Huffington Post, pitch them and they’ll let you in, and not only will they let you in. You might have pitched them a couple of times with a good concept, but they’ll let you in and once they do that, you have access to their backend and you can pretty much write whenever you want, whatever you want, so that’s the first thing.

And then I use that to step into myself, I jumped in Huffington Post, and once I get some credibility and I built up some articles there, I went to Entrepreneur, and I found some friends who were already there that I already knew, and I was like hey who’s your editor? They give me the name of the editor, and I cold pitched and I was like, hey, look I write for Huffington Post, I have done some cool things, I think I might resonate with your audience, got in there. Once like I’m not leaving anything out, that was really the story.

Steve: Did you have Rich 20 Something at that point with the library of articles?

Daniel: Yes.

Steve: Oh you did okay.

Daniel: And one thing I’ll say, when I say syndication I literally mean syndication, I don’t write new articles for these websites. I take articles I have already written on my website and I repost them on these websites. That allows me to move a lot faster through my systems.

Steve: I see okay, that makes a lot sense then okay, yeah, because I know people that hire copy writers to just reword their existing articles, but it sounds like you are just posting everything verbatim.

Daniel: Yeah, I mean that works too, the only thing I make sure of is that — is published on my site first, then I give it a few weeks just for the SEO juice on my own site and then I repost it. And they need it, so that’s the first way that I get traffic. The second way is the social media, so for me that big social media source is Instagram, and we’ve talked about that a little bit before the call.

Steve: We have and we are going to go into a little bit more depth. Okay so we’ve covered syndication, let’s talk about these 130,000 Instagram followers that you’ve immersed in just 29.5 weeks.

Daniel: Oh my god it’s really…

Steve: I stalked you…

Daniel: You stalked me; well it’s actually 132,000 thank you very much.

Steve: Sorry about that.

Daniel: Our growth is a little bit of excitement pushing us hard, but the first 100,000 of those came in four months, so pretty good right?

Steve: Yeah, no, awesome, yeah, that’s like the understatement essentially.

Daniel: Well one thing about Instagram which I was totally not on board with using it as a platform in the beginning because I thought what’s the use, you can’t post any links in your images, so how am I going to get traffic? And what I realized is that there is only one link on Instagram right now. I’m sure they’ll roll out more as the platform develops, but right now you can really only post one link and that’s in your bio link which is your profile for your Instagram account. And that alone has driven 40,000 opt-ins to me in the past five months or so.

Steve: That is ridiculous.

Daniel: Yeah it’s ridiculous stuff, so you do you want to dig it how I did that?

Steve: Yeah, so let’s talk about the different strategies first of all, okay actually well I’ll just let you talk, and then I’ll interrupt you.

Daniel: Yeah, so anyone who is keeping track, first strategy is syndication, second strategy social media, and for me specifically Instagram okay? So the thing you have to know about Instagram is that it’s kind of like there is two things going on here. One is community building like finding content that people will really like, and then the second thing is promotion, finding a way to drive people back to your site.

I think the most valuable part probably of that isn’t the promotion part, it’s probably the community building, because you have to have a good relationship with your audience so that your engagement is high, so when you actually do post something in promotional they’ll go and do your thing. So that’s the first thing, so essentially what I have done is I looked at what type of account I wanted to create.

There is different types of accounts, there is — there are like — there are accounts that’s just do quotes, there are accounts that are like more of a personal brands where it’s just people taking pictures of their ice cream, or which [inaudible 00:17:35] do I have for the day. There are people who just promote or who just like their fan pages essentially like all Bentleys, they are just pictures of all Bentleys, stuff like that. There are different types of accounts and what I realized– I try to look at what was doing well in the space.

So the first thing I realize is since I’m very approachable in my emails, I’m very approachable with my videos, I realized I kind of probably should position as a personal brand, but I also realized I was hot right now at Instagram and generally in what I considered to be this entrepreneurship lifestyle hustling bubble.

What’s really popular is like motivational quotes, cool pictures of interesting lifestyles and things of the like right. I try to combine my personal brand with some of those other images of like luxury things and motivational things, and it’s come out to be a pretty good mix. If you look at my account adwords or something, it’s a combination of cool pictures, interesting quotes that I find to be meaningful, and also pictures of what I’m am doing in my life.

Steve: Right and an occasional video also, right?

Daniel: And occasional video also yeah. That is what I’ve even moved more into, it just in the past week or so, I’ve started doing a bit more comedy, just humor stuff because humor gets the combination going. People love to see things that make them laugh, and they associate that stuff with you. I try to just be a good mix, but primarily it’s a personal brand so you can see it says restoring something and then the name is Daniel Depiazza, and then the bio, it has a little bit about me and a link to right now my YouTube channel, but typically it’s a link to an opt-in.

I started off just like everyone else, no followers, no credibility on that platform and the first thing I started doing was I started creating great content. One of the apps I use is called Word Swag and Word Swag, if you’ve ever looked on the something and you said man that’s a really beautifully designed image. I wonder if they had a professional designer to do that, or that I thought that was really hard to make in Photoshop. They probably use Word Swag and Word Swag is just a simple application that allows you to arrange beautiful images, and text so…

Steve: You do all this on your phone right?

Daniel: Yes it’s all done on the phone which is– it’s not an invisible limiting factor as you might think, it’s actually pretty easy once you get into it. It’s all about clicking those images and in the beginning what you have to do to get traction on Instagram is you have to follow other people. Many people that I talk to, and my friends who were on Instagram all of us certainly comfortable with this, because it feels like a spamy thing from Twitter from seven years ago, where you follow a million people in a day and hope they follow you back, and then you un-follow them if they don’t follow you, all that crap. Then you get robust to automate that, then you get a whole bunch of followers from India all that kind of stuff. You will need all that follow, unfollow and all that crap and like…

Steve: Yeah I remember.

Daniel: Yeah they’re generally turned off by it, but it’s but that’s not really the process. Basically I use this app called Crowdfire, and what Crowdfire allows you to do, it allows you to essentially make the process of following people a lot easier because on your phone it’s very hard click, click, click, it’s not easy. The desk top application of Instagram doesn’t allow you to actually use the program, it’s very limited.

Crowdfire allows you to use the desktop format to basically find people who fit with your message. Basically what I’ll do is I’ll find other people who have my account, the web users that I would like to attract. One of those accounts might be like my friend Nathan. I found a magazine who by the way taught me pretty much everything I know about Instagram. I’ll look at Nathan’s account and I’ll say all right, Nathan has the type of followers that I want to attract.

Now I’m going to go follow his followers and so I will have already have some content out that resonates with what I know I’m looking for in terms of audience. Then I’ll go follow his followers and Instagram allows you to follow up to 400 people a day, and you can do it in increments of 100 meaning that you can follow 100 people, and then you have to take a break for a few hours. Follow 100 people and take a break, but I maximize that. In the very beginning I maxed that out every single day.

Steve: This is a manual process right, you’re physically clicking?

Daniel: I’m physically clicking at least 400 times a day in the beginning. Eventually you start to build up the amount of people you’re following and about 30 to 40% of those people will follow you back. You start to grow your following you as well. Eventually what happens is the ratio starts to balance out, because what happens on Instagram is you’re only allowed to follow a maximum of 27,000 and 7,500 people depending on I don’t whatever Instagram feels like letting you do that day.

Basically I would follow people, I would max up my following for about four, or five days, then I would spend a day or so un-following people just to keep my ratio balanced. Eventually I got to the point where the number of people I was following was smaller than the number of people that were following me. Eventually the ratio started to grow, and so in the first couple of weeks I got to about two or 3000.

Over the first month I got to maybe four or five, and I grew to probably double that by up to 10 or 12 and in the next month. It typically grows; I guess it would be pretty linearly I guess. It is a pretty predictable growth pattern, and so over the next four months typically it doubled. I guess it would probably be expediential than exponential, because typically it doubled.

For the first three or four months the growth doubled every month, so it was like the first month it was like three to five K and the next month was like five to 12 just using this strategy. Then I would finally improve in terms of space and eventually I would make friends with them. They would help me out by shouting me, but this is the core strategy is following. Then eventually what I started doing was once I got to 30 or 40K I started meeting other people who had much bigger accounts than me in the space.

I just started paying them to shout me out. I reimbursed myself by having like a very, what I call a tri-bio product, and it was like a little nine dollar productivity pack that I put in my bio. Basically I would put the little productivity link in my bio link, and whenever someone signed up to my list they would have an option to buy that. That nine dollars made me with the amount of following I was getting and the amount of work I was putting in, it was a lot of work. I was posting probably eight to 10 times as day in most days.

Steve: Really okay.

Daniel: It’s a lot, it’s a lot, but…

Steve: Is that the frequency that you need to do in the very beginning?

Daniel: In the very beginning yes, it’s about volume and quality just because you have to get those, you have to get that library of content up there and have a lot of things for people to look at and get more engagement. That triple end product really helped me, and I started really being impressed with the account. I was making at least two grand in a month just off the nine dollar triple bio product. I reinvested that money to get other influencers to pay them to shout me, and that threw gas on the flames, and I was like it will grow faster.

Steve: Interesting. I just wanted to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down and here’s where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated book keepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you.

They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them in to nice concise financial reports, so no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches. Plus it’s reasonably priced and the best part is that you can get 20% off of your first six months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months, now back to the show.

Where can you find people to pay to give you shout outs?

Daniel: Well I mean you can look for influencers in your space. Instagram kind of and I don’t know if I’m supposed to be saying this. I don’t think it matters, everyone knows this, it’s in the space. There’s a little underground market of, there’s an underground economy. A lot of people who have accounts over $100,000 over 100,000 people, always some might have even less 40, 50,000, take money in return for shouts. Basically it’s where they send out an image where in the link, and then in the catch and they say blah-blah-blah about this image, brought to you by my friend, then they probably put you name in there.

They say follow them for more advice, tips or whatever right? And that’s what drives people back to your page, because they get to follow you and then take those few followers and whenever you want to promote your content you say, hey guys I have free bonus, a free mini course, a free guide for you. Check my bio link, and you can use image that just says check my bio link basically, and that will drive people to that link. They’ll sign up for your stuff, and you’ll grow your email list as well.

Steve: Okay and then you mentioned community in the very beginning, when does that kick in?

Daniel: Yeah so one thing that Instagram, you’ll notice as you get more involved is like you’ll see a lot of the same people commenting on your stuff, and also see people liking your stuff. Sometimes the promotional aspect, you have to put aside in order just to get more people talking and more people engaged.

One thing I might do is I might post up an image with no ulterior motive basically just saying, I’ll post up an image that will show a picture and an image that will say tag the person who you think is going to have a, who’s going to be really successful this year. I will get them to tag their friends, I will get them to talk, I will get them to purposely engage them to try to see as many comments as I can get, or post an image of myself, I did this a few months ago.

I posted an image of myself and said hey guys, having that chance to thank you guys individually and I really want to let you know that I appreciate you for following my account and liking and sharing my images. Please introduce yourself in the comments, and tell me where you’re from. I’ll get– I think that post got almost a thousand comments, stuff like that. You just engage them and then again when you want to promote something, it’s much easier.

Steve: Okay and so it looks like at your account that most of your stuff is non promotional. In fact it’s very rare that I saw a promotional post.

Daniel: Yeah I don’t have anything, I don’t really have anything promotional and sometimes I delete the promotional posts, but typically speaking I don’t have anything, I haven’t got anything promotional in a while, because I’m trying to focus on growing my YouTube right now. I haven’t even with folks on the email list, but particularly my ratio is maybe if I am posting, right now I’ve posted about three or 400 a day max. Maybe three times a day and probably once every three days I might post up a promotional post.

Just became I’ve been pretty aggressive like over the past three or four months, I’d love to slow down, but when I was being more aggressive I was probably doing a post every other day with those promotional. After I was done with that I would take it down, so it didn’t cloud up my page.

Steve: What about hashtags and the actually content that you put in a post?

Daniel: Hashtags are something that I think they still work, but one thing you have to be careful about this. There’s a limit of 30 hashtags per cache, and so there are different size, like I think about [inaudible 00:28:51] square is one of them, where you could look up the most popular hashtags in your niche and other people are searching for the hashtag, they will find your post and hopefully find your profile and follow you.

That all works, but I think that Instagram is getting more aggressive with slapping down people who are essentially hashtag savvy. If you put up 30 hashtags, and you put up the same 30 hashtags every time, Instagrammers they don’t like that. I think they’re trying to be more careful about launching that, so I do post hashtags occasionally now, but in don’t do it as much as I used to. I probably would recommend doing it more in the beginning, but as your account gets a little bit more natural momentum; I kind of have stopped doing that as much.

Steve: Okay so would you say the actual caption is very important as well as the image?

Daniel: Yeah, one person that you really look to, I mean I do it okay drop off the off captions. One person does a really great job, if you look at Ruben as they grow prosper, I think grow prosper in his account. He has mastered how to create images that get tons of shares, comments and likes, and his account is mostly, it’s like motivational with a sentimental side. I like to call—I tease him, I like to call him like touchy feely, because he’ll like go grab a Maya Angelo quote and about like a caged bird singing, and like he really knows how to hit that like sweet, very sweat pain pleasure point with his audience, and like really…

Steve: I have to check it out, okay.

Daniel: It’s emotional, but he will put really thoughtful quotes, really thoughtful captions. You’ll notice that like if you look at the longer captions on my post, a lot of those get the most comments, and they result in more likes, because people actually do read your comments. Sometimes I’ll even take extracts from my blog post, or I’ll make a little mini blog post just for a caption, and those tend to do really well. Because I think people are reading them and it allows you to tell a little bit more about your story.

Steve: Yeah I was going to say some of your captions are super long, they’re like mini blog posts in a way.

Daniel: Yeah but that’s the only way to share interesting content with your audience that you find useful, and remember man, if you, just like with our email list. Most people don’t see your stuff, so one thing you notice is that I have 130,000 followers, but the most I’m going to get on a post is like 4 or 5000 likes. That doesn’t happen as much, I think as it used to especially now with Instagram testing out their platform.

They’re changing the algorithms, the way that posts are displayed, but also just because they necessarily put a cap on how many people can see your post. So if you have 130,000 people on your follower list, they throttle that, because if they push out to everyone, one it’s a lot of server activity right, and two just think about the amount of cluster confusion that will come with everyone who’s following anyone getting every post that everyone put up, it’s too much.

Steve: Sure, right.

Daniel: Just like Facebook has now called back, remember when you used to see all your friends’ posts, and now you see five?

Steve: Yeah, okay.

Daniel: It’s the same concept, maybe only five or 6000 of my people actually see my stuff, and that’s why I know that it’s okay to repost. What I will typically is I’ll go when I want to have a post that I am pressed with time or have a really good one that I haven’t shared in a while. I just go back six to eight weeks and find the good one that got some good feedback, and I’ll just repost that with the caption again, because I know that people will be seeing it for the first time.

Steve: Will you remove the old one?

Daniel: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Daniel: Remove the old one; repost [inaudible 00:32:21].

Steve: Okay so it’s just like blogging, I mean I do that occasionally also.

Daniel: Yeah like you send out a post you sent about a year ago, but you know that people haven’t seen that stuff.

Steve: Right.

Daniel: It’s content.

Steve: Right, and in terms of the frequency, so in the very beginning you said eight or nine of these, and you bring captions, okay.

Daniel: Yeah, a lot but my captions were– it’s hard to be as good as the caption that you put on a lot of them.

Steve: And you have to do all of this on your phone too?

Daniel: Yes, it’s a lot of work.

Steve: And then in terms of the images, you do them on your phone or do you contract those out?

Daniel: I make them on either– so there’re a couple of ways to get images. The Word Swag which I haven’t talked about has great templates for you to use for like quotes if you just want a blank canvas. They also have licensed stock images, you can use because they are actually pretty good. Then you can also do, you can also repost other people’s stuff, so you literally just screen shot it, and then you repost it. Just make sure you attribute to them, like hey I got this from such and such account. I try to stay away from, I used to have a lot more images of like– or images that I thought were probably copyrighted.

Things from photographs, professionally taken photographs of celebrities, things like that where I’m pretty sure that some photographer made money off his picture. What I’ve noticed is that more accounts are also getting slapped for having images or videos that are clearly the work of someone else. I’ve just been more careful with that. I still do have some images on my page that are probably copyrighted, but I used to have a lot more and I’m just being more careful, because for me the account is too big of an asset to risk over copyrighting. Basically Instagram doesn’t give a damn. They will take away your account, they don’t care.

Steve: If that happens can you protest or by taking this stuff down, or is it too late at that point?

Daniel: No there’s always a recourse like I’ve had several friends that’s gotten taken down, and then they can work with Instagram, but that’s too much of a hustle for me, and there’s no guarantee that you’ll get it back either, and they don’t give you a good reason for why they took it away.

Steve: Bottom line, just be safe with your images is what you’re saying?

Daniel: Yeah be safe with your images. Always get stock images. If you have a question about it just probably don’t do it. I posted up a video like a two part video a couple of days ago, and I attributed Complex Magazine. I assumed that that was okay, but like I try to say with anything, like for instance if you want a picture of the rock, take a picture from a screen shot of him in the movie, don’t take it from a professional photographer.

Screen shot Sony Colombia doesn’t care if you take a– if you have a screen shot of him in a movie, but the photographer who’s making his money off with reality pictures probably will care if they found it. It’s probably not a big deal, probably most photographers aren’t looking for that, but I actually [inaudible 00:35:03] the chance, same thing with music, right? If you’re using music that’s on the radio right now, probably not a good idea.

Steve: Yeah I mean YouTube you can’t use any of that, they’ll really crack it down.

Daniel: Yeah they’ll really crack down, so I try to just be safe.

Steve: Okay, hey Daniel let’s switch gears a little bit, talk about the 20 something here. I actually get a lot of people asking me for help, but to be honest since I teach Ecommerce, some of the people who approach me are pretty much broke. Starting a business wouldn’t quite be appropriate for them since they don’t have any money to invest. I know you specialize in this area, so for the people out there with very little money to invest in a business, what would you suggest them to do to make some cash right away.

Daniel: Yeah I mean the number one thing, I mean besides drugs. The number one thing I mean…

Steve: Or sex, drugs, yeah right.

Daniel: Drugs or sex both are acceptable, but borrowing that I get this question a lot as well and people are worried about startup capital, whether that needs going out to give an investor or just raise the money themselves. I think the best thing to start with is a service based business that you can provide for somebody immediately. You got to think about it like this, businesses, no matter if it’s a product or service or idea, all businesses solve problems. They should solve a problem. If you can offer a service to someone that solves a problem, you can charge money for that.

I always start by thinking, what services can I offer that someone else will value, and that’s how I came to do SAT, web development consulting, and that’s how I developed my idea around freelancing. I always think that freelancing is also a good way to go as you build up your ideas, and you create some momentum, that allows you get some cash in the bank. Then if you want to start doing what I call, and I’m using my mere quote figures here, a real business, you want to do that, then you can move on to that.

Steve: Let’s continue on with your story actually. So you got pissed off with your butter balls. What did you do about it?

Daniel: I have a roll of butter balls since, that’s the first thing. I now chop at the square plucks. I mean flash back to that day, I wasn’t ready to quit. People are like; people always ask me, “What did you put in your two weeks [inaudible 00:37:12] right there and then you just stormed out.” No, I was too scared. I wasn’t in a position to quit right there, but I was thinking to myself, “Okay well, what can I do?” I took a couple of weeks to think about it. I realized that one of the skills I had was teaching SAT test prep. This is because– I used to teach this for a company called Kaplan [ph] which I’m sure you are familiar with, [inaudible 00:37:35].

Steve: Come on Asian? Kaplan Princeton Review?

Daniel: Oh Princeton review, that’s like a 90 press review.

Steve: That’s old school.

Daniel: We don’t do press review here, we do Kaplan. I taught for Kaplan in college. I’m flexing my muscles here, because I’m at the top like 95% of all test takers, flexing my own muscle there. I still have to do like basic division on a calculator.

Steve: Dan was a body builder too, a former body builder too.

Daniel: We will talk about all these things. But, I remember a little, a small little memory I had teaching test prep. It was like I went to a student’s house, and I was looking through one of the most [inaudible 00:38:16] on the desk. I realized, “Men, they are paying $100 for me to be here, but capitally they pay me $18 an hour.” When I remembered that, I thought to myself, “Well, this butter ball thing isn’t working out. Maybe I can just do this test prep thing, because I know it’s a highly valuable skill.”

What I realized was at that point if you’ve ever had a job, you probably have a skill someone can pay you, someone’s willing to pay you for, and you can tease out some of your skills that you’ve used at work, or you can think about other hobby skills or interests you have and try to use those to make money. For me I realized test prep was a good option. Don’t worry if you don’t do test prep. That’s fine, I’ll just give you my path and my example. I realized test prep was a good option, and the first thing I did to start my business was what I later coined as the marsupial method. You want to hear about it?

Steve: Yes, the kangaroo method. Go.

Daniel: Why do we call it the marsupial method? What do marsupials do? By the way marsupials is not just kangaroos, like [inaudible 00:39:15] I think are marsupials.

Steve: Koalas are marsupials too.

Daniel: Yeah, koalas are cute but also evil looking. They are marsupials. Marsupials have this pouch where they house a freshly born child for development. It’s like an outside womb. It’s like an outer womb. The whole idea is that the little baby, marsupials in there getting nutrients, getting protected from the environment while the mum hops around basically doing other work. What I was thinking to myself was, “Man, I want to get customers for the tester thing, but I don’t want to put up ads on Craigslist or post up ads in supermarkets. That stuff generally is very slow rowing. It’s not going to kick me off in the way I need to get kicked off especially if I want to leave this job, this restaurant job.”

What I did was, I started thinking to myself okay, who in my area already has my ideal customer, who already has their ear. Who’s already doing business with them and how can I connect with these people to create sort of a win-win situation, and make some money for myself quickly. So what I realized was that there is this whole group of — and you probably know this. This whole group of almost elite academic or admissions coaches, and what they do is — yeah right? It’s their job — even in middle school they start like packaging and prepping these…

Steve: Elementary school man.

Daniel: Really it’s that early that makes me sad. Really because I like ruining a little bit of the childhood, but I can see it in middle school, I can understand.

Steve: Welcome to my world Daniel.

Daniel: Yeah, welcome to my world, I can see like an eighth grade starting to thinking about college, fifth grade is too early. But anyway so these admissions coaches, they help to groom the kids and what they do? They help them format their essays and they are like help them figure out what extracurricular they are going to do, because you are realize if you are thinking about getting into an [inaudible 00:40:57] school, soccer when you’re in high school is too late, most likely. Unless you are like really you are going to save the environment that year, you are not going get in, because people have been preparing for five to seven years before this and packaging themselves.

So there are these admissions coaches who will help students get in. And usually that means that these students are well groomed, they probably have some disposal income, so it’s a really good market because guess what? These admissions coaches don’t teach exam prac, they just outsource that and then what they say is go to Kaplan, go to [inaudible 00:41:31] review. So what I do is I looked up all these private admissions coaches in the area and I said, all right listen guys, listen buddies [ph], I used to teach for Kaplan obviously I have the credentials.

I will come in-house and essentially white label myself for you. And I will become your in-house test prep guide, and in exchange for that you will — I’ll give you some of the money that I make. Also you can now add for their services where you can keep everything branded and in house, so make sure its service that’s much more valuable right? They love this idea because not only — because it doesn’t really matter to them, because basically I was the same as Kaplan to them since I already had that pedigree.

But they can keep all people in-house, keep better track of them and they can make some money on the side, so they were totally into it. So I basically hit up all these — I had all these private based coaches, and we started — basically they started giving me the client list immediately from over night I literally went from no clients to completely full roster. So I let them do all the hard work, they spent years finding these customers, grooming them, getting their ear, and I just stepped in there and started doing my work. There was no like vetting process where the family had to see if I was good enough, if that admission coach said I was the guy, I was the guy. So I started making money immediately and we scaled that to six figures very quickly, because it’s a good market.

Steve: So are these some tactics that you kind of teach in this guide that you offer on your site?

Daniel: Yeah, I mean the more suitable method, you can learn that for free, but that’s — first of all I always went back up and said that don’t worry if you don’t do test prep, or if I taught web design, don’t worry if you don’t do web design. The concepts are their frame works right, they are not like specific to that industry, or that skill set, just think about that.

And as you listen to this podcast guys, don’t sit for this whole progress like, okay, I got to come up with this idea now, like I can’t think of anything, it’s been 15 minutes, really take some time. It’s not like I’m telling you this now in attendance sound bite, but it took a minute to develop the strategy. So don’t feel upset, I just — it wasn’t like a year, a week, a moment, like I really had to think about this.

So like okay well I was going to do Craigslist ads in the beginning. So just take some time to think about your strategy, but that means that yeah, we teach all this in freelance domination which is my course, but this is just a little taste of what you can do if you use systems and leverage to get going, rather than this hitting your head against the wall hoping that it works.

Steve: I’m just curious do you have any other examples of maybe students in your class who have found successful freelance gigs using this method?

Daniel: Like the marsupial method?

Steve: Yeah like outside the test prep, outside of like web design, that sort of thing?

Daniel: Yeah I mean let’s see, I’m trying to think of– and I would like to also – yeah I’m trying to think of something like various ideas that don’t — that aren’t about academics or like test skills that people…

Steve: Yeah, because the hardest problem in my class at least is people coming up with the idea right?

Daniel: Well here is a perfect one. I had one student who she is like a dog walker, pet sitter right? She’s leveraged herself very easily because there are sites specifically for dog walkers and pets sitters, and I’m sure she is probably big in like the…

Steve: Yeah, it is here yeah.

Daniel: Just because a lot of executives who are like busy and they all want dogs, but they don’t want to take care of them. So there is a site called dog bakey [ph] and her name is Sarah. She basically used dog bake to start up her dog walking and pet sitting business, it’s pretty cool, it’s very easy. But sometimes she didn’t want to use that service, because she has to give a cut of her money to that platform, so there’s different ways to find best solutions.

What she started doing, she started doing only two things. One at the apartment complex as some of the locals, not only hers, but some of the ones that were on the area, she started talking to the leasing office, and she basically negotiated getting her cards stack in all the welcome packets for new residents. But she’s a local service and she’s just providing cool much thinner value to that community. What she also started doing was going up to local vets office like within a five or 10 mile radius and including that and not only on the front desk but also in the informational packets that new clients or new patients get passed out.

That increased her business a lot, I think it only like I think she said 60% increase, because she’s able to use– think about it, marsupial method, think about who’s already doing the work. You already have these places that are actively turning over residents, actually turning on people who clearly have pets at a veterinary office. Just get them, partner up with them and in this case she didn’t even need to share any of that money, because they weren’t interested in taking her money.

They just want to provide service for residents especially with a leasing office with a welcome packet. They’re already providing services like a lot of their personal training services, a lot of times they include coupons for restaurants in the area, this is all normal stuff, but no one was doing pet sitting. She’s like no I’m not going to put up fliers. I’m going to go directly to the consumers like direct mail; they’re going to have to look at my stuff. Everybody can overlook a flier in the neighborhood, but when you get a welcome packet, you’re going to read everything in there most likely.

Steve: That is a really good story, that’s ingenious actually.

Daniel: It’s not technical either. Like dog sit pet walking, everyone can do that right? It’s not a technical thing, but she’s making a few thousand dollars extra on the side a month just for taking care of dogs, what she already likes to do anyway so…

Steve: What I like about this is that it’s a win-win for both parties, right?

Daniel: Yeah, and it’s like don’t over think it guys, figure out who already has your ideal customer rather than trying to get all this attention to yourself with no traction. Find who already has traction, and just negotiate with them.

Steve: Great advice Daniel, hey we’ve been chatting for quite a while. I know you’ve got other commitments and a big trip that you’re heading out to New York City or something like that so…

Daniel: Yeah I’m going off to New York.

Steve: I can’t wait to hear about that actually, but if people listening want to get a hold of you or ask you questions or explore what you had to offer, where can they find you?

Daniel: The best ways to find me is rich20something.com, so it’s 20 with the number rich 20 something dot com, and my email address is the same Daniel@rich20something.com as well. I’m extremely responsive.

Steve: What about you instagram account?

Daniel: Its rich20something, all rich20something man, I’ve got a brand consistence.

Steve: Yeah consistent branding there. All right man hey it was a pleasure having you on the show man.

Daniel: Oh you’re the pleasure, you are pleasurable, I like you.

Steve: We didn’t even get to the other cool stories that you had to offer, like how you drove someone to the air force, you drove the president to the air force once, and some of the other cool stories that you interviewed a porn star.

Daniel: [inaudible 00:47:53] well first of all I’ll say those two things. One, I interviewed Obama. I met Obama when he was still cool after he just won the Nobel peace prize. He’s not as cool anymore, but he was still very serious. The porn star thing my girlfriend was very upset about it, so because she was my favorite porn star, she’s like so basically you have…

Steve: You have a favorite porn star?

Daniel: Yeah I had a favorite–see I mean…

Steve: You should not have added that little…

Daniel: I know but she’s like so basically you’re in a relationship with this porn star. I’m like we’re not in a relationship, it was an interview okay, but it was a good interview. You know what one thing guys, if you ever get to meet your favorite porn star or maybe I’m a little, I don’t think I’m the only one who has favorite porn stars, but if you ever get to meet your favorite porn star, just know that it’s going to ruin a little bit your experience for you, because once you see them as a real person, it’s just not the same.

Steve: And just don’t marry– you’re not married yet right, you’re just in…

Daniel: No, I’m not.

Steve: Yeah, do not mention that you have a favorite porn star to your fiancée, that’s just word of advice there.

Daniel: She already knows now, so she never listens to any of my interviews, so this is fine.

Steve: And then you had Lori Groneman which is pretty cool, listen all interviews are on his site by the way, so go check them out.

Daniel: Lori is a beast and she’s so cool. I can’t wait to tell you guys about this story the next time I come on the podcast.

Steve: Right on man. All right take care.

Daniel: Yeah take care, I appreciate.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Daniel is a hustler and I really admire his passion and how he’s able to spread his energy to everyone that he meets. His success on Instagram is really just a small example of what he’s achieved, so you should definitely go and check out his site and get inspire. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode103.

And once again I’m starting my own ecommerce conference this year, and it’s called the Sellers Summit. It’s going to be held in May 19th in Miami Florida. If you’re interested in learning about ecommerce or taking your existing ecommerce business to the next level, then you must attend. Go to sellerssummit.com for more information.

I also want to thank Famebit for sponsoring this episode. As I mentioned earlier Famebit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagrammers and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. One of my podcast guests Emmanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks to start. The best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off. Go to famebit.com right now and get famous YouTubers to promote your products.

Finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

102: How to Start A Multi Million Dollar Clothing Line With Edmund Lowman

102: How to Start A Multi Million Dollar Clothing Line With Edmund Lowman

I’m really excited to have Edmund Lowman on the show. Edmund is someone who I met at the Import Summit in Orlando and after chatting with the guy for a while at the conference, I learned that he’s got a pretty awesome story to share.

First off he’s a former rockstar who was part of a wildly successful rock band called Red Jump Suit Apparatus. In fact, I believe that his rock band made him a multimillionaire in his 20’s. Then he realized that the rockstar life was not for him, lost all of his money and had to work his way back up from pretty much ground zero.

Today Edmund owns a variety of seven figure companies. First off, he started Kekai Express which is a company that helps companies find great products and reliable suppliers.

Two, he runs a multi-million dollar fashion production and design house called IFG. And finally, he also owns the most popular hostel chain in Thailand called Slumber Party Hostels.

What You’ll Learn

  • How to source, validate and market a clothing line.
  • How to get your clothing in from of large chains like H&M and Zara.
  • The 2 main options on how to sell your clothes
  • What Edmund would do today to start a clothing line
  • How to find goods to sell online and how to import them and make money.
  • What the main criteria is for selecting a product to sell.
  • How to validate your product before you start.
  • Where to source your products from. Where to find vendors and the scripts to contact them.
  • How to attract quality suppliers. How to tell if someone is a middleman or a trading company.
  • Online services that Edmund uses for his business that he can’t live without.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin. I’m happy to announce that I’m holding my own ecommerce conference on May 19th in Miami, Florida this year called the Sellers Summit. Instead of the large crowded conferences that you are used to hearing about, mine will be small and intimate with a focus on learning. So picture small round table workshops instead of large auditoriums with a focus on actionable strategies that will grow your ecommerce business. For more information go to sellerssummit.com and watch the video.

Now, before we begin, I also want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagramers, people on Twitter and Vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it be, beauty tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes, you can get famous YouTubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as $50. And the best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest, Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing.

And the best part is if you use coupon code “my wife” at famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m really excited to have Edmund Lowman on the show. Now Edmund is someone who I met at the Import Summit in Orlando, and after chatting with the guy for quite a while at the conference I learned that he’s got a pretty awesome story to share. First off he’s a former rock star, who was part of a wild B successful rock band called Red Jumpsuit Apparatus. In fact I believe the rock band made him a multimillionaire in his twenties, then he realized that the rock star lifestyle was not for him, lost all of his money and had to work his way back up from pretty much ground zero.

Today actually Edmund owns a variety of seven figure companies. So first off he started Kekai Express, which is a company that helps other companies find great products and reliable suppliers. Two, he runs a multimillion dollar fashion production and design house called IFG. Finally, and this is kind of random, he also owns the most popular hostel chain in Thailand. Now Edmund’s got a ton of experience, but today, we are kind of going to focus his China sourcing company and maybe his fashion company, and basically how he sources great products from China for his clients. And with that, welcome to the show Edmund, how are you doing today man?

Edmund: I’m doing well, and yourself?

Steve: I’m doing very well. Here’s something I just want to comment on real quick. When I heard that you were a former member of a rock band, I kind of had some preconceived notions about your personality. So for example, when we were out partying, I kind of half expected you to get wasted and start like going on, jumping on top of the bar, and going nuts. But only half of that happened. You got wasted, but you didn’t do any of those crazy stuff.

Edmund: I’m usually the one that actually– everyone always thinks that. Everyone always think that they are going to get me wasted, and I’m always the one that leaves early and doesn’t get wasted.

Steve: Yes, just for the listeners, it turns out Edmund is actually super down to earth, easy to talk to and he knows his stuff. Normally, if you guys have been listening to my podcast, I don’t usually like to focus too much on the back story of my interviewees, but Edmund just got an incredible story. And so Edmund, give us like the rock star back story, and how that kind of led to Kekai Express.

Edmund: The rock star back story. Huh, yeah, basically where to start. I had a band. And I had several different bands actually. There’s even more to the story. I was in a bunch of bands before that. I had a few record deals before that even. Then, I just kind of like, how life works. Businesswise, it’s just like being an entrepreneur eventually if you keep trying, one of the ideas works, and that’s what happens with this band. It just happened to work. We went on tour. We had a top twenty song on billboard. You know did everything that rock stars are supposed to do. It just wasn’t for me. It was very unfulfilling I found.

Steve: In what way?

Edmund: Just you’re kind of like a circus animal. It’s like, you are plated around, you play the same song twenty times every single day. You don’t really have any time to– you have no free time. That was the most depressing part actually. I thought it was so depressing that I was traveling the world to all these amazing places, and I wasn’t seeing anything. It was like I was seeing the inside of hotel rooms, the inside of radio stations and the inside of amphitheatres, and auditoriums and they are all pretty much like the same in every country. So that was very exciting.

Steve: Interesting, but I imagine you did it for the fame, right?

Edmund: I think– good question. That’s good question Steve.

Steve: Well, then you made a lot of money too, right?

Edmund: Yeah, I think. I can’t say obviously, but I think in the beginning I got in with pure incisions of I just realized I loved the music. As I got older, and as I started again to college and you realize– I guess for me like money was never– when I was younger, I’m not saying that I came from a super wealthy family, but I can from like a middle class family, so it was never like money was never a big stress in my life. And so I got to college and I started realizing, “Oh you have some money to live in the world.” I think at that point it became a little bit more about the money, whereas before that it wasn’t really, that wasn’t my reason for getting into music.

Steve: Okay, but you did make a lot of money with the band and then you ended up losing it somehow, right?

Edmund: Yup, exactly. We had a big lawsuit with a bunch of former band members over this song that was our hit song, and basically everything was gone overnight.

Steve: Yes, so I mean everything is gone and it just– so how does losing all of your money, you are in this rock band that you don’t enjoy being in anymore, how does that kind of lead to China sourcing. It’s kind of random.

Edmund: Yeah, yeah. Okay, so it wasn’t a direct. It wasn’t a direct like it just happened overnight thing. What happened was I had lost all the money. I still had a little bit left, and so I decided to go to Germany to go see my brother. He was living there and working as a professor at a university. So I decided to go see my brother. While I was there, I probably shouldn’t say this on a podcast, but [inaudible 00:07:56].

I kind of figured out that you could import cigars and [inaudible 00:08:04] are Cuban cigars and you could get them through as long as you took the labels off the cigars. So I started selling Cuban cigars online. And so it started like my first like real life business. I was like, “Oh, I can make money outside of a band.” And so I started selling cigars online and found out very quickly that that was a really bad idea, because I was going to get to federal prison forever and ever.

Steve: Technicalities, technicalities.

Edmund: Technicalities, technicalities. I mean what are [inaudible 00:08:33] burgers for anyways? So I shut down the business, but I actually acquired a little bit of money from that. I had a friend who was living in China. His family owned a fashion company. This fashion company, probably for a lot of you guys remember, it was called Asprey.

Steve: Yeah totally.

Edmund: Asprey was a huge company. They were part of Asprey in China. They did all the production over there. You know it was this [inaudible 00:09:01] family. Basically he invited me over. “Come over, I think you could help us out with the business development side.” I don’t know why I was the choice of all the people, but for whatever reason, he said, “I think you could probably help us out with business development side of things, and most of the ecommerce,” because they saw what I had done with my website. So they were very…

Steve: Your cigar company?

Edmund: My cigar company. And they were like, “Okay, that was interesting. I think we can use ecommerce and online store online marketing whatever, we think we can use that in our business.” So I went over there and my friend and I basically in a probably alcohol fueled conversation, decided that really what was going to be happening next over the next few years was to trust fashion, which is companies like Abercrombie and Gap and Zara, H&M, all these guys, they are just trending out clothes like nonstop. I was of the opinion that there was no way they were doing all this in house. This was all assumption at this point.

The amount of people you would need and the amount of infrastructure you would need to do that, and the margins in fashion, I just didn’t believe that they were doing it themselves, and I was right. And so we decided to hire a designer out of, just straight out of fashion school in Italy. We just went and goggled what’s the biggest fashion school in Italy. Then we called this school and found out who’s the top ten people that would graduate this year.

We had this guy like, “Hey look, we want to go after these three companies. So here’s X amount of money.” I think we gave him like five to ten thousand dollars, “Go on a shopping spree, buy as many clothes as you want from these companies, and we want you to bring it back here, and we want you to make clothes very similar to what they are selling right now,” which is what he did. Through friends of friends I had some connections at Zara a H&M, and at and some other big companies, and we got all these buyers to come into the show room. We basically sold them their shit back to them.

Steve: Interesting. So they didn’t recognize their own design. I mean these are different designs obviously.

Edmund: Yeah, they are different, but they are close enough.

Steve: I see, okay wow. Okay, so these large companies now like the Zara, they actually buy their clothing designs from you guys?

Edmund: Yeah, not always but most, a lot of the time. We get a lot of the designs are done through us for men’s fashion.

Steve: Okay, so this is IFG, did that come first?

Edmund: Yeah, IFG came first.

Steve: Okay and then how did that transition over to Kekai Express?

Edmund: So what happened was we were producing like massive amounts of designs. So we were doing like 2000 designs per season, so like almost 4000 a year. Let’s say 1500 to 2000. So what happened was our designers and our buyers were like, hammering really hard for like three to six months. I had like three months and then they had three months off, because of the way we were doing our production.

Basically, my partner and I were sitting around and I was getting a lot of emails from friends like, “Hey can you look for this for me. I know you are in China. Hey can you look for this for me I know you are in China.” And eventually I was like, “Dude, why don’t we just put a couple of our buyers on this while they don’t have any time right now.”

And the first thing that was brought to us was these touch screen monitors. So I was like, why don’t we see if we can source through this guy, it was a friend of a friend. We found like insanely cheaper. I think they are selling or buying them in America for like $425 and he was like if I can get them for like $375 to the door, like we’d be killing it. I was like, yeah, let’s look for him. We found it for like $175. And I was like guess what, I found them for $350, I got you. And so we are like, hey the sourcing thing. That’s not a bad idea. We just made like $40,000 in 20 minutes. Let’s do this some more.

Steve: Interesting, so these are all like random events that kind of happened to you. You didn’t start out saying, “Hey, I’m going to start a sourcing company.” It just kind of fell on your lap so to speak?

Edmund: It sort of fell on my lap. I mean, it seems like everything happens that way for me, I don’t know why.

Steve: In like both of these cases too, right? Like the clothing company and the sourcing company.

Edmund: Yeah, and actually the band as well to be honest like in retrospect.

Steve: Do you recommend this like procedure for starting businesses?

Edmund: Not at all. Okay, here’s the thing. Actually with the clothing company, sorry– and I’m sorry if I’m moving around, you guys are hearing a lot of noise. I’m at my good friend Will’s house right now, and his cat’s going crazy as you are probably hearing.

Steve: He’s a cat man.

Edmund: He’s got twenty of them, it’s weird.

Steve: Interesting, everybody thought.

Edmund: Here’s the thing, for my outside perspective, it sounds like they fell on my lap. But actually going to China in the first place was a pretty huge risk. I had a very stable life living in Germany. I had a girlfriend. Everything was good. I could have stayed there forever, and the quality of life was great there. I had a basically few more months and I could get citizenship. Not citizenship, but like permanent residency. It was a huge risk and a huge decision for me to go to China.

That alone was a risk. I took a small amount of money to go there and try to start something. Even the story of how once I got there, there was all this chaos. The day I got there basically the family’s company got invaded by the government. A bunch of family had to like leave that day. My friend and I lived in like this terrible apartment for months, and months and months trying to get the business going again.

It wasn’t– it sounds easy and nice, but I think like any success story, if anyone asks you about your blog, they probably are going to be like, “Wow man, you are crushing it. That’s awesome, that it just worked out for you.” But I’m sure there’s years, and years of work behind what you’ve got until now. It’s easier to look at it…

Steve: Oh yeah for sure.

Edmund: When you are not the one doing the work it’s easy to look and go, “Oh yeah that must have been great.” Yeah, we put in a lot of work. I would not suggest to anyone just jump in and hope that things fall in their lap, because it’s not the way it works.

Steve: Here’s the thing Edmund, a lot of my listeners are actually– I ran a class too where people want to sell their stuff online and actually a lot of people want to start to their own clothing line and have their own fashion line. I always tell them that selling clothing is tough. I thought since you kind of do that for a living. I wanted in your perspective, if you were to start a clothing line today, like how would you start?

Edmund: Okay, how would I start today? There’s sort of two ways you could do it. Way number one which if it was me personally, this is– no, that’s too very simplified. Okay, way number one is this. Way number one is you go either, if you are going to do in China, or whether you are going to do it locally, it doesn’t matter, you go to a local seamstress.

This is a side note too. This is what really interesting about fashion. A lot of people think that it’s like a restaurant. Have you ever gone and you sat at a restaurant and you are sitting in the front and you’ve never been to the kitchen. And you are sitting in the front, “Oh men, it might be this mysterious thing. This fancy steak is coming out with red wine reduction and rolls made of potatoes and oh men, it must be crazy back there. How did they do this?”

And you get back in the back and it’s some short white guy, picking his nose and kicking your steak. And you are like, “Oh wow, it’s not as mysterious as I thought it was.” This is how I feel about fashion as well. Is that people go, “Oh men, it must be all this stuff that goes into it, producing these shirts and clothes and blah, blah, blah.” It’s some fat white guy picking his nose.

Steve: I thought it would be some Chinese guy doing it actually.

Edmund: Actually yeah. It’s the Chou family; your descendants are over there. In China or locally, everybody thinks I have to go to China, I got to go here. But you can just as easily go to a local tailor or a local seamstress if you are trying to get prototypes made at least. And they can make the stuff for you. Anyone who knows how to saw– I think even you told me like in the beginning, you learnt how to saw. You did all your monogramming, right?

Steve: I did but that’s all done by the machine, not by me, but yeah.

Edmund: But still, it’s not like it’s this crazy complicated thing. I would guess that probably if I came over and sat for a weekend with you and learnt how to embroider, probably by the end of the weekend I can probably do some basic stuff, right?

Steve: Oh yeah for sure.

Edmund: It’s the same thing with fashion. It’s not really this crazy thing. I mean there’s more technical designs, but it’s not that crazy. Anyone who knows how to sow can probably make what you are looking to get made, so you can go to China, but you can also just go to a local seamstress and have them prototype your things. Then after that, the next step, this is where you have…

Steve: Well, let’s talk about the prototype real quick. So let’s say I don’t have any background in clothing design, what do I tell the person to prototype, do I just give him assurance, say make something similar to it like kind of what you did?

Edmund: You’d be shocked I would say especially with fast fashion, 99% of their stuff is not new designs. What most fashion houses do is they go out and they buy samples. They call them samples. So basically they go into Zara for example, and they buy a bunch of shirts off the racks and say, I like this, I like this, I like this. And then they take them to a company like ours or they take them to the local seamstress and say, “Okay, I really like this design. I like the material, but maybe can we move this pocket. I don’t like the pocket. Let’s get rid of that. And that tag, let’s move that tag. And instead of making it swimmy happy dolphins, let’s make it angry scorpions.” Just simple stuff like that and they just modify the existing shirt, or the existing design. Sort of like if you like pimp your ride, kind of the same thing.

Steve: So they probably just rip apart the clothing and then create a pattern out of it based on your…

Edmund: Yeah, so you can do that way as well. Sometimes, they’ll create a pattern out of it, sometimes if they already have the basic design they know what the pattern is. But if you take it to like a local seamstress, they can definitely cut it up and make a pattern out of whatever you take to them. If you say like, this is the base. This is what I really like. Make a pattern out of this. They can do it. Or an even easier way is you can go on like Fiverr, or you can go on Odesk.

Steve: Fiverr?

Edmund: Yeah, trust me man, people do it all the time. Hire someone; say hey, “Take a picture of the shirts.” Say, “Hey can you Photoshop this for me. I want to put this, this and this,” if you have no Photoshop skills. If you have Photoshop skills you can do it yourself. Put it on to like a PDF and show them exactly what you want the sizing, where you want to move things and very easily a seamstress can copy that, as long as they have like a base shirt to work off of and they have a design that you’re showing them, they can definitely do it.

Steve: Okay. So once you got that what’s the next step?

Edmund: Okay, then obviously you want to produce or you want to sell, so this is where my, you can go left or you can go right. If you go to the last that would be going to some of the biggest, I don’t know what that means, you can get some of the bigger is what I’m trying to say, some of the bigger fashion shows. Not like fashion week, but these are like wholesale fashion shows where the buyers from all of these big companies go to either source clothes or even to just source new fashion design companies.

There’s one called The Project Show in New York and I believe it’s also in Vegas, there is another one called the Magic Show which is also in New York and Vegas if I remember correctly, maybe it’s just in Vegas. There is another one called Bread ‘n’ Batter, that’s a massive one in Germany, there’s all these big fashion shows per year, and if you remember actually Daymond John talked about this during the Import Summit, when he spoke. He said he went there and he didn’t have any money so he was just was like walking around the show showing people his clothes.

He was wearing his clothes and talking to people and taking their business cards and trying to get them back to his hotel room to show his clothes, and that works. You can hustle and that’s really in business especially when you have no money, your only option is to hustle, and not be afraid and not be shy to go out to people and say hey this is my product, do you want to buy it, because otherwise no one is – if you just put it on the website and hope people are going to come, it’s not going to work.

That’s one way, go there, and try to meet some people, collect some emails, collect some cards, unless you have $100,000 in and you want to buy booths you can also do that, but that’s quite a bit of money.

Steve: Yeah, actually before we go on to the other side I was just curious what the margins are like on clothing, so how much does it cost to produce let’s say a typical T-Shirt, how much would the clothing company buy from you for and how much it would sell?

Edmund: It’s really all over the place, a typical – because shirts, actually like a T-Shirt are pretty hard to make money on.

Steve: Like a burn down let’s say.

Edmund: A burn down would be where you make money, it really depends on the quality, they can be as cheap as…

Steve: I’m just trying to get an idea of the market.

Edmund: I mean the market let’s use like 75% to 100%, you could say like maybe you buy them for $6 to $12 really depending on quality, quality obviously is a huge factor,. If I was producing for 6 then I should be able to sell it for anywhere between $10 to $14 depending on the company, and also depending on both, because I mean if someone huge comes in and buys it and we will sell it for 8 because they are buying 200,000 pieces, it really depends.

The other side of it too is sometimes especially when you are working with bigger clients like you’ll lose money on some piece because you are making money on other pieces. So it’s like okay we want all of these pieces, and you’ll say it’s okay we’re going to lose money on this shirt and this shirt and this shirt, but hey we’re killing it on this shirt and this shirt, and so basically it evens out, it’s a game of chess.

Steve: Okay, it sounds like the pricing is just like a traditional retail model, double for whole sale, and then double it again for retail.

Edmund: Exactly.

Steve: What’s the other side?

Edmund: Depending a lot on the book.

Steve: Of course.

Edmund: If they’re buying massive amounts then obviously they are going to push you way hard on the pricing.

Steve: Sure, that totally makes sense.

Edmund: The other way, if I were going to produce something today, would be the beginning part is actually the same, then I would go to either back to the seamstress, or I would go to try to source for a factory in China and put a little bit of skin in the game, how much you can afford and start getting some samples made and getting them online. And even with this I have kind of two varying schools of thought, one way would be to go around to local boutiques to try to get some preorders so that you are not spending your own money, I’m not a big fan of spending my own money.

I would probably do it that way, I would try to maybe get to some boutiques, maybe go to some smaller like – even locally, I know people have fashion shows, so there’s like Massey shows or there’s wedding shows where they show off all the new bridal stuff depending on what you are doing. I would maybe try to get one of those too and just try to walk around and show other people what you are doing.

If you couldn’t do that and you just feel you can’t go around and talk to people then the other way I would do it is get 10 to 50 pieces made of each product you are trying to sell and get it up on Amazon, get it up on Etsy, get it up on eBay, get it up on your site and so try to push it that way. It’s just that I think with the online model especially when no one knows who you are, it’s a lot more labor intensive, like you really have to get a lot out there and convince people to buy your stuff, whereas when you meet people face to face it’s much easier in my opinion at the beginning at least to get them to buy your stuff and take a chance on you.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I have the most, bookkeeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down, and here’s where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online bookkeeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you.

They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice concise financial reports, so no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches. Plus it’s reasonably priced, and the best part is that you can get 20% offer of your first six months if you go to Bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s Bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get a 20% offer of your first six months, now back to the show.

Okay so let’s go onto those two ways a little more deeply, so you walk into a boutique where you just ask for the owner and say hey I got some clothes to show you?

Edmund: Yeah that’s what I would do.

Steve: Like what’s the, is that how really it works?

Edmund: Well I don’t know, I have never done it before, but I think it would, you are saying how I would do it, this is how I would do it. I’ve never personally had in my own fashion brand where I was just selling to stores like we always had like a – We always went route one, where we went to all project shows and all the wholesale shows like Bread ‘n’ Butter, and we sold, took book orders like right off the bat, even though we didn’t know what we were doing.

Actually I had a lot of, it was like a kindle spirit with Daymond John because even though obviously my company was not as big as FUBU was, his story to how he got started is very-very similar to how we got started. I was like okay I guess that’s a pretty proven model that works, the only thing with that is that it doesn’t really – like a lot of people want that instant gratification of seeing their product in a store right away, that’s the goal, kind of like hearing your song on the radio.

It’s like okay that’s I’ve made it, but in a lot of ways that’s not really making it, that means that you’ve got a really developed supply chain and if you start off that way I think it can even be a bit of a nightmare, whereas when you get to these project shows who knows who’s buying your tuff. It might be someone in Lebanon, it might be someone in France, it might be someone who has a small boutique in California. You’re probably not going to instantly walk in a shop and start seeing your stuff, but that model is the base of building one your financial foundation, and your supply chain that can move you into getting your stuff all over the place in my opinion.

Steve: So you were at one of these big shows, what are the negotiations like especially when you don’t know what you are doing?

Edmund: When we did that we kind of went all in, we had– we bought a booth, so I think…

Steve: You bought a booth, okay.

Edmund: Yeah, it was expensive, there was, we got a small booth, crappy little booth and I think it was like 60 grand, and it was basically all the money we had. We were like okay we got to make it work, and we were just there all day just hustling. Anyone who walked by we were like hey man check out our clothes, check this out, product new fashion company in China blah, blah, blah buy my stuff, and typically the way it works is there’s one of two things.

Even at this time we didn’t even have an office because we were so broke, and we had all this trouble with the [inaudible 00:28:24] basically was kind of set up incorrectly in China. We like rented out like this – you can rent out sometimes during the fair like these fake offices, where someone will set a reception, you can put your logo up on the wall and these conference rooms, and blah, blah, blah.

Steve: Interesting.

Edmund: This is what we had, so people come in, they look at your clothes, oh yeah this is cool, and some cases they might say yeah we really like what you have, let’s sit down and talk numbers right now, or they might say this is pretty cool, can we come to your show room, which we paid for this office so that we can have a showroom. So we would bring people the showroom, walk around, show them everything, and at that point typically what they do is if they really liked it they’d start to make an order.

They made an order and after they made the order they would have like five days to transfer the deposit, and after that’s done we start production. It’s interesting in business, that’s what you’ll always find, at least I do, that there’s this like magical moment when someone hands you their money and you think it’s going to be like this big crazy thing and fireworks are going to go off, and it’s something really technical and it’s just like no give me my money dude, that’s it, okay let’s do this.

Steve: Usually when someone hands you money, I’m like oh crap.

Edmund: That’s how I am too, but that’s the point it’s just like it’s nothing really that mysterious, it’s just like oh shit now I really have to go do this.

Steve: I was under the impression that you were selling your designs and not actually having to produce your own stuff.

Edmund: It depends, so excuse me I drink some water. We do both, the way it works for someone like H&M comes in, here’s how it works. They come in, they start just like shopping in a mall, they start pulling off the designs that they like, and they start putting them on the racks, and they’ll have like the H&M racks. We say, okay we like all these designs, we will like to buy these, what’s your pricing on them? And we say, okay, this is our pricing. They say okay cool, they’ll go away for like four, five days, they’ll come back and say okay, well, this is our opinion. Sometimes they only take the pricing its crazy, they really know production. Sometimes they just say this is what we like and they take pictures of it and then they go off.

And they come back and say, okay, this is what we think this costs this, this is what this costs, this is what this costs. And they give us the pricing. We look at the pricing and we say okay, yeah, we can work with that or no we can’t work with that. If we can work with it then lots of time they’ll say, okay you guys go ahead and produce it, and we’ll actually produce it for them. Or if it’s at this time where it’s like we think that it costs us for example we say it costs $10, and they said hey, we are coming in at $7. We’ll say, okay, there is no way we are going to be able to produce this and make money; do you guys want to buy it? And sometimes they’ll buy the design.

Steve: What to stop them from just stealing it?

Edmund: Nothing, a long term relationship I suppose, but yeah, there is nothing stopping anyone from just walking in and taking picture and running off. But yeah, we haven’t had it happen; I don’t think it would happen; it would be just tarnishing the relationship so bad. I don’t think it would be worth it to them.

Steve: Okay, so here is the thing, there is a lot of people who contact me, they want to sell their own clothes, but they’ve opted or option number two to produce their own stuff and just list something on Amazon and their own site. The problem with that is when you are unknown, clothing all kind of looks very similar to — there is a lot of designs, but they all kind of blend together after a while. So if you were going with option number two, like how the heck do you get the word out there, is it just leg work at that point?

Edmund: Honestly I think it’s really similar to what you do with your bargain and what I do with standard price which is you have to put in the work. I have heard so many people say to me, oh yeah, so we are going to put up a website, and we are going to sell online and duh-duh-duh. I’ll say, okay, well, that’s cool, how you are going to get people to your website? Well, yeah, well are going to have this website and it’s going to be online, yeah, I get that part. How people are going to get to your website, because it’s one thing to put up a website, like that’s great now. But you have to be producing content or value that make people want to go visit your website. People don’t just go randomly search for mywifequitherjob.com like that’s not how it happened, right?

You had to start putting up value and things that people are interested in. So if it were me and I was actually going to start ground zero of fashion blog right now, what I would do is I would first start a blog. I would start writing about fashion, I would start Instagram account and Pinterest account. I would start pinning clothes that I think are cool. And then start putting pins up with my clothes, like with links back to — I think with Pinterest now you can actually link it back to your website right?

Steve: Yeah, well, absolutely yeah.

Edmund: Yeah, so I would start putting pins up with clothes that are mine that are cool, make sure they are like really beautiful pictures. I’m not a huge — I don’t have a huge amount of knowledge about Pinterest, but I have seen how it works for other companies. And it seems like when you have really beautiful sleek cool pictures people click on it, like, okay, what is this, I want to buy this.

So I would really get my stuff out there on Pinterest, with Instagram, even Periscope. I think Periscope is an amazing tool you and I started using it recently a bit. If I was in fashion I would do a Periscope like, hey, I’m going to show you guys today live how to design a shirt or hey, I’m going to show you guys today how to do a stitch and actually show people how things work.

And these kinds of things will start getting people interested in what you are doing. And not only that, it will position you as an expert. Once you are positioned as the expert and whatever your field is, people are going to start coming to you not only for advice on how to do it, but two on looking on what you are selling, they go cool this guy obviously he is an expert, so I’m going to buy his stuff. So that’s how it goes.

Steve: Yeah here is the thing, that takes time right? Like for me it took me like two years I think before I started developing a following on my blog. A lot of people just don’t have this patience, and what’s tough about clothing. So when we started our store, we got a lot of early sales on through like buying ads right? But with clothing does that work as well?

Edmund: Doing what?

Steve: Like let’s say I can’t just buy adwords ad for like button down shirts and expect to get sales right?

Edmund: I don’t know, I never tried it…

Steve: You never tried it okay.

Edmund: Yeah, because I mean like my business model and I’m sorry if this is disappointing your listeners, my business model is so opposite of that. But I guess if it were me, and I don’t know I do Facebook ads and adwords stuff or other things. I would think in theory you probably could put them up and it might work, your conversion rate would probably be really crappy and you probably spend a lot of money getting people to your website.

Maybe if it was something like Facebook ads and Pinterest ads, you might be able to get people to your site, but again it’s really developing that name that people know and trust. It’s hard to get people to buy something online from someone they have no idea who they are. Already buying stuff online it’s a little bit scary for a lot of people. I would say Amazon; eBay would probably be the best ways to try to get sales in the beginning.

But I also don’t believe in get rich quick, and I don’t like people who pitch it, I just don’t think that’s how it works. You can’t just go put stuff up online and hope that’s it’s going to work tomorrow, it’s not. And people who say that it’s my opinion are lying too; I think that you have to put in some work, and it’s going to take some time.

I don’t know if it’s going two years, but I would say it’s going to take a couple of months of really pumping out some content, getting on different — like doing what I’m doing now and getting on podcast. And knowing people so they let you on the show, and getting your name out there a bit. And then you can start really pushing it, I just don’t…

Steve: You are pretty annoying yeah, it’s true. Sorry I cut you off there, I was going to say yeah so okay…

Edmund: In all fairness in the beginning about three years ago or so when I was first trying to kind of like get into this world of online marketing. And even though I don’t even have a blog or anything, I do stuff with other people. But I was really annoying with Noah, like hey man like put me on your blog man, like let me do an interview; let me come speak at your conference.

Finally he’s like just leave me alone. And I think that’s what it takes, if you are not pretty consistent then don’t do it you are wasting your time. If you are going to give half, half, and you are going to work a little bit on it, it’s going to be the kind of side project that you don’t care about that much. And when it’s convenient you work on it, then dude don’t waste your time, because it’s probably not going to work. It’s got to be something like you have a full time job, plus you do this. This is what it takes, this is hustling, this is how you make money, and if you are not willing to do that, then don’t do it.

Steve: Yeah, I just want to touch on one of your points there, is getting your name out there. A lot of people who just sell stuff online don’t do that right? They kind of just list it, and they drive some ads to it and they expect it to sell when in fact when you kind of develop deeper relationships with people through other blogging, or any of the various mediums it doesn’t really matter what you do, they are much more likely to buy from you no matter what you decide to sell. And even if like you decide to sell something completely different, it’s easier to steer that audience over to the new product that you are going to sell.

Edmund: Definitely I mean once you have a relationship with somebody you’re way more willing — not only willing to buy from them, but less likely to return it. So once you’ve decided if I buy something on Amazon from some company I have never heard of, when it gets to my doorstep I’m going to be very skeptical from the moment I open that box to when I start using the product.
And I think I’m going to be way more likely to return it, whereas if I already have a relationship with whatever that product is, I’m going to be way less likely to return it because my expectations are already managed. I already basically know what I’m getting. When I don’t know what I’m getting, my expectations can be all over the place.

Steve: Yeah, totally, hey, Edmund we got off track a little bit because I wanted to talk a little bit about your sourcing also. No this is good stuff. I want to talk a little bit about sourcing like let’s say you got this contract and you got to buy a lot of clothes, where do you find your vendors?

Edmund: Okay, so sourcing I can give you all kinds of [inaudible 00:38:12] if you want. For us obviously our offices are located in china, so the way we go about it is probably a little bit different. But even with an operation outside, a lot of times we use Alibaba simple as that. We go on there and we look for people on our study.

We start looking at like the way I look at it I look like are they gold supplier, which that is a just a box symbol, but it’s getting more and more strict to get that symbol. I see do they accept trade insurance, I see how they handle onsite check. And I’m still looking at it that way, I find really-really good suppliers and I start contacting people, I send out designs and see if they are able to do what I want to do, then I ask for a sample.

This is the thing too especially with clothing. In the beginning if you are trying to source clothes; it is going to be expensive to get a sample. We have people ask us for samples all the time. Making samples for a Fashion Company completely sucks. Just so everyone out there knows and there is no…

Steve: How much are we talking about for a sample for like a burn down let’s say?

Edmund: I mean it just depends, like on the company, on the quality, how bad they want your business, like if someone asks me for a burn up I’d pay like 100-200 bucks easy, because it’s going to annoy the crap out of me to do it. It means that I have to take a worker who can be producing 20 or 30 shirts completely off the line, 20 or 30 shirts that are going to make us quite a bit more money and get this order done.

I have to take them completely off the line, I have to have them focus on only your sample, and hopefully it gets done right the first couple of times. It might three, four, five times to do it, so at least a day of work maybe more. And it’s just not efficient at all. Even when we do it we charge a lot and people usually don’t do samples with us. However there are a lot of people that do just do samples. They are called sample houses and they’ll actually make samples for you.

Even if the factory doesn’t make the sample for you, you can take them a sample of your product and as long as it’s a good factory they should build a copy if it exactly. Even then you still want to get at least like a small production run at the beginning, so maybe five to 10 shirts so that you’re not going all in and finding out that they have no idea what they’re doing. Yeah it’s worth it in my opinion and I don’t know if your experiences have differed, but my experience is that it’s worth it to pay the factory a little bit more to do a couple samples for you in the beginning.

Steve: Yeah absolutely.

Edmund: Then make the money back later, and also the thing is too with a lot of factories especially if you’re talking bigger orders, they’ll ask you for money upfront. Okay like you want these samples give us 200 or $300 we’ll make these samples for you. You say okay like no problem, but hey if I do this order with you and everything goes well will you please just count this sampling fee off the final order, and all the time people go yeah no problem. They just don’t want you to go and get the samples and run off forever because people do, do that and the factories just like you’ve been banned in china. The factories have been banned so they’re very cautious about doing free work.

Steve: Yeah absolutely I was just curious though on Alibaba like sometimes you get some Chinese dude who just wakes up, goes on the street, buys some stuff, and then ships it to you. Do you do any sort, like how do you sort out the real guys from some of the fakers?

Edmund: Yeah no problem and there’s a few ways you can do it. Like when you actually go into Alibaba, if they’ve had what’s called an onsite check which I always look for, there’s a little blue symbol on the bottom of two hands shaking. You can click on that and it will show you actually the onsite report on that factory, so it means that either someone from Alibaba’s inspection team or third party inspection team has actually gone into that factory, and they’ve given a full report like what is their actual uplift capacity, is there ability or is there potential to expand later if to a company that is huge.

What are the conditions of the factory, are they over staffed, are they under staffed, do they have enough staff, what’s the condition. I mean it tells you everything. So typically I always click on those to see what they say about the factory, and if that doesn’t work, if they don’t have an onsite check then the next thing you do is hire a company, an inspection company just to go out there and verify that the factory is there.

Those companies will charge you like a hundred or 200 bucks. They’ll go out there they’ll look through the whole factory and they’ll come back and give you report on what they think of the factory. That’s personally how I would do it. You can also I mean I’ve lived in china long enough that I’d say okay yeah you can also look up the address and this and that, and you can call and see that the reality is as the great Steve Chou once told me never trust a Chinese person.

Steve: I probably did say that actually.

Edmund: There’s just so many ways that you could easily. I mean it’s the other side of the world and the walls aren’t the same as they are here, and definitely business morals aren’t the same as they are in the states. I am not saying this to scare you, I’m just saying is if it were myself I would at least spend the money to get an inspection company if they don’t have a check to go out there and check it out, because it’s not worth it to go send like1000 or 20000 or whatever amount of money to some person that you’ve never met before only to find out that they’re buying clothes out of the back of someone’s car, like you don’t want that to happen.

Steve: Do you have any comments on Alibaba verses Global Sources verses going to a trade show, like the Canton Fair verses like using Panjiva or in this yeah.

Edmund: Okay, so Global Sources and Panjiva I’ve heard of both of them, I’ve never used either. The sites that I’ve used are Alibaba, made in China and gone to Canton Fair. I personally think and it’s hard to say. I have two really varying opinions on this, because on the one side it’s like yeah it’s great to go to Canton Fair, it’s really great to go and meet the person face to face especially in China, because china is so much about relationships. If you have the means to do that then by all means you should go do it, because I think that’s the best way to have a great relationship with the Chinese factories.

Go see the factory, meet them, go out to dinner with them, do the whole song and dance that is China and the factories really will have a lot of respect for you just for making a trip out there. On the other side I also realize that not everyone can afford to go to China, or can take the time or whatever, and I totally get it. If that’s your case then I personally believe Alibaba is the best option though I haven’t really used Global Sources. I know this site, but I haven’t really used it so I can’t comment on it too much, but I can say that Alibaba is getting really strong in protecting the buyer.

It used to be very factory centric which is the factory can get away with murder on Alibaba and since their IPO they’ve released some really great products and more coming out, where they’re really trying to protect the buyer more. So things like trade assurance, protects payment 100%, protects quality 100%, protects your shipment 100%. They’re coming out with a new thing called secure pay which is going to be like you can actually pay for goods through their own proprietary system with a credit card which will be insane for people who like to collect miles that will be great.

Steve: That’s true yeah.

Edmund: Theirs is this I think Alibaba is really, it seems like in my opinion they’re pushing to make it a safer platform which will be interesting to see how it works, but so far I think they’re doing a good job.

Steve: I’m also curious how you deal with quality control.

Edmund: Okay so with IFG we have our own in house QC that will QC things as well as we also deal a lot with inspection companies, because obviously when we’re producing stuff it’s for outside companies, so we have companies coming in and inspect us. That’s one way you deal with it. With Kekai Express the way we deal with it is we have our own QC guys as well which is we call them production managers, so what they’ll do is if there’s a production run happening, depending on the factory and depending on how much we’ve worked with them and how much money is on the line.

We’ll send them actually to the factory to monitor the production, and basically they’ll just stand there and watch the lines see how things are being made. They’ll take pictures, they’ll pull a product off the line to make sure it looks like it’s good. They’ll do– I mean it’s hard to say like us for fashion example like I will say fashion; because there is so many different products you can source.

For fashion if it was production run for shirts, they will pull clothes off the line, they will test the fabric to make sure it’s really the fabric that they’re saying that it is because sometimes the biggest problem people have in China is they say they’re getting like 80/20 cotton blend, and it turns out that they’re getting 80/20 polyester blends.

Steve: Dude that’s happened to us, yeah, pain in the ass.

Edmund: Yeah it’s a huge pain in the ass when you think you’re getting 80% cotton and you end up getting 80% polyester, it’s obviously a very different material, and it’s a very different experience for the customer especially. They will pull the fabric off the line; they will do what we call burn testing. You can actually burn the fabric and see the way it burns with a lighter, you can see what it is. They do pretty simple burn test to make sure it is what it is, whether it’s not.

They would check the stitching to make sure that the stitching is nice clean stitching, because obviously there’s a bunch of different types of stitches that you can do which gets deep into fashion. Make sure that the stitching is what we asked for, make sure that you know different pieces of different garments have to be done with a certain type of stitch; otherwise it’s really easy to fall apart.

Steve: If you were like a person in America you would just hire someone to this absolutely.

Edmund: Yeah I am sorry I am getting very deep into this, like next. If it was– if I am a person in America and I am not living in China, yeah I would hire someone like V-Trust, we use them a lot they’re a great company. They’re very solid, they’re also very strong in textiles, and we would send them a sample. Ideally the best way to do is you send the V-Trust a sample of what’s getting made, so this is exactly what we want. If you can, send them an inspect sheet, send them a design sheet.

The more information you can give to them the better the job they’re going to do. You can also just send them email and say hey, does this look okay and they’ll tell you their opinion, but the best way is the more information you give them the more accurate their inspection will be, and those guys are super on point. I mean they’ll send you like a 40 page report on a couple of pieces of garments telling you exactly how it’s put together. No matter what you’ll never get a perfect production run like that’s just not how production works, but V-Trust will give you very-very accurately what is going on with your production.

Steve: What is an acceptable defect rate for clothing let’s say?

Edmund: Yeah, I think three to five percent is.

Steve: Three to five percent, okay.

Edmund: If it gets anything over that, I mean three percent is what we aim for, sometimes five percent happens, but I think over that with any factory if you’re getting over five percent that’s not good.

Steve: Okay.

Edmund: I mean I’ve seen people that run on like say 10%, and I am just like how are you guys– that’s just so inefficient, but yeah we run three to five.

Steve: Okay, cool hey I mean we’ve been chatting for a while. I want to be respectful of your time. Thanks a lot for coming on. If anyone out there who is looking to start a clothing line or importing from China where can they find you?

Edmund: Yeah you can email me at Edmund E-D-M-U-N-D@startupbros.com so S-T-A-R-T-B-R-O-S-U-P. Wait I did it the wrong way, S-T-A-R-T-U-P-B-R-O-S dot com, so startupbros.com, and yeah I’d love to hear from you guys, follow me on Twitter all that good stuff, I don’t know how this works.

Steve: What’s your Twitter handle man, you’ve got to tell me your Twitter handle and your Periscope handle.

Edmund: Yeah it’s Edmund Lowman E-D-M-U-N-D-L-O-W-M-A-N you can follow me on Twitter, you can add me on Facebook, email me at startupbros and always Steve Chou maybe he’ll give you my phone number, stuff like that.

Steve: Yeah what’s funny is Edmund just bosed or doing periscope. I think you’ve done two or three. I’ve only done one at this point but it’s been kind of fun.

Edmund: It’s interesting isn’t it? It’s like you’re just broadcasting whatever out into the world and people watch and they comment.

Steve: I feel like I am doing standup comedy. I’m just like on the stage, I can’t really see anyone though.

Edmund: Yeah you were funny there, your Periscope was quite funny.

Steve: Thanks man.

Edmund: It’s also interesting, like it feels sort of like the Truman show, doesn’t it?

Steve: It does, yeah totally. It’s a weird feeling and hopefully it will benefit the business like in some way.

Edmund: Yeah I periscoped myself eating dinner the other night, I had thirty people watching me.

Steve: I saw that I was going to join, but I was like your title was watch me eat or something like that right?

Edmund: Yeah that’s what I was doing, I was eating nachos, I’m drinking a margarita and people watched.

Steve: Did you say anything or?

Edmund: Yeah I talked a little bit. I was just curious, I was like how, what’s the most ridiculous thing we can put up and just see what people will watch. I was like watch me eat, will people watch that, and they did.

Steve: Yeah I wasn’t sold on that one.

Edmund: Yeah.

Steve: All right dude well hey thanks for coming on the show man.

Edmund: Yeah it was a pleasure and good luck to everyone out there.

Steve: All right take case.

Edmund: Later.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I get a lot of emails from readers who want to start their own clothing line and the information that Edmund revealed today is priceless. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode102.

And once again I’m starting my own ecommerce conference this year it’s called the Sellers Summit, which is going to be held in may 19th in Miami Florida. If you’re interested in learning about ecommerce or taking your existing ecommerce business to the next level, then you must attend. Go to sellerssummit.com for more information.

I also want to thank Famebit for sponsoring this episode. As I mentioned earlier Famebit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagrammers and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. One of my podcast guests Emmanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks to start. The best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. Go to famebit.com right now and get famous YouTubers to promote your products.

Finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

101: Will It Fly? How To Validate Your Business Before You Invest With Pat Flynn

101: Will It Fly? How To Validate Your Business Before You Invest With Pat Flynn

Today I’m thrilled to have my buddy Pat Flynn back on the show. Now I’ve had Pat on the show once before on episode 41 where we talked about how to make money with every online business model out there.

In fact, Pat was gracious enough to come dressed for the occasion as he wore Stanford cardinal red and a beat cal button during the interview. I mean how cool is that? To be able to forsake his own college for a superior school is just a testament to his awesomeness.

Anyway, Pat runs the very popular blog SmartPassiveIncome.com and what’s cool about Pat is that there’s always something new going on with his businesses.

Last month, he brought in almost 108 thousand dollars from various sources such as affiliate marketing, iphone apps, ebook sales, software sales, podcast sponsorships…you name it and he’s done it.

And this time around, he’s releasing a brand new book called Will It Fly, which covers a very important topic related to business.

What You’ll Learn

  • Pat’s vision behind the book
  • The 4 steps of business validation
  • How to formulate a unique value proposition
  • How to come up with a mission statement
  • How to evaluate market conditions
  • How to validate your idea before getting started

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before I begin, I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing, with over 20,000 Youtubers, Instagramers, people on Twitter and via LinkedIn to promote your company in any vertical, whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more.

Yes, you can get famous Youtubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as a low as $50. And the best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before one of my guests Emmanuel Elayae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous you tubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have my buddy Pat Flynn back on the show. Now I’ve had Pat on the show once before on episode 41 where we talked about how to make money with every online business model out there. And in fact Pat was gracious enough to come dressed for the occasion as he wore at Stanford cardinal red [inaudible 00:02:31] during the interview. I mean how cool is that to be able to forsake his own college for a superior school is just a testimony to his awesomeness. Anyway, Pat runs the very popular blog, Smart Passive Income.com, and what’s cool about Pat is there’s always something new going on with his businesses.

So last month he brought in almost $108,000 from various sources such as affiliate marketing, iPhone apps, eBook sales, you name it, and this time around he’s actually releasing a brand new book about a very important topic related to business. And with that welcome back to the show Pat. How are you doing today man?

Pat: I’m doing well and you know I got handed to the cardinal for beating [inaudible 00:03:11] this year during the big game. I want to thank you for wearing your golden blue for the interview when you are on my show. So I appreciate that with little phone finger, that was great.

Steve: The phone finger was classic.

Pat: We have like a Photoshop for it going on. But I do it in my own Photoshop skills I must say.

Steve: I know a lot of people on the audience probably know who you are already, but if you won’t mind telling us kind of what you’ve been up to lately, that would be awesome.

Pat: Yeah totally. So I’ve been up to a lot of things. Moving into 2016 I wanted to think of what I could do differently than what I’ve done before. To help me figure out what to do, I’ve looked at my audience to see what it is I can improve, and what is necessary to better provide value to them, all those sort of things. So I looked in a couple of sports to help me figure that out.

The first one is really cool because I have another podcast called the Ask Pat show or Ask Pat and askPat.com. And on that show, I answer voicemail questions from my audience five days a week. As a cool by product of this I get these questions coming in from my audience all the time and they are voicemails. So I get to hear their voice and hear their struggles and all the stuff. I hand select a few for the show, but I get dozens every day.

By far the number one question that I had over the past two years of doing that show is, how do I know if what I’m working on is going to work? And that was a really difficult question for me to answer on a fifteen minute podcast. So I actually tried to do that, and I figured out this is a huge topic. I need to see how else I can do this. So I thought about turning that in to a blog post or an eBook or something and then, I did a survey also.

This is the second part of it that I was looking into my audience to figure what to do. And I just confirmed that this was like a huge topic that people needed to know more information about, “How do I know if this idea I’m working on or this idea I have is actually worth pursuing. How do I know it’s not going to fail or it’s the one that going to work in the market.”

And so I decided to write a book about it and it was a fun interesting topic to write about because actually I’m not the first person to talk about this. I don’t know if you remember in The 4 Hour Work Week by Tim Ferriss, he has a chapter called testing the news where he just, in one chapter, it’s a very small thing. But he talked about how for instance he paid Google for Google ad words to get cold traffic to a website where he was selling something. I think it was French Sherwood shirt or something, and he was validating that business idea.

One of this see if people were interested in it first before building it out. And so he actually kept track of how many people clicked on the buy now button. And that was how he could tell whether or not this is something people wanted because that was a sign that yes, they were actually going to pay money for it. And that chapter was so short, but so many people talked about that and have used that to help them validate business ideas. And there’s a lot of other ways to do it that have popped up since 2007, and I wanted to explore that.

I wanted to put it out there and share that with everybody in a nice step by step kind of manner. I think I talked about it very well. I’m very excited to share this book with people which is called Will It Fly: How to test your next business idea so you don’t waste your time and money, because really that’s what it’s all about. It’s about wasting time. You don’t want to waste time. A lot of us who are entrepreneurs and even us who are going to be entrepreneurs, we know that time is our number one asset. We do want to just focus on the things that we know that are going to work out in the end.

And I kind of broke this book up into two major parts in terms of validation. There’s the obvious one which is how do you know if this thing that you are working on is going to be well received in the market? How does it compete versus everybody else who’s already out there, all those sort of things. But the second part and the most important part, which is why I start with this, which is how do you know if that idea is actually going to fit with the you. Like, how does that validate your strengths? How does it actually complement where you are going and where you want to be? A lot of times– I know you and I we both go to conferences and at the end of the day, usually after the conferences is over, we are sitting in a bar somewhere, and we have these chats and we get pretty deep with what we talk about.

A lot of times these conversations are about like, how is life and stuff. And I know through just personal conversations with people, that a lot of successful entrepreneurs are unhappy. And they are unhappy because they are at the top of the ladder, but it’s not the ladder they want to be on top of, the business that they chose is not complementing their life. They go out into entrepreneurship to have control and they’ve lost control. Or they are doing something that they don’t feel fulfilled about. So I want to catch people early in this book. I’m really excited with what’s it’s become, because it’s going to help a ton of people.

And the cool thing about this is you know, I don’t know if you coach people Steve, but I coach a few people and my students are like, a lot of times, they just simply need permission. They need– it’s like that’s great. Go do it, really? Okay. Okay. Somebody gave me permission to do it, so I’m going to do it. I want this book to be sort of that permission giver for people like yeah that idea is great, like it’s checked out. It’s gone through all these litmus tests. It’s kind of like taking these experiments and actually then going full scale after you’ve started with small scale experiments. It’s either that or people go through the book and they are like, wow this was actually a really bad idea. I’m so glad I didn’t waste two years of my life and money on it, and I figured this out now instead of later.

That’s what kind of what the book is about. That’s really been my one thing over the last year. You know, I do have other things I’ve been trying to make the systems and the stuff within my business better, the teams. I’ve been expanding my team. I hired a content manager which has been completely helpful for helping me plan into the future in terms of content and helping me figure out what to write, when and how to incorporate it into the different launches and things I’ve been coming out with. Even down to, I know…

Steve: You have someone handling your email now, I know right?

Pat: Yeah, Jessica. I feature her in episode 155 of my podcast. I interviewed her because she was such a huge weight off my shoulders. Like she, oh my gosh, I had nearly 10,000 unread emails when I hired her.

Steve: I got 24,000 right now actually. I need her. I need a Jessica.

Pat: Are you serious? Oh my gosh.

Steve: In fact how much are you paying her? May be I’ll have to make an offer.

Pat: Yeah, I can make that connection for you, she’s like amazing. She was able to help me create a system where now I go into my email and I don’t even look at my inbox, I go into my “urgent box” and that’s what I need to see and only the things that I need to see. You know, she goes in there and reads most of my emails beforehand unless they kind of bypass the inbox and go directly into my urgent box based on who I’m getting emails from. But there’s a lot of systems in place, and you can listen into that in episode 115. But I’ve had her, I have Jenner who is my content manager. And really just focusing on the systems moving forward to make sure that my time is spent exactly where it needs to be spent which is kind of so much of the theme for this book.

Steve: So on the topic of validation; it’s actually where I find most people screw up at least in the world of ecommerce. Not validating your product kind of usually leads to like a garage full of products that don’t sell. I had this one reader who actually recently brought in really nice lady. She had been running her jewelry business for six years. She has her stuff listed on Etsy, Amazon, eBay, but she’s actually only had a couple of sales in six years. Now, six years is a long time, right? What do you think Pat. Do you think it’s fair to say that her business isn’t working?

Pat: Her business isn’t working, but there’s a reason that she’s been doing this for so long and I would say there’s a little bit of passion behind which she is doing, she sees it more than just a business. That totally can be great, but it also if you are trying to run a business that can earn profit, passion can also screw you up. There has to be some sort of business aspect on the other end of it which means you have to be making money one way or the other. So you know, I’m curious to see how her garage looks like, and how much inventory is there. Did she need all that in the beginning, or did she need to just start with a few prototypes and other things at first just to make sure that this is something that people would want to buy.

Steve: Yeah, here’s actually another question that a reader sent in, actually specifically for you because I kind of told people that you were coming on. So if you wouldn’t mind yeah, so Steve and Pat big fun of your show. I’ve been rooting for the same football team for six years now, but they keep losing the big game to the Stanford Cardinal year after year. Should I just give up all together and wear the Stanford colors with pride. I mean six years is a long time, right?

Pat: Well, let’s talk about this a little bit. No, because– no never, never go.

Steve: Six years without a win. It’s time you get. You didn’t answer the first question correctly either by the way. You were supposed to tell the lady to give up.

Pat: No, it’s not about giving up; it’s about reassessing where you are at, and what it is that people want. Really, that’s where it all starts. It starts with the market researching and understanding what people want and actually using transactions to validate, because maybe she did try validating. And this is what a lot of people do. They go to their friends. They go to their families and say, “Is this something you would be interested in?” And they say, “Yeah totally, I’d buy that.” But when it comes down to actually putting money on the table, they don’t. And that’s also where a lot of people screw up.

So I don’t know how she went into this, but she’s done traditionally what a lot of people do which is they built something, maybe they heard it was a good idea. Maybe somebody said it would be, and they go to rooftops and they scream like “buy my products.” And then nobody buys it and they wonder why. The validation process is an iterative process where along the way you can see where the points of failure are, and you can figure out where to fix it from there, or if you should continue moving or not and then no on that Stanford thing, ever.

Steve: So I would say that the people– so I ran a class that teaches ecommerce and I would say that the people who kind of run into problems fall in to two camps. Those that rush in without research, kind of wasting money on stuff that doesn’t sell, they get discouraged and then they quit. And on the other side of the spectrum, there’s people that never start because they don’t want to choose the wrong idea, they don’t want to fail. They are kind of scared about the competition. They don’t have the money or resources and generally they are just kind of scared to start.

Pat: I mean that’s most entrepreneurs. I mean, you think about people out there who are scared to start and all the amazing things that they can do, it almost makes me sad. I mean, what if there’s a person out there who has the cure for cancer, but they are just too scared of the publicity that would come with it or the failure. But you have the cure for cancer. I’m not saying that ecommerce is essentially the same as a cure for cancer, but it might be. I mean you are solving a person’s pain or problem with the product that you are promoting and putting out there and creating. So you are actually doing your potential customer a disservice hopefully because you aren’t creating something that is actually helpful.

When it comes to competition, the fact that you are coming in later than everybody else is actually a huge advantage. I talk about this in the book, because you get a bird’s eye perspective. You get to do some more research where you get to see, what I like to call your market map, your three Ps. You discover all the places where people are at and you target on each. You discover all the people who are starting out already, and also all the products they are buying already. When you create this map, you get a bird’s eye perspective of everything that’s going on, and you actually begin to start to know about that market better than the people who are already there. You can see what the problems are. You can see where the issues are, where the holes are. It’s very easy for you to see what’s missing.

And then you go in and you talk to some customers and you talk to people in that potential market and you see exactly and you hear from their own voice what it is that they need. That way when you go into the space, you are not just guessing, you are not just creating something based on a win. You are going there knowing that this is something that people want. And that’s really what validation is all about. It’s taking that guessing game out.

I mean, I want people to go out into this book with an idea in mind and go through the litmus test where the people who go read this book and get new ideas along the way. But what happens and every time I’ve ran people through this process, when I’ve validated this book and the principles in it, their idea mops. And it mops because it stops being our idea and becomes an idea for our audience, and it turns into something that will work for them if you actually execute. That’s another big thing; the idea is just part of it.

Steve: I was hoping actually we could just kind of go through step by step through your framework. I know you’ve released a product of your own in the past, the podcast player. And you followed the same principles that you talk in the book.

Pat: Yes. The other thing on that specific example though is because, and why that one is really important, is because I made a huge mistake back in 2010 with software. That was my first foray into software and I rushed into it. I didn’t do validation. Two of my friends released WordPress plug-ins all within about a couple of miles from each other and each of them were making six figures a month from those releases, and that’s why I got into it because I was like, wow, this is an incredible opportunity. This is working for you guys.

I am going to come up with some plug-in ideas and sell it, because I have this platform at smartpassiveincome.com. It’s going to go really well, right? And so the first thing I do is come up with ideas really first, and then I kept them secret. That’s the first mistake that people make. It’s like, they keep it a secret. And I wanted to keep it a secret because A) I was too afraid of telling other people about my great ideas and having them steal it which will never happen, and B) I wanted it to be like this huge reveal on my day one, you know from launch. “Oh my god, look at Pat’s amazing plug-in. Let’s all buy it.” That obviously never happened because I didn’t release it.

I spent $15,000 trying to develop two at the same time. That was how greedy I was. That goes back to the purpose of creating in the first place. It wasn’t to help people. It was actually to just try and make money. And every time I chase the money, I’ve always failed. Every time I’ve put my clients first it’s always been a win. So that was a huge lesson there. But also because I rushed into it, because I didn’t validate it, and because I didn’t go through some of the steps in the book which is like, what is this idea actually mean.

You know, we have these ideas in our brains. Our brain does a really good job of getting inspired and coming up with things, but it doesn’t do a very good job of ordering them. We think these things all over the place. And I tried to portray that in an email to these developers and because of that they just didn’t understand exactly what I wanted. I didn’t even understand what I wanted. And when they came with something, it was not what I had envisioned. And there was no way to match my vision, because I didn’t really have one. I just like, hey make this for me. And it just didn’t work out, but again, because I didn’t validate in the beginning.

Steve: You didn’t try to sell it at all though, right?

Pat: No, no, it was just terrible. I mean, I literally shared it after it was built. And people were like, “Yeah, that’s okay.” And that was, oh man, this is not going to go so well. I should have done that first. I should have just had the idea, shared it with a few people on my audience, share it with a few of my friends and colleagues to see if this was actually something that they would want. And when you speak about your idea with other people, they start to pull calls on it. They start to tell you what could be better; they start to tell you what’s not so good about it. That’s what we did with the smart podcast later.

You know, I actually built this thing for myself and then I actually wanted to share it with others, because they all said that they wanted in, but then when I came down to it I wanted to see whether they would pay for it and that’s where the beta group came in. Then we released as a WordPress plug-in. But I released it in a sort of an MVP model which is a minimal viable product. All these ideas I had in my head in terms of what I wanted to include in it, they wouldn’t validate it. I went to that beta group to see what it is that they would want and actually it turned out to be completely different. So I was so glad that they were there at the beginning. I guess I can just walk you through the process.

Steve: Yes, let’s take a step back. So step one, I know the first chapter in your book is called mission design. What do you mean by that?

Pat: So mission design is kind of stepping away from this idea. Like, yes, it’s about validating your idea, but it’s about looking inward and seeing where you want to go, and does this idea then actually complement that. Does it fit into that trajectory that you want to go on? Does it fit into your five year plan? The mission design is really all about these, there’s three thought experiments within mission design that are really important for you to think about so that you know where you are going.

It’s like, the analogy I use in the book and you know, there’s a few flight analogies in the Will It Fly writing. It’s because we’re always in the launch stuff, but launching is just the start of it. How do you know if it’s going to take off and fly, that’s why it’s called Will It Fly. This is really like how do you know if this is going to fly for you? And so the first test is really important, because it helps you determine like what would be perfect, what would be a perfect flight in five years.

So the thought experiment is like Steve, let’s say you and I for whatever reason we’ve lost our connection. We don’t talk for however many years, and then all of a sudden we find each other, crossing each other at an airport. It’s five years, I’m like “Dude, Steve, like how’s everything? So good to see you, how is life?” And you say, “Life is amazing. It’s everything I ever wanted to be right now.” And I go, “That’s awesome. Tell me why? Like what’s happening in your life right now?”

If you think about that, what would you say? I mean, the way that you break this down is you fold a piece of paper into four sections so you have four portions. And you right down your top four categories of your life that are most important to you. So for me it’s family, professional, finances and health, and then under each of those categories, you literally write down, what would make you say that life is awesome and perfect five years from now. This is not like a wish list or anything. It’s like you are literally thinking what would be perfect right now for five years from now.

And this sheet that you create becomes the basis for all the decisions that you make. It has been so helpful for me, because actually for me I get all these new opportunities coming my way, and a lot of times we get like googly [ph] eye with certain opportunities, but then I look at my sheet and I see, well, that actually won’t be a good fit for me. Like for instance I have this opportunity to create a hosting company right now for podcasts, which makes complete sense for me and who I am in my business in terms of where I’m at in podcasting world and all that stuff. It could potentially make millions of dollars and I have it on air space already, I mean every customer at [inaudible 00:20:07] podcast can become one of these people.

But it just doesn’t make sense for me right now with my family and my health, because all the things that I listed it would take me away from that. I would need to put a lot more time and effort into the professional and finance part, but it would take away from my health and family part.

Steve: So is the framework that you are talking about more for a kind of higher level goals, like we are just talking about the podcast player. Obviously these things are just too deep for a product focus idea, right?

Pat: Yes, but the product then becomes one component of you leading up to that. So that’s the first thing. And then there other things, for example, like– so that experiment kind of you looking into the future. The other one, you look into the past and you look at all the different jobs that you’ve had and different vocations and careers and maybe volunteer work and teams that you’ve joined, and you think about what you liked and dislike about those things, because a lot of times we move through life without really thinking about what we like.

We just do that whatever it is we are doing right now, but when you look in the past, you kind of get this parameter of the things that you like and the things that you dislike. And you can make sure that the things that you continue to do from that point forward match up in line with the things that you like and not with things you dislike. And for instance, I’ve run through this experiment for a lot of people who love to be sort of behind the scenes.

They love making things work, but they are not really into putting themselves out there in front of the world, so they are more likely to be happy with building a business on the back end, something a little bit more on sort of the ecommerce side where they are not necessarily the face or brand of their business, but they are on the back side creating things and putting things out there into the world. Whereas me for example, I love being in front of people, I love talking and being the personality, so that’s why, Smart Passive Income, even though that’s what it’s called, everybody knows that that’s Pat Flynn site, because I put myself out there.
4
So there’s a few other exercises and mission designs that are never really important. But I think what most people might be interested in are how to take this idea and actually develop it and get into a place where you can then validate it and actually having people pay for it before you actually build it. And so to start with that, it really starts in what I like to call the development lab. So it’s creating this idea, but then actually mind mapping out and then figuring out what its purpose is.

And there’s a really cool exercise where if you have this idea, I want you to write a whole page worth of, what is this that this thing is? What is it that it does, who is it for? What are the benefits, what are the features? And then take that one page and try to squeeze it down into one paragraph. Can you get all those essentials out of that page into one paragraph? And then one more time, turning it into one sentence that becomes the thing that you are doing and why you are doing what you are doing now, and who is it for.

And that’s a really good exercise to help shape your mind around why is it what you are doing, and what is this that you are creating? And then from there, that’s what you take and then talk about with other people. And through those conversations, you can really have people like I said help poke holes in that thing. So if you have an ecommerce idea for a product for example, just talk about it with people. And say, see what– like literally go to Starbucks and be like, “Hey, can I buy you coffee?” “What’s the catch?” “I have this idea for a product; I just want to get your honest opinion about.”

That is a golden opportunity for you. And the cool thing is it’s a stranger. You won’t ever see them again. You won’t really know– you won’t really care what they have to say, but it’s going to be so important for you and what you move forward with. And even though they might poke holes in it, that’s good information for you that you can use moving forward.

Steve: So you don’t advice going to people that you know or your friends for opinions?

Pat: I think it’s still helpful, but your target customer or just random strangers is where you can get the unbiased kind of information from. If you go to your friends and family, they are going to want to tell you what you want to hear, but not necessarily what you need to hear.

Steve: What about finding people that are in your target market right? If you go to Starbucks or something, that person might not be your ideal customer, right?

Pat: No, but they can still give you some good advice, but you are right. I think the best place to go to is to find people in your target audience. And so there’s actually an exercise in the book, I actually talked about earlier which is your market mapping. There’s specific steps on finding places online and offline to find where those people are.

Forums are great, forums I think are the most underutilized tool on the web, because there is just a plethora of information on a specific niche, people who are pouring their hearts out telling stories, asking questions. It’s like going through their problems and people who are all in that space talking about it. Because a lot of people don’t realize how important forums are because it’s where you connect with other people like you.

And if you can go into those forums and use the search functions, there’s some really cool search functions you can use in Google to scope out some really cool things. So for example, if you want to find out problems that your target audience is having, you can look up certain phrases in those forums using Google. And Google will spit out every thread in that forum where those certain phrases were used. So I can say for example, let’s use, I don’t know, just any forum. Let’s use the fire fishing forum for example. If I want to look at a certain phrase– sorry I just heard my daughter crying.

Steve: Yeah, I hear that.

Pat: She’s like don’t give away this tip, Still the trick Google is, you know how when you put quotations around a word Google spits out the top search results for that exact phrase. Well you can do the same thing, but look through a specific website for that exact phrase, sorry.

Steve: Pat is still recovering from the cold by the way, just so you guys know.

Pat: I am, but that’s okay. So you put a certain phrase in quotations, space site colon, and then whatever URL, so firefishing.com. And that will then spit out every inference of that phrase in that forum on Google.

Steve: I used to do this all the time for the wedding forums to figure out what brides were looking for actually.

Pat: You are familiar with this. So it’s…

Steve: I was Christine [inaudible 00:25:56] on the forums. I never went [inaudible 00:26:00] but yeah.

Pat: You don’t even need to be a part of the forums to find that information although you could go in. But those forums are really helpful, because then you can go in there, you can talk to people, you can build authority. Actually there was a forum in the Lead Exam space that I became an authority in, and that really helped to launch the Lead Exam website that I had. And I didn’t go in there and I didn’t start promoting right away.

I went in there, I built friendships, I added value, I answered people’s questions, I became a resource for people and then all over a sudden people got interested on what I had to say and what I offered, and that’s when my business started to grow from there. But that’s where you can find people. Plus there’s also websites and you can look through iTunes, there’s a search engine. Amazon is a search engine; you can find a lot of authority figures there who you can then look at who their followers are, Facebook graphs, which is a fantastic resource to find people too.

And then again it’s just about putting yourself out there, making cold calls is actually one of the best strategies you can use too and that’s a tough thing to do. But I know some of you who are listening to my show might remember Dane Maxwell’s episode in episode 46 where he used to cold call small businesses and just ask them, “What are your biggest struggles? What is something you do every day that you hate? What’s a software that you use to help you, and what do you wish was done better with?” Those are all idea extractions and questions that tell him what needs to be done, and he can go in there and build that software for them.

Steve: You know it’s funny. Cold calling is actually quite difficult, because a lot of times they don’t want to talk to you, and you end up dealing with a lot of objections. We do that for our business too. We cold call event planners, and kind of ask them if they need any of our services. It is tough.

Pat: It is tough and that’s why I feel like now you can utilize social media to actually initiate those conversations, or emails to just establish a relationship first before you call them out of nowhere. If you can provide value in the same way, or at the same time, then you they are going to be more likely to reciprocate at least by just having a small conversation with you and then you can go from there.

Steve: So one of the biggest mistakes for the students in my class at least is that they go in with a product that they are interested in and it has a market for, but there’s nothing unique about their product, it kind of just blends in with the rest. So what are some of your frameworks for figuring out what’s going to make your thing special?

Pat: So the market plan will help you because you get to see all the products that are out there. But one of my favorite things to do is go on Amazon, I know a lot of you use Amazon as your foot billing platform. Look at the competitors products and look at the three star reviews for all those products. The five star reviews are okay and you know a lot of times it’s just like super fans, and you get some good information three too. And the one star review maybe had a bad experience or whatever.

The three star reviews is where you can get the most honest information. You know because it’s a three star review. There is going to be things they like about it and things they dislike about it. A lot of times you come across these reviews that literally say, here are the pros of this and here’s are the cons of this.

I also like to, if I were in the ecommerce space, which I might get into in the future, I would literally buy those products and use them and see what they are like, and see what I can do to make them even better and then talk to people about what those ideas are. Say, “What if you had this but it also included that, how much would that affect your love for this product, or how much do you feel that would change your thoughts about what this actually can do for you? Again those conversations are so important to have.

And then also then taking a little bit of initiative and making a prototype of what that next thing might be and see if it’s actually something that people would– gauge their reactions. That’s the most important thing and why I love the one on one in person reactions or conversations, because you can literally see in a split second what their thoughts are and gauge their body language on what a new feature might do to your product. Those conversations are really important.

Steve: So in the context of your podcast player, did you go through and test a whole bunch of different players and then asked people what they liked and disliked about the existing ones?

Pat: Well, the interesting thing about that one was all the players out there were just simply a play button and a stop button. So it was easy for me to determine what other features could be included to differentiate it, but then it was a lot about which ones are most important. Then we actually went in and actually surveyed a bunch of people and said okay out of these lists or out of this list of features that can be included in this product which ones are most important to you.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: Then we got the top ones there, people added their own and some of them were kind of outlandish and some of them were right on the money. Again I wouldn’t have known that if it wasn’t for those conversations, and those conversations can be hard to deal, I mean I had one on one conversations through Skype, but also we ran a survey with some of our beta group, we tried to figure that information out. Those in person conversations which are the most helpful they can be very– you can get very nervous leading up to that.

I think even that goes along with what you said earlier, some people are just sacred and it’s really scary, but that’s part of the process of becoming an entrepreneur. It’s not going to just land in your lap, you have to do the work, and you have to go out there and get uncomfortable because that’s where all the awesome stuff happens is when you get uncomfortable. If you are comfortable the entire time, it probably means you aren’t doing what you needed to do.

Steve: The process that you went through, it sounds like you sent out a list, created a beta group of people who were interested, and then you proposed to a much smaller group a list of features that you had them evaluate essentially right?

Pat: Here’s the validation process, so this is part four which is called the flight simulator where you’re actually doing a small scale experiment with this idea that you have that you’ve kind of flushed out already. You’ve determined based on conversations, based on research, based on what this would be. This is kind of like where your myth is and myth busters right? What you want to put to the test.

The first step is you get in front of an audience. If you have an audience already great, if you have existing customers perfect, that’s where you start. If you don’t I should give you eight different ways, actually nine different ways that you can get in front of an audience even if it’s not yours. I think this is where a lot of other instructions on validation falls short is they often assume that you have an audience already. There’s a lot of different strategies from paid advertising to getting on other people’s shows to kick starter and suing platforms like that to get in front of an audience and validate your product too.

That’s a first step, and then from there if you get in front of your audience or you have an audience already for example, then it’s about hyper targeting. What I mean by that is you have this audience already, but your solution is going to be only for a certain people with a certain problem, and you have to have people in that audience to essentially raise your hand and say yeah I have that problem or I could use something like that. Again you’re hyper targeting because those are the people you want to actually test and have conversations with when you propose your idea which is the next step.

You want to share the solution with them and then come back to them a little bit later and say, okay well I’ve had a few people that were interested in this. If there were indeed people who were interested, and then you say okay, well I need to know for sure that this is actually something that you are interested in. If you are I am trying to get 20 people to actually preorder this, which will give me notification like yes this is something to build, and if I don’t get that I’m am not going to build it.

I mean again you’re being very honest about this, this is kind of what’s different than the ten fairest model, which is like you have a buy now button which looks real, but you’re just gauging that quick note. This way you’re actually having conversations with people and you’re saying this is what I propose, this is what you all said you’re interested in. If you are preorder it here or PayPal me this money here which is what some people do actually. If I get 20 people, then I am going to build it, if not I will just simply refund your money.

Steve: Incidentally that’s actually how I launched my class. I got on like a webinar and I said I am going to build this course, prepay me and I’ll develop it, and 35 people signed up right away, and then I was like crap I guess I have to build this now.

Pat: Yeah, but that’s is good you know it’s going to work instead of where a lot of people do is they would build that course first, and then say hey guys I’ve got this new course, are you interested? And then maybe they’re not. In that way you knew because there were 35 people that were interested, so you did have validation to move forward there. I liked how you said you used the webinar because that’s another strategy to get in front of an audience whether you have your own.

You get them on a webinar, or you paid to have cold traffic get in to this webinar and they get to see you and of course on that webinar I’m sure you provided a ton of value. Then you had your pitch at the end, and then people were interested and that’s actually, I have several examples of people who have done this in all different kinds of ways in the book. A couple of people have used the webinar strategy very well. Some people just went out and hustled and talked to a bunch of people in person. I know that Kagan actually I don’t know if you know this, but he validated a beef jerky subscription company called Sumo Jerky.

Steve: Yes.

Pat: He validated that as a challenge and that was done in 24 hours. He earned a thousand dollars profit. That was his challenge to see if he could earn a thousand dollars profit in 24 hours for an idea that his audience gave him. That idea was a jerky service company, and he went out there and now that company he actually handed out that company off to somebody named Ryan to become a CEO, who’s now a chief jerk in that company as Noah says, and that company earns five figures a month now and…

Steve: That’s crazy.

Pat: If he didn’t validate it wouldn’t have been built, but he validated it, and that told him to put more resources into it and build it out full scale.

Steve: Let me ask you this, so let’s say you had zero audience and you wanted to market your podcast player, what method would you personally have used to get feedback about your player?

Pat: Well I would start with building a list of who the podcasters are out there, and then also who the podcasters are out there who have influence to other podcasters, because that would be really important to know. I would get in front of those people, talk to them maybe even get in person with them at a conference or so and take them out to dinner, and then tell them about what this idea is, and actually give them a copy to use and actually set it up completely for them maybe, even on a sand box site to show them what it looked like so they can see if it’s actually that’s my prototype for them, and they can get a fill for what it’s like.

Then I can say hey if this is something you’re interested in, I’d love to give it to you for half off. If I collect 20 people or however many people depending on how many people you reach out to. Essentially you want to get eight to 12% say yes and actually pay you based off the amount of people you ask. That’s sort of like in alignment with the earlier doctor graph.

Steve: It’s funny that you mention going to conferences, because it is kind of hard as a nobody to just randomly reach out to people and have them respond to you right?

Pat: It is but it’s not possible right.

Steve: Right.

Pat: But when you’re there in person its like people are going to be rude and say…

Steve: Yeah exactly.

Pat: No, I’m not going to talk to you right now, but they will shake your hand and even if that’s not where you have this conversation, you at least made a point of contact. Then when you follow up with them later, even if you call them it’s no longer a cold call anymore. That’s why conferences are a great place to go, but even if it’s not a conference establishing that relationship on social media, sending an email out or starting as a person who runs a guest post or maybe you talk about and reveal all this incredible information.

Again asking for nothing in return, but then you later then talk about this opportunity. That’s how a lot of people have gotten in front of me is we build a relationship together, and then I later find out that I have this really cool thing that’s is going on, and I ended up buying it or using it, and then of course later promoting it to my audience.

Steve: We’ve kind of covered steps one and two. Three is kind of market conditions right, which is determining the level of competition and what’s out there?

Pat: Yes.

Steve: We’ve kind of it seems like we’ve kind of mixed all the different steps together.

Pat: Yeah, we kind of did.

Steve: Is there anything that we missed in that spot and kind of just gauging the competition and what the market is like?

Pat: Yeah I mean one of my favorite things to do is come up with your customer plan P-L-A-N. This is something I came up with which is sort of an alternative to your customer avatar. Obviously knowing your avatar is important, and avatar is sort of a made up person that you create who is your ideal customer who you can know about them. A lot of people will give this person a name, and a life and what their problems are.

That’s key I think it’s important to know who your audience is, but every time I’ve tried to create my own customer avatar, it’s felt a little weird to me. I don’t know if you feel the same way, but it’s like I know that person is fake right? Like it’s a made up person and I never truly feel connected to that person. Which is why I feel like it’s important to go out there and actually get to know a few people who are who have those struggles, so you…

Steve: My avatar has always been wrong.

Pat: Has it always been wrong just because you make it up and it’s not…

Steve: We make it up, and then it turns out not to be the right market, and then we just switch on the fly after we have a couple of customers. I don’t know if that’s how your experience?

Pat: No it is.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: I like how you say that it was after when you got customers, after you got people who actually are in your target audience, and you’ve gotten to know them or at least get an understanding of their buying habits and what not. The customer plan the P-L-A-N is not going to– the P is the problems. You’ve got to know what the problems are. Every business is just a solution to a person’s problem, and the better you understand those problems the more likely it is you’re going to succeed right? Then it’s the language, that’s the L and that’s really important, because the language is what your use to connect with that person on your sales page and conversations and tweets.

You’ve got to know how they describe those problems or what they say. You’ve got to understand the language of your audience, and that’s really important especially if you’re going into a space that you know nothing about, because then if you start talking about this solution that you have, even if though it’s a great solution if you don’t know the way that that audience talks, you’re just going to seem like you don’t belong there. You need to know the language.

Steve: On that language point before you go on. Yeah so incidentally I use that technique when people start asking me questions I would use their language and put that on my sales page, and that actually ended up helping improve conversations on myself.

Pat: Like to really copy paste it, right?

Steve: Almost copy paste.

Pat: Yeah, you can do that. I mean the survey that I ran in July I literally copy pasted parts and put them in my email sequence, like for subject lines and bullet points and the response rate has been huge. I jumped from a 35% open rate to about a 75% open rate on sending those emails which is crazy. The language is super-super important. Then the A is one of my favorites which is the anecdotes or the stories, and this is where you can start to get like really into the feelings and really into the head of who are your target about customers. It’s actually like pin pointing a few people in your target audience and getting just to know them and what their story is.

Some of the best questions you could ask in those conversations, I got this from [inaudible 00:40:05] from you know MPR and startup because he was talking about– he’s a great interviewer right, and one of his favorite questions to ask is tell me about a story when blank. That’s one of the most powerful questions because then your option is going to get, “Oh well I did this and this.” It’s like oh well, it was Saturday morning, it was kind of– you get this whole spectrum of really the whole setting of everything.

That’s really important to know when you are looking to get into the heads of your customer and then the N is the need. Based on the problems and the language and the stories you can really come up with what truly that need is that you’re trying to solve, and again when you get to know that part of your audience the plan it does become your plan. You get to create that thing to really help them, and then other part of the market map going back to the three Ps that I talked about earlier.

You’ve got the places the people and the products. If you were to just simply do that, like if you were do that right now and list just the top 20 places your audience is at, the top 20 people the other influencers in the space, and the top 20 products that they use better on a Amazon or elsewhere. I mean that is such an incredible tool that you can use because okay you’ve got the list of places. Those are places you can advertise, those are places you could guest post on. Those are places that you could do retargeting on, or any of that stuff. The people, those are people who you can JV with, you could have as a guest on your show or be a guest on their show.

You could connect with on Twitter and follow up and build that relationship. You could scope them out on at conferences, and the products those are potentially products that yes your competitors, but you can also be an affiliate with them or work out deals with them, or at least get an understanding of what the top products are that people are buying, and what’s wrong with them so you can come out and them build something that’s even better.

Steve: I was curious on you anecdotes, can you give me an example of someone you would target for example maybe in the context of your podcast player an anecdote example.

Pat: Yeah so you know to discover the anecdotes for that one it’s a little bit tougher, because nobody really even thinks about the podcast player, but the story is about the podcast and how they’re trying to grow it and how they’re trying to make the experience better for their audience, and how they’re struggling. I have these conversations all the time with people about their podcasts. It might be– I can’t pin point a person specifically right now, but there are people out there who are coming up with brand new podcasts, they have a new show, they have a new noteworthy and they just want as many people to listen to their show as possible.

Digging deeper into that, part of the information that I’m giving to people that people might not know which is what you’re doing when you come out with a product a lot of times is for this one is specifically is that a lot of people didn’t know that a lot of people listen to your show on your website as opposed to on iTunes or in Stinchar.

Steve: Right.

Pat: Even though we want them to listen to there, I have dated a backup to the fact that people are listening on your website, and so what is that experience like for people who are listening, who is listening on your website. Well it’s a play button and a stop button and a volume button and that’s it. Well what if there is was an opportunity there in that call to action that moment that usually it’s a first impression that people have to make that experience even better.

The conversation or the story might not be the podcast star, maybe it’s about the podcast listener who is listening on the website. Yeah press play button and I read this show notes and that was it. Well that is a boring experience like how can we enhance to make that story even better?

Steve: Yeah the reason why I asked that question is because in the context of my email autoresponder I had started telling stories about my life related to business. Once I started doing that I found that people started buying my stuff after reading these anecdotes. For example I told a story about how I almost didn’t ask my out my wife and take that chance, and it’s kind of related to business right talking that leap.

Pat: Totally.

Steve: I had other stories about when I first had my kid, I did all this book reading and I thought that I knew how to take care of my child and then the kid came out, and then I didn’t know what I was doing and it all helped. For some, I think those stories actually had an effect on my conversion rate, but I couldn’t really exactly measure it, I don’t know is that kind of what the A stands for in you plan or…

Pat: Yeah totally.

Steve: Okay.

Pat: It’s just getting to– because like you said when you started sharing your stories your audience got to know you better and trust you better. When you learn about the stories of your target audience, or the people who are going to be using the product you get to understand them better. You get to really feel for them and trust them and what they’re saying because it gets placed in this context. Also in just as a side note like using your own stories in your marketing is great, I mean Will It Fly is full of stories, I am pretty sure you’ve…

Steve: It starts with a story right?

Pat: Yeah it starts with a story about my son who on his third birthday I taught him how to fold the paper aero plane, which was like the coolest thing for me when I was a child, so I wanted to pass sit on to him. I folded just a plain dark design, I flew it across the room, and he was just like, Oh my God amazed. Like any three year old boy who saw his dad do something cool, he wants to do the same thing, so he like immediately grabbed a piece of paper, and even before I could give him instructions he kind of like started folding, like going through the emotions, but obviously it just ended up becoming this, it looked like a boat really more than a plane.

He threw it and it didn’t fly anywhere of course, and he flew it again and he ended up saying I hate paper aero planes. I was like no like you’ve got to, you need somebody to teach you these things and these principles first. It needs wings and all these things. I think that’s how a lot of people build their businesses, it’s like they see other people doing something and its cool, and they try to emulate it, and then the first moment it goes bad or doesn’t work they just give up.

Steve: Yeah totally.

Pat: You have to get that instruction, you have to go through a process of folding one, and then folding the other an then actually having that plane before you can fly and make it work. Now you know ever since I taught [inaudible 00:45:40] how to do it properly, he’s has been coming up with all these new designs and trying things out. He understands now that failure is a part of the process, and that’s what entrepreneurship is, but also getting advice and learning from somebody who’s done it before is also really important too.

Steve: At this point we’ve talked about validating the idea, the value preposition, the mission design. What is the next step after we validate it?

Pat: Well if you validate it, well then it’s like…

Steve: Just start selling.

Pat: All the systems go. I mean not just start selling, but then you building it out and actually work with those people to turn it into something that they would use and your other targeted customers would use. I mean a lot of people get the validation part right, but then they just build and then they start putting in their own things into it and no. You have this amazing resource from your existing customers who have paid you money already, talk to them.

They’re going to want to know and keep up with what you’re up to, so keep in constant contact with them, creating a small private facebook group for those people so they can stay connected to you and what you’re up to, providing news updates. It’s just like on kickstarter right? It’s the exact same thing as kickstarter and actually kickstarter is a great platform for validating although it comes with these all other things like fulfillment of pledge things, and actually going too big at first which is why I don’t recommend it. Like kickstarter, after the– I don’t know if you’ve ever backed anything on kick starter Steve?

Steve: I have yeah.

Pat: You’re paying for something essential that isn’t built yet, and over the course of the period when the contest ends and you get that item, they are giving you updates on the manufacturing process, they’re giving you insights, and at the same time they’re also building that relationship with you in addition to just keeping you filled in on when that thing is going to come and arrive at your doorstep.

You can do the same thing with your audience too, and by the time you get to that point you’ve build up this thing, you know the systems, you’ve created it in a way that your target audience wants, and it just becomes this thing that you can scale. Scaling is different for all types of businesses obviously, from consultation work and private stuff to just digital mass production, but that’s where you go from there.

Steve: It seems like all these principles that you’ve talked about apply to pretty much anything regardless of what type of product, whether it’s a service or product or a physical product, right yeah.

Pat: Totally, like if you’re doing a service you would actually be doing that service for somebody and seeing if A) they would want it. If they don’t want it, then you don’t have to worry about everything else, but if they do then you go and you do it and you work with them to see if it was done well and what could be done better. Again you’re doing it with just a few people before you do it with masses.

Steve: Yeah that’s great Pat. We’ve been chatting for quite a while already, surprising actually.

Pat: Yeah, I can’t believe it.

Steve: Yeah, so when does the book come out, where can you get it, and if anyone has any questions for you where can they reach you?

Pat: Thanks Steve well the book comes out February 1st, which I am like super stoked about it and very nervous. This book was really hard for me to do actually, because I’ve been blogging for almost seven years now, and I can write a 5000 word blog post in half a day or a day, easy, but this book was just a challenge for me. I think it was a challenge because I wanted it to be great.

I am very happy with what I’ve come up with what I came up with, and so willitflybook.com, you can check out the book. It comes out February 1st. You can preorder it before then, or order it of course afterwards. Willitflybook.com, and you can connect with me on Twitter @patflynn if you have any quick questions about it, and I’d love to answer and I am here for you guys.

Steve: Yeah and I am giving away recaps to Stanford fans only, so if you’re a [inaudible 00:49:08] unfortunately the offer doesn’t apply.

Pat: I don’t, oh man.

Steve: I just came up with that by the way.

Pat: That good, oh man that’s funny.

Steve: I’m just curious before we go why a book, because it’s a tremendous amount of work. Why a book and not a series of YouTube videos or something like that?

Pat: Totally great thought. The book I feel a lot of people read books right, and a lot of people feel like the book is the start of a lot of things for them, and this book I wanted it to be different than other books. It does have a lot of actionable information; it does have a lot of exercises. One of my pet uses of books are books that tell you why and what, but not necessarily how.

This book does tell you how and I feel like it’s a low easy non threatening sort of a starting point for people. That’s why I wanted it to be a book, and there is of course other things coming and courses and other things coming out later, but the book I felt like was a low buried entry into entrepreneurship, and if I could be there to help hold people’s hands along the way, then it’s going to maximize my impact and maximize the amount of people who actually follow through.

Steve: Cool, sounds like a good reason, well hey thanks Pat for coming on the show, really appreciate you coming on.

Pat: Thanks for having me.

Steve: All right, take care.

Well there you have it, and I hope you got a lot out of this episode. Most of the people who fail at their business neglect to validate their niches before investing significant time and money into a venture. By experimenting and selling early and often, you will eventually find out what works, so pick up Pat’s book which will be available next week.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode101. And once again I want to thank Famebit for sponsoring this episode. As I mentioned earlier Famebit is the best place to find Youtubers, Instagramers and other influencers to promote your products online, and it works. One of my podcast guests Emanuel Elayae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous Youtubers to promote your products.

And finally if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

100: An Interview With My Wife – How We Made $100K Profit In Our First Year Selling Handkerchiefs

How We Made $100,000 Profit In Our First Year Selling Wedding Handkerchiefs

Welcome to an extra special podcast episode. As you know, I’ve been running this podcast for almost 2 years now and we just hit episode 100! Can you believe it?

And to celebrate this very special milestone, I finally convinced my wife to be a guest on the show.

Now up until this point, you haven’t heard from her at all because she’s an introvert. She doesn’t like the spotlight and she hates public speaking.

So I can not tell you what a treat it is for me to have her come on the show.

Jennifer Chou is the better half of MyWifeQuitHerJob.com. We started our online store BumblebeeLinens.com so that she could quit her job and take care of our kids.

And what will be interesting about this episode is that you’ll hear her side of the story about running our business, about working together and how she felt during the entire process.

What You’ll Learn

  • My wife’s version of how we got started with our business and her motivations for doing so
  • Would she really have quit her job if our business flopped?
  • How we came up with the name for our online store
  • How we work together despite having completely opposite personalities
  • How she decides what to carry in our shop
  • How she deals with our Asian vendors
  • How to know something will sell before it’s listed
  • Her advice on office space versus running a business from home with kids
  • Her recommendations on working with your spouse
  • Her future plans for our business

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before I begin, I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing, with over 20,000 Youtubers, Instagramers, people on Twitter looking to promote your company in any vertical, whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more.

Yes, you can get famous Youtubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as a low as $50. And the best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests Emmanuel Elayae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous Youtubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I have an extra special episode for you. Now as you know I have been running this podcast for almost two years now and we just hit episode 100, can you believe that? And to celebrate this very special milestone I finally convinced my wife to be a guest on the show. Now up until this point you haven’t heard from her at all, because she is an introvert. She doesn’t like the spotlight and she hates public speaking.

So I cannot tell you what a treat it is for me to finally have her on. And if incase you don’t know who she is, she is the better half mywifequitherjobjob.com. We started our online store Bumblebeelinens.com so that she could quit her job and take care of our kids. And what’s going to be interesting about today is to hear her side of the story about running our business, about working together and how she felt during the entire process. And with that welcome to the show Jen, how are you doing today?

Jen: I am good Steve.

Steve: So first of off it’s really weird calling you Jen since I normally call you by your nickname, is it okay if I tell people what your nickname is?

Jen: Sure.

Steve: Okay, yes, so I call my wife little because she is a very petite Asian woman. So anyways, so how are you feeling about this, any second thoughts about coming on here today?

Jen: Of course I have second thoughts; you have been haunting me to do this for I don’t know how long. I have been trying to push off as long as possible, but I guess that today is the day.

Steve: Yeah too late we are live already, so I want to start it off, a lot of people out there have heard my version of how we got started, but it would be interesting because to get the story from your perspective. So give us your version of the story on how Bumblebee Linens got started, and kind of your motivations for starting this business?

Jen: Okay, well, I guess I don’t know what you want to know, how we came up with the idea or how we…?

Steve: I just want to hear your side of the story.

Jen: Okay.

Steve: Yeah.

Jen: So I told Steve upfront way when we first started dating that I really wanted to stay at home with the kids when we got married. This is way before we were even talking about having kids even. I told him I don’t know why it was very important to me, both my parents worked when I was growing up, but for some reason I had this idea that I wanted to stay at home with the kids once I had them.

So I was working a pretty good job in finance, I had a couple of big companies and I didn’t ever have this desire to stay in that role. So it was almost bidding my time until we got married and had kids. But I guess one other thing that we talked about was we — I mean we tried a ton of different things. We tried the franchising; we looked into doing I don’t know…

Steve: We did, we wanted to do Kumons.

Jen: Well we looked into Kumons; we looked into dream dinners…

Steve: Dream dinners yeah, which is a place where, you basically — yeah.

Jen: You meal prep, it’s meal prepping. So we tried all these different things and then I was thinking, oh maybe we tutor, I don’t know I was just trying to think of anything. So Steve was like why don’t we try an online business and I was like, oh what does that mean? He is like, we can sell on eBay where we can do whatever, and I said, okay, let’s try it.

So then we were trying to think of what to sell, and at the time I was really into the embroidery, I guess machine embroidery that as my hobby. I was making baby bibs; I was embroidering baby blankets for friends. And I was thinking oh my gosh we should come up with the idea that we can personalize something, so then we can raise the price of it. And then I was like, okay, well what can we personalize?

And I thought back to when we got married, I looked everywhere for handkerchiefs. I looked everywhere, because I really wanted a name like my name, Steve’s name and the writing would be on the handkerchief, and I couldn’t find it anywhere. So finally back in the day there was no Etsy, so I looked online and I couldn’t find any place that would sell it locally, I mean you could find men’s handkerchief, but you couldn’t find women’s handkerchiefs.

And I found this place in Hong Kong and that’s actually where we found our first vendor. I bought a ton for our wedding, and then I embroidered our names on our wedding handkerchiefs, and I actually added beads to the handkerchief and everything. But the problem with buying in Hong Kong is you have to buy a lot of it.

And at the time we bought it for like as a wedding paper, so we actually bought it for all of our guests and also our bridesmaids. So we had this huge amount of handkerchiefs and then afterwards I was like what are going to do with these extra handkerchiefs after the wedding? So we actually sold them on eBay, and I guess the rest is history so when we were thinking about it…

Steve: See we’ve already differed a little bit in our recollections and this is pretty interesting. You had no intention of personalizing, and I just want to state that upfront because I kind of convinced you to do that for the business.

Jen: Okay, let’s take it back; let’s think back to when it started. I actually wanted to personalize it in the very-very beginning okay. But then once I started personalizing I realized this is a lot of work, and then I changed my mind.

Steve: Okay, see there you have it, see we got different versions, anyways okay, so that’s how we got started pretty much the story is the same as far as I can tell. So I want to — and a lot of people have already heard the story already, but I have always been curious and we’ve actually never really talked about this before. But had we not had the business any extra income, would you have still quit your job even if it meant that we had to cut back, live in a bad school district potentially, drastically come back and going out and that sort of thing. How serious were you about the whole stay at home thing?

Jen: I was very serious, but I think if push comes to shove and we couldn’t survive and we had our kids, obviously I would go back to work. If push comes to shove, but I wouldn’t have needed extravagant things, like I think we could have lived off of your income, but it would have changed our lifestyle greatly. And we didn’t really want to change our lifestyle, but if push comes to shove, and you didn’t have a job or we didn’t have any income of course I would work.

Steve: Okay because it didn’t sound like that, and I recall you actually said that you are going to quit your job while we were dating right? I remember that right?

Jen: Oh not when we were dating, but when we had kids.

Steve: No-no-no, but we were dating before we got married you said you know that I’m going to quit.
Jen: Yes absolutely.

Steve: In fact I think you said on our second date or something, oh easy…

Jen: No, I did tell you early on in our relationship that I was definitely going to quit my job when we had kids yes.

Steve: See I had a feeling this is going to happen, this podcast is going just turn to one big argument. Okay, so prior to Bumblebee did you personally have any experience running any other business?

Jen: Yes and no, so me personally I never ran a business, but I have worked ever since I was in I guess in high school. I worked at [inaudible 00:08:49].

Steve: But you never ran your own business?

Jen: I never ran a business but I managed people, right? So in college I ran a restaurant, or I helped ran a restaurant, so but me personally I did not own the restaurant. I never did anything of that sort if you are asking me.

Steve: And one question I always get asked and I have actually only told the story to a couple of people, but I thought it would be interesting to have you tell it. How did we come up with the name for Bumblebee Linens?

Jen: Well Bumblebee Linens was actually supposed to be Launder Linens at first.

Steve: Yes but someone stole our domain name.

Jen: Yes someone actually had that domain. So we brain stormed different ideas and we came up with the name Bumblebee, because Steve used to call me his little Bumblebee.

Steve: And why did I call — okay, so I’ll tell the story since — I’ll tell it for you. Okay, so my wife got, was it lasek or lasik, lasek right?

Jen: Actually I think it was in my other eye surgery.

Steve: Okay it was she got laser eye surgery and then she had another eye surgery, and she had to wear these like big goggles. She had to wear them for a couple of weeks, right? And she looked exactly like a Bumblebee with these bug eyes, and so I used to just call her Bumblebee nonstop for quite a while.

Jen: And I used to buzz at him.

Steve: Right and then she used to buzz at me, so that’s kind of how we came up with the name. All right so a lot of people kind of asked me this question, about how we kind of work together. Now my wife and I have completely different personalities. So in our business I do everything kind of based on data, so it’s volume and demand, I’m very calculated whereas you seem to have this intuition. And besides handkerchiefs, so we sell more than handkerchiefs today, so how did you actually decide what you want to carry in the store. It seems kind of random to me sometimes, and so when we go to like the Canton Fair how do you kind of pick out what you want to sell?

Jen: From the Canton store, okay, from the Canton Fair, okay, well, leading up to the Canton Fair I have some general idea of what I want to look for. So for example last year when we went, I kind of had a feeling I wanted to look at apron, so that was my big thing. So when we went to the fair we targeted all the apron places. And I wanted to get a print — I’m sorry a print E-print.

And then but I guess that doesn’t answer your question, so that’s just one example, so one example would be I have a general idea. And how I get these general ideas is I do follow different blogs, wedding blogs, home décor blogs. And I kind of get general feeling of what is popular, but not necessarily what is easily available. So I have a couple of new ideas of what we want to sell this coming year.

Steve: Where did you get apron from?

Jen: Apron, okay, apron was because we were actually selling a lot in the store our current store, just the lace apron. So white lace apron, so that was starting to sell very well, we were constantly selling out because it was really hard to find. So one of the other ideas I had was okay we need to find a new vendor for lace apron, white lace apron. And after that I was like, okay, let me think of what other apron I can find. And I was like, I think it would be really cute if we got a print apron with like flowers or ruffles or anything because our print handkerchiefs were doing very well also. So it was kind of mixture of the two together.

Steve: So here is what’s funny like Jen basically tells me what she is thinking about selling, and then I kind of go in, I run all the numbers and I just make sure everything is cautious and that we can actually rank for this and whether there is enough demand. But for something as general as aprons, it can be a little difficult, so I’ll pick out keywords like lace aprons is easy.

But when it comes to these print design and the mother and daughter things; sometimes it’s hard to figure out keywords with what’s going to sell and what not. So what’s great about my wife is she’ll pick out these products, and we did very well on aprons over the holiday season. There is a bunch of designs that we sold, but they ended up just selling like crazy, and it’s really hard to pick these things, so what was your criteria for picking?

Jen: What was cute?

Steve: Okay, that’s not going to help our listeners.

Jen: But that’s the truth right, it sticks, like I found these aprons in Canton or at the fair, and I thought they were very cute. I thought the designs were cute, I thought we can personalize them. It was something too easy to personalize, and I thought this is something that’s a little bit harder to find. You can’t find personalized aprons on [inaudible 00:13:19]. The ones that you find are the very basic block straight apron. So this was something different.

Steve: Okay and then when we went last year also, what else were you looking for?

Jen: Oh gosh, I think I was looking at — well actually shall I say this? It’s something that we haven’t launched that product yet.

Steve: Okay never mind, what are we selling this year?

Jen: Okay well this year it’s actually going to be — should we [inaudible 00:13:52].

Steve: Are we going back to the Canton Fair this year?

Jen: Why not, I think one more year, probably one more year.

Steve: Okay one more year, okay, sorry about that guys. I guess Jen doesn’t want to reveal our next product yet.

Jen: Well I don’t think we are ready yet, because I want to, one I want to actually find a local vendor for one of the items, or get a maid locally, because I want to test the idea.

Steve: Let’s talk about that real quick why locally this time as opposed to going straight over there?

Jen: Well searching items at the fair you actually have to have very high minimum order quantity. And if I do it locally it’s a very simple product, I don’t think it requires that much like quantity for us to fulfill that I could probably find a local like a seamstress, or a local manufacturer to do it, and then I can also pick the fabrics.

Because one of the things — the problems — we actually tried sourcing it through China last year, I don’t know if you are thinking of the same product I’m thinking about, but we tried actually sourcing it from China. But the problem was the minimum order was per design, and it was really-really hard, were really high. So this item I wanted to test a ton of different fabrics in smaller quantities.

Steve: Yes, so at the time we didn’t know that these aprons were going to sell and maybe my wife did, but I wasn’t positive and we weren’t prepared to fork over the large…

Jen: That’s not the product I’m talking about.

Steve: Oh you are not talking about aprons?

Jen: No, I’m not, I’m talking about the …

Steve: Oh right, okay, it’s weird we are sitting next to each other and she just gave me like this hand motion.

Jen: So now you know what I am talking about?

Steve: But anyways she brings up a good point though, so we actually went to the LA garment district so that we could look for local people who actually stitch these things. And it turns out there is actually all these seamstresses out there who were willing to create steps for you in like single unit quantities.

So if you are not ready to go out to Asia you can actually look locally and have a couple of prototypes made. And it is a little bit more expensive, but just logistically you don’t have to deal with the shipping and then you can actually do iterations really quickly. So if you are doing anything textile related, I actually highly recommend that you go and look for a local seamstress to help you out. Let’s talk about embroidery for a sec, you mentioned earlier and you claim that you had the idea first.

Jen: Yes I definitely did.

Steve: And you did reveal that embroidery used to be one of your favorite hobbies. So let’s go back how did you feel about monetizing that aspect of the business today, which is actually one of our big money makers right?

Jen: Yes, it is one of our big money makers. So since it was my idea in the very beginning, actually in the very beginning to be perfectly honest I was gung ho for it, until I realized just how much work it was, because back in the day we actually had a home embroidery machine. And this is when I was doing I guess my custom guess for my friends, and then I also sold on eBay some…

Steve: We did baby bibs right?

Jen: We did baby bibs, so we did baby bibs on eBay that were personalized. So that was my foray into trying to see if that would work. And I used to get so mad at it, like I would start cursing and I start throwing things, and I was just really-really frustrated. And then I was just like it’s not worth my energy and time to do. And then I was like well worth for handkerchiefs, I was like thinking okay, it will be something easy, it’s two lines, it wouldn’t be that much work, but with a home machine actually it was really hard because it kept constantly tore the fabric.

I was into the hobby, but I wasn’t really into embroidery, so I was like — I was into embroidery, but I wasn’t really great at embroidery. So I concentrate with the fabric and then I started throwing my hands up in the air for that kind of item. So we actually started selling the blinks and I was like, oh, that’s a good idea, let’s sell the blinks of that item. And we actually used to target border lists back in the day.

Steve: Yeah, part of the story you are leaving out is you got fed up and so I said, I will do all the embroidery.

Jen: Yes that’s true.

Steve: So I ended up sewing for…

Jen: Many years.

Steve: No it wasn’t many years was it? I think a year probably.

Jen: Probably two years.

Steve: Yeah, so I’d get home from my job designing micro processors, and then I would have dinner and then I would fire up the sewing machine, and then saw for two hours every single night — probably two hours, right?

Jen: In the very beginning.

Steve: Yeah in the very beginning, every single night and then I go to bed because my wife who enjoys doing embroidery didn’t fee l like doing it.

Jen: But you ruined that hobby for me Steve.

Steve: No, but you came up with the idea so you ruined it yourself, you just said you came up with the idea.

Jen: I came up with the idea initially, but then I gave up on it because you ruined the whole hobby for me, I no longer enjoyed it.

Steve: Anyway moral of the story is we were selling a bunch of these personalized bibs and handkerchiefs and all of a sudden my wife didn’t want to do it anymore. And I was like wow this is our value add, we can try a whole lot for this, we better keep on doing it.

Jen: Well in the very beginning don’t forget when we were testing the market we thought we can find a find a niche on selling the blink.

Steve: That’s true we did target embroiders in the beginning, that’s actually interesting. We didn’t target brides or wedding parties or anything; we actually targeted the people who created the personalized stuff.

Jen: Well, okay, so this is where I was back in the day when we first started right, there was a business idea on selling the blink products. Because there was people that were not willing, these home embroiders were not willing to buy from Asia and buy bulk amount. We were willing to buy the bulk amount, because the price per handkerchief was very little, it’s the shipping that was really high. So the only way you can make it worthwhile was if you buy a whole lot at one time, and then price per handkerchief dropped at that point. But in the very beginning we were targeting those embroiders.

Steve: Which ultimately ended up not working out so well, so we ended up switching direct to consumer right?

Jen: I think it worked very well in the very beginning; it just wasn’t our money maker right?

Steve: Right that’s correct.

Jen: So you can’t say it didn’t work very well because we were able to meet our goal right in the very beginning, but we did shift and started making it more wedding like.

Steve: Once we started doing the personalization. So you deal with our Asian vendors kind of on a day to day basis, and we got shipped a bunch of junk in the very beginning. So I was just curious what advice you have in regards to kind of how you deal with the vendors since you deal with them more than I do on a regular basis.

Jen: Well, I think a big turning point in terms of quality was actually when we went and met them. So we went to Hong Kong. Our first two vendors were both in Hong Kong. Coincidentally they were located really, really close to each other. So we decided on a vacation, we would go to Hong Kong and stop and meet them. We actually didn’t make an appointment. We just showed up.

Strangely enough I thought we kind of did it because we kind of wanted to see what the real environment was like, to see how they work. So we just showed up at I guess their warehouse or their showroom. And just showed up and they seemed really nice, but after that, it made a huge, huge difference.

Steve: I don’t know about you but I kind of expected like a nice building and like a showroom, but it was pretty ghetto, wouldn’t you say?

Jen: Well, you know, I think your expectation was completely different than mine. I was actually pleasantly surprised by the look. I guess I was imagining like a sweat shop basically.

Steve: I was expecting an Asian dude wearing a white beard and smoking a cigarette.

Jen: But in a nice building, you said.

Steve: Yeah, in a nicer building.

Jen: But mine was I was expecting, you know, I was expecting a not so great looking place, but I don’t know.

Steve: Yeah, so we met our vendors and then we ended up just chatting. We stayed there for a while.

Jen: We stayed there for a couple of hours. And then we met the other vendor.

Steve: Yeah, we met our other vendor who’s super nice.

Jen: They are both super nice and we continue to work with them because they’ve been loyal vendors. Of course we do go through ups and downs in terms of quality, but the great thing is now that we had that relationship and we’ve been working with them so many years, they are willing to do other things. They are willing to try to make a product for us to see if they can source other designs. Or they are willing to I guess try to get us better deals, like changing the things– they are definitely willing to do lower quantities.

Steve: Remember there was that one time that someone tried to knock off our product, was it?

Jen: Oh yeah. There was one time when there was, I wouldn’t say competitor. But there was someone that was interested in the product that we carried. And they contacted our vendor and our vendor was like, “Sorry we can’t do it for you.”

Steve: Right, because they had loyalty to us.

Jen: They had loyalty to us.

Steve: Yeah, outside of visiting them, were there any other things that you did to kind of strengthen the relationship?

Jen: I can’t think of anything in particular. I think the biggest difference was when we met them in person and was able to put a name to a face– where I guess a face tuning.

Steve: So let’s say someone can’t go all the way to Asia and meet their vendors, would you have recommended like Skyping them or?

Jen: Yeah, I would recommend Skyping them if possible. We actually did get some vendors calling us in the very beginning, that tried to call over the phone and it made a big difference. Because we got random vendor emails all the time, and it’s when the vendor actually called us to try to establish that relationship. That helped a lot.

Steve: And, I’m kind of jumping all over the place here, but these are questions that I have, that I have never really gotten the answers to. So I’m just kind of taking advantage of this podcast since it’s kind of public, my wife isn’t going to get on my case for this. But we ran our business out of our house for a couple of years before getting office space. I didn’t actually mind it all that much, but in your mind looking back, should we have done that sooner rather than later, because we did save a lot of money during that time.

Jen: No I think it was important because the whole point in the very beginning. We actually ran that business out of our house until our kids went to preschool. So if you remember, the whole point was to be at home. As soon as they went to preschool is when we decided to move the business out of the house.

Steve: But at the time, did we outgrow, I don’t even remember that far now. Did we outgrow, is that why we moved it out or?

Jen: No, I think, so one of the things is back then, when we were still working at the house, we were having employees come in, and we were thinking we probably could grow it a little bit more. We were thinking about hiring one other person. And the problem with that is I didn’t want to have two people in my house. It was one thing with having one person in our house, but I didn’t want two people in our house.

Steve: I mean if you were to do it all over again would you have done it the same way, running out of our house first?

Jen: Yes, absolutely. The whole point was to do this business so that I could stay home with the kids.

Steve: But what about other people? Would you advice them to do the same thing?

Jen: I think until you have a point where you know that it is a profitable business, I think it makes sense to just save money and run it out of your house. I don’t think that’s a bad idea.

Steve: Here’s actually an interesting question for you. If we were to do it all over again, would we have just sold on Amazon in the beginning?

Jen: If we did it back in the beginning?

Steve: Because we started out on eBay. Things were selling well there, and then we stopped. Actually do you even remember why we stopped on eBay? Was it just too much of a hustle?

Jen: No, we stopped on eBay because we built the website, and we were getting business on the website and then we then decided to use eBay as way to liquidate our product. So the stuff that didn’t sell were the, our irregular products. So we didn’t want to sell good product on eBay anymore.

Steve: Because?

Jen: Because it was then questionable if people wanted to return it, and we didn’t want them to associate bad product with our brand.

Steve: Yes, so yeah. So for everyone listening out there, we were liquidating our irregular stuff. So we were getting some bad product from China, and this happens for every shipment, you get a small quantity that’s irregular and we were liquidating.

Jen: In the very beginning with more.

Steve: We were liquidating those bad products on eBay, and what my wife just said was we didn’t want to mix good product with irregular product on eBay, because we didn’t like people to associate bad product with our good product, back to the question on Amazon then.

Jen: I think in the beginning– so it’s hard for me to imagine, but I think we definitely would have dabbled in Amazon. I don’t know. I think we would have still established our brand. I think we– I’m sorry. I think we would have still created our website. I don’t think we would have been full force into Amazon.

Steve: Yeah, that’s not what I was asking.

Jen: What’s your question?

Steve: Would we have started on Amazon for– I mean Amazon wasn’t really an option back when we started, but would you have started on Amazon and then down to the website or would you have done it at the same time?

Jen: I probably would have done it at the same time. What do you think?

Steve: It’s a hard question to answer because we do personalized stuff and you can’t really sell personalized stuff on Amazon. So if I were to do it all over again, and I was just curious what your answer was, but I would probably sell our non-personalized stuff on Amazon to see if it sells, and then I would have added to our store once it would have sold, and that would have made our store like all personalized stuff in the very beginning. Yeah, I probably would have both.

Jen: Okay. Yeah I probably still disagree with you.

Steve: I mean it’s hard at the beginning. You need so much energy.

Jen: Yeah, I understand, but I think I would have listed everything on our– I still would have listed everything on our regular store because there is still larger companies that are not going to buy off of Amazon. Our big customers that constantly come back are event planners and they wouldn’t buy that on Amazon.

Steve: So here’s a question for you. We got a lot of event planners now that just come and buy from us on a regular basis. Has there been anything that you’ve done to kind of nurture those relationships. Do you give them special treatment in any way?

Jen: I definitely give them special treatment.

Steve: Okay, so what are some of the things that you do?

Jen: Well, so they have a discount coupon. So they automatically get a discount on our products. I will upgrade their shifting to a faster timeline if they need it to get something on– like by a certain date since it’s an event. And most of the time it’s a very last minute deadline.

Steve: Yeah, they always call last minute.

Jen: Yeah, I’m always surprised because I’m always like, these are event planners and they know when these events are, but they always call really last minute and I don’t know if it’s because of storage issues or what. But they always call really, really last minute. Right now we charge $30 to no matter what the cost of the product is, we’ll charge $30 to basically overnight it or two day airlift to someone.

But we typically say it’s over to a certain pound limit. Like I think we say it’s up to 4 pounds. But we are talking about huge volumes, we are talking about very-very heavy products, and I will just eat the cost because I want to make sure that they get the products on time and that we return their phone calls promptly if they call off hours. I almost always take their orders over the phone.

Steve: That’s funny. They always call.

Jen: They always call. I don’t know really why because they are given the coupon code that they can enter themselves, but they always want to talk over the phone, and I think it’s to ensure that they get the product on time, so we know when the event is.

Steve: Yeah, which is kind of funny because if you are running a store solely on Amazon, event planners don’t– I mean they typically just don’t go on Amazon. They want someone personally to handle.

Jen: I don’t think they would go on Amazon.

Steve: So that’s just another one of these examples of why you need your store. If you do have a B to B component to your business, the businesses– they want to talk to a human. They want to know that there’s consistency in the service. And from what it sounds like you always put them first in a very…

Jen: I definitely took them first yeah.

Steve: And I do know that sometimes off hours like if we get an email from one of these vampires you are like on it, even if we are like in the middle of dinner.

Jen: Yes. I won’t necessarily call them back, because I think it’s bad form, because they are also at different time zones, so it will be really late for them. I will definitely email them right away to make sure that they know that I know that they are– I know that they have needs, and I need to meet those needs.

Steve: Another thing that I wanted to just comment on that you do very well is just customer service. And I just wanted to ask you about the power of word of mouth. Now it’s not something that’s very easily measurable. But there are examples of where you know that customers have referred other people to our shop, right?

Jen: Right, well they tell me.

Steve: The people that buy?

Jen: They buy, they tell me and they also will say, “I saw my daughter got this from her friend and I loved it so much.” Or we’ll really get customers that are so happy with our products then they’ll say, “Hey, I’m going to tell everyone I know about your business.”

Steve: So what are the things that you do? And I already know these policies, and I know the answer to these questions, but what are some of the things that you do to just make sure that a customer never leaves angry?

Jen: Well, we are really lucky that I would say that 95% to 98% of our customers are super sweet and super nice. But we do get some customers that are very upset. It could be because a lot of the times we do get customers that are waiting so last minute to book their handkerchiefs. So on occasion we’ll get someone that maybe on a Thursday will call and say, “Hey I need a handkerchief by Saturday.”

Usually we ask for up to five business days to do the embroidery and we may rush the order through that day, so that they’ll get it by Friday the next day. In terms of anger, if they are angry, most of the time, almost a hundred percent of the time, if they are nice, actually they sound nice, but they are just upset, we would just give them the handkerchief, like…

Steve: Or you offer to redo it.

Jen: We’ll definitely redo it, but if it’s due to timing, and there’s no way we can meet their deadline, we’ll just give them a refund. Or we’ll just say, “We’ll redo it, but you can go ahead and keep the product.”

Steve: Yeah, this is actually one of the reasons why you need to have a really good vendor where you can source your products and have decent margins, because in order to deal with these customer service problems, often times we give away our product for free. And we can do that because our margins are so high. So we can eat the cost and it doesn’t really matter. And that’s one of the advantages I would say of importing from overseas.

Jen: Yeah, I think I mean, in general, if you can find the right product, you don’t necessary have to import overseas, but it helps because the margins are much higher. It also helps our products are very light weight. So the shipping, reshipping it isn’t that big of a deal. If you had a really large bulky product, then you have to ask for people to send it back, or this way we can say, “Don’t worry about sending it back, just go ahead and keep it and we’ll send you a new product.”

Steve: Yes, the moral of the story here is whenever someone calls in anger, by just giving our product, like would you say they do a 180?

Jen: Yes, but you know, what’s funny is some people are very disappointed with the product, but it’s the nicer customers that probably get a little bit more out of me than the really angry-angry customers that seem unreasonable.

Steve: But they don’t leave angry.

Jen: I don’t think anyone leaves angry. They maybe not a 100% happy with the solution, but I try to get them as close to a 100% happy as I can.

Steve: So they don’t like talk bad about our company.

Jen: Exactly.

Steve: And then the people that you do please, they go and they tell their friends and it’s just worth it.

Jen: Yeah, I think I would say the ones that we please, or we turn them around from being an angry person to a happy person, I think those folks are more of an advocate for us than the people that we don’t even interact with.

Steve: Yeah, I would agree. Let’s talk about a little bit more difficult topic now. And I’ve always been curious about these questions I’m about to ask you. Let’s talk about working together with me. So first of all, what are your thoughts about working with such an amazingly intelligent partner? I’m saying that with a straight face by the way.

Jen: No, it’s a joke or what? Actually to be perfectly honest, I am very fortunate to work with you because one, you are super ambitious. I’m not as ambitious. I think you drive a lot of the growth in our business and I’m very lucky. Because I’m pretty happy with the way things are. You are truly the driver of our business, I think.

Steve: And we have this on tape now. Anyways, what I wanted to ask you, was do you actually recommend working with your spouse?

Jen: Yes and no. I think it doesn’t hurt to work with your spouse, but you have to have very different responsibilities. I think where we butt heads, where when we used to butt heads in the very beginning is because we overlapped a lot. You should really play to the strength of your spouse. So I would never have Steve pick products for us. That’s for sure. Because Steve would peak– I still remember when he took a customer call.

In the very beginning everyone just– it was just me and him. So Steve would take these customer calls, and he would be talking to these ladies and I’m listening behind him, and he’s like recommending these products that I personally think are a little bit ugly. But he’ll be like, “Oh that’s a really pretty one with pink flowers, or with a little bit grey.” And I was like, “Oh my god, it’s such an ugly handkerchief.”

Steve: But why are we carrying if it’s ugly?

Jen: Because actually, it’s so funny because searching products, I’m actually surprised that do well as well as they do, because me personally I’m not a huge fan of them, but they do very well.

Steve: I just happen to like those handkerchiefs with the red flowers and the grey.

Jen: No they were pink. It was pink.

Steve: Whatever, whatever color it was.

Jen: They was at the time one of my least favorite, and they are not huge sellers, but they still sell.

Steve: Yes, so I was just trying to, you know.

Jen: So anyhow, I took over, the lady called back and I was like, “I would recommend these handkerchiefs.” And she’s like, “Oh, I talked to someone that recommended these,” and I’m like, “Yeah, yeah, but he’s a guy.” And so she was very pleased with the handkerchiefs I picked.

Steve: I have a lot of good customer service stories by the way where I made a lot of sales and I even saved a marriage.

Jen: Yes you did.

Steve: Yes, because there was this one story where this wife called in and she was like, “I’m trying to buy a handkerchief for my husband. What color would you pick silver or blue?” And I gave my color and she was like, “Huh! I knew it. He has no taste, blah, blah, blah.” And she’s just like went off for like ten minutes. And I had to like calm her down and kind of mediate the solution in that and convince her that her husband really had good taste, because he was actually marrying her. Anyways, back to like maintaining a good relationship while you are working with your spouse.

Jen: Keep the responsibilities.

Steve: I mean we didn’t really clash on picking product. I remember we crushed a little bit on website design, right?

Jen: I don’t remember actually clashing on the website design actually. I really don’t.

Steve: Okay, so what were we clashing in the beginning. I just remember we clashed all the time.

Jen: We clashed also because– okay, so I don’t like putting myself out there. And I don’t like writing. And so we clashed a lot in the very beginning because you wanted me to put myself out there more, and you wanted me to write a lot more product description, more flowery. And I just didn’t really want to write.

Steve: But your face wasn’t out, yeah, for the crafts, yeah.

Jen: Yeah for the crafts.

Steve: It was important.

Jen: Yes, but even the products, like you were just like, “No this isn’t well written. You have to redo it,” or like in the very beginning, and I didn’t really want it. I was just like I just describe the product, and you wanted me to really– I’m not a great copywriter I guess. And also I think, as I already mentioned, you know, we have different ambition levels. Like Steve is very, very ambitious and wants to grow the business into this huge, huge business. To a point, I’m probably, like I’m happy with the way things are, and I know that the business would not have grown as much as it has, but you tend to push.

Steve: That’s actually not entirely accurate. I don’t want it to be a huge, huge, huge business. It just so happens we are in this like no man’s land right now, where we need to make more so that we can hire like a full time type of manager.

Jen: Another manager.

Steve: Yeah, another full time manager. And so I wanted to get it to this point where we can outsource it some more. And it is true. I’m always trying to grow, and my wife was happy with the business.

Jen: Well in the beginning. So I thought we were talking about the beginning.

Steve: You were happy I would say like, five years ago even, right.

Jen: Yeah, I mean my goal of staying at home with the kids so I can run this business was fine. And also if you remember like when we first started the business, I would have been actually happy with just supplemental income. But you were like, “okay we need to have a goal, we need to figure out how big we should make this, we need to make sure we push towards that goal.” I was just trying to like survive as a new parent, right?

Steve: It’s mainly because I have this philosophy that your business can only go one or two directions, up or down, there is no such thing as just like maintenance in my eyes. You’re either growing or not, but…

Jen: No, I totally — I see at that time I was just trying to survive, so I think…

Steve: We were both trying to survive.

Jen: We were both trying to survive, right. So for me it was just like — and there was a period where it was growing, but not as quickly as it could have been growing, and it was because life was happening, right?

Steve: For sure, we had a couple of years where we didn’t do anything, we just coasted.

Jen: Yeah, and it still grew, but not as nearly as high as it could have.

Steve: Yeah, when we put energy into it, we get significant growth, when we don’t do anything; the business just kind of grows on its own. It trails just ecommerce which has been growing year to year. I am curious on, and ironically we haven’t really talked about this that much, but what are some of your goals with Bumblebee Linens going forward? Do you want to start a new business, or do you want to continue with Bumblebee Linens and grow it? Do you have any intention of selling? I’ve always wanted to, I was always curious, and we’ve never really talked about that business.

Jen: Right, so I think the goal is for us to grow the business more, and then I would hire I guess a manager to run the business, so that I can take — the kids are now getting older and they have more and more activities that I definitely want to be part of. Right now it’s great because I could still do all the stuff with them, but as they get older they’re going to have more and more stuff to do.

I think the idea is for us to grow the business a little bit more so I would feel comfortable, one finding a really good manager to run it. I have a hard time letting go, so that’s a big problem with me personally. I’m afraid, one it cuts into the margin, two I’m like I kind of I’m a control freak, and I’m afraid things would just go in the crapper if I take a step back.

Steve: Actually right now your schedule is very flexible, right?

Jen: Yeah, it’s very, very flexible.

Steve: So why do you feel like we need a full time manager? Do you just not want to do any work at all with the business?

Jen: I feel like we’ve been in this business for what, I guess eight or nine years.

Steve: Eight or nine?

Jen: Ninth year, I’m getting burnt out. Certain aspects are really fun, and certain aspects are not as fun, I would like to focus on just the fun stuff. This year we were actually growing a lot by going to Amazon, and I actually packed a ton of our Amazon orders. And so that’s stuff I shouldn’t have to do, I really should think that either I need to delegate that more, but we were just so overrun with the orders like on a regular business that…

Steve: Yeah, it was surprising with the volume.

Jen: Yeah, the volume was…

Steve: We were not prepared.

Jen: In Amazon we were definitely weren’t prepared. We had one of our — we were canceling pre-packing for Amazon, but even then we didn’t prepare as much as we needed to for Christmas.

Steve: It kind of threw off our entire inventory too, because we typically saved some stuff for some of our B to B customers, and here is Amazon like you need to feed that beast, because you’ll lose rankings if you ever go out of stock.

Jen: Plus I — part of me was it took a revolution realizing, because I was trying to keep stuff in our store because I was afraid that we would sell out in our shop, but it kind of I had a light moment where I’m like it doesn’t matter where I’m getting the business from, I should just sell it. I just needed to make sure I have enough for my large customers that they rely on my product as to fulfill that product, but if I have enough for them then I shouldn’t care who I sell it to.

Steve: Absolutely. There is actually a lot of listeners out there who are expecting a child or they want to have one spouse kind of stay at home with the children. I was just curious what your advice is for those people who are starting a business and wanting to have children. I just remember that when we had our first kid, I don’t know if we would have been able to start something during that period, it was very stressful.

Jen: It was very stressful, I think our daughter was a little bit — it was very stressful as new parents in the very beginning with her, so I don’t know if we could have necessarily started then. I mean that’s why we started earlier.

Steve: Yeah, since you became pregnant essentially.

Jen: Yeah, and then it did get better, so once we got — we were able to establish a rhythm, we worked on the business when she was napping and at night, after she went down. We were lucky she actually slept well at night, but back then we didn’t actually answer any of our phone calls if you remember, we called everyone back.

Steve: We had them leave voicemail.

Jen: We called everyone back.

Steve: If I remember correctly we said something like for faster service please email.

Jen: Please email.

Steve: Please email us and we will respond right away or something like that.

Jen: I can’t remember, it’s all…

Steve: It’s all blending together now.

Jen: It’s blending together, but back then I couldn’t take any phone calls during the day because I was so afraid she will wake up and cry.

Steve: What advice would you have for anyone starting an ecommerce based business today?

Jen: I think finding your products is very important, take the time to research. I think a lot of people have a preconceived notion of what they want to sell, I think they think I want to sell this because it’s hot, but it may not make the most sense to sell. For new parents I would recommend starting before they have kids or way until after you’ve established between with your kids, because it’s really difficult when you don’t know what the heck you’re doing to start a business. In that case it’s really great because having a spouse that will support you also is very useful. They understand, they’ll take a little more slack, more of the slack I guess.

Steve: What are your views about going to the Canton Fair because a lot of people, they email me and they say hey Steve are you going to lead a tour to the Canton Fair, and how important do you think it is to actually go to the fair versus just using Alibaba and finding venders, like I have my answer to this question, but…

Jen: I think you could just do Alibaba, I think you could still establish a relationship with the vendors on Alibaba, but I think going to the Canton Fair makes it so much faster, that process will go so much faster through if you go to the fair.

Steve: Yeah, because when we went to the fair we hit like…

Jen: We found so many more…

Steve: Countless vendors.

Jen: Vendors that way, but I think you could do everything through Alibaba, it just could take many iterations and you have to feel comfortable with that vendor, and you will be asking for samples and then you will be sending information back to — if you are not happy with them. Whereas at the Canton Fair you just hit it, and then you see all our products all at once, and you can establish that relationship, you could take pictures. You can definitely– the really smart vendors actually at the Canton Fair actually will ask to take a picture of you with them. Do you remember a couple of vendors do that?

Steve: Yeah, I remember.

Jen: That was brilliant, and then they would email it to you which was brilliant, because they wanted you to try to remember them.

Steve: Yeah, and the other thing is I think it’s important because I assure you when you go on Alibaba you can find samples and look at product quality, but when you are actually at the fair, you didn’t need to ask for samples, because they have the samples with them.

Jen: They are also — I’m sorry to cut you off, but remember you helped one of your students look for a product, and she was going back and forth within Alibaba?

Steve: Yes I remember that.

Jen: Then we went on her behalf to look at the product and it was a completely different product?

Steve: Yes. Let me film that story a little bit. I run this class and one of my students, was like hey you going to the fair, can you check with this vendor for me, here is a picture of what I’m trying to source, can you just take a look at it and make sure it’s the right thing. And she sent me this picture of this product that the vendor was supposedly going to send her. I stopped at the booth, talked to the exact vendor that she was talking to, and he showed me the product.

It was completely different from the picture, and so somehow there was a problem in communication. He was going to send her all this stuff that wasn’t what she wanted and it was a good thing I was there to take a look at it. Of course this could have been all rectified if they just had him take some pictures of the product. I don’t know why that didn’t happen, but it’s just a lot easier to go and visit your vendor and see everything face to face, and see all the product in hand, just to make sure it meets your specifications, outside of going back and forth which can take a long period of time.

At the fair you can handle everything in just a couple of days, that’s why I’m a big fun. Going forward, what’s in the future plans for Bumblebee Linens, what are we going to do next year to grow the business?

Jen: We are going to send more and more stuff to Amazon; we’re going to grow the Amazon’s side. I am definitely going to get a better handle on the inventory levels that are needed at Amazon. I think this year I was — I thought I had a good handle on it, but I was still surprised by it, so this year we’re definitely going to focus on sending more stock and also different stuff.

We also are going to launch a couple of new product lines. I’m going to hopefully find a local vendor to source one of our products that I hope to do. I think we are going to update the website, we redesign the website, that’s Steve’s job hopefully soon. I think we need to streamline certain things, I hope to potentially move into a larger space, because we are outgrowing our current space, I don’t know what else.

Steve: Yeah, that sounds like a lot actually. There you have it, very thankful that my wife was actually willing to come on to the podcast, because she does not like doing any of these things. Anyone who wants to get a hold of you, do you want people to get a hold of you?

Jen: Honestly I’d rather them get a hold of you, because actually have to handle Bumblebee Linens business.

Steve: Right. How about this?

Jen: You can email Steve and put attention Jen.

Steve: Yes, I will forward any messages over to my wife. And just to close if you guys are getting married, and you want a nice personalized gift, my wife will hook you up, can we say that?

Jen: Yeah, sure.

Steve: It’s BumblebeeLinens.com, Twitter, we don’t have Twitter actually.

Jen: We don’t have Twitter.

Steve: But Instagram.

Jen: You can follow us on Instagram and Pinterest.

Steve: @bumblebeelinens. All right, thanks a lot for coming on the show.

Jen: You are welcome.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed episode 100. I’m really proud of my wife for stepping up to the plate and putting herself out there, and I kid you not, I’ve been trying to get her on the show since day one. And what’s ironic is that if she went on earlier they would have been less people listening in case she said anything embarrassing, however I think she did great. For more information about this episode go to mywifeqiteherjob.com/episode100

Once again I just want to thank Famebit for sponsoring this episode. As I mentioned earlier, Famebit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagramers and other influencers to promote your products online, and it works. One of my podcast guests Emmanuel Allay used FameBit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks to launch a campaign.

The best part is if you use coupon code mywife@Famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign, so go to Famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products online. Finally if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign right up there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequiteherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

099: How To Find Legit Chinese Vendors Online With Peter Zapf Of GlobalSources.com

How To Find Legit Chinese Vendors Online With Peter Zapf Of GlobalSources.com

Today I’m happy to have Peter Zapf, the CIO of Global Sources, which is one of the leading B2B marketplaces for connecting buyers and suppliers in Asia.

They’ve been around for 40 years, make around 200 million in revenues, have over 150000 suppliers in their database and work with 95% of the top global retailers.

Today, Peter was gracious enough to come on my podcast to give us an overview of the private labeling landscape and all of the recent trends in importing!

Enjoy the episode.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Global Sources compares with other B2B marketplaces like Alibaba
  • How does Global Sources vet the companies in their database
  • Why a lot of vendors are not on Alibaba
  • How to find legit factories and manufacturers
  • How to weed out the good vendors from the middlemen
  • What is the threat of factories and manufacturers going direct to Amazon?
  • The best practices to stay ahead in private labeling
  • How to interact with a potential vendor. What are some best practices for initial contact?
  • The common no-nos when dealing with Chinese vendors
  • What Chinese vendors look for in a customer

Other Resources And Books

GlobalSources.com
SmartChinaSourcing.com

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before I begin, I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing, with over 20,000 Youtubers, Instagramers, people on Twitter and via LinkedIn to promote your company in any vertical, whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more.

Yes you can get famous Youtubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as a low as $50. And the best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before one of my guest Emmanuel Elayae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous you tubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m happy to have Peter Zeff the CIO of globalsoruces.com which is one of the leading B to B market places for connecting buyers and suppliers in Asia. Now Global Sources has been around for four years, they make around 200 million revenues, and they’ve got over 150,000 suppliers in their database, and they also work with 95% of the top global retailers all over the world. Now Peter was gracious enough to come on my podcast, to kind of give us an overview of the private labeling landscape and all of the recent trends in importing. And with that welcome to the show Peter, how are you doing today man?

Peter: Oh great, thanks, I appreciate you having me on, it’s just a comment in relation to the top retailers we also have a lot of Amazon private label sellers and eBay private sellers that uses our services as well. So it’s quite a range of buyers that use our services.

Steve: Yeah and just so a quick background on Peter, he was actually nice enough to come on my create a profitable online store office hours, where he actually went and answered a whole bunch of the student questions as well, so I was very appreciative of that. So Peter give us the quick background story about kind of what Global Sources is all about and kind of how it compares with some of the other B to B market places like Alibaba?

Peter: Sure, so Global Sources as you said we’ve been in business for over 40 years. We started with trade magazines, and really our goal was to help bring manufacturers and overseas importers, wholesalers and retailers together, help them find each other. And 40 years ago the best way to do that was with magazines. We’ve converted those magazines to electronic magazines now; they are still popular although not as popular. And they are available at globalsources.com/magazines if you want to download them.

So what we did then is we launched our website because in the late 90s we started saying, hey, wow, the internet is a great way to distribute information about suppliers very quickly to global buyers. The magazines would two to six weeks to distribute by boat, so the near instantaneous distribution on the internet was great. So we launched the website in the late 90s, and then in the early 2000s we launched our trade shows. So that gives the buyers an opportunity to meet suppliers face to face, and also meets some suppliers that don’t market themselves online.

And then in conjunction with that we have a small site called smartchinasourcing.com. And that’s really good for folks that are just getting into importing and learning how to import and want to know things about logistics and payment and quality control and all the others as you deal with importing. Well those are kind of some of the things that we do, and ultimately the goal is to bring overseas buyers and suppliers and nowadays they are primarily in China, the China manufacturers together, so they can do business.

Steve: Are the vendors primarily on the website, are they primarily from Asia, or are they vendors from other countries as well?

Peter: We do have vendors from other countries, but I would say that the majority of them nowadays are from mainland China.

Steve: Okay, and as I was just going through like Global Sources is one of the places that I recommend to the students in my class, but I thought it would be interesting just to kind of hear it from you guys what kind of differentiates Global Sources from some of the other places, like what do you guys that’s just really good?

Peter: Sure, first of all there a lot of good other sites on the internet, and they do a lot of similar things, right? Search for products, search for suppliers and contact them. A couple of other things that we do a little bit differently, the first is because we also run trade shows we try to get all of the exhibitors from the trade shows online as well. Now what’s interesting and a lot of people I don’t think realize this is the suppliers, a lot of them I’ll call them trade shows lovers.

They like participating at trade shows because the people that they meet at a Hong Kong show for example are people that have invested in paying for a plane ticket and spending a few days in Hong Kong. So they tend to be more serious buyers. So those types — some of those suppliers they don’t want to be on some of the more widely used online sites, because then they get a lot of inquiries from I’ll call it less serious suppliers.

So the first thing is because we run the trade shows and we get those suppliers on our website, we have some suppliers that you can’t find in other places and other trade shows. So they also tend to be more likely to be a manufacturer and more likely to have export experience and more likely to be a larger and more sustainable business. So that’s the first thing just all the touch points with the trade shows that we run.

The second is we also have quite a bit of editorial content, and really editorial content in two areas. If you go to the homepage on Global Sources in the left column you’ll see a bunch of product categories. And you can click on one of the product categories and click down to see a lot of the editorial content that we have there, here let me just bring something op here to give you an example.

So in our fashion accessories and footwear for instance, we’ve got an analyst choice section with some new products that have come out. Some flip flops are here, leather handbags, gold statement necklaces. And then some top 20 most popular section for content that is very popular on the site that people may be interested in seeing. And trending section for content that’s most trending in that particular category, this should be fashion accessories and then some…

Steve: It sounds like instead of just a listing of products and vendors you guys kind of have a little bit of value add in that you kind of carry certain things as well, is that accurate?

Peter: That’s exactly right, so it’s accurate and then part editorial content around it just to give the audience a little more information on what’s new. So those are two big things.

Steve: Yeah, I was just going to make a quick comment here that I’ve kind of noticed lately that Alibaba is becoming a kind of saturated full middle man traded companies and actually all the vendors I use for my shop are actually not on Alibaba. I found almost all of our vendors from trade shows, not like the Global Source — not your trade show, but like trade shows like the Canton Fair. I think what you are saying is quite true and I actually asked my vendors at one point why they don’t list on some of these places, why they just focus on the fair, is because they don’t really want to be dealing with some of the smaller guys in the space.

Peter: Yeah, and we’ve had that from the buy side also, some of the buyers will tell us that they visit our site because they don’t want have to read through a lot of the smaller say independent college dorm room sellers that are on some of the other sites. And they find that it’s easier to find manufacturers or larger trading companies that are real [inaudible 00:09:11] in our businesses using our services, both on our site and the trade shows.

Steve: So along those same lines, so how does Global Sources kind of vet the companies in the database?

Peter: Sure and that’s a good question for everybody, we do a couple things. The first thing we do is we do for the verified suppliers that are on our site, we visit those suppliers, so we’ve seen them face to face, we’ve seen their offices. And we also get their business registration, so we ensure that they are a legally registered entity. So that’s the very beginning part of the process.

Then the next stop is as content is uploaded, we also review and we are not perfect so if you see something let us know, but we’ll review for obvious say trademark and intellectual property infringement. So you tend not to find that kind of content on our site and some of the brand owners have commented to us that they like working with us because when there are issues we are very responsive, and they don’t find many issues on our site. And then those processes work pretty well, not perfect work pretty well.

But the real managers at the end of the process, there are always commercial disputes between buyers and suppliers, and sometimes the buyers contact us asking us for help or assistance. And in the vast majority of cases they are commercial disputes; it’s only in a very-very small number of cases that we actually have to go take a supplier down because the supplier did something that was shady.

And I would say it’s around one supplier per year that we have to take down. So to me that’s a pretty good measure of quality that the upfront steps that we take are a result of us having to take a very-very small number of actions on suppliers at the end of the process based on buyer feedback.

Steve: So along those same lines, I get this question a lot from people. When you find a vendor whether it would be Global Sources or Alibaba, do you kind of have to do that extra leg work to make sure that you are not violating or copying other people’s brands? You can never make the assumption that what you are getting is legit, right?

Peter: Well I think there is two things to think about, well maybe three things. The first is, are you looking for something that’s unique, so is it your design or not? A lot of the private label sellers are not doing a lot of design work. So then the second thing is if you are using the supplier’s design, you may want to do a little bit of research to figure out does somebody have a design pattern on it in your country, which is different than trademark. Trademark is mainly the logo that’s on it, so that you can also look up on the databases in the US to see if anybody has that trademark in your product category.

But you do need to do some work to make sure that you are not violating somebody else’s intellectual property if it looks like it’s not a commoditized product. If it’s a commoditized product like picture frames or something like that, there’s not a lot of intellectual property in that, so that’s not as worrisome. But it is something that folks should at least be aware of.

Steve: So finding out whether you are infringing a trademark is relatively simple, but how would you go about finding out whether you are violating a design pattern?

Peter: Yeah that is a lot tougher. My two way I reverse image search on some of the product images and see where else they show up and then try to figure out if some of — and then look up whether some of those are coupon [inaudible 00:12:50] have design patterns. Oh, that one is not totally easy. The other way to do it is to request some changes to the product that will make it more different from what other folks that might be selling. None of these are guarantees; they are all risk management steps.

Steve: Okay and I’ve used a lot of these listing services or market places in the past, and a lot of times you have good vendors and you have kind of middle man, and you have bad vendors. What are some of your word tactics for kind of weeding out the good guys from like the bad guys?

Peter: I hate using the words on good and bad, the supplier is selling to buyers in 200 different countries, and every buyer has different requirements whether they are regulatory and sort of occasional requirements or body requirements. And to me the key is good communication, so the supplier has a clear understanding of what you as a buyer what your requirements are, and especially the quality requirements, because that’s where a lot of the commercial disputes seem to come from.

And to do that one of the practices that you can do is first to get samples and I think everybody is right about that and doing that. The second thing is when you get the samples everything that you don’t like about the samples are put down on what’s going to become your quality control or inspection criteria checklist. And everything that you don’t like about the samples turn into a very objective statement that the third party could look at and assess, hey does this product meet this quality requirement or not. And if you get a few samples from a few factories, you’ll be able to put together a pretty good quality checklist.

Then when you have that checklist done and it’s got to be objective, it can’t be like it looks pretty. Well, pretty is — everybody defines pretty differently. No visible scratches, that’s more objective, the more objective you can make it the better. Then when you have that list of criteria, include it as part of the purchase order, and ask the supplier to sign off on it and say, look it’s part of the purchase order, these are the inspect, these are the quality criteria we want, and we are going to have a third party inspection agent come in and judge against these inspection criteria before the product ships.

So then you’ve told the supplier two things, one these are quality criteria, and two we are going to have somebody check on them before you get your final payment. And that helps also, and then the supplier, the supplier may come back and say; hey these quality requirements are higher than what we can do. And that’s fine, that’s what you wanted to learn at that point in the process, we are going to come back and sign off on it. And then after manufacturing is done, it’s a good idea to then bring in a third party inspector to inspect the goods before they ship.

And again to me I look at that as an investment, you are trying to figure out, hey can this supplier meet my quality requirements? Not just for this shipment, because the shipment may be a smaller trial orders, and you may not make a lot of money on that shipment especially when you add the inspection cost in. But you are learning better whether as the supplier increases their production quantity they can meet your quality requirements, and that’s super valuable. Especially if you don’t want to start getting a lot of bad reviews when you start selling your product, so that’s…

Steve: Can you just comment real quick on how much it costs to get an inspection company; I imagine they are paid by a certain amount of time, right?

Peter: Yeah most of them will, they’ll look at the size of your order, and usually what the larger retailers do is they’ll have a random sample, the products is checked and there is statistical tables to figure out how many need to be checked. And then they’ll figure how much time it’s going to take to do that and charge you based on mandates. I would suspect that for most of the Amazon private label sellers, one mandate would be enough to do an inspection. That may not be 100%, it may be a good random sample.

And the typical mandate rates are around $300 although I have seen — and that would be from folks that are – I’ll say — I don’t want to use the word reputable, but a lot of the good inspection companies that’s the pay charge. If you search around you may be able to find folks that are less well known that charge less than that. I’ve seen numbers I think as low as $150, but I would recommend sticking with folks that are maybe a little bit more reputable and the…

Steve: 300 is actually in line with what we’ve gotten in the past.

Peter: Yeah, so that makes sense. And then the big inspection companies which can be more difficult for smaller entrepreneurial companies to work with, the bigger inspection companies are SGS, Pure, VeriTest, and Intertech. But then there’s a number of I’ll say mid tier inspection companies, Asia inspection, Intouch, V-trust, and they are all — and Sofist [ph]. And they are all pretty good for working with Amazon private label sellers.

Steve: Okay, yes so I just want to emphasize a couple of things about what you said that quality control or a QC checklist is actually really important. We import napkins and there was a time when we were just like, hey, ship us white napkins. And it turns out that there is thousands of shades of white which we actually discovered very quickly. So you have to get really specific on what you want in order to actually get what you want, because if you don’t specify something they will make assumptions, and almost always those assumptions will not match what you were thinking.

Peter: Yeah and it’s not that they are purposely trying to do it, it’s just that they are different assumptions. Plus they may also be trying to manage the cost and they’ll say, okay within these assumptions you gave me he said, white okay, this off white is a little bit less expensive so let me do that one, and it’s still right.

Steve: Or even materials like you will say you want curtain, but then they’ll give you like a blend or something like that because you didn’t specify 100%, stuff like that.

Peter: Yeah, absolutely, yeah so…

Steve: Let’s talk a little bit about just kind of interacting with potential vendors. So what are some of your best practices just for kind of the initial contact and like kind of the negotiation process? Like what are some common no, nos, when dealing with Chinese vendors?

Peter: I think what I would suggest first is a lot of folks are going to be contacting the suppliers via email, and one of the things to recognize especially with the – I’ll say the larger more experienced suppliers is they maybe capacity constrained or labor constrained, so they may not need new or more business, which then means you have to sell yourself to them. And in fact this is more likely among I’ll say the good suppliers who have relationships with a lot of overseas buyers, and those buyers keep coming back to them because they are good suppliers. As a result those suppliers have run out of capacity, so I think you should do a little bit more than just say, hey I’m interested in this product, what’s the MOQ, what’s the price?

It’s also helpful to introduce your company and try to explain something about why you will be able to help break that supplier into a new market or product line. We are very good in this, these are some of the channels that we use, we are expanding our product categories, we are very interested in your product, and we think we can help take this product to market. So to get the supplier excited about working with you, sell yourself to the supplier.

So I think that’s one thing to keep in mind. The second thing we talked about is the quality, I mean you are working across time zones, you are working across cultures, a lot of the folks that you are initially contacting they’ll be 20-21 years old, straight out of business English course from college. They may not have travelled internationally at all, so they really don’t — so the norms are different, just because you are crossing cultures and all those other things. So as a result it does become important to communicate very clearly and very explicitly.

I think the third thing and a lot of folks have said this to me also. A lot of the suppliers, I mean form a western perspective we view, hey this is the contract and the negotiation is over because we’ve agreed on the terms and conditions in the contract. And the China suppliers often view the contract as I’ll say the start of the negotiation. It’s more like, oh, okay, we are seriously going to do business now because they’ve given us a purchase order and a contract, we’ll sign it off and then as we go through the process we’ll identify whether there are areas that we need to adjust or change in order to meet their requirements. Which for a western or American perspective it’s a little bit different and then can create frustration. So just be aware of that upfront, and then it’s a lot less frustrating when it happens.

But that’s why from a western perspective just get those quality criteria upfront, get everything signed off upfront, get everything agreed to, then you can go back and say, no look, we agreed to this at the beginning, I really do need it this way. There are maybe things the supplier has asked that you can change, I don’t know packing quantities, number of pieces per curtain. I mean there could be a million things that they ask that you say, oh, yeah, that’s not a big issue; I have not problems if you change that if it makes it easier for you. But then there are other things that you will feel absolutely not, now this is critical to the success of this product in the market, so we can’t change that. But those kinds of discussions are going to happen maybe more often than most people expect.

Steve: So based on kind of what you said if a vendor is kind of over eager to work with you is that generally a red flag?

Peter: No I don’t think it’s a — that doesn’t go either way.

Steve: Okay.

Peter: One valuable aspect of a vendor is how well they communicate, and good communication makes them easier to work with. That being said good communication itself, the executive that communicates with you well that doesn’t mean that he has any control over the manufacturing and production line, or the QC inspector if there is one on the manufacturing and production line. So I think good communication is a plus, but it doesn’t necessarily mean you are going to get what you want, you are going to have to take additional steps to make sure that you get what you are looking for and what you want.

Steve: Yeah, I mean we’ve had cases where the vendor has agreed to everything that we’ve said and we’ve been very explicit, but then when it comes to time to get the products it’s not what we said. I guess this kind of ties into what you mentioned about always getting an inspection company into play, right?

Peter: Yeah and what folks that have larger productions runs do is they’ll also ask for — they could ask for samples from the beginning of the production run, or have an inspector go in during the beginning of the production run. Because at the end of the production run if there is problems, that’s harder to resolve, but if you can identify this at the beginning of the production run, then it’s easier to make changes.

Or even nowadays just over Skype get one of the first pieces off the — they come off the production line and review them over Skype. Really what you are trying to think about is what are all the checkpoints that I can put in to minimize problems, maximize the odds that I’m going to get what I believe I need, and then minimize issues at the end of process, because if you get to the end of the process and you have issues it’s kind of too late.

Steve: Right, yeah, so you mentioned before that you kind of have to sell yourself to the Chinese vendors. What are some of things that you can say to make yourself look better in their eyes?

Peter: For startup entrepreneurs, in any industry it’s always going to be difficult to get started. But you can leverage either knowledge or success, we are selling these channels, we are selling in these volumes, we are selling our own website and third party market places, we’ve had a lot of success with these products that we are — and if you are importing them, that we are importing. If you are sourcing domestically that we are sourcing domestically, but we would like to move toward importing some products directly from manufacture. Just something that explains one — like cover the experience that you have, and something that explains why you are going to be able to grow with that volumes and sales.

Steve: Okay and do you recommend kind of negotiating the minimum order quantities in the beginning. And if you are like how would you kind of phrase those questions about minimum order quantities to not turn off the vendor?

Peter: Yeah, I know that’s a great question too. I think the three steps tends to be get a sample, review the sample, then do a trial order which is a different way of saying negotiate the minimum order quantity. And then move to orders that hit the minimum order quantities. And that middle step of the trial order, the conversation with the supplier can be, hey, we really like this product, we would like to do a trial order of whatever, 200 pieces, 500 pieces.

And the reason we want to do the trial order is to assess, one the quality of the product when it’s manufactured, and two to get market feedback when you try to sell it. Subject to the quality in the market feedback, we would expect to place orders that hit your MOQ requirements.

Steve: Okay.

Peter: Every supplier is different, some suppliers will say yes, some suppliers will say no, it also depends on time of year. Right now everybody is maxed, any manufacturer right now because we are on holiday in China. But this time of year manufacturing capacity is kind of maxed out to get everything on the boat in time for Christmas. Other times of the year it tends to be slower, so depending on the time of the year it could also change the suppliers answer. Or if the supplier for whatever reason has additional capacity, he will be more open to a trial order with a small order size than if he’s got 15 customers with an order backlog of three months.

Steve: That’s actually a very interesting point, so would you recommend looking for new vendors towards kind of the beginning of the year when things are a little bit slower?

Peter: I think there is a lot of advantages to that plus with the lead times. And also if you are having maybe trouble getting feedback during the say August-September timeframe, check back in January-February. I mean each product category has a little bit of a different sourcing cycle. But yeah, I think one can check back in it at a different time.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk a little bit about quality control, I mean we’ve already talked about several things, the QC checklist, and the inspector. Is there any recourse for shipments that you’ve received that maybe inspected okay, but they are either late or damaged by the time you receive them?

Peter: I guess it would depend on the terms that you have in the purchase order. If you are buying FOB which is a pretty common term that means that the goods kind of moved to your I guess legal possession at the port in China if you are ocean shipping. Anything that happens after that is your responsibility. So if the goods get damaged in transit, it’s your responsibility. But quite frankly commercially once you’ve sent that final payment to the supplier, there is very — it’s very difficult to have any recourse. You might be able to get a discount on a future order.

Steve: Okay, because shipping it back would be prohibitively expensive, and so yeah you are pretty much stuck with it, right? Okay, and for — do you recommend putting in a shipping date clause in your purchase order?

Peter: I think so, yeah, and then also put in a clause that says, if you miss by whatever is important to you, if you miss by three days we are going to deduct 1% per day that you are late in shipping. But then during the manufacturing process, be careful about when you ask for changes, hey, I want the labels differently, hey I need the boxes differently, that they will not impact the shipping time. Because then the supplier will come back to you and say, well, hold on the reason we are late is because you asked for a change.

But I think it is a good practice to put in an agreed ship date, you are going to ask the supplier, hey, what ship date can you hack I’m going to put that in there. And then put in a clause that says, I don’t know 1% a day for more than 3 days late. And then whether or not you actually get that 1% back at least the supplier recognizes if he’s got two orders, hey this guy might penalize me if I’m late, this guy won’t. So yours might move up right, and you are increasing the odds of hitting ship date.

Steve: Okay now that makes a whole lot of sense. I’m just curious have you ever had cases where you spent — send an inspection company in, the whole production run is done and it’s sitting at the factory and the inspection guy goes in and says, hey, none of these are acceptable, what generally happens then?

Peter: Yeah, so again, we don’t do a lot of the importing ourselves, so I’m mainly relying on what I have heard from buyers and suppliers. If that happens usually often you’ll have paid your 30% deposit, manufacturing is done, you haven’t paid your remaining 70%. So at that point you will request the manufacturer to rework the product to meet the requirements and then have a second inspection done. And that would be a very typical process in that case.

Steve: Okay I want to switch gears a little bit now and just kind of talk about a lot of these people are going — these Amazon private labelers; they are having their stuff shipped directly to Amazon. And I have just kind of anecdotally heard that Amazon is now working with factories directly to getting their stuff and kind of cutting out the middle man or the private labeler so to speak. Are you seeing that happen and are there any reasons why a manufacturer would not ship directly to Amazon?

Peter: Yeah, I think well there is a few underlying questions here, let me cover each of them. The first is Amazon has some of their own brands, their own private label, just like the large retailers do. And those private label brands they will go direct to the manufacturer and say can you get this product for me. I think that Amazon basics is one of their private label brands.

So absolutely Amazon is going in and getting — going direct to manufactures and sourcing products. The second thing is there are a lot of common private label sellers, or third party sellers from China also are selling on Amazon as I’m sure folks have seen. And Amazon has offices in China and Amazon is supporting those guys as well. Amazon is an equal opportunity market place.

So as a private label seller you just need to be aware of the different directions the competition is going to come from. Amazon is not there to make your life easier; Amazon is there to make money for Amazon. And they are providing a great opportunity for folks to get in front of a good audience and providing a lot of great services to make it easier to sell products, but they are doing that for everybody. So you are competing against everybody when you’re taking advantage of those services.

Steve: So do you see that as a trend going forward then more and more of these factory and manufacturers are going to be working with Amazon directly to kind of reap the profits?

Peter: Well, so, yeah, let’s talk about that from two directions. The first is Amazon is a private label; Amazon goes to the factory to source its products, just like the large retailers do for their private labels. So that’ll probably continue. Second is Amazon helping manufacturers sell say the manufacturers own private label. And a lot of manufacturers are interested in this, and I’d say that there is three groups, one they are interested they haven’t tried it, they are interested, they are trying it and they are going to keep doing it. They are interested they try it; they are going to stop doing it. And I’ll explain some of what we see the manufacturers think about when they do this.

The first thing they think about is hey; well, if I do my own brand on Amazon I get great margins. So that’s very interesting to them. Then they realize, oh, but wait, it’s FBA so I have to manufacture stock without getting paid, and that’s risky and I’m not used to doing that, so maybe I won’t do this. Third thing they might realize is okay I manufactured this stock, I put it in FBA, but I don’t really know how Amazon works well right? I don’t have good native English skills, I don’t have good Amazon optimization skills, I’m not good at managing the people that leave reviews and following up with them etcetera.

So then a lot of them come back and say, okay, let me focus on what I’m good at, let me focus on what we are manufacturing and find other people who are better at selling whether they are retailers on Amazon, power sellers whoever to buy from me and let them handle the sales. It’s going to be quite a mix, but certainly the manufacturers are aware of Amazon and they are thinking about whether it’s something they should pursue or not.

Steve: Okay, what I was trying to get at is it’s not just some mad gold rush where a whole bunch of manufacturers are turning over to FBA. It just sounds like it’s a consideration in their business, and they just have to evaluate their needs and what they are good at it sounds like okay?

Peter: Yeah, and a lot of suppliers are choosing not to do it.

Steve: Okay, one other question that I constantly get asked is a lot of people who are manufacturing their own things, they are kind of worried about intellectual property theft. So you might take your design and have it manufactured, but then all of a sudden the design leaks, and all of a sudden a whole bunch of other guys are producing the same thing. How do you prevent that from happening, is there anything that you can do?

Peter: Well there are a number of things that you can do, and they all come down to — I’ll call it risk mitigation again. So there is – it’s difficult to be full proof and everybody has this issue, whether it’s a China manufacture has a new design or US or European design or brand owner. But one thing that I have seen done, if your product has multiple parts, have different manufacturers make different parts, and then bring it to an assembly facility, have the assembly facility assemble that.

And try to make sure that nobody knows kind of each of the contributors because then it’s harder to replicate, not impossible but harder that’s one. Second is to the extent that you can put some kind of intellectual property protection around it whether it’s a design pattern or some other kind of pattern, that’s helpful as well, but keep in mind that there are legal costs in enforcing that.

So if you do find that folks are doing something unexpected then you are going to incur some legal cost to enforce that. And then your enforcement actions you want to think about well which countries do I want enforcement actions in. Do I want to do them in China or in — I mean sales market the US or somewhere else. So there are some strategy involved in where you are trying to get your IP protection. So it is a challenge for everybody and…

Steve: It sounds like for a little guy they are unlikely to go the enforcement route, and so it sounds like the best option is to just kind of [inaudible 00:37:55] the design process by using different manufacturers, at least that’s what it sounds like to me.

Peter: Sure and then actually the third option is just do better marketing, so people know that your product is the real deal.

Steve: Okay, but there will still be clones out there at that point, right? You are just going to be out selling to clones essentially.

Peter: Possibly yeah, that sometimes happens.

Steve: Okay, let’s switch gears again and talk a little bit about trade shows like my wife and I try to go trade shows every other year. And I have my own stories, but I was hoping to hear some of your input about the advantage of actually going to shows. I know it’s quite intimidating for people to go to a brand new country. So I was hoping to get your take on and hopefully convince people that going to shows isn’t that intimating and it’s very valuable.

Peter: Why? Yeah, I completely agree with what you said not that intimidating and very valuable, but yeah, I’ll give you some comments. First I’m always amazed when I walk into trade shows; I’m amazed at how much product there is there. Because there is not enough just to stock at store, there is enough product to stock entire malls. And I’m just amazed by the depth and variety of product. For us we run shows twice a year in Hong Kong, our upcoming shows are in October. We have October 11th through to 14th we’ll have about 300 booths of home office electronics components suppliers. Then from the 18th to 21st we have a second set of show dates which should be a lot of mobile electronics products, smart phones, tablets, wearables, accessories. During those same dates 18th to 21st we also run a gifts and home product show.

And then from the 27th through the 30th we run a fashion accessory show and that has a lot of accessories, bags, caps, etcetera. So and we run those shows twice a year, it’s quite late for folks to make it up for these shows in October, but we run them every October and April. There is couple of things to know about visiting a show; first the shows — there are several organizers in Hong Kong and China the Canton Fair. And we all organize our shows around the same time. So a lot of buyers they come out and they visit each of the shows, or all of the shows that are relevant to them. And I would recommend visiting multiple shows to get a sense of the differences in which ones you like the best.

Second thing to keep in mind is the Hong Kong shows — Hong Kong is still English speaking. It’s very easy to get around, I think with an America passport you can just come in on a 90 days tourist visa. So it’s just a long flight that’s all, but once you get here it’s like — it’s pretty easy. A third thing about the trade shows is as I mentioned before a lot of the exhibitors at the trade shows, they are not marketing in other online channels. Now we do try to get them all on the globalsources.com site. So you’ll see different suppliers than you might see if you are only doing online research. Well even more important than that, a lot of the suppliers don’t put all of their products online.

So if you go to the show you can see additional products, and you can touch and feel them, and you can see maybe five or six or ten suppliers have similar products, and you can talk to them and get immediate feedback about any questions you have about the product or anything that you learned about the product. Then the very last thing to keep in mind is if you do meet a supplier face to face in the show and you start building a relationship, then they may start showing you products before they show anybody else. And you are less likely to get that as an online only buyer, so you end up getting better access to suppliers and their products if you meet them face to face at a show, and if you start developing that relationship with them.

Steve: A couple of comments here, one thing that I’ve noticed in the past is that vendors are very reluctant to give you like a listing of their products. And I think – I suspect it’s because they don’t want other people copying what they had to offer, but as soon as you see them face to face they’ll just show you everything.

Peter: Well also online they don’t know if you are one of their competitors emasculating as a real buyer or a real buyer. So that also makes them a little more cautious.

Steve: I also did also want to vouch that going to Hong Kong is actually quite simple, you can get by just speaking English, and the public transit system is very good. So it’s actually not that — it’s very easy to get around in Hong Kong, Canton…

Peter: You don’t need to rent a car I forget; whenever I go to a city in the US I’m often renting cars. I don’t need to rent a car in Hong Kong, public transportation and taxis are great, yeah.

Steve: I was just going to make a comment on the Canton Fair is a little bit more intimidating because not everyone speaks English, but you can still get by just taking a taxi, there’s a lot of hotels. I think I posted my itinerary in one of my posts of the exact hotel that I stayed at, and there’s usually shuttles that go back and forth on the fair. So you don’t really need to do anything there either.

Peter: Yeah that makes sense I mean the Canton Fair it’s in China, so there’s less English speaking. I think it’s also a little bit harder to get around, but if you are out for an adventure and like I said visit all the shows and get to know the differences between the shows.

Steve: What would you say is one of the big differences between the Global Source’s show and the Canton Fair?

Peter: Well what some of the buyers have told us and this is coming admittedly a little bit from say the larger retailers. But they prefer the Hong Kong shows including our show, because you’re getting more suppliers have export experience and they’re more export ready. At some of the China shows you may have more smaller suppliers, they may have less export experience. So that’s one of the differences that we hear some of the buyers that visit the show.

Steve: Okay and in terms of products selection, does Global Sources kind of specialize in a certain area or what are they strong at?

Peter: That’s a good question too. As I mentioned for electronics and consumer electronics I think we are super strong, I think you have to go to one of our shows if you are sourcing any kind of electronic or mobile electronics products. For gifts and home products we have a very solid medium size show working closely trying to bring suppliers and have more innovative products. So I think one should visit it.

The Canton Fair probably has a higher quantity of suppliers in that category, but maybe not the same kind of innovation or export experience, but I mean visit both. And then for the fashion products the scraps and the bags, we are pretty sure that we are largest show of those types of products anywhere, because there aren’t a lot of shows focused on those types of fashion accessory products.

Steve: Okay, I just also want to comment that Peter keeps mentioning that you can go to both. It’s actually very easy to go from Hong Kong to Canton. It’s just a train ride I can’t remember exactly how long it is, I think its 90 minutes, does that sound accurate to you?

Peter: Yeah, I was going to say about two hours I mean you have book your train tickets in advance because during that time of year everybody is going back and forth. And don’t take the bus because the bus takes like six or seven hours.

Steve: Yeah exactly, yeah, the train is super fast and so you can actually go — there is one fair we actually stayed in Hong Kong and actually took the train over really early in the morning to go to the Canton Fair, and then we came back to Hong Kong. I actually don’t recommend doing that, but you could if you wanted to.

Peter: Yeah no that’s exactly like some people will do a day trip, but as you said it is a long day and there is a lot of working when you are that he fair so…

Steve: Yeah, one other question I wanted to ask you is I’ve noticed actually with my vendors that the prices have just been increasing year over year at pretty significant levels. So what is a good way that I as a buyer can find cheaper prices or other vendors maybe in other countries or — what is the trend that you are seeing that’s causing these price hikes first of all, and what can I do about it?

Peter: Yeah, that’s a great question. We’ve had articles about this on our smartchinasourcing.com site on and off over the years. I remember one of the articles a buyer was saying, look if you are not going to be able to get a 30% price improvement by souring from overseas keep sourcing where you are sourcing, or sourcing from China. Because cost — this was a few years ago because cost in China keep going up. And the components of costs that are going up include labor costs, raw material costs, and the exchange rates.

Now if I would have commented on this two or three years ago I would have said all three of those are definitely going up. Now I would say labor rates are still going up no doubt about that, raw materials cost it’s unclear, it depends of what product you are sourcing, so you can check that. And the exchange rate interestingly moved about 3% in the other direction about a month ago. So kind of having an understanding of some of those underlying factors that are driving changes in pricing is helpful.

Then when again time is on the larger retailers what they do — well there’s two things they’ll do, one is they’ll try to do call it a bill of materials costs things. So they’ll try to get component costs, try to figure out the amount of labor it takes to assemble the components, then try to figure out what a fair manufacturing price is. I think that’s a little bit challenging but that’s an approach some folks take. A last approach is just get multiple quotes, so some of the larger retailers they require getting three quotes for a particular product. Then use the different quotes in the negotiating with the supplier. Say hey, I would really like to work with you, but I have this quote from another supplier that’s this price and I don’t really understand or I’m wondering if you can help me that price. So those are some strategies.

Steve: I knew for myself like going to a new vendor is such a pain in the butt, like we have to go through this whole quality control process again even though we specify everything on paper, there’s always things that we don’t specify even though we’ve done this for many years. So the cost is switching and it seems to be pretty high for us at least.

Peter: No I think that’s true for a lot of folks, so you want to think about how much — at the end of the day the best outcome is stay with my current supplier and get a good price. So if you get quotes from other folks you can go back to your current supplier and say, look I really like working with you, but we are really having a tough time in the market. There’s other suppliers, or we are getting quotes from other suppliers for these prices. But you got to be careful, the other suppliers may not be understanding your quality criteria right, like you mentioned. And you have to be very careful about how you do that conversation, because you could damage the relationship with the existing supplier.

Steve: Absolutely, hey Peter I want to be respectful of your time we’ve been chatting for almost 50 minutes. If people want to find a little bit more about Global Sources or if they have any questions for you, where can they find you, and what are some of the resources that you guys provide?

Peter: Yeah, I think the best place is globalsources.com. One of the things we didn’t talk about if people go to the site and they want to keep updated on new products as suppliers post them, they can sign up for products alerts on the globalsoruces.com site, so that’s a great resource. Second we talked about the magazines, the magazines are great for let’s say browsing and discovery, and we have PDF versions of those magazines by product category, people can find those at globalsources.com/magazines.

And for the trade shows they can learn more about them at globalsources.com/exhibitions. And we spent a lot of time on best practices for importing from China, and we have a lot of content on that at smartchinasourcing.com. So I think those are all great resources, if folks need to contact us, we have customer service links on our website. If folks who want to reach out to me they can go through the customer services, and the customer services folks will reach me.

Steve: I just want to also mention so everything is free right, these PDFs, these magazines are all free going to the tradeshow is also free.

Peter: That’s correct; I think for the trade shows if you don’t pre-register we’ve started charging I think it’s 100 Hong Kong which is about $13 US, but yeah.

Steve: Okay, yeah, more or less free. All right Peter thanks a lot for coming on the show.

Peter: Oh no, my pleasure, thank you for having me.

Steve: All right, I appreciate it take care.

Peter: Take care.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Global Sources is a great place to find vendors from Asia especially if you are selling into the electronics and accessory space. It was pretty cool to hear from the CIO himself and get advice from someone who deals with Chinese vendors every single day. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode99.

And once again I want to thank Famebit for sponsoring this episode. As I mentioned earlier Famebit is the best place to find Youtubers, Instagramers and other influencers to promote your products online, and it works. One of my podcast guests Emanuel Elayae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing, and its cost as low as 50 bucks to give a try. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous Youtubers to promote your products today.

And then finally if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you over the course. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

098: How To Private Label Goods From China With Sam Boyd Of Guided Imports

How To Private Label Goods From China With Sam Boyd Of Guided Imports

In this episode, I have Sam Boyd of GuidedImports.com, a company that helps others import safely from China.

Now in the past few years, more and people have been jumping on the Amazon private labeling bandwagon so I brought Sam Boyd on the show to give us his unique perspective on the Amazon gold rush.

As I’ve mentioned many times in previous articles and podcasts, relying solely on Amazon is a dangerous play and you really need to establish your own branded website in order to future proof your business.

Enjoy the show!

What You’ll Learn

  • Common mistakes that Amazon sellers are making
  • The right way to find a good supplier
  • Sam’s opinion on Alibaba vs Global Sources vs Canton Fair
  • How to ensure quality with your shipment
  • How to negotiate MOQs
  • Why only selling on Amazon is risky
  • Horror stories from existing Amazon sellers
  • How to find suppliers outside of China

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply their celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I’m really excited to chat with Sam Boyd of guidedimports.com, a company that helps others import safely from China. Now in the past few years more and more people have been kind of jumping on the Amazon private labeling band wagon. So I brought Sam Boyd on the show to kind of give us his unique perspective on the Amazon gold rush.

Now as I have mentioned many times in previous articles and podcast relying solely on Amazon is kind of a dangerous play, because you are putting all your eggs in one basket, and you kind of really need to establish your own branded website or business in order to kind of future proof your business. And with that welcome to the show Sam, how are you doing today man?

Sam: Thank you so much for having me Steve, I’m doing great, how are you?

Steve: Very good, so tell us about Guided Imports, so what do you guys do, and why did you start this company?

Sam: Yeah sure, so to put it simply, Guided Imports is a company that helps people get products made in China and safely and easily get them shifted to their destination country to be sold. So we started as just a regular sourcing company and what that means is, larger businesses and brands who don’t necessarily have the means of having their own purchasing office in China, we started out as being very dedicated purchasing office. And through the time of us working with these clients, we realized that there was a huge market for people who were interested in selling on Amazon and also selling on ecommerce.

So at about a year after we were established as our first sourcing company, we launched Guided Imports. And guided import’s goal is to help buyer or help sellers on Amazon purchase products and get them manufactured in China and seamlessly deal with everything on the China side to get them over to Amazon warehouses, and to be sold on Amazon.

Steve: So Sam if I went up to you and said, hey, I want to sell cell phone cases for example, you would just take care of it from there after I give the specifications?

Sam: Yeah, I mean that’s the ideal goal right? So essentially the way it works is we offer the seamless service that allows people to tell us exactly what it is that they are looking for. We sort of walk them through the information that we need to know. And we come back to with them with reports telling them okay this is how much we think it’s going to cost. This is what it’s going to cost to do to get the products through customs and pay the duty in taxes. These are the necessary certifications you need and ultimately give you an idea of the entire process and then start working from A to Z, so exactly what you said.

Steve: And this is probably getting a little too specific I was just curios. The way you guys get paid is it like flat fee or do you take cut off of each product?

Sam: Great question, so the way that — so what we do is — to put it simply this is a sourcing company there’s a lot of companies out here, we just try to give it a different approach. And what a lot of sourcing companies do is they’ll take some type of commission, they’ll charge percentage on top of the total sales or multiple payment structures. What we try to do is we have just one flat fee that you pay and we handle everything, we are your eyes, ears, boots on the ground, and that’s all you necessarily have to worry about.

Steve: Okay, so let’s get into kind of like the Amazon space I know a lot of people just been kind of jumping on the Amazon band wagon, and they’ve been just been making mistakes left and right in sourcing. I was just kind of curious what your view you probably see this more than I do but what is your view of just kind of selling on Amazon today?

Sam: So selling on Amazon is the phenomenal business model, it’s really the first platform where anyone can seemingly find a product, get it made, and sell it to the end user. The problem that we are seeing are importing is a serious game. It’s not just about finding a product, and for your example cell phone cases, and saying okay, I’m going to get 3000 of this made and start selling them. There’s a lot more that goes into it, and well, there are a lot of guides that are teaching people how to safely import, they are leaving out a lot of important information. And it’s really causing some Amazon sellers to feel the wrath, because Amazon is getting stricter.

And they are starting to essentially ban users for not complying with rules and regulations through Amazon as well as through import regulations. So while selling on Amazon is a great model, it really needs to be done carefully and properly.

Steve: Yeah, I have just noticed I think they just went through another banning wave like a month ago right? Where they just banned a whole bunch of people and they removed a lot of reviews as well. Do you happen to have any insight on why they were banned?

Sam: Yeah, there’s a lot of reasons, I think why people were banned and Amazon did recently change their terms of service where people are saying regarding false reviews or un-organic reviews. What we are hearing and what we are seeing on people posting on different blog posts or posting on our facebook group and things like this, are some of the instances where maybe they just got unlucky. But I don’t think everyone is being completely honest with the exact reasons why Amazon banned them, or they just don’t know. After hearing some stories I definitely have my own opinions as to why the majority of them are being banned, but…

Steve: Let’s hear them.

Sam: So essentially one of the biggest concerns is safety. Amazons customer is the end user, it’s not the seller. And this is the reason why Amazon is starting to teach factories how to sell on Amazon. Is because they want to minimize this risk of exposure that they have to products that are not necessarily safe and they don’t have the proper licenses and things like this. So a big example is anything that is food related, whether its food itself or a product that’s used in cooking, needs a certification through the FDA, if it’s being sold in the US market. Many people see this as something that they can just skip passed that they think well, I can get it — I can get this product, that not necessarily need me to spend a couple of 100 dollars on the FDA certification.

I can sort of just hope it slips through customs, start selling it on Amazon, and I figured that I have such a low volume that no one’s really going to catch me. Well this is a perfect example, but when we look at it it’s not just an FDA certification that people need for products, there’s tons and tons of certifications. And there’s so many to the extent that there’s — it’s a customs brokers job, it’s their profession to have an understanding and to advice people on all the necessary certification. So one of the biggest things that I see people getting banned for is, lacking this necessary compliance regulations and certifications, it’s ultimately let’s assume that you are selling baby products.

And you don’t get the products tested to make sure there’s let’s say — to make sure that there’s no lead in the product itself. This is a huge issue, because you are responsible for putting these products in the hands of children. A lot of other people that are selling are mothers and fathers themselves, so at least I have a family and they are neglecting these major concerns. That a major importer or someone who knows how to import would never do, but because people are just reading quick guides or just looking through forms and seeing how easy it is to sell on Amazon, they completely neglect this stuff and what’s happening is they are getting banned.

Steve: Okay, I have actually heard other stories about Amazon kind of cracking down on customer service and quality of products as well. Which is why if someone gets too many complaints after X number of sales, Amazon just doesn’t want the seller in the system anymore even though they might have a pretty decent track record.

Sam: Yeah, absolutely and that’s within reason, I mean there’s – it’s funny you asked me for what my theories are or what my thoughts are, there’s a lot of them Steve. That’s another one, its quality control. Quality controls, having an inspector, a third party inspector go to your factory and check the goods and test the goods cost usually under $300. But someone who is working on such tight margins might neglect doing this and what’s happening is they are going to get — their products are going to get banned because the products themselves don’t meet the necessary quality control. They don’t meet the necessary quality that the end users want to get in returns.

So it’s even easy for a long time seller to get banned as well for just saying I don’t want to spend $300 on QC. QC is quality control, and just because I’ll assume my supplier is good, I have worked with him in the past, I usually get good products, it doesn’t work like that. With manufacturing at least you really need to be one step ahead of the manufacturer at all times. And it’s costing people just like you said their accounts and essentially their business.

Steve: I mean I can talk a little bit about personal experience here, from production run to production run, we always go through everything. Because the materials might have changed, someone else might have been working in the line different set of people and the quality always varies from production run to production run. So let’s talk about some of these common mistakes that some of these newbie Amazon sellers are making, what are some of the problems that you’ve been seeing?

Sam: Sure, so I think we touched on two of them, two of them being not necessarily knowing what certifications needs to be purchased or applied or tested to a product quality control. Those are two of them some other ones are — some other problems that we are seeing are not working with proper factories…

Steve: What does that mean exactly?

Sam: Alibaba is a great platform to find factories; it’s what some people would say it’s the ideal platform. But a lot of people put too much faith into Alibaba, or suppliers on Alibaba because someone has a gold ratings, a [inaudible 00:13:26] that they paid Alibaba. And have that says we’ve been a perfect supplier for ten years, or we’ve been perfect supplier for five years. So one of the mistakes is with sourcing, so sourcing is searching for factories, finding ideal factories, that’s a serious problem is that they are finding the wrong factories, or they are finding factories that are not necessarily qualified.

And what is happening is they are facing all of these problems that we just spoke about but these problems could have easily been avoided had they found a proper factory or a factory that’s specialized in the product that they want to sell to be sold in the market that they want to sell.

Steve: So let me ask you this since we are on the topic, so what is the right way to find the proper factory to manufacture a specific item?

Sam: That’s a good question, so it’s … I don’t think you are going to like the answer because it takes a long time to do this. What we like to — the way we like to explain finding a factory to manufacture your product is to cast the white net. So speak to as many factories as you possibly can and what I mean by this is speak to a hundred factories and rapidly narrow down these 100 factory list into more qualified factories. Until you are getting down to approximately five factories that you’ve been able to personally vet and personally qualify and say of the 100 factories that we spoke with, these five we fell meet all requirements that we need.

And one of the most difficult and serious things that someone who is new to finding these factories needs to understand is, the very last thing you want to be looking at is the price of the product. A lot of people just look at price first, and then find a qualified factory based on price but it’s really the opposite.

Steve: What are some of the criteria that you use to go from a hundred down to five for example?

Sam: Sure, so some of them can just purely be how a factory responds, what’s the response rate, but other ones can be more serious ones looking at their products, so there’s hard factories that you can put into place. If you are looking for cell phone cases for example and you see that a factory sells everything from microwaves to wallets to cell phone cases, that’s not necessarily a good thing, because it’s telling you that supplier does not specialize in one criteria. They are trying to just throw — they are just trying to throw a bunch of stuff on the wall and see what’s sticking. So if a factory has multiple items that are in completely different categories that would be a factor that would make you say, okay, we don’t want to work with them.

Steve: Okay, they are probably not a factory either right, because they are probably not making their own stuff at that point either?

Sam: Yeah, there’s definitely a possibility that they are not a factory. And yeah, I try to use the word supplier and not factory because a lot of people have this idea that I’m going to China or I’m going to Asia and I want to get products manufactured. I need to go to a factory because I don’t want any middle man.

And it’s kind of a harmful thought process because it really minimizes your options, so one of the things that you can always look for is if they are some type of middle man, a trading company it doesn’t mean that they are bad, or it doesn’t mean that they are priced any more expensive, it just means that they are purchasing for maybe a factory that doesn’t necessarily have the means to do international export.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: I would say there’s a lot of criteria we list them on our blog, but one of more important thing that I would say, is focus on the export market that these factories manufacture for. So if you are going to be selling in the US but a factory says that 80% of their sales are to India, that’s not necessarily a good thing because the level of quality on products is different per country. And comparing India to the US in terms of quality is you are going to see such a huge difference that you want a factory that completely understands the western market, and it’s not selling just the lowest possible price, they are more focused on quality.

Steve: Okay and what services would you recommend to find vendors you mentioned Alibaba already, but do you have experience with like Global Sources, going to trade shows, using some of these import services like Panjiva and Import Genius?

Sam: I’m a huge fan of Global Sources, I love Global Sources, and I think for the newer importer, Global Sources does not get the amount of recognition that they deserve. Because the search features alone in Global Sources are a lot better for the newer importer. You can basically choose — as a newer importer you can basically choose how big of a factory you want to work with.

And if you are ordering a small quantity, it depends on the product but let’s say for these cell phone cases 5,000 cell phone cases, you don’t want to work with a huge company or a huge factory that’s selling also to best buy and radio check. You want to work with someone who is a little bit more in line with your business model, or with the size of your business.

And Global Sources is using their star ratings, it’s a very simple way to just read out these giant factories, we are going to have huge overheads and they are going to charge that on top of the — they are going to cover that through the product price. Other services yeah, Panjiva is great import, where as Import Genius is also good. They are good for identifying if there’s a brand that you want to know the factory, that they came from, that the product came from; those services are good for an Amazon seller. I don’t think it’s necessary to pay the hundreds some dollars a month for the service when most of this information can be found online anyway. So then there’s also websites like made in China, which is also a pretty good. And then trade shows, the canton fair is coming up soon in Guanzhong in a couple weeks, Guanzhong China.

And that is a great way to get product ideas but for a small seller it’s difficult to really use these companies, because these are some of those bigger factories. They are selling to Home Depot they are selling to Wal-Mart, they are clients, and they are searching for these big companies to put in multimillion dollar orders. And I don’t really think most Amazon sellers are ready to do that at this point.

Steve: Interesting every time we go to the canton fair we managed to find a bunch of small guys who are willing to work with us at least. So that’s interesting I guess it probably just depends on what products that you are trying to sell.

Sam: Absolutely, I bring clients to the canton fair and we are usually able to find some factories or some trading companies that are good. But nine times out of ten if not more, the prices that they come back, using our sourcing services we are able to beat their prices just through finding other factories.

Steve: Okay so for the little guy then where do you suggest finding sources for private labeling?

Sam: To find little guy?

Steve: Little guy someone starting out, they have a budget of maybe like five grand to start.

Sam: So someone in that range, Alibaba, Global Sources, are great if their budget is five grand, I don’t see how they could justify paying the five grand, it’s going to take for them to get to China.

Steve: Oh, I meant like just for products like initial inventory just to start with yeah.

Sam: Alibaba, Global Sources, these are two good locations to source suppliers if you want to do it on your own. There are services that help you do this, one of them is Guided Imports, but sourcing companies are there. The thing that most people will find when they run into sourcing companies is for a smaller buyer, it’s sometimes difficult to work with their margin and see a profit. So what I would suggest is if you are new, take your chances and get your feet wet using what’s available, using the databases that are out there, and from there scale up.

Steve: So to use a sourcing service such as Guided Imports, what would you typically be willing to spend, or what should you be willing to invest?

Sam: This is a good question because a lot of people think from a monetary standpoint and ultimately that’s completely understandable, because it’s their business, all they care about is the bottom line. But one of the things that they are really investing when they are using a sourcing service similar to Guided Imports, is they are investing money or the saved time. Traditionally if you were to do this on your own, it’s going to take having to speak with up to nine different services just to get your product idea to market to be sold on Amazon. And this is counting working with factories, working with quality control teams, doing what it just takes, all the stuff.

When you are looking towards a sourcing service, it’s — the biggest investment here is the amount of time that you are going to be able to save. Because ultimately a service like this is — they are focused on handling everything for you. So you can sit back and allow your business to grow where it matters which is your customers.

Steve: Okay.

Sam: You did mention $5000, I would say that can be a good starting point for someone who is interested in using one of these sourcing services its $5000. But we see buyers who are ready to — or looking to spend twice that or if not five times that amount on orders. So it does depend on the product, it depends on the kind of business you have, how much time do you want to dedicate to sourcing.

Steve: Okay, fair enough.

Sam: Right.

Steve: Okay, and just speaking with a bunch of Amazon sellers, people will tend to email me their problems and one big problem that they have is quality control. And so I was wondering if you have any inputs on kind of ensuring a consistent quality of product from under run.

Sam: Sure. So in regards to quality control, there’s a lot of great quality control services that will do inspections at the factory or at the supplier’s warehouse prior to the goods getting their final payment. But what someone really wants to ensure is that they have what I like to call to a quality gates throughout the entire process. So what that means is not only are they doing quality control the very end but they have some type of quality assurance through every step of the process.

So one of the quality gates that I mentioned is when you are sourcing a product, it’s finding that qualified supplier. Another one can be ordering samples. You always want to order samples. Another one can be doing preparing proper– we call product manuals which is like a purchase contract or purchasing agreement. So all of these things give you a safer and more qualified understanding, that the product that you intend to purchase is going to be the product that you are going to get.

Quality issues still happen and I think the ultimate way to prevent that is to have someone look at the goods before they are ever shipped out of the manufacturing country. But by having your checks and balances in place, even before that happens, you can really minimize the potential of bad quality.

Steve: This is a very general question. I’m not sure you are going to be able to provide a good answer but even though we have some of our stuff looked at; we still end up with defects when we get our final order. What is typically an acceptable defect rate or a reasonable defect rate?

Sam: It’s a good question. This is really going to depend on the product. It’s really going to depend on the product. If your product has very few moving pieces, if your product was cast from a single mold, from a single material, you’d expect the defect rate to be a little bit lower than something that has multiple moving pieces maybe an electronic component. One of the things that you can do to get a better understanding of this is ask your supplier what is the expected defect rate. And asking them what do they consider a reasonable amount of defects.

I would say, anything, defects are going to happen. Nothing in this world is perfect. The way manufacturing is done today, you are going to get defects. The goal is really minimizing that amount. So what I try to look for is for most consumer grade products, you want to try to shoot for a defect rate under 3%, usually even more than that. I mean if you can work with half of a percent, then you are in good shape.

Steve: Oh, half of a percent. That would be incredible.

Sam: That would be phenomenal, right?

Steve: Yeah.

Sam: And that can be done too if a factory has their, uses the proper techniques for their own quality control. So one thing that a lot of importers don’t necessarily understand or don’t yet know about is that there’s something that is called QMS stands for Quality Management Systems. And there’s a text book criteria for how a factory handles quality control in-house. They can get certified on certain types of quality control. What this certification say is that that the way that they do quality control equates to a certain level if not less, or a certain level or less defects than if they were just to do what someone would say in-house. Does that make sense?

Steve: Kind of. Can you elaborate a little bit more?

Sam: Sure, so one of the most basic ones and for some of your listeners who are interested in this they can always quickly look it off, is that ISO9001. So this is basically saying the way that our factory tests their product is only a certain amount of defects are going to make it to the final production. So this is a phenomenal quality gate that people can use that if a factory is certified in ISO then they can say, not only do they care about quality control, but the factory has these necessary techniques to test the quality.

So when you ask a factory, “How do you handle quality control?” And they simply say, “Oh, yeah, we do it in-house. We search; we just look through the line for products.” That’s telling you maybe they don’t necessarily care that much about quality control. Whereas that says, “We are ISO9001 certified,” that can potentially tell you, “Okay. These guys know a little bit more about quality control and I can sort of put a little bit more faith on the fact that prior to my inspector looking at the products, the factory is going to be able to deliver a decent level of quality.”

Steve: Okay, fair enough. Lets a step back a little bit and kind of just talk about how someone who’s smaller can actually even get the attention of a supplier to work with them. Do you have any tips there?

Sam: A lot of people, I see on these forums, a lot of people are saying to lie to suppliers and say that, “This is just a test order. This isn’t a big order. Our next order is going to be large.” I kind do frown on that because you, you are basing your relationship with the supplier off of false hopes, and that’s not really a great way to get into a business relationship with someone.

I would say instead of trying to get larger factories to look at someone who’s looking to—who only has the means of placing a small order, I would say, well a lot of people aren’t going to like the answer to this, it’s focus on the type of suppliers that are interested in working with them. So someone who only has a couple of thousand dollars to spend might want to look more towards a trading company who has the means to work with their smaller quantities.

Steve: Yeah, what I usually tell people also is, if their quantities are super low, just go on AliExpress, and just get your feet in the water.

Sam: Absolutely. I mean AliExpress, Dhgate, there’s a lot of viable options for someone who’s just trying to get their feet wet, absolutely.

Steve: Okay. Lets switch gears once again and just kind of talk about Amazon. I think one of the reasons we got into contact was I think one of your coworkers read my post on Amazon horror stories, and I just kind of wanted your take on just focusing all your efforts on one channel as opposed to kind of broadening, selling to the retail space, selling with your own shop and that sort of thing. What you are kind of seeing out there now?

Sam: Amazon is not going to—Amazon is a big company. They are ideal. Their customer is the end user. It’s not these sellers who are trying to make selling on Amazon their full time income. And while a lot of people are not going to like hearing that, sellers are expendable. They are absolutely expendable.

What’s happening is there– the people who are selling on Amazon were not getting banned, but the ones who are going to survive through this wave of Amazon getting stricter, or my opinion better at what they do, is if you broaden your sales channels, don’t only sell on Amazon.

Amazon is phenomenal right now, they are a great market, but put yourself in a position that you have, you have the entire world to sell your products to. Don’t—putting all your eggs in one basket is not necessarily the best solution in my opinion. But for those who are focused on selling on Amazon, it’s start listening to what it is that Amazon is preaching, because their regulations and their new rules, they are not going away.

Steve: You mentioned that a lot of the factories that you’ve been kind of encountering are starting to sell direct on Amazon kind of by passing the private labeler, are you seeing that more and more?

Sam: Amazon is training sellers, or Amazon is training factories to sell on Amazon. I would say that the extent that we are seeing it is not at a wave right now that it’s completely affecting everyone but it is something that we are seeing. And it is something that is the first move of Amazon saying, “Hey look, you guys are not who we—you guys are not our intended customers. It’s the end user. We are going to do everything we possibly can to ensure that our end user stays happy.”

Steve: And in terms of private labeling in general, what are your thoughts on the saturation level of Amazon right now?

Sam: So, it’s a good question. Amazon is a great market for people who are looking to purchase products. I think everyone—it’s safe to say almost everyone who’s listening has purchased a random product on Amazon. But what we see is there are so many different variations of one product that—I don’t think that’s necessarily a good thing.

There was this famous psychology experiment where this [inaudible 00:36:13] food store was—they were featuring a line of exotic and high quality jams. And customers who came to taste samples they were given a couple for a dollar off if they bought a jar. So in this one condition, the study had six varieties of jam that they were able to test and another testing, there was 24 varieties. In both testing, the consumer tasted the same amount. But when there was only six varieties, the purchase rate went up a lot more. While people like to have variations, too much variation is never a good thing.

Steve: Yeah, I don’t know about you but when I shop on Amazon these days, the shopping experience isn’t as pleasant because I have a bunch of stuff that all looks the same and I kind of have to sift through all reviews in order to buy stuff. Do you see Amazon kind of cracking down and kind of reducing the choices and eliminating all these smaller guys going forward?

Sam: Yeah, absolutely. The reviews that you are looking at, can you guarantee that those reviews were not written by someone who received the product for free or for 99 cents? I mean a lot of people are not really going to love where Amazon is going but what we are focused on and what people need to be focused on is that in order to get your product ranked and to stay a top product, you need to have quality.

So by just following in this band wagon of, “Oh, someone is selling a garlic press; let me sell it as well.” It’s not doing any one any favors because you are just another guy and potentially you have reviews that—nowadays people aren’t really sure if these reviews are genuine. That’s not a good position Amazon wants to be in.

Steve: So let me ask you this. So let’s say you are a brand new aspiring ecommerce store owner, or business owner, how would you proceed. Which market would you tackle first? Would you start out at Amazon, would you start with your own site, would you go into retail? What would be your strategy?

Sam: If I was starting from day one, I think Amazon is an ideal location to at least put some type of product. It’s great for validation. If the ecommerce market is interested in buying my products, there’s a good chance the rest of the market is interested in buying my product as well. So I would definitely start on Amazon. I would also focus on selling on my own ecommerce site. I mean if you just look at it, the numbers once you are able to build up a site and have a following, the numbers are just so much more in your favor, because you don’t have Amazon taking a decent chunk out of your pockets.

But one of the other things that is interesting that I don’t see a whole lot of people doing is go to retail. There’s some very simple ways. If you have a product already made, there’s some very simple ways for you to go to retail. If you are importing 5,000 units of your products, keep a hundred at your home and keep ten samples in your car. And any time that you are out shopping around, just show the product to a store owner of a small mom and pop shop and offer to fulfill their—to give them a certain quantity as a test quantity and say, “Hey if this sell, we can go into—we can do a purchase agreement. But you try it out. Maybe your consumers are interested in this.”

I can tell you, I’ve had experiences prior to moving to China in sales. It’s a phenomenal thing when you are given terms where you don’t have to pay until you’ve actually sold an item. For someone who wants to get into retail on minimal investment, go locally. Find those small stores and try to get your products in there, and maybe you’ll strike out a couple of times, but the one time that you do make a success it just flattens the door for you to get into an even bigger store the next time and even larger store. So if this remains, I will not just stick to Amazon and say, “This is where I’m going to grow everything.” I’d really focus on broadening my sales channels as much as possible.

Steve: What else I like about your retail strategy is that those type of customers would be ordering on a regular basis. You don’t have to actually go out and find them again.

Sam: Absolutely. Yeah, it’s amazing. It’s to be able to sell wholesale. I mean that’s your dream. As an importer and as a brand owner, do you really have to deal with customers for the rest of the life of the product? No, you want to deal with other buyers. And you want to be able to get into B to B, so you can leave B to C. leave the reviews and leave these things to the company who’s selling to the end user.

Steve: Yeah, that’s one thing that you definitely cannot be doing on Amazon. Amazon is always going to be B to C, for now at least.

Sam: Right now, absolutely.

Steve: I had kind of a personal problem that I was hoping you could help me out with. I’ve noticed that the price is in China have been increasing dramatically from year to year, so what can one do about that and is there an easy way to find suppliers outside of China like in Pakistan, Bangladesh, Indonesia or Vietnam?

Sam: So, price increase in China is something that not only are you seeing but huge companies are seeing and also China itself is seeing. China just devalued the Renminbi a couple of months ago in hopes to get more foreign buyers purchasing products from factories. But what’s going to happen, China is not going to be China forever. I mean, I live in China. I love China but unfortunately, it’s not—the China that we know is not going to be the manufacturing hub of the world forever.

So looking for other factories in other countries to produced goods, is something that can be done. But I think what you are going to notice is unless you are producing at the scale that allows you to get a factory to start its own production, then it might be difficult for you to look at India, Vietnam or Bangladesh. Also it depends on the product. So what I mean by this is, cell phone cases for example, most likely the reason you went to the one factory that you may be working with for cell phone cases for example, is probably because this supplier already makes these cell phone cases.

By leaving that factory and going to another country, you are most likely going to have to commission that factory to recreate the molds which is a very expensive part of manufacturing. It’s a very expensive startup cost and get them to the point where they can produce the product that you were having made at the same level of quality if not better at the price that you need it to be. So for someone in your position, I would say, you can start looking at other countries but you might have better luck figuring out better ways to negotiate with suppliers currently or find suppliers who are more willing to drop their costs for one reason or another.

Steve: Okay. What’s funny is some of my Chinese vendors have started opening I guess their own factories in other countries as well. I don’t know if you’ve seen that. I just found that kind of funny that they’ve actually travelled outside of their country to start other places where the labor is significantly cheaper.

Sam: Yeah, there’s definitely a lot of investment in that. It’s sort of goes in my belief that no one’s really going to be the next China. It’s really once we see the serious fall of Chinese production, other countries are going to specialize in their own individual thing. So we might look at Bangladesh as textiles and that will just be the best place to get textiles.

We might look at Vietnam for electronics, in India for plastics and consumer hard goods. So China is sort of—they are taking all of their eggs out of their own basket for good reason. That should be a good sign to you that if your suppliers are doing this, then their intent is to stay. That’s a very reassuring thing to have in a supplier.

Steve: Okay, hey Sam, we’ve been chatting for like 45 minutes. I don’t want to take up too much of your time. Can you tell the listeners where they can find you and where they can go on Guided Imports to get more information?

Sam: Yeah, sure, so you can always find me at guidedimports.com. You can email me directly at info@guidedimports.com. We are definitely very excited to be launching this new service that probably be out by the times this podcast is ready. It is truly streamlining the process of sourcing. So we are taking a product where our customers give us the idea and we are able to do absolutely everything for them where all they have to worry about is selling their products. So we will find their product, the factories, deal with the customs; deal with shipping absolutely everything, including marketing on Amazon.

We’ve a phenomenal new resource that is exclusive to us, that current tastings has allowed the BSR to go from about—the products that we’ve tested on, these are the BSR has gone from the high 4,000 to number nine in its category in under 36 hours and it’s 100% in Amazon’s terms of service and it’s more what they are looking for from a seller.

So we’re excited to be able to have that to our service. But if you are looking for more information we certainly have a blog as well. It’s guidedimports.com/blog. We have a Facebook group that you can search for us. I’m always open to answering questions whether it’s on a website or a blog or Facebook, or whatever you can find me. I try to be pretty open, so you know anyone who has problems or questions feel free to reach out to me. I’m happy to help them.

Steve: Sam, that almost sounds too good to be true. So I’ll have to check it out.

Sam: Yeah, you know what; I’m very excited for it. Yeah, it does sound too good to be true. It’s one of those things that the person that we are working with is one of the, I would say, one of the best Amazon affiliate marketers in the industry. And we’ve been able to partner with him and put something together that’s really revolutionary. This is keep in mind, this is the initial testing. This is what we are getting from the first products that we are trying. But we are sort of, all struck right now. Are these numbers real? Is this really what’s happening? While I don’t want to guarantee this will work for everyone, the tests and the products that we’ve done are, it’s looking good and it’s very exciting for us.

Steve: Sounds good Sam, I will definitely be checking it out.

Sam: Absolutely.

Steve: Well, thanks a lot for coming on the show Sam. Really appreciate your time.

Sam: No, Steve thank you so much, I appreciate it as well. It was great talking to you.

Steve: All right take care.

Sam: All right, thank you, you too.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Getting your importing flow down is extremely important for any ecommerce store, and Sam’s tips were awesome.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode97, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice for my guess. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

097: How To Go From 0 To 180K Subscribers On SoundCloud In A Year As A Musician

How To Go From 0 to 180K Subscribers In A Year On SoundCloud As A Musician

Budi Voogt is the co-founder of Heroic Recordings, a record label group and agency that represents a number of major electronic artists. He is also the author of the SoundCloud Bible.

Now I have a lot of listeners who are artists and some are even musicians. So I brought Budi on the show today to teach us how to become a successful solo entrepreneur and leverage your artistic talents as a business.

What You’ll Learn

  • What exactly a record label does and what it means to be an agency
  • How the music industry works
  • How artists are typically paid and how copyrights work
  • How Budi got his first clients and the appeal of his firm vs a larger record label
  • How to become an authority on Sound Cloud and the music marketing space
  • Common mistakes artists make
  • The right way to market yourself online

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m happy to have Budi Voogt on the show. Now Budi is the co-founder of Heroic Recordings, a record label group, an agency that represents a number of major electronic artists. He’s also the author of the Soundcloud Bible. And here’s just a quick aside before we begin.

You know, when I was young, I was somewhat discouraged by my parents to kind of pursue any career in the arts not that I was any good at the arts, but being a professional artists carries kind of a negative connotation about being poor in starting. Now I have a lot of listeners who are artists and some are even musicians. So I brought Budi on the show today to kind of teach us how to become a successful solo entrepreneur and kind of leverage our artistic talents as a business. So with that, welcome to the show Budi. How are you doing today man?

Budi: Doing very good. Thank you for having me Steve.

Steve: Yes so give us the quick background story. I actually know very little about the music industry. So how did you start Heroic Recordings, and basically can you explain what a record label is and what an agency does?

Budi: Sure, absolutely, so to give a quick random for the listeners. So basically Heroic is a record label group and agency. And what we do is very much focused on the electronic music. And we try it on the web. What we do is we have a number of record labels which serve for us as a platform to discover and kick start upcoming talents. So that might be we discover them on Soundcloud or elsewhere, or they were tipped off to us.

And then we release their records, we market them with a heavy emphasis on online, so blogs, YouTube channels, Soundcloud channels. And from there we pick out the artist with the most potential and from our agency division, we then represent them for management to really build careers. So to give you an illustration, one of the artists we brought from 2,000 followers to like 180,000 taking him from guitar teacher to fully—yeah, he is self sustaining as an artist right now touring the world.

Steve: That’s cool. So actually how did you actually get into this business in the first place? Are you an artist yourself?

Budi: I am not.

Steve: So how did you actually start Heroic?

Budi: Right, so I was in business administration. I do my bachelors in a university here in the Netherlands. And this was about four and a half years ago when I started. And I always had an entrepreneurial itch, but I didn’t know so much what I wanted to do yet. So I’d chosen this university direction because it was the closest approximation to doing business, right business administration. I was going to the local chamber of commerce following a number of workshops about entrepreneurships and trying to figure out how they worked.

At the time my best friend started producing music and they put a track on Soundcloud which at the time was at its infancy. And in one or two weeks time, it got 10 to 20 thousand plays which back in the day meant that they were like the top 1% people on the platform. It was surprisingly good how well the response was. And mind you this was without any following. This was super organic. It was sort of like the stars aligning.

So we came together and it was guys there’s some great opportunity here. They started an act. I started managing them. These were really the beginnings. It was a great way for us to start finding our way and also a great opportunity to start running a business, and from there it very much escalated.

Steve: That’s interesting. So you were the author of the Soundcloud Bible. So is that primarily how you promote your artists?

Budi: No, absolutely not. It is just a part of a spectrum of things that we do. You see, how the Soundcloud Bible comes in here is that to pick up where we left off. So when I started managing these guys, soon enough I discovered how much I loved doing that. So I started an agency with my partner, started signing more acts and then at one point we realized like, hey we are trying to open all these doors of all these established players, managers, publishers, really the established, you would say elite, but it’s rather just that the music business model was very much focused around these bigger companies that grew back when physical still was the driving product.

And we were trying to open these doors and we had artists with so much potential, but they didn’t have the track record to back that up. So that’s when it hit us like, hey our initial success came from Soundcloud. Why not fully dedicate ourselves to leveraging digital to create that leverage for ourselves to open the doors. At the time I bought up my partner from the agency at the time and together with my now partner Tim who is also half of the act [inaudible 0:06:34] we started Heroic, and we merged both the agency and the record label. And…

Steve: Okay, so you guys were like a one stop shop at this point so to speak.

Budi: Pretty much, yes.

Steve: So a couple of things I just want to get clear since I know very little about the music industry. So what is a record label first of all?

Budi: Right, so originally a record label where the name comes from is from the sticker that people would put on a vinyl record, because vinyl all look the same. It was wax and then you would put on the sticker and that would be the brand, so hence record label. Now that meant typically that the record label has the role of discovering the talent, and then both financing and facilitating the production of records and then that will be sent to a distributor and the distributor will distribute it at the stores.

And now we essentially do exactly the same, but then instead playing the physical level, we do this on a digital level. So we discover talents, we sign them, we curate it. We make sure the product and the artist is in the best shape possible. We might finance it. We might make sure that there’s correct branding visual, aesthetics, artwork etcetera, and then it goes to the distributor and then the distributor brings it to our stores which we call DSPs digital service providers.

These are your iTunes, Spotify etcetera. And from there the tracks are available for sale and this is only the beginning. The real work comes when you are doing marketing. That is pretty much what a record label does. So everything I just told you is the foundation where you really excel is your musical curation, your visual presentation and then especially your marketing.

Steve: So I’m just curious, and I’ve always been wondering about how this all work. So how do musical artists typically get paid? So is it by the play, do they make most of their money doing concerts and live things, live events? How does that work?

Budi: Right, very good question and one where the answer has sort of shifted over time. In say 15 years ago, 1998 the record industry was a $30 billion dollar yearly grossing industry where as now, 15 years later, it’s about $15 billion. So the industry is effectively halved. And the reason why that happened is because with the decline of physical, and with the rise of digital, you would got sort of a democratization of distribution and everyone is opting now for accessibility and comfort instead of ownership. People want to have access instead of wanting to own that CD or vinyl.

And what’s happened in the process is that all those, those larger [inaudible 0:09:26], think about $12 for a CD which effectively now is someone just rings a track on Spotify and that one play might make an artist 0.056 cents. Yeah, so the game is very much changed. So right now the majority of a touring artist his revenue might be events like performances. But, there are many artists still who are able to make a living off of royalties, and that means income from download sales, CD purchases.

Steve: Just curious, so people still buy CDs?

Budi: Some, yes. However I think this is very dependent on genre. For example we are very much focused on electronic music making our demographic very young, and thus physical consumption is nonexistent. But maybe if you are making country music, there is a larger portion of people that still do.

Steve: Yeah, I mean, I can’t remember the last time I actually purchased an album. These days, I just use Pandora, Spotify, and I’ll buy an occasional track here and there. So the artists are they—you mentioned it was somewhere like 0.001 cents per play like on Spotify. So that kind of implies that you have to really still hit it big in order to make a living doing this. Is that accurate?

Budi: Absolutely. I think there are many artists though who very successfully manage to create the sort of a synergy of revenue streams. So you would have some licensing for example you put a track behind advertisements or video replacement. You might have some breakable royalties via downloads and streaming. You might play a few shows and all that together might come to [inaudible 0:11:18] income.

Steve: Okay, I’ve always been curious about how copyrights and all the rights to music works. So when an artist produces something, they own that sound right, and so they have to get contacted if anyone wants to use their music in a video or something?

Budi: Yeah, music copyright is very, very complex. But if I were to summarize, there are two major copyrights for everyone’s understanding. So basically via international law, if you create something that is a unique idea whether that’s a song or actually an idea or a device or whatever and you can, you break down that idea, or you store it in such a way that it can be reproduced by someone else, then technically you have copyright on that thoughts.

Now, on music it means there are two different entities if you need to separate between. And number one is the song, the composition. And this is easiest to interpret as a sheet music for example. You know if you look at sheet music, there’s all these notes and the notes together make the arrangement that is the song.

Steve: You still there?

Budi: You are still with me Steve?

Steve: Yeah, I’m still with you, yeah.

Budi: Okay beautiful. So a good point to visualize that would be to think about sheet music. And then you have all these notes switched together form the arrangement of the song. And that is one copyright. That is the composition copyright on the song. That is owned by the songwriter. And then another copyright is the copyright on the actual recording of that song. So you might have person A write the song and you might person B perform the song. And then you might have person C record the performance of person B.

Steve: Okay, wow, so if I were to use just this is a random aside, if I were to use like a piece of music in one of my YouTube videos, it sounds like I have to contact several people.

Budi: Yeah, so basically different—absolutely. It’s going to be super confusing for people, but usually what that means is that if you were to use a track then technically you would have to reach out to the master owner. And the master owner would either be the record label or the person performing the song.

Steve: So I’m just curious Budi, so what—how did you get your first clients and why would they go to you as opposed to like a larger record label, like a Sony or [inaudible 0:13:47] or whatever?

Budi: Right, so our first clients very much came from our close environment. So basically my initial act were my best friends and from there they were doing a great job and other people saw I was doing a good job, and this allowed me to find other talent and they were seeing that I was making things happen for these other guys. So that was the initial growth.

And now very much what you see is a compounding effect. So the bigger the label gets, the more music submissions we get, the more easier it is to find artists. And on the agency side as well, like the artist I just named San Holo. We took him from 2,000 to 180,000 fans, right? He’s going to do three international towards the end of the year.

And I think what allowed us to for example work with him is that we recognized potential where other people didn’t, and then we executed so precisely that we actually managed to capitalize on the opportunity that was there whilst other people passed on it or didn’t know it was there.

Steve: So assuming that a large record label had noticed him, what would have been the advantage that your firm had over much larger player would have?

Budi: A larger player would never have signed him simply because the track record would not have been there, so they couldn’t have justified the investment.

Steve: I see. Okay, okay that makes sense. So let’s go into some of the details. You mentioned, is it Han Solo?

Budi: San Holo, it’s a word play.

Steve: Right. So let’s say for example that I was a musician. What would be some of my first steps on getting the word out there? So a client goes to you for help. What are some of the first things that you do to kind of promote the musician?

Budi: Right, okay, so whenever I talk about marketing for music, I always try to make it very clear that the foundation for correct marketing needs to be there. So if your music and your visuals are not up to par, then it’s a futile effort to be pushing the act in itself. So step one is always, you got to make sure the music is up to par and a guideline we use for that is you take the three best current acts in a similar sound as the actor trying to push, you compare their three best records to yours, and if your stuff doesn’t come 80% close, you go back to the drawing board and you improve, and you improve and you improve until you are there. So that’s step one.

Step two would be making sure that you have a very strong and coherent visual aesthetic, your look. And ideally you want to have a look that is an extension of your musical style and you want to make sure that you extend that across all your channels. So your Facebook, your Twitter, your website, everywhere. So that someone would see your track, or the art work cover and they would know what band you are, and they might see your Facebook and have the same effect on your art work.

Steve: So you mentioned a bunch of social media platforms on there. Is there a particular one that a lot of musicians look at or use?

Budi: Yeah, that would be Soundcloud.

Steve: Soundcloud, okay.

Budi: However I feel that there’s a selection that are essential to be on right now, like that an artist simply couldn’t do without. And that would be Facebook, Twitter, YouTube, Soundcloud, Instagram, increasingly more so and more recently also Snapchat and Vine are becoming very popular. And now, at least the ones I mentioned are important to be on simply because there’s going to be fans there looking for you if you are building a name, and if you are not there, you are going to lose a lot of listeners or fans or subscribers.

Steve: Interesting. So in my experience, when you try to be good at a lot of different social media platforms, you end up not doing a good job with any. So if there’s any that you would focus on in the beginning, it sounds like you would focus on Soundcloud, or in terms of social media, what would you be focusing on?

Budi: Right, okay. So there’s something that we call the funnel theory. And that’s basically, if you are an artist, and this goes beyond music by the way. I’m sure you’ve of the super fan theory.

Steve: Yeah, once you explain that for the listeners.

Budi: Yeah, basically a super fan would be someone who is so committed to your brand whatever it is that you are doing that they would tell their friends about you, that they would go out of their way to support you, that they would be willing to give you their money. And super fans is what every brand and business are trying to create even if it’s clients. You want to do such a good job that that person then goes on and tell someone else how good of a job you did so that you get more business.

And now in music, I think that social media is very much a funnel. So most important for a musician might be the content [inaudible 0:18:50] ones. So YouTube and Soundcloud, because the people who go there, don’t go to see people’s status updates, but they go to consume media and then Soundcloud is most centric to music. So there’s highest value there, then followed by YouTube where people go to watch videos or to listen to music. And then from there you might have a play, and a play might convert into a follow on YouTube or Soundcloud, and then those people might click through to your Facebook, or your Twitter or your Instagram, and then they might follow you there.

But then of course a play does not per say constitute a follow and a follow does not per say constitute a super fan. So this is the funnel that I mean. So it’s very much about what can you do to build up a continuous long-term trusted relationship with someone who has the potential to be your fan. And by doing that over time, either on one social media platform or by engaging with them on a variety over time, you convert them slowly into super fans. And those…

Steve: What is your definition of a conversion? Are you gathering email addresses, are you getting subscribers? What is your definition?

Budi: All of them are conversions.

Steve: All of them.

Budi: Yes. However, there are some we value more than others. For example for a musician 10,000 Facebook likes will never do for you what 10,000 Soundcloud fans will.

Steve: Okay.

Budi: Both in terms of — sorry go ahead.

Steve: No I was going to say let’s talk about Soundcloud a little bit, because I don’t have a complete understanding about how the platform works. I do know that I had considered hosting my podcast on Soundcloud at some point. But is it basically — you mentioned earlier when we were talking pre-interview that it’s like a YouTube. So is it mainly for musicians or is it for podcasters as well, because I know a lot of podcasts — a lot of my listeners actually have their own podcast as well.

Budi: It is absolutely for podcasters too.

Steve: Okay and so what are some good strategies involved in building a following on Soundcloud?

Budi: Right, so I think one thing that’s important for people to understand is how quickly Soundcloud is growing. So they reported about 2.5 billion monthly plays last year June I think. And then this year in May they recorded 5 billion monthly plays, so that’s a huge growth rate. And more and more so the consumption is going far beyond just music listeners, comedians are on there, podcast etcetera, so I would absolutely recommend.

Now when you are starting on a platform, there are a few basic things, so number one would be start realizing your profile, making sure it’s cool here and tweet the rest of your brand. But then when you do that the most important beginner tip would be to make sure that you make correct use of the tax.

So similar like a YouTube, Soundcloud has a chatting system which can be found if you land on the webpage, you can go to the explore tab, and there’s a drop down list of categories. And among those are a few for podcast, and now what you want to do when you upload a track or a podcast, is you want to make sure that you not only put in the actual title and maybe some related podcasts, but you also want to put in the specific name of digital category that you want to be indexed in. Because then when you get plays you will have a much higher probability of being indexed.

Steve: I see, categorized essentially is what you mean?

Budi: Yes, but then indexed in one of the charts.

Steve: Oh, okay got it okay. So Soundcloud — so how does discovery work on Soundcloud, it’s basically based on search results based on these charts, how does it work?

Budi: Right, so a lot of it is community driven. So many people have the Soundcloud accounts and whether they are content creators or just consumers or listeners. People go in Soundcloud, they follow accounts, and you will have a feed similar to a Facebook feed. And the feed will show in chronological order of the uploads and the reposts. A repost is basically a re-tweet, but then on Soundcloud, of all their other people they follow. So it’s very much like a digest.

Steve: Interesting, how does Soundcloud compare to like a Stitcher radio for example?

Budi: Right, so I’m not super up to date about Stitcher, but…

Steve: Or iTunes for that matter.

Budi: Right iTunes is a store, much more so than a community. And the only reason why podcasts thrive on iTunes is because iTunes is so well adopted right. Like everyone has their credit card hooked up to iTunes, and a lot of people have a Smartphone. So it’s very easy to want to be accessible there as a podcast.
But I think what iTunes lacks is the community aspect, so you might have people that review a podcast right, or a track that you will never get people commenting asking you maybe 27 minutes in this interview when you publicize it, like hey, I would love to know more about this specific copy, and for you then to be able to jump in there and send someone a link.

Steve: Interesting, okay, yeah clearly I need to explore this Soundcloud platform a lot more. So you would have your musicians start on Soundcloud and do some of the procedures that you just mentioned. What are some of the kind of the next steps to gain traction? So let’s say your content is good, your art work is good. What are some of the next steps?

Budi: Number one would be a schedule, very strict release schedule. I think if you are playing the online game, then there is a few things to keep in mind. Number one is that accountability is super important, because there are so much stuff coming out. You want to make sure that you are top of mind. And if you put out a track now, then it must be forgotten in four weeks if you don’t put out something again, simply because there are so much, so that is the first spot and the…

Steve: What frequency do you recommend?

Budi: One track between four to six weeks.

Steve: Oh, okay, that’s not that often, so 12 tracks a year?

Budi: Yes, however for example with San Holo we did 19 tracks on one year.

Steve: Okay.

Budi: So that is a lot and I know that many creatives have a very hard time keeping up with that pace.

Steve: Is there any techniques to just quickly accelerate the subscriber process on Soundcloud?

Budi: Well it’s the same as this traditional marketing that’s really a variety of things you can do. So number one means — would be making sure that you tie correctly. Number two would be finding a group of relevant artists or pace makers in your niche, and then connecting with them and committing to reposting each other’s work. So let’s say they are five people with 10,000 subscribers, then if everyone reposts each other’s uploads then you will have a collective reach of 50,000 subscribers.

Steve: And was that your strategy with—I have an [inaudible 00:26:06] is it San Holo?

Budi: Yeah, San Holo and butcher…

Steve: So was that your strategy, I mean you went from 20,000 to 180,000, what is it like a year you said?

Budi: Yeah.

Steve: Yeah, so that type of exponential growth would not be from just tagging your music properly, right?

Budi: No, these are 20 factors coming together.

Steve: Yeah, so let’s talk about some of these, the major ones that contributed to this growth yeah.

Budi: So this reposting that I was explaining is super important, so it would be finding the pace makers in your niche, building relationships with them, and getting them to repost your material when it comes out.

Steve: What is their incentive for reposting your material?

Budi: Having good content, however if you do this properly right, you actually create a proper incentive. So it might be that you repost their stuff as well as a sort of a given tag. It might also be that there are many promotional channels, so for example on Soundcloud there’s channels who do nothing else but plays music in specific genres. So you might reach out to those people and say, hey listen I would love it if you guys pre-post this track and then you could upload it as well. And then they have content for their channel when you get exposure.

Steve: Okay.

Budi: Now you can build upon that by also getting blogs to cover your release, and this is very-very essential. And blogs nowadays especially music blogs what they do is around 95% of them, they all embed Soundcloud players on their articles. So if you have for example new release come out, you might structure a bunch of reposts to happen within the first week of release. You might also structure a few blogs to write about it embedding the Soundcloud link. You might have then tagged it correctly, you might have done — made sure to also have reached out to some YouTube channels who promote music, I’m not sure if you are familiar with the concept.

Steve: No actually can you go over in more specifics on what you say when you reach out to the blogs or the YouTube channel owners.

Budi: Sure, okay, so this is very much the art of pitching right? Which is relevant not just in music, but just any business or craft or…

Steve: That’s correct absolutely.

Budi: Yeah, so we have a framework for this, and it comes down to the business basics they teach you. Number one is figure out who the people behind the entities are right? It might be this huge blog, but at the end of the day you are trying to reach out to the one person who write the article. Just like you if you are trying to get hired right, you might — yeah you are trying to find the one person who is in charge of HR or hiring.

Steve: Right.

Budi: And then you try and build a relationship based on mutual interest, based on mutual values, maybe something you can do for them. Maybe you can tape off a good artist; maybe you can make sure that your music is perfectly pre-selected. So our crafts — sorry I just got a face on call going straight through this. Let me restart this yeah.

Steve: Yeah, you just keep going I’ll just set it out.

Budi: Yeah, one second. Okay, I mean I’m not sure if it’s possible to mute that actually.

Steve: It’s okay, I’ll just cut it all out don’t worry about it, just keep going.

Budi: Okay, beautiful let me reiterate the answer. Okay, so blogs yes, so this comes back to the art of pitching. And this is very much the same skill that you are going to need in life and in business in general. And what we are trying to do first is we deconstruct who the relevant people are behind the entities. So you want to find the writer at the blog, you want to find the founder of that YouTube channel.

And then what you do is you are trying to connect with them on a personal level, so that might mean we might add them on Facebook and have a real conversation with them before asking for anything. Or it might mean that we send them an email and tape them some music. And then when it comes to the actual pitching, we make sure that it’s perfectly crafted. Like we would never pitch music to someone if we weren’t 100% sure that they’re actually are going to cover it.

Steve: Okay, by then you are 100% sure because you’ve already had a few conversations none business related prior.

Budi: Yes, we absolutely try and do that. And sometimes there are scenarios where that’s not the case, because you can’t potentially reach everyone. But then still when you pitch you want to make sure that they overly probably support your stuff. There’s no reason to pitch if you don’t think they’ll write about it. And you only get so many shots with these people. Typically your first impression is the only impression.

Steve: Okay, I mean this is a lot just like online marketing in general, right?

Budi: 100%.

Steve: Yeah, find the people who matter or who can help you and then reach out. Do you end up going to conferences? Are there music conferences and what not where you can actually meet a lot of these people live? Is that part of your a strategy as well?

Budi: Definitely. There’s actually a very big one coming up called Amsterdam dance event. This is where all the people in dance music come together from around the world. You are talking ten meetings a day for five weeks straight, for five days straight.

Steve: Okay. But you’ve mentioned Soundcloud, a bunch of other social media platforms. I was also just kind of curious; those are platforms that you do not own. At any point does your own personal branded website or own properties come into play here?

Budi: Absolutely. Internet marketing like you said. So at the bottom of the funnel, the things that we would value most would be visitors on an entity you control. So that would be our website. Also we are very big on the email marketing and building an email list.

Steve: Okay, and what are some of the incentives for someone to sign up for an email list that you guys employ?

Budi: It would be free tracks, it would exclusives. So free compilation, get a track before it comes out. Exclusive remix to email subscribers. It could be get notifications when we have a show. It could be– we recently did this with San Holo. We actually did a very unique video clip concept, where we worked together with a bunch of amazing directors and editors. What they did is that we made a clip where everything takes place just on San’s computer screen.

And then throughout the clip, we actually played some fan footage on his computer and that was inside the video. So to gather that footage, we reached out to the fans. It was like, “Guys please send over whatever photo or image material or video material you have of live shows.” And they send it in with bunches and a few of them were actually included in the video.

Steve: All of this actually that you are describing, it sounds a little pricy to get these videos professionally made, to get your sound recorded at a professional level. What I think of musicians and artist, I think that they tend to be very poor. Is it just a service that you provide as being the record label, or can any solo artist kind of afford to do these things?

Budi: Absolutely. I think if you exclude this video clip with a bunch of directors from this equation, then you can get a good visual aesthetic. You can set up your socials. You can build a website without knowing how to code. You can buy a microphone for 100 bucks and record yourself. You can distribute to all the stores using TuneCore. I mean the real variable here is effort.

Steve: Okay, no it just sounds like if I can kind of summarize your strategies, is put yourself out there on platforms where there is larger audiences and communities, gain a following, somehow lead them back to your site where you can actually get them on to your list, and you want to be establishing raving fans that will follow you wherever you go. Is that kind of an accurate summary?

Budi: That is a part of it. I think the missing variable here is the following. So this model that I’m explaining here is very much a model that we’ve used to go from no track record, no money, no followers, into actually making a living off music, both on the label side but also for our artist. And we do that indeed by building a following on social platforms, but then the crucial variable here is that we use that following to actually leverage deals.

So for example, San blew up on Soundcloud and at the time he was working as a guitar teacher. And we were bootstrapping everything. It was just us at the record label, working a lot of hours, and him making a lot of music and a friend of ours doing the visuals. And from there we turned that around into finding three, no four actually booking agents worldwide and going to a big record label and negotiating a good deal, which in turn gave us a budget to start producing bigger things.

So we very much took what we didn’t need any financing to do, and then we started leveraging those numbers and the social hype into more tangible and maybe in the business sense more and more financially funded situations.

Steve: So what was that deal with the major label? What was it for?

Budi: Yes, so this was not with a major label, but rather with a larger label. And with San and all of our artists actually, we are very hesitant on doing exclusive deals. So we typically work on a basis where we might do one or two releases or an EP with a specific label. And now we’ve had the opportunity of working with a number of very cool labels over this year. But more recently we’ve done a release on Spinnin which you may know.

Steve: Sorry, not familiar.

Budi: Right, they are the label who broke Martin Garrix who you might know.

Steve: So it sounds like once you have the following, everything kind of starts falling into place. What are some monetization models that artists have once they have a certain following? What would you say would be kind of like the minimum threshold?

Budi: Right, so I’m sure you are familiar with a thousand true fans. Yes. So I think that concept is very good. When you look at the follow a thousand fans will probably be not enough to have a thousand true fans, right?

Steve: That’s correct.

Budi: So you will probably need somewhere between 50,000 and 100,000 collective fans on your socials like in aggregate before you can really make a living off music.

Steve: Okay, and then what are some of the—when you are smaller, what are some of the primarily monetization models.

Budi: Okay, so step one would be distribute your music. Go to an aggregator like TuneCore, you would pay about 10, 20 bucks a year to have a single on all the stores, iTunes, Spotify, etcetera. That would be the first step. Step number two might be to monetize your YouTube and Soundcloud accounts which you can do…

Steve: What is the revenue percentage for a platform like that, TuneCore?

Budi: For TuneCore? In that case you are actually fulfilling your roles of distributor yourself as a record label would do. And iTunes for example is typically a dollar for a single. So then after covering your costs for having that single up on all the stores for a year, you would put almost 95 cents out of that dollar in your pocket.

Steve: That’s not bad.

Budi: No, no it’s not. So if you keep full control of everything, if you go fully in, then technically you can start making those small revenue streams.

Steve: Okay, I didn’t realize you get to keep 95% assuming you control everything.

Budi: Yeah, you can actually on TuneCore; you can keep 100% if you just pay a yearly fee, a flat fee to get the stuff up.

Steve: Sorry, I interrupted you. You can go on.

Budi: So one side of it is distribution, just selling your stuff on stores. Another aspect would be monetizing your YouTube and Soundcloud accounts. And [inaudible 0:38:56] not a lot of money here. We are talking about 2,000 plays to a dollar.

Steve: Oh wow. That’s really bad actually.

Budi: Yeah it is. But it’s another thing you can do with reasonably little effort, right?

Steve: Sure.

Budi: So you would go to a multichannel network, and we work very closely with a couple of guys in Canada who do amazing things called The District.

Steve: Sorry, not familiar. What is that?

Budi: It is a multichannel network.

Steve: Okay.

Budi: Basically they represent YouTube channels and Soundcloud channels. If you are an artist with a following, then you can reach out to them and make sure you start monetizing your accounts and your content.

Steve: Is it going to be the same approximate payout of 2,000 downloads for a dollar.

Budi: Yeah. So Soundcloud is a little bit worse, but for YouTube absolutely. And then there’s another revenue stream called Content ID which is basically monetizing other people using your music on their videos on YouTube.

Steve: I see, okay, that makes sense.

Budi: So there is another revenue stream, and then of course you have public performance, so signing up to the [inaudible 00:40:09] and their sound exchange if your track is going to get played then on the radio or on TV, then you get public performance royalties.

Steve: Okay, what are the logistics in doing these performances is there a larger upfront investment?

Budi: How do you mean these performances?

Steve: Well, let’s say I wanted to perform at a venue near my house; wouldn’t I have to reserve all that stuff, put a lot of upfront money down, sell tickets and that sort of thing?

Budi: Very much depends on your set up, so for example we work with electronic artists right, DJs. So for us it means playing a show that’s technically one of them bringing up USB stick to the club to play itself.

Steve: Okay, I guess in your case that would be the case, I was just thinking of like — think even more like a conference right? You have to kind of book the venues and all that stuff and then start selling tickets right?

Budi: Yes, so to give you some insights, so basically these are all — this whole process is fulfilled by people doing different roles in the music industry. So you have the people who control the venues, these are typically called either the venue owners or the promoters. And the promoters are the people who organize the events. They typically finance it, they typically make sure that there is art work made, they book the act, and then they sell the show and make a profit off tickets.

Steve: Okay.

Budi: Now the artist might be booked by a promoter, and then the artist might have a booking agent, and the booking agent might negotiate a reasonable fee for that artist to be paid by the promoter.

Steve: Okay, it sounds like there’s a lot of different players here in the process, that they are kind of like intermediaries artist might need to have right? You mentioned a booking agent, a record label, and so are all these things kind of required if you are just starting out?

Budi: Absolutely not, I think just like with anything that once you reach a certain point there will come a certain time where you need to involve other people if you want to scale. So you can 100% book shows yourself and play and make some money. But of course once you start creating a following for yourself, you might find a booking agent who is super enthusiastic about what you are doing. And then that booking agent even though he takes a commission might help you make more money than you would if you were fully independent still.

Steve: Okay, yeah, I mean this sounds a lot like running an online business to be honest with you. Yeah, there’s definitely a lot of parallels. Hey one last question for you then, I want to be respectful of your time, we’ve already been talking for 40 minutes. I was just curious how does Vevo work, like whenever I’m on YouTube and I’m kind of watching a video, I always see Vevo right?

Budi: Yeah, so from my understanding and I’m going out of my depth here, Vevo is the collective YouTube channel from the major labels. And now the major labels right now, there used to be more are Sony, Universal and Warner, and I think what they did is they paired together to create a big YouTube channel where they put all the prime artists, so that collectively they would have the bigger audience instead of separating that and compartmentalizing. So that’s why you see a Katy Perry uploaded track on Vevo instead of her own accounts, because that’s a major label pushing it on the biggest YouTube platform they have.

Steve: I see, okay, that makes sense. Hey Budi I want to be respectful of your time, and thanks a lot for coming on. If anyone wants to locate you or get a hold of you, or if there’s any musicians out there listening to this podcast, where can they get a hold of you?

Budi: Okay, so you can find on record label on heroicrecordings.com. And there you could find our different imprints and also the artists who you manage for. Now I write about my experiences on my blog which is budivoogt.com. And from there you could also click through to my book the Soundcloud Bible, and my new music marketing academy video course.

Steve: Awesome, well, hey Budi thanks a lot for coming to the show man, I learned a lot about the music industry. I had no idea how anything worked prior to talking to you.

Budi: Beautiful, thank you Steve, I appreciate your time and the opportunity.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode, I have actually often wondered why musicians are often poor, and I had no idea how the music industry worked until today. Thanks to the internet any musician has a chance to make it big without going with one of the large record labels and I love it.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode 97, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. This is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the email course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

096: How To Get Unbiased Feedback On Your Project In Minutes With John Li Of PickFu.com

How To Get Unbiased Feedback About Your Project In Minutes With John Li Of PickFu.com

Today, I’m thrilled to have John Li on the show. John is someone who I met through Dave Lu, who I had on the show back in episode 19. Originally, I had only planned to have a short coffee break with John but we ended up chatting for close to 3 hours about family, business and life.

One of the things I like about the Bay Area is that there seems to be an endless stream of awesome entrepreneurs to meet and John is no exception.

John and his partner created PickFu.com, a site that allows you to easily get massive unbiased feedback about anything in a matter minutes.

What’s also cool is that John and his buddy coded up the whole thing in a week and the idea was profitable right away.

In fact, John is the perfect example of how starting a business doesn’t have to be risky or expensive.

John is offering a 50% off coupon to anyone who wants to try the service too. Please reference coupon code: MYWIFEQUIT to redeem the discount.

Click here to checkout PickFu.com and redeem the discount

What You’ll Learn

  • How John came up with the idea for PickFu
  • How much John invested in the project
  • How long it took for John to create a prototype and how he threw it up so quickly
  • How John got his early customers
  • How John encourages people to come back for more
  • Some awesome case studies and success stories with the service
  • How John came up with the pricing model

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the free mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I’m thrilled to have John Li on the show. Now John is someone who I met through Dave Lu who I had on the show back in episode 19. And originally when I met up with John I had only planned to have a short coffee break with him. But we ended up chatting for close to three hours I think about family, business, and life.

And one of the things I really like about the Bay area where I live is that there seems to be an endless stream of awesome entrepreneurs to meet and John is no exception. So he and his buddy started out by creating a site called Menuism which is a cloud source site for restaurant reviews, which has done incredibly well. But I actually brought John on the show to talk about his other business PickFu.com.

Now here is what’s cool about PickFu, John and his buddy pretty much coded the whole thing up in a holiday weekend, and the idea was so cool that it was profitable right away. Now we’ll get into how much John invested in PickFu to start his venture, but let’s just say that his business cost very little to create, and it was a hit right from the start. And John is the perfect example of how starting a business does not have to be risky or expensive. And with that welcome to the show John, how are you doing today man?

John: Good, thanks for having me on Steve.

Steve: Yes, so in my intro I didn’t explain what PickFu does, so if you wouldn’t mind just giving the quick one minute description of your service that would be great.

John: Sure, so PickFu is a preference testing service where we bring the responders. And it’s a basically a tool for helping make better decision, it gets you really fast feedback. It will bring you 50 responders, you basically create a poll with two options, and it will bring you 50 responders within 10 minutes. So our responders will vote answering your question, which option is better, and they’ll tell you why as well. You not only get the quantitative but also some qualitative feedback as well.

Steve: Yes, so let’s say I want to design — let’s say I was releasing a book and I had two covers, I would use PickFu to get audience feedback and which cover they like the best, right?

John: Exactly, yes, and a lot of times those authors would use the responses as well to iterate on book covers in case if it wasn’t something that they were satisfied with.

Steve: Yes, so I’m just curious, how did you come up with the idea of for even doing this, like what’s the back story?

John: Yes, a couple of years back my co-founder Justin and I we had started that site Menuism. And both of us are developers by training, we were working with designers and stuff, but given that it was a founding team of two, we always had debates about what should this icon look like? What logo looks better and what not. Back at the time I think that was around when Team Ferris also released his 4 Hour Work Week, talked about testing his book titles with the AdWords.

And Amazon released their Mechanical Turk API, and so one weekend we just decided to build this tool for ourselves. Basically we wanted to build a tool that could help us resolve our own debates and then bring some external opinions, and besides just the two of us arguing back and forth about which option was better.

Steve: Were you guys arguing about like website design or graphics or what?

John: Yeah, we were arguing about website design, graphics and it was just the two of us, so it’s — and we are equal partners but it’s not like I can — anyone can pull a rank over the other right? And each of us had our own preference; I think we were changing our logo for Menuism at the time. And we figured, well why not build something that can get a lot of external opinions really fast, and that can settle the debates.

Steve: So I’m just curious when you guys were having these debates, like what sort of questions were you asking these users.

John: So we would ask these users for example which logo is more attractive, or which logo looks better for a restaurant review website? Which logo would make you want to click through and find out more about the website, questions like that.

Steve: And how big of a sample size would you typically use to kind of give yourself confidence?

John: So the sample size of our panel is about — it’s in the tens of thousands. We set up the polls to be 50 responses, figured 50 is a good number — it’s a good balance of getting responses back really quickly, but also having enough responses where you could kind of see a clear winner.

Steve: Okay, and what do you consider like a clear winner? So out of 50 let’s say there was like 30 versus 20, is that…?

John: Generally that’s a pretty clear winner to us, I mean we definitely have seen cases where we’ve done things — we’ve gotten results as skewed as 45 to 5. And I mean if you get a result like that you kind of know which one is definitely better. We are actually working on features right now to help do more analysis on those results as well for statistical significance and stuff.

Steve: So I’m just curious before we get into some of the nuts and bolts like how does — how do you guys actually get the people to take these surveys, like where do you find these people?

John: So we built the service on top of a platform called Mechanical Turk, it’s run by Amazon. And it’s basically a market place for work, so you can provide small jobs for people. And then in our case the jobs we provide is to answer these polls that we are creating or that our customers are creating.

Steve: Okay, I actually went on the site before this interview, it looks like it was designed in like the 90s right?

John: Yeah, I think it was yeah.

Steve: So I guess they have some sort of software, API that you can go in and then post stuff automatically and get results?

John: Right, so the Mechanical Turk site is actually really difficult to use if you are using the web. But they do have a software backend where you can connect and write your own software to use it. And that’s what we did to build PickFu to begin with.

Steve: So you post like a job for some of these people, and how can you guarantee that you are going to get enough results to actually fulfill the polls?

John: So it’s a really large pull of workers on Mechanical Turk at any given time. And with these jobs you also host — you also post the payment. So basically you offer a certain amount of money for these responders to come do your work. Answering our polls is one thing, but a lot of other companies use Mechanical Turk for transcription services, translation, all of that stuff. And it’s basically just a market place, and if you offer enough of an incentive then people will come and respond very quickly.

Steve: Okay and I was just curious what the going rate is, so you are having them come on, look at two things — is it just two things typically or is it?

John: Yeah, we kept it to two things. People request, have requested for multiple choice often times they’ll run around Robin [ph] poll, like multiple polls. We want to keep it as simple as possible and as easy as possible for our responders.

Steve: Okay, so these people come in, you ask them a bunch of questions and look between two options. Like how much do you pay someone? How did you know how much to set the rate for?

John: We tried various — we tried a bunch of different rates and we settled, it’s less than a dollar per response. But it’s definitely very fair for the going rate for Mechanical Turk and generally we are one of the highest rated work — I guess requesters on the Mechanical Turk forums. So then…

Steve: So these people on — because I have never used the service before, I’m just curious. So this is a huge pool of people just willing to do small task for like a dollar here, a dollar there?

John: Yeah, less than a dollar even like 10 cents or something or even less yeah. It’s a huge pool, and it just depend — it really depends on the size of the job, right? If you are asking them to translate a long document from one language to another then you’ve got to pay them sufficiently for their time. In our case we made the polls deliberately really fast to answer, you are just choosing between two options and you are giving a response, or you are giving an explanation for your choice. So in that case it’s a small job, it’s supper fast, usually it takes less than a minute for our responders, so…

Steve: I see, so let’s say I wanted, let’s say I was writing a book on parenting, would there be a way for me to just get people with kids to give an evaluation?

John: Actually yes, so when we first created the product, it was asking anyone and everyone. And what we do is we do get the demographic information of the responders. So when you get poll results you do see the breakdown of males preferred option A over B, how many college educated responders preferred B over A, and what not. That was the case for a while, but recently we added the ability to also target those demographic segments. So yeah, we actually do ask family size, and number of kids in the household. So if you wanted to run a poll where you targeted only parents, we can definitely do that for you.

Steve: I see and this is all stuff that’s kind of — that you’ve built on top of like this Amazon Mechanical Turk API?

John: Right, so this is our own layer of understanding the data on top of our list of responders.

Steve: Okay and I imagine your software nicely corates all the data and everything and it presents it to you in a — easily in a way that you can easily make a decision right?

John: Totally we give you — yeah, two columns list of all of the comments, which one won, all the demographic breakdowns on the same page.

Steve: Yes, so what I find really cool is that you told me earlier that you kind of threw this up over a holiday weekend, so how much did you actually invest in getting this started, and what was involved in just putting up the first prototype?

John: In terms of monetary investment it was really inexpensive, because we set it up on a small hosting service called Heroku which is really popular for developers to create really small one off websites, probably less than 100 bucks for the first month or so. It was just an investment of time. Both my co-founder and I have development backgrounds, so it was more of a fun weekend project. It was more of a fun exploration than anything else until I get it set up and running.

Steve: And Heroku just handles all like the backend stuff and all the scalability right?

John: Exactly, yeah, it’s a God sent.

Steve: Can you actually just comment on Heroku versus like Amazon web services, versus Google’s platform real quick?

John: Sure, so I think Amazon web service has been around the longest. It probably offers the most flexibility if you want to get really deep into the nuts and bolts of building your own services. Heroku is this amazing layer built — I think it was built on top of Amazon web services that just made it really focused on making it super user and developer friendly to get something up and running really quickly. Yeah, and then I know that Google’s came in later into the game and I think they are very focused on making things very user friendly as well. But for now Heroku is still kind of the most preferred choice among a lot of developers.

Steve: Okay and then the fact that you used Heroku allowed you to throw this up in a weekend without really having to worry about any of the server side stuff, right?

John: Totally, yeah.

Steve: Okay and then in the beginning you mentioned that you built it for yourself right? So it probably didn’t have like a front end ready for customers, is that…

John: Right.

Steve: Okay, and then so at what point did you decide to turn this into a service?

John: So actually PickFu was– it was mostly an internal tool for a number of years actually. We built it for ourselves; we did put a front end on it. We put it on Hacker News and just kind of let it sit for a while. And during this time we were running Menuism for the past couple of years. And we kept noticing that people would come in and purchase a poll on PickFu even though we were trying to do nothing to spread the word.

Steve: So you had a payment option on there and…

John: I think we threw it on a PayPal button and yeah, and that’s all we did, we threw on via PayPal, create a poll, that’s it. Like nothing about sharing and not trying to get not trying to spread the word or anything. And over time we noticed people kept using it, and then we upped the price and people kept using it more. And eventually we noticed that there were a couple of customer segments that were built and — sorry.

Steve: Yeah, no worries.

John: So we had these customer segments building up organically and we were like, hey there might be a business. And as we kept using it we kept adding features as well to make it more useful and valuable for us, and then we saw more customers using those too. So probably one or two years ago where we decided that we really wanted to get back into and turn this into a business.

Steve: So it sounds like you built this a long time ago and you used it yourself for like a year and then you decide to slap a PayPal button on it?

John: Exactly.

Steve: Okay, so there was really no plan…

John: No.

Steve: To really turn this into something, it was just a tool you built for yourself and it just happened to — you thought you just share it and see if anyone else wants to use it?

John: Yeah, exactly like we just kind of put it out there and let it go on its own and it was mostly just for our use.

Steve: So let’s talk about getting your early customers then, so you had to set up — you mentioned Hacker News, so how does that work?

John: So Hacker News it’s probably one of the biggest news sources for people in the tech industry, people who submit articles and people who look them up and down basically. It’s kind of like Reddit.

Steve: So did you — so was there anything any strategy involved doing that, you can’t just throw something up, you need people to upload it right away right?

John: Right, well, what was actually cool was that it wasn’t us who really submitted hard to Hacker News actually, it was other people who used us, blogged about their experience and then submitted their own posts to Hacker News. So really I think one of our earliest users was a guy named Gabriel Weinberg, he is the creator of DuckDuckGo this — yeah, so when he was creating DuckDuckGo really early on he used PickFu. I think it was to test either a logo or a name or the name of the service, and he blogged about it, and then he posted it on Hacker News and that kind of got — it got a lot of votes because he…

Steve: Okay, so how did you get him to use your service?

John: I wish I could tell you, he just discovered us.

Steve: Wait but you didn’t do any marketing, he just — I mean how does someone discover it?

John: It probably was some kind of Google search early on.

Steve: Interesting okay.

John: So I think that initial discovery was probably through organic searches.

Steve: Of which you weren’t even trying to rank, I would imagine it was just a one page…

John: Yeah, it was like a one or two page site, I think we put some copy about AB and preference testing for logos, because that’s what we used it for.

Steve: Okay.

John: And then I guess he and other people were looking for a similar service, and so they probably discovered us and started using this.

Steve: I see, okay, and then after that someone submitted to Hacker News, did it go viral at that point?

John: No I wish it did, but — I wish I could say yes, but no a couple of other people had used it and I think that the service provided – they count value from the really fast feedback and they probably told — it kind of spread slowly through word of mouth initially.

Steve: Okay, and then — so now obviously you are actually trying to push it, or you have been for the last couple of years right? So what are some of the things that you’ve been doing?

John: We’ve been doing — we’ve been trying to do a lot more outreach to our customers who use it. Generally our — I mentioned that our customers have kind of segmented it into a couple of different verticals. So our most — our biggest customer — our biggest verticals are entrepreneurs using it for testing business ideas, business logos, websites and a lot of mobile game developers using it to test app icons and screen store app before publishing to the app stores.

And we have a lot of self publishing authors that use it for testing book titles and book covers before they publish. Generally we try to do a lot about reaching to influencers into those spaces. We started doing some advertising recently, but we are still working on — we are still working and growing the marketing aspect of things.

Steve: So it’s just two guys right still?

John: It’s two of us full time and then we have a handful of part time contractors that are spread virtually.

Steve: So how do you decide which way to outdo outreach first right, it’s only a handful of people that have seen it. So what have you been focusing on and what’s kind of worked out the best for your service?

John: So our different verticals have very different characteristics, like with our mobile game companies we have a lot of large mobile game companies, and so that’s easy for us to handle those relationships, just between myself and my co-founder. For authors one of our main focuses right now is reaching out in the author space. Generally we prioritize pretty diligently among potential points of outreach and also advertising. And I wouldn’t say that I have — I wouldn’t say we have it figured out at all, but…

Steve: Sure of course, so give me an example. Say you are reaching out to a game company like how you do your outreach and what does the conversation sound like?

John: So fortunately for us it seems like there is lot of attrition and turnover in the gaming companies. So what we found is that tracing the use of PickFu back in the gaming company it seems like there was one or two game companies where a lot of product managers in there really started using PickFu to test all their icons, and then…

Steve: Was this before you reached out to them or?

John: Yeah, it was before we reached out to them, they kind of stumbled upon PickFu themselves.

Steve: So it sounds like SEO was like your first foray basically, right?

John: I guess so, yeah, you can say that SEO was probably the first driver of business to PickFu. And then from there it kind of — things have been spreading through word of mouth and just naturally.

Steve: Okay, and so you took it — so it sounds like you got a couple of customers via word of mouth, and then you engaged with those customers?

John: Right so then we engaged with those customers and we talked to — like for example for game companies we are trying to engage with the customers we work with, ask them who else in the industry we should be talking to who would find benefit from PickFu. We have been using LinkedIn ads to some benefit and — LinkedIn and Facebook ads to some success although it could still be a lot better to target people within the gaming company — within the gaming industries as well. And generally — yeah, go ahead.

Steve: So I was just curios, so I imagine you have their email address when they sign up for PickFu. So did you just reach out to them? Like how did you know they were a gaming company, just based on what they were testing or?

John: Yeah, just based on what they were testing, we could see that they were testing app icons, so we just reach out. And I think that’s one of the biggest lessons that we’ve learned along the way is that you can always learn so much from talking to your customers. And that’s not something that we initially started off doing as well as we’ve been doing, but I think that we’ve really taken that to heart is to just keep trying to talk to almost every customer that we get. Ask them how they found us; how they like the service, what can we improve on. And I think as long as we keep doing that, we are going to keep being able to improve the service to provide more value for our customers.

Steve: Okay and so in terms of — so you are doing the leg work now to reach out to other people and you mentioned advertising. Just curious which advertising mediums have you tried and which ones have been the most effective for you?

John: We’ve tried — let’s see, so we’ve tried AdWords, we’ve tried Facebook ads, we’ve tried LinkedIn ads and Twitter ads. And I think of those we found that Facebook and Twitter actually has led to the most engagement.

Steve: Interesting, Twitter can you comment on how that works?

John: Yeah, so I guess Twitter advertising thing is not something that people usually talk about, but their platforms actually pretty — it’s pretty flexible to reach large audiences. Because the Twitter ad platform allows you to target audiences based on interest, which a lot of the other platforms do, but they also allow you to target audiences based on followers of specific people or specific people on Twitter.

So if you know that you have certain influencers within the space that you are trying to target, you can go on Twitter and say, hey I want to target all the followers of the Pope or something. And I want to be able to promote this message to them. So it’s a really nice way to target like segment and target really specifically within a vertical.

Steve: Yeah, so what ends up happening then is your tweet gets pushed up all the way to the top.

John: It gets pushed into the feeds of the people who are being targeted. And then Twitter will measure engagement based on whether the — click through, re-tweet or favorite your tweet basically.

Steve: Okay and then what are some of the percentages that you get in terms of like click through rate, and what not compared to some of the other platforms?

John: Oh, I don’t have those off the top of my head, but I definitely know that the engagement rate on Twitter– we’ve probably seen two to three X the performance on Twitter versus some of the things that we’ve been trying to do on AdWords.

Steve: Okay.

John: And that could just be us not being good at using AdWords of course, but it’s been pretty promising on Twitter.

Steve: Because I would imagine the way you sue those platforms is tremendously different right? AdWords like you are targeting queries and what not, and then Twitter you are just trying to interrupt them right?

John: And I think the thing I guess maybe it’s more specific for PickFu is that no one searches for PickFu and generally no one searches for book title testing, or app store optimization that much. Or it’s very difficult — or they are very expensive terms. So for us to get into the conversation on AdWords it’s a lot more expensive than for us to be able to send some promoted tweets, to people who are interested in book marketing or app marketing on Twitter.

Steve: I see, so it’s funny though that you would rank it; I assume you are already ranking for a lot of stuff in Google organically, right?

John: We were ranking for some things yeah, but it wasn’t — yeah, the things we were ranking for, probably came out of our first pass at SEO optimization when we first built the site a long time ago. So it was only recently where we actually thought more about, “Hey, Google organic search has been sending us referrals, we should try to optimize better for that.”

Steve: Okay, so let me just ask you this question John, let’s say you were going to start over again from scratch like from the very beginning and deliberately try to build this into a business, how would you start today knowing what you know?

John: Knowing what I know, I would probably pick a single vertical or a single customer segment and try to target that one first, and actually to work with people in that segment to build the product to the best of their needs.

Steve: Actually I had a couple of other questions too. How did you, like in order to find these verticals, obviously you have to have a target customer in mind. So how did you kind of determine that? Like what your ideal customer would look like?

John: Well, you know how I mentioned that it was kind of a side project; it was on the backroom for a bit of time before we decided to come back to it. The target customers kind of determine, no shows themselves. Like, because the word of mouth through those segments. It turns out looking at the people who use our service now, it’s people who want—it’s basically anyone who needs to make a business decision and needs feedback, who doesn’t already have their own audience.

Steve: So how do you find that out though when you have no customers? Pretend you’re starting over today again, how would you figure out who to start with?

John: So if I was to go through it again to try and arrive at that conclusion, I’d probably be — I’d probably try to take the product out and talk to—basically come up with the whole bunch of hypothesis and try to find people in those different segments and show it to them, show them the product and say, would you use it and why and why not?

And I think, that would — basically iterating on those hypothesis about, oh what if it’s business people who want to do this, or what if it’s people with products that are already launched or books that are already published. I think kind of just talk to people in those potential segments, and asking how much value they see in this product, that would help me kind of narrow down which segment of customers this, like PickFu would provide the most value to.

Steve: Yeah, and you mentioned a whole bunch of different demographics for your customers. So I was just curious like when you are designing your landing page, I would imagine that you would want like a separate one targeting each type of customers so you can really horn in on those guys. So how do you guys have your current page set up to kind of target all the different guys?

John: Yeah, so we definitely have different landing pages for the different segments. If you are an app developer and you land on our app targeted landing page, you are going to see examples of successful icon tests where one company chose their icons based on some PickFu polls. You are going to see samples and actual polls of different app store graphics and screen shots that people have chosen based on the PickFu polls.

That’s a different value preposition than if you were an author and you landed on our book landing page where you are going to see how we have like a — we have an author who ended up on the new York times best seller list, and how he used to PickFu to choose his titles and covers and so on.

Steve: And so how do you encourage — so want to get a little bit into your like pricing model. So do you guys just have like an a la carte system, or are you trying to turn this into more like a recurring billing type of platform?

John: So we have both. We started off with just an a la carte system where a single poll is $20 to get 50 responses. And you can purchase more responses for a higher price. You can purchase, you can add on things like demographic targeting, and that all change the price as well.

And then for, we also have a recurring system where if you are let’s say you are a like a creative agency or a web design firm and you have clients, and a lot of design agencies will use us on their client projects because they want to show their clients that the design they came up with is far better than the one that the client has currently. So if you are using it on a regular basis, then we do have plans where we’ll give you a recurring set of credits on a monthly basis, and discounts on a la carte polls.

Steve: I see. So it’s not like an all you can eat package. They still — they just get a discounted rate on credits when they just buy in bulk like that.

John: Right. They get a regular allotment of credits plus it’s a discounted rate on all other purchases as long as they are subscribed to the plan.

Steve: So that’s interesting. So why not just have them buy a lump sum credit at a discount as opposed to — like what’s their incentive for choosing this recurring plan.

John: There are certain features that we have enabled for some of those plans that we don’t haven’t enabled for the a la carte. We are still trying to figure out the right model for this. And towards what you just mentioned we actually also do allow lump sum purchase of bulk credits as well. But if you are on a plan, you get a discount on those as well.

Steve: Interesting. Okay. So when you approach a customer, it almost seems a little confusing to me, so how do you present all these plans to them?

John: Honestly it definitely is confusing. We are really trying to streamline it better. When we approach a customer, I feel like — I don’t think that we try to explain all the different plans. I think the main thing for a potential customer is just to try it out and see, as often times what happens is after you try one poll, either you’ll, either it’ll work for you, or it won’t. If it doesn’t, we don’t want you on a plan. We only want to provide value where it makes sense. And if it does work for you as a potential customer, then you are — we trust that you’ll figure out what plan and pricing scheme is going to be best for you.

Steve: Okay, I would imagine your goal though is to establish some sort of recurring. You want people on recurring, right? Because then you don’t have to worry about them.

John: Ideally yeah.

Steve: So along those lines, then it’s for the people that are on your plans, and I’m not sure what the split is on your site, how do you kind of encourage those people to stay and come back. Is there anything special that you do?

John: I wish I could say yes, but that’s a really good question. That’s actually something we are working on now is that, I would say that that’s one thing where we haven’t been great at is customer education. You know, right now, we are focused on marketing and trying to get the word out. But I know that customer education is one big part of that.

We are definitely not where we want to be in terms of suggesting uses for PickFu. For example if you are using PickFu for a book title, we should be telling you how to use PickFu for your book covers, and so on and within each of those verticals. And so education is definitely something that we can be a lot better at in terms of getting people on the plans to stick around and continue to use the service.

Steve: Yeah, and so that’s actually one of the things I want to talk about a little bit, because you probably have a bunch of success stories and what not. So I was just curious whether you had any sort of case studies that we could just talk about real quick, some real examples that use models of PickFu, they might just have handy.

John: Sure. Let’s see. We have a couple of case studies. For example — the one of the things that people ask is always like, “Can we trust, can we trust the results of this.” We’ve definitely done, we’ve definitely done our own verifications of the results of PickFu polls versus using, trying to use the same thing with AdWords, and Facebook and the results definitely align in terms of bench marking.

If option A on your app icon wins on PickFu, you can be pretty sure that it’s going to win on AdWords and it’s going to win on Facebook as well. We’ve had some pretty — for example recently we had a bestselling author. His name is [inaudible 0:33:42]. And this guy, he’s probably in his late 60s now. But I think he claims to be the first American to travel to every single country in the world, and he was writing a book about his travels.

This guy, he is a character; I mean it takes a character to try to do all these travels in a lifetime. He found PickFu and he really enjoyed the concept of that it would bring unbiased feedback. He was working with a large publisher. I forgot if it’s Peppercorn or Penguin or what not. And the publisher had their own view of what his book title; his book cover should look like. He had his own view of what his book cover should look like. And it was his book and he was very opinionated.

And so he kept using PickFu over and over and over again to test his own hand created copy and paste images, like home Photoshop made versus the publishers professional covers. Over and over the professional covers won every single time. So this was a case where the publisher was actually right. And it took using PickFu a lot to convince him to go with the publisher’s option, suggested options.

Steve: I see, and again this is like the classic case of where you have people working together with one another, and you can’t really decide on a design to go with right?

John: Right, exactly. The other case that comes to mind is a book marketing expert named Tim Grahl, and I think he kind of has written a very popular book on self publishing called The First 1000 Copies. And but that was a title that he hated. So it actually — but he believed in data, and so he ran round robin polls on PickFu including his favorite title options, and this option called the first thousand copies kept winning over and over and over again. So in the end he decided to go with it, and I think it’s done very well for him.

Steve: Interesting. So this is actually — so how quickly does a poll come out, like once it’s posted?

John: You’ll start seeing results in probably within 30 seconds to a minute.

Steve: Oh my goodness, okay.

John: And you’ll get 50 results within ten minutes. So it’s really good for just starting a poll and taking a coffee break and you come back and you have your results.

Steve: So one of the applications that just came up top of my head is if you are writing a blog post and you want to come up with a viral title, you could just put up these titles and you will get something within ten minutes?

John: Totally. Yeah, you will get something within ten minutes.

Steve: That is incredible. It sounds like this Amazon Mechanical Turk just has gobs and gobs of people.

John: Yeah, ready to work. I know that people I’ve talked about using AdWords or Facebook as well to test these titles. We’ve tried that before in the past and PickFu was something we build because we felt that those other services were, they were really complicated to use basically.

Steve: So how does one price your service, like how do you guys come up with the pricing?

John: That’s a good question.

Steve: It was an iterative process, it sounded like.

John: It’s an iterative and ongoing process. We definitely want to make it accessible for anyone who has a decision that needs some feedback.

Steve: But I see the tremendous value in what you are providing as well. So it should be priced appropriately, right?

John: Right. That’s a tough question. I mean, I don’t think we have the answers now. If we price it too high, then you are going to drive away a lot of potential usage.

Steve: Actually you know what, sorry let’s switch gears a little bit. I actually had a question that just popped into my head just like on the logistics and how you guys run your businesses. You have this site called Menuism, which is doing really well. Now you have PickFu but you only have two guys. So how do you kind of work on two businesses at once? You know what I’m saying. It’s almost like — like for me it’s hard too.

John: Yeah because I know you are juggling a lot of different businesses or different aspects of your businesses as well. For us, we try to schedule our time around different strengths and focuses. Menuism is at a point — Menuism is a more mature business in the way that it’s run. And so now we don’t have to spend as much time maintaining the site and adding new things. It’s also completely different business from PickFu unlike, in terms of its nature.

So we have to — we generally prioritize really heavily and try to schedule pretty hard about what are the things that we need to get done for both businesses. On a year by year or month by month basis, we’ll decide that our main focus is going to be this and this business and within this business, these are going to be our main prioritize to get done in this month or what not.

Steve: Okay, yeah, that’s — and then your partner actually doesn’t even live in the area, right? So you guys work together remotely.

John: Yeah, so we work together remotely, and we’ve been doing that for the past eight years, nine years.

Steve: Okay and here’s another question from — it’s a selfish question actually because I want to do something similar to PickFu at some point in the future. If you were to again start all over again, like can you just kind of describe the process. When you guys are talking about designing PickFu, was it just like, “Hey let’s just throw this up and see what happens.” Or were you specifically looking at pin points with your business when you decided to start this or?

John: Yeah. So the model that my co-founder Justin and I have had for how we work is that we’ve always wanted to build a portfolio of businesses. And throughout this time when we’ve been working together, we’ve tried — there’s Menuism, there’s PickFu, and there’s like ten other small projects that we’ve tried and completely failed on. Generally when we are considering a new business, we try to focus on the pin points that we have. And we’ll build a lot of small tools to solve pin points that we have, and then once we build those tools, we’ll say “Okay, well, how well does it solve our problem and then potentially how many other people out there have a problem that’s similar to this.” So that’s the second questions we ask.

And then number three, if we realize that a lot of other people have the problem and that our tool can solve — our solution could solve it, then the next question is how interested will we really be in committing the time to turn this from a tool into an actual business. I think that last part has been something that we learned only through a lot of trial and error.

Steve: It sounds like all the business after you know talking to you over coffee that one time, all your businesses start out with basically minimal upfront investment, right? Is that kind of part of your strategy as well?

John: That’s always been part of our strategy is to, it doesn’t — especially nowadays with all the tools and education available out there, it doesn’t take a lot of money to start a business.

Steve: Okay. Yeah, that’s interesting. So you would never think about getting funding or anything like that.

John: I wouldn’t say never say never, but that’s never been a priority of ours. We enjoy having the control to be able to grow our businesses the way we want to.

Steve: So to kind of summarize, it just sounds like you think of small problems where you can come up with solutions relatively quickly. I imagine Menuism did not cost that much either, right?

John: Besides time.

Steve: Yeah besides time, yes. And then you just put something up, see if it gets a little bit of traction, and then decide whether you want to put more effort into it.

John: Exactly, yeah.

Steve: And there’s no risks really other than your time, of course.

John: Right. You can definitely try to start businesses with very little upfront risk.

Steve: So let me ask you this question, let’s say you weren’t a coder, how would this whole thing have changed?

John: So if we weren’t coders, then I see a lot of non-coders starting businesses as well and doing very successfully. And I think it’s still about taking things one step at a time and doing them in bite sized pieces. So if I wasn’t a coder, then and I came up with this idea for PickFu, then I could ran this idea by a whole bunch of other people who I know have had experience starting businesses, and try to validate the idea first before committing time and money to hiring developers to actually try to build out this type of product.

Steve: What I was actually trying to get at was that, do you still do your own coding? Because it sounds like PickFu is at a point where you need to more focus on like the sales and marketing aspects.

John: Right, we still do a large portion of the coding. We do have some part time contractors as well doing some of the coding.

Steve: Okay, and do you do that because you enjoy the coding process or?

John: Yeah we do. We enjoy the coding the process, we enjoy building things. But we also, part of the reason we started the businesses in the first place is that we enjoy learning. And so we do enjoy learning about all the different aspects of running a business, marketing, advertising, all of that stuff.

Steve: Cool, hey thanks a lot. We’ve been chatting for quite a while and a lot of good stuff here because a lot of my questions are actually selfish questions. I want to do what you are doing. I think it’s really cool.

John: I want to do what you are doing Steve. It’s really cool too.

Steve: I mean the fact that you can just take an idea and just whip it up over like four or five days, and then turn it into something that’s awesome, just sounds very attractive to me.

John: Yeah, it takes some time as well. Yeah, I mean we are pretty happy with where we are, and looking forward to growing everything.

Steve: So John, where can people find you. I understand you have a coupon code for the listeners here.

John: Yeah, so people can find PickFu at our website, PickFu.com. For anyone who wants to try it out, we have a coupon for your listeners. It’s — as they just enter the code, “mywifequit” for 50% off their first poll.

Steve: Awesome. I know for myself, I’m going to actually try this for some of my next blog posts titles just see where it goes. I mean, I didn’t realize you can get results in ten minutes which is pretty cool.

John: Yeah, totally. We would love to get any feedback, and I’m looking forward to you using it.

Steve: Yeah, well hey John thanks for coming on the show man. Really appreciate your time.

John: Cool thanks a lot for having me Steve.

Steve: All right take care.

John: Take care.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I think a service like PickFu is perfect especially when you are testing a site that gets very little traffic. By soliciting feedback from a pool of people, you can get real opinions on your site in ten minutes as opposed to weeks or months with split testing.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode96. And if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page and I’ll send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

095: How Nathan Barry Created ConvertKit, An Email Service Made For Bloggers

How Nathan Barry Created ConvertKit - The Best Email Marketing Provider For Bloggers

Today I’m thrilled to have Nathan Barry on the show. If you’ve never heard of Nathan, he is the owner of NathanBarry.com. And he’s well known for many different accomplishments.

First off, Nathan is the author of The App Design Handbook, a book where he made $12K on his first day with an email list of under 1000 people.

He’s created a bunch of iPhone apps which include OneVoice, Fluent and Commit.

But the reason I have Nathan on the show is to talk about his latest project ConvertKit.

ConvertKit is an email marketing platform designed specifically with bloggers in mind. So today, we’re going to explore the challenges of email marketing from a blogging perspective and how Nathan came up with the idea for the service.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Nathan came up with the idea for ConvertKit
  • How ConvertKit was funded
  • How Nathan validated his idea before beginning
  • How much Nathan invested early on
  • How Nathan got his first customers
  • Nathan’s early challenges and how he overcame them.
  • How ConvertKit caters specifically to bloggers.
  • How email marketing will evolve as a strategy going forward.

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the free mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Nathan Barry on the show. Now if you’ve never heard of Nathan he is the owner of nathanbarry.com, and he is actually well known of many things. So first off Nathan is the author of the App design handbook, a book where he made $12,000 on his first day with an email list of 100,000 people. He’s also written a book called Authority, and he has created a bunch of iphone Apps which include OneVoice, Fluent, and Commit, but the reason I have Nathan on the show today is to actually talk about his latest project ConvertKit. Now ConvertKit is an email marketing platform designed specifically with bloggers in mind.

And if you’ve listened to my podcast for a while now I have had then founders of AWeber and Klaviyo on the show already which their email marketing they are specifically cater to different niches. But there’s a whole lot of innovation in the email marketing space and ConvertKit aims to target bloggers and those with digital products. So today we are going to explore the challenges of email marketing from a blogging perspective, and how Nathan came up with the idea for ConvertKit. And with that welcome to the show Nathan how are you doing today man?

Nathan: I’m doing well, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yes, so tell me about ConvertKit and how you came up with the idea and kind of the back story. And I know you were doing really well with books, eBooks before ConvertKit,4 so I was just wondering and I understand you kind of pose that side of business to go on ConvertKit, I just want to know — well there’s a lot of money that you left behind and kind of what all the psychological factors were involved.

Nathan: Yeah, so that’s a big question, there’s a blog post there I’m going to write at some point, and it’s basically read how I left a quarter million dollars on the table this year by ignoring my blog and training business. Because yeah, I did that right, I built up a blog to the point where it was consistently pulling in $250,000 a year. And certainly I could have grown that much more and the folks at ConvertKit. So I’ll tell you why I went — why I built ConvertKit in the first place, and that’s really because I got into the blogging world, I always wanted to be a famous blogger, internet famous blogger I guess.

And I learned that you can build an audience and you could make money through running eBooks, and so I wrote the App design handbook. And my goal was to make $10,000 over the lifetime of the book and I just started — I had no audience really when I started writing the book. But I just started writing a blog post, getting people to sign up for my email list, and all this is when I launched I had 800 people on the list, and did $12,000 in the first day.

So I learned two things from that, one email is amazingly powerful for driving sales and get to meet with your audience. And two this whole online business thing is pretty cool, and you can make a living out of it. And because I blue passed all like my lifetime goals for that book in revenue, because I…

Steve: How much did it generate in total do you know, so for the first one…?

Nathan: That one book is well over six figures.

Steve: Crazy okay.

Nathan: Yeah, so and that was off from a relatively small email list and then I would go and talk to other friends who were far more experienced, like hey guys — this email thing is amazing, like it’s driving — did you know that it converts like ten times better than social? And they are, aha we’ve known that since 2002. I was brand new to it, but I went on to writing another book designing web applications because my whole background is building software.

And I launched it to a now bigger audience, it did double the revenue, that book did 25,000 in the first day. It created 50,000 by the end of the first month. But there’s a thing where I learned that email was so amazing and so powerful, and I learned all these best practices. Like if you want to grow your list quickly you should give away, I think everyone calls it lead magnets or an incentive of some kind.

Steve: Right.

Nathan: Or like email courses, or follow up sequence are really powerful for getting people to come back and buy, you should automate that. If you give away a sample chapter on your sales page you should remind them over time to come back and purchase. But it was such a pain to set that up in MailChimp. Like I knew that that the autoresponder follow up sequence would make me a bunch of money, but I didn’t set it out because it was just too frustrating to use interface and to go through that. And then with the — to avoid different incentives you had to create a bunch of different lists, and then you end up with two different subscribers and it was just such a pain.

And then I also wanted to know like the conversation rates for my opt-in forms. And in order to know that I had to either use an outside plug-in, or go calculate it with Google analytics. And I thought okay, there’s always best practices, what if I built a tool that had all of them built in by default, specifically for people who are trying to grow big audience and then sell books and courses to them? So I ended up being bloggers, so that started me down I went — I guess it’s been two and half years now the journey of building ConvertKit.

Steve: So did you build this for yourself in the beginning, and then decide to put it out to a broader audience?

Nathan: I did build it for myself, I was customer number one, but the goal was always to sell it.

Steve: Okay, and you are quite a technical guy and a software programmer, did you kind of bootstrap ConvertKit and coded it up yourself in the beginning?

Nathan: I didn’t code it myself, so my background is in user experience and design. So I do a lot of programming, I program bunch of iphone Apps; I have built many hundreds of websites over the years. But I don’t trust myself to architect large applications and systems and I know the ones that are inability. So I knew from the beginning that I was going to hire out development, and bring out developers to help with that.

But I also knew — I had seen a bunch of other people have some successful product to a company, they gave them a bunch of money, and then when they go into something knew they just take like $50,000 or something from that, and say let’s build this out and that money allowed them to wait a long time before they had to sell. And they could perfect this product really before even having to go out to the market and see if it’s something people wanted to buy. And I just had this pile of cash because — like when I started ConvertKit, I had made $50,000 in the last 30 days.

Steve: With the book?

Nathan: With the book.

Steve: Okay, I got it.

Nathan: So I had all this money and I thought, well just pour it all into ConvertKit, but then I thought, okay what if I build something that people don’t want? And it would have cost me $50,000 to learn that, that would really suck. So instead I gave myself a budget of $5,000 plus a bunch of my own time. And the other requirement was that I had to come up with all the extra capital that I needed from pre sales. So that forced me from day one like the very first day of working on ConvertKit, I sketched the wire frames, and then I picked up the phone. And I just talked to 10 people and pre-sold it.

Steve: So you had nothing and then you pre-sold ConvertKit?

Nathan: Yeah, absolutely.

Steve: Interesting, so walk me through that, convince me like how would you have pitched me, are these your friends or?

Nathan: Yeah, friends or I would say like acquaintances in the blogging world. I just kind of I guess broken onto the scene and so people knew who I was, and so they– and that sounds like oh yeah, he wrote this blog post about how his books did, it was that sort of thing. So what I did is I just wrote out once to people who I thought might have similar problems to me. And then I just called them and said hey, I’m thinking of working on this product and instead of pitching them I just asked them like, do you have this problem? Or what frustrates you about your email marketing? And then I get more things added to that list.

And then as we talked through it they would usually come to the same problems that I did, and then I would say well is that something that you would pay, would you buy a product and solve that problem? In all cases the answer is yes absolutely. So I said well, how much would pay for it? And the answers that I got ranged from $50 a month up to $200, and really the only difference here was how big people’s list were.

Steve: That of course yes.

Nathan: Because that determine how much value they are going to get out of it.

Steve: So did they give you money upfront then?

Nathan: That’s a very good point. No they did not and that was — I think I was doing everything right in the process up until that point. So what I did I said, I got to — how much would you pay for it? And they said a number, and so like we have everything ready in this transaction except for actually exchanging money. And I thought that’s not important because they’ve said that they are going to pre-order it.

So then what I did is I said great I don’t have a way for you to pre-order it yet, to process your credit, so I’m going to go away and I’m going to work on this some more, talk to some more people and then we’ll talk soon. Then like a month later I had refined wireframes with further along, I said all right I’m ready to process payments. Actually what I ended up doing is just setting up a quick page in Gumroad to take the…

Steve: In Gumroad, interesting okay.

Nathan: Because that’s where it would be easy to sell all of my books, so…

Steve: Right but for an ongoing recurring payment thing I would think that Gumroad wouldn’t be as good, right?

Nathan: You are right and so later on we ended up using Stripe, but I didn’t need to collect ongoing payments; I just needed to collect money. So what I did is I said basically people would be pre-paying for three months off the tool. If we are doing it over again I might do a year just to get…

Steve: Was the tool — it was usable?

Nathan: No it was not.

Steve: Oh it was not usable.

Nathan: I was able to– we had development markups and we were working out of it really quickly, but they wouldn’t get access to it for a couple more months. So I went back to these people and I said okay, great, we made this progress, now you can pay with the money that I thought you committed to. And every single one of them didn’t end up pre-ordering. And the interesting thing that happened is the conversation was different that time.

Once they were about to hand over their credit card it changed from like a hypothetical of like would you buy this, this is interesting like, yeah, that sounds great, yeah it definitely solves a problem, to handing over money then it turns it like your brain switches from the hypothetical to the I guess rational, and says, okay well our existing tools there’s do you have this feature. And it starts getting through all the real objections that you actually want the first time around.

Steve: Right.

Nathan: So my mistake was just the first — in the first conversation I just needed to push time it further and have a way to process credit cards right then and just say, okay, great would you pay — like the amount of money doesn’t even matter. It could be 100 bucks, it could be five bucks. But it’s the difference between okay, now you are actually making purchase rather than like giving some random advice to some friend. So those people who didn’t pre-order a couple of them are actually customers now though. Then I went out to a broader audience, I have been blogging about this and all that and talked to more people and ended up getting about I think 25 pre-orders.

Steve: Pre-orders with cash you mean, right?

Nathan: Yes, with actual money and that came to about $5,000.

Steve: It’s interesting like how did you convince these people, so let’s say they are on their existing email platforms and here you are offering something that wasn’t usable yet, and yet you got people to pay you for it.

Nathan: I think it was– they had the problem and they saw the vision, and they knew it was something that they would be able to use once it was ready. And then they definitely trusted me, I think being open about the whole process and putting out a lot of content in blog posts and all of that helped a lot.

Steve: Okay, so these were avert followers of you because they had read your blog and so they trusted that you would deliver?

Nathan: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Nathan: At this point I have been blogging for I don’t know not even a year though, so it’s not like I built up a huge following.

Steve: But clearly if you’d sold all those books, those people know you from that and they trust you, right?

Nathan: Exactly.

Steve: Okay, so you put in 5000 of your money, and then you said you just raised 5,000 from pre-orders, right? And is that enough to hire a developer to start working on this?

Nathan: Yeah, it is. Now I basically saved 50% of the money that I would have spent at least because I did all the design and [inaudible 00:14:48] codes, so I read all the issue on CSS design the user experience.

Steve: Okay, so you just needed a back end person to connect all — okay.

Nathan: Yeah exactly, and then once we launched we started getting paying customers. So we basically launched with those pre-orders and everything to about $1,000 a month in revenue. So we were working on this really so they– spending that last amount of cash that we still had built up. And then it got to the point pretty quickly where we were just every penny that I made was going back into development. And that was pretty much the biggest [inaudible 00:15:24] in the cost.

Steve: Can you comment on how you got your first few customers again, was it just emailing out to your list?

Nathan: Yeah, emailing out to the list and then…

Steve: Through ConvertKit, or through a different service at the time?

Nathan: I did it through MailChimp.

Steve: Oh, okay.

Nathan: Yeah and there was actually…

Steve: That’s kind of ironic.

Nathan: Yes, it was probably four months into ConvertKit that I actually switched my whole list over to ConvertKit, four or five months. Because that was my whole business that was how I made money. But it was also I guess a good selling point for ConvertKit, and I was like hey, this blog that makes a bunch of money — like I actually use ConvertKit for it. Because people would wonder like, okay it’s brand new, is it usable.

Steve: Yes, that would be my first question.

Nathan: So then when I could say, yes, I don’t know how many subscribers at the time, like 7000 or something like that. I would say yes, I’m doing all my emailing for 7000 subscribers on this, and it’s driving I don’t know $15,000 a month in revenue for my books and courses. So that was some good validation and I wasn’t some total random person who didn’t know the industry and…

Steve: So how did you get your remaining customers like early on, like what were some of the challenges early on in getting new customers? Was it just primarily a list in your blog driving customers in?

Nathan: Yeah, and then that was not nearly enough. And I tried other blogging, other content marketing things, and it just didn’t work. And then we tried other things like we launched something and this is a bit later on called ConvertKit academy. And that’s where we added this whole training component. And about helping people build a blog, get to their first 100 subscribers and doing that on ConvertKit.

Steve: I see, yeah.

Nathan: And that worked well enough that in the short time I definitely considered it a success. The thing was that it got us a whole bunch of beginner customers. And these were people who wanted to build a blog, but if you are in that position you haven’t been writing blog posts for a year. And if your initial stuff doesn’t get traction, so many people just kind of loose interest and all that. So our biggest cancelation reason was people just saying out yeah I don’t know if this blogging makes for me, or basically building an audience is more work than I thought, or ConvertKit is too expensive, and so that ultimately was a failure.

Steve: That’s why MailChimp gets so many customers right, because they have that free option?

Nathan: Yeah.

Steve: Right.

Nathan: Exactly.

Steve: So how did you overcome that then, did you start going after bigger names or?

Nathan: Yes, so there was kind of a long time period in here where I had the book and course side of my business that was doing really well. I could do a launch and make $30,000 in a day and $50,000 in a couple — over a week. So I had that side of things and so that was going really well, and then the ConvertKit side just getting another $100 in monthly recurring revenue was so much work.

So like when you balance these two things, you look at it you are like, yeah, ConvertKit would be better long term, but it’s so hard to focus on something that’s not working when you have something else that’s working so well. So ConvertKit kind of just — I guess limped along for a while. And had gotten to about $2,000 in monthly recurring revenue and stayed there. And it was just — it was a side project.

And then it got to basically September or October 2014 is just last year. A friend did call me out on — actually Heathen Shaw from Kissmetrics, Crazy Egg, a bunch of great stuff. He called me out on a couple of months earlier and he just said, hey when are you going to admit that ConvertKit was a failure and shut it down? Or give it the attention and money that it deserves and build it into a real company.

And that was kind of what I needed to hear because — wait, because he went on to say like it would have better if it had been a complete failure, because then you would have admitted it by now and moved on to build something else that would be great. So realizing that I’m like okay there’s $2,000 a month in revenue is not a tiny success, it’s actually a failure. So then instead of shutting it down I thought long and hard about, like have I given ConvertKit my best focus, have I given it every chance possible to be successful?

And the answer is no, and so in October I started working on it full time, the revenue was at $1,300 a month then. And I decided instead of hiring outsource development, that sort of thing, I wanted to bring on someone really good, so — being from the software world and working with — I had a bunch of startups; I knew a lot of developers.

So I made a list of all developers I would want to work with and then organized it by topics, and actually started recruiting. So treating not like a side project or like what someone might do when they are just trying to spend five grand to build the world’s best plug-in or something like that, but like if you wanted to build a company who do you want running the technology side. And I ended — go ahead.

Steve: No I was just going to ask presumably your incoming revenue was not enough to pay these guys in the beginning right, so you had to put more money in right?

Nathan: Right, and so I brought on David Weather [ph] as my lead developer, he was the number one person that went on my list. He said no the first time, but gave time fir [inaudible 00:21:26], and I invested $50,000 into ConvertKit, so the total invested up to 55,000, and that…

Steve: So you invested two week’s worth of income into ConvertKit?

Nathan: Yeah well, two weeks from the launch.

Steve: From the launch yeah.

Nathan: I think at that time let’s see, I was averaging — let’s see, the numbers are on my blog, but like 250, I made 250,000 in revenue that year.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: So I guess you can average that out to whatever.

Steve: So if you were to do it all over again just curious would you have started out by investing all that upfront money, or would you have proceeded the same way kind of little by little and getting a lot of feedback?

Nathan: I would have proceeded the same way by being cautions with the money upfront and make sure — I would have hit sales and pre-orders way harder. But then I also would have had cash on hand, and I would have invested it sooner. Like I would have given the company a little bit of money and say okay, let’s make it work with this and then once it started to work I would have given it a bunch more money.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: But I wouldn’t– like I really encourage people against like when you don’t know what you are doing and you get all this money and you are just going to waste it. So you have to be really-really careful with that, and that’s like if you go raise a million bucks in bunch of capital, you are probably going to waste all of it because you have no clue what you are doing.

Steve: So getting outside funding did not even crush your mind right in this case?

Nathan: I mean it did a few times, but I always had the ability to go and be my own angel investor I guess.

Steve: Okay, great because you had this other source of income that was kind of funding your development so to speak.

Nathan: So the other big change that I made in October last year is that I stopped working on the books and courses entirely. And the reason that was significant was because like I just had to make that decision to stop chasing the easy money. Because I knew that that was never going to turn into a big company, but ConvertKit could. All these other email marketing companies like I’m sure like here now we can name 20 email marketing companies that do over a million dollars in revenue a year.

Steve: For sure yeah.

Nathan: Many that are worth billions of dollars, and so there’s a ton of opportunity there but I was never going to make it happen if I was constantly like yeah. I’ll put 30% of my effort in ConvertKit, but the other 70% is going to the blog and courses because that’s where the money is right now. So I had to give up that short term revenue because I don’t know maybe someone else could pull off running both at the same time, I actually tried, and I couldn’t do it.

Steve: So just curious you had this tool that you released early on and it probably had a few bugs here and there, is there anything you do specifically to kind of reduce churn?

Nathan: Well churn was super high.

Steve: Okay, in the beginning okay?

Nathan: Yeah, you are looking at like 25% a month…

Steve: Oh, wow, okay, how did you address that later on?

Nathan: You just keep making the product better; it’s one of the things where the first many versions of your software suck. You really have two options, you either wait so long to release that you’ve run out of money and your software doesn’t get exposed to customers and feedback and all that which is terrible. Because you are going to end up building the wrong thing, and maybe you super polish which is going to be the wrong thing.

Or you go the other route and you say hey, we have this thing it’s the very first version, but we are making it better every single day. There are going to be bugs, there are going to be issues, there’s features missing. But it’s out there, we are making it better every day, and that’s the route that you want to go because then people use it and they go hey this part, I love the concept of this, fix these three things, and that part would be useful to me.

And you just keep improving all the time and that’s what we did. But there will be people who will say, I would love to use it, but I tried it and I just have to have these three features in MailChimp. And it’s like and I would tell them I would love to build that, I just don’t have the time or money right now, so it get pushed further off.

Steve: I see, well, let’s switch gears a little bit and talk about some of these needs of the customers that you have. And remember when we were just talking there’s a whole bunch of different email marketing companies out there. So what specifically makes ConvertKit stand out, and what are some of the needs specifically for bloggers and that sort of thing that you kind of directly address?

Nathan: Yeah, so a lot of those initial needs that I had, the first one being that you want to have a subscriber centric system rather than list centric. In both MailChimp and AWeber it’s the same — say you have a customer list and a newsletter list. If the same person is on both they are treated as two separate people. Whereas in ConvertKit and InfusionSoft and others they are subscriber centric, so then those are just more attributes added to that one subscriber’s profile. So that’s really important when it comes to doing any kind of automation or anything sophisticated there.

The next would be being able to easily create optin forms and give away those incentives and have good analytics and track and see what’s working. Then also so that it doesn’t end up creating like in MailChimp you would create the same person, have a bunch of different lists and get traction with difficult subscribers, and it’s just kind of a mess.

Steve: Give me an example of making an opt-in form easily; because I already kind of think that the process is pretty easier on some of the competing platforms. Can you give me an example?

Nathan: So like there’s a bunch of other tools — well, take like lead boxes, that LeadPages has. So that’s functionality that we built into ConvertKit directly. When you sign up you give out – it’s going to send out the incentive, the PDF, the video course, or whatever directly to you. So everyone is doing that outside of their email tool they are doing it with LeadPages, and then that solves — they came out with that right around the same time that we were working on ConvertKit to solve the exact same issue.

Steve: So let me get this straight, so I click on something, a box pops up, and I pop in my email and then you automatically send some sort of free giveaway, is that what you are talking about?

Nathan: Yeah, and then when you click on that giveaway we confirm your email address behind the scenes. So we don’t have to do stuff like well like in MailChimp it’s going to email it out and they are — like their email list is basically like hey, I know you signed up for Steve’s list, but do you really-really-really want to sign up? Like just make sure that you really want to sign up before I [inaudible 00:28:30] like, it’s just as really weird user experience where it’s like — it’s trying to prevent you from signing up almost. And MailChimp doesn’t let you customize those emails and that’s just weird to me.

Steve: Let’s talk about that for a little bit, so is ConvertKit double opt-in then in that respect?

Nathan: Yeah, so you can do single opt-in or double opt-in and, but you can customize that email. So you could do single optin if you wanted and auto confirm everybody, but then you get the benefits of when they click that confirmation button, it could say like download your free PDF. And when they click that it’s going to do the confirmation behind the scenes so we add to their profile and say oh, yeah, they own that email address which is the point of double opt-in.

Steve: Right.

Nathan: So we marked that behind scenes and they just get taken seamlessly to the thank you page or the file they requested or the video course or whatever.

Steve: I see so instead of a dedicated double optin email that’s kind of generic like the ones they force you to use; you can write a custom one that’s kind of related to your give away?

Nathan: Yeah, exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: So it’s not like in your face thing where you are — people are like well, I really wanted that PDF, and it’s like you have to confirm your subscription and then we’ll send you another email with the incentive. We can combine and my whole thing is user experience and I want all the subscribers to have a great experience, and I want it to be customizable for each blogger, and yeah. So I just saw a better way to do it, we can accomplish the same goal all behind the scenes.

Steve: Okay and so that is just something that’s already built in ConvertKit, so this isn’t like an auto responder sequence, this is kind of like the double and opt-in email and giveaway?

Nathan: Yeah.

Steve: Right okay.

Nathan: Yup, and then also on the auto responder side the designer and me knew that that could be done better. Everyone’s running sequences, but then just the interface on all this is a total pain, and so I knew that I could design it where you may have an email course and all the emails are listed down the left side and you will click between them easily, you can click back and see hey where did I send in that previous email. You can write it as an actual sequence instead of you know– other interfaces encourage you to send, well it’s effectively 10 random emails that just happen to come in a sequence because people don’t write them that way.

Steve: I am just curious; do you know what each person has gotten at any given time with an auto responder sequence?

Nathan: Yeah, so if you click in to each subscriber profile you would see what emails they’ve received.

Steve: Okay, and what are some other features that you built in just as being a user, or what are some of the other– because I’m just thinking like often time I had there’s like 10 email different email marketing firms. How do you kind of differentiate yourself from the competition, how do hammer home these differentiating factors to your potential customers?

Nathan: Yeah the biggest thing that we say is coming from the blogging world we know exactly what bloggers need. It’s build for bloggers by a blogger, and so a couple of other examples would be on a blog everyone, anyone who knows the power of email is doing all the work possible to capture email subscribers. That means that they’ll probably have a couple of opt-in forms on their site, maybe a side bar, a footer and an exit intent or something like that.

What happens is you’re putting all this work and you’re getting subscribers, and then someone subscribes and they come back and they read your blog because they are a fan, and your still– you have all these calls to action for an action they’ve already taken. There are ways to code around that, but nobody does it. No one sets up to the individual tracking so that their side bar opt-in form checks to see if it’s already– if that person visiting is already a subscriber and shows ultimate content.

And so we just built that in to ConvertKit, so that like if you’re reading my blog and you’ve already subscribed, then instead of the footer like at the end of the post saying subscribe, it’s going to show you a picture from one of my books just because like that’s waste of real estate, that’s a waste to call to action if when you’re telling your subscriber to subscribe.

Steve: Interesting, so is that tracking done if they’ve clicked on an email to get to your site, or is there just some cookie that’s on their computer to indicate that they’re an existing subscriber?

Nathan: Right now we’re doing it with the cookie, and so when they sign up we’re tracking a cookie that never expires.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: Then we’ll make it a little more robust over time, but as long as this was like because we run this whole platform with hundreds of bloggers using it, we can do this work once and everybody benefits from it.

Steve: Right, yeah that’s pretty compelling, yeah someone’s already on my list, I might want to show them like a link to one of my products for example as opposed to just a sign up form.

Nathan: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, and just curious do you have any stats on how that’s improved sales for any of your customers or?

Nathan: We don’t have any hard stats. There is one that we run some tests on, they had a pretty big list see, I think they were around 40,000 email subscribers and pretty decent traffic. all we did was track a specific coupon code for basically that link to their course, and it drove– I’m trying to remember it was like an extra 40 to 50 sales at about 100 to $200 I think it’s what the course is priced at.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: So it’s one of those things where they paid us a couple of $1000 a year for ConvertKit for all of their email marketing, and that one feature made them over 10 grand.

Steve: Okay. Let’s talk a little bit about just general email practices. What are some of your main strategies or tips for growing an email list fast?

Nathan: Well so it depends on what stage people are at. A lot of people get stuck on the like just getting started, and so for that I like to take people through what I call the 10 person rule, and that’s where you figure out what it is you’re going to teach, or you identify about who your audience is and you say okay. You go through your list of people you know in real life that have that problem that you can solve.

They need your product, in my case starting out there are developers who want to learn to design better iPhone apps for my first book, and so you write out 10 actual names of those people, and then reach out to them and it should be people you know in real life. If you can’t get to 10 people then maybe you haven’t picked a very good topic

Steve: Right.

Nathan: Reach out to them and ask them, hey are you interested in learning more about how to design iPhone apps, and if so often I love it if you’d be one of the first people to opt-in to my list, and help me craft the content of this new site that I’m creating. That gets you your first roughly 10 people, but then you keep talking to them and the next questions you ask are where do you currently go online to learn about this topic, and then the other question is what problem and frustrations do you have with it right now, or what are you stuck on?

The first question is going to tell you to do a whole list of where your target audience hangs out online, so you can go after those people. It’s going to be the sublets, the blogs, everything, so that’s where you get most way to promote your content. The second one is all those ideas, it’s a list of you answer all of those, you put them on especially in the right blog post one by one answering each one of those things, and that’s your next six months worth of content, and so that’s what gets you started, that’s how you get to 100 subscribers.

Steve: Okay, is this kind of the strategy you used to launch your first book?

Nathan: No, I wish I had been that sophisticated.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: I mean it’s similar; I just did it with less content and less focus I guess.

Steve: Let’s say you’ve already gathered your first 1000 subscribers, what are some next steps after that?

Nathan: One of my favorite things to do is to do an email course, and so there is something like when you tell people, hey set up for a newsletter. It’s not a very compelling call to action, and then if you tell people like hey downloads this free PDF that is 10 ways to do whatever, that’s also kind of has this weird thing where it’s like why do you need my email for PDF, can’t I just click on it and download it.

And so that’s why like email courses because then it’s like we’re going to send out this content over email on time and so you can digest it gradually. It’s not all a prank and then it’s obvious that you need their email because you’re sending it over email. I like to do those, I like a really targeted course and we’ve done; I did one called mastering product launches, because I was getting asked about how to do these product launches. Then every time that I would write a post about marketing, I would link the call to action at the end of the post would be to this mastery product launches course.

It’s totally free, so I go from a guest post on like I bought one for smashingmargazine.com and so it’s all about product launches, and it’s like 4000 words long. It’s pretty detailed and then the call to action at the end is like hey if you want to learn more check out this free course that I put together called mastering product launches, and I ended up getting over 1000 email subscribers just from that one guest post…

Steve: Nice.

Nathan: Glued to the email course.

Steve: nice, so instead of just a regular old link to your blog you link to a landing page that’s a sign up form instead?

Nathan: Yeah and it’s super streamlined, there is no actually links to my blog, there is no side bars, there’s none of that. It’s just content about here’s what you’re going to get form to opt in. The other great thing is that it gives me something to promote, so it doesn’t send a couple other times with other ConvertKit customers. And so there is this guy, his name is West Wages, and he put together a course called– I don’t remember what it called, but it was about online video. And so that finally– instead of telling people randomly like, hey check on my blog I talk about video, it gave him something that he could– people understood the value immediately and they could link to it, they could share it and all that.

Then he promoted it on his Twitter and Facebook pages, and he got maybe 50 subscribers or something, but then he went out and he promoted on a product side, and picked up like 300 subscribers. And then he just kept sharing it around and submitting it to different sub-reddits and just trying to get this out there, and by the end of the week after launching it he had 1000 subscribers, but it came from 10 different sources.

Steve: Right.

Nathan: That’s some of the cool ConvertKit features, there’s a lot of referral tracking, so you can add a campaign attribute to any URL that has a ConvertKit form in it, and then the form will track all the stats separately for that campaign.

Steve: Okay where all the form, where the form was shared basically?

Nathan: Yeah so if like if I wrote a blog post, and then I wanted you to share it I could set up [inaudible 00:40:22] blog post and then question mark rep equals Steve.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: Then when you share that I would see all the stats that like the visitors, the subscribers, and the conversion rate just for what you shared.

Steve: So in a way that’s kind of like a mini affiliate program without a payout so to speak? Okay.

Nathan: Yeah just really you’re tracking, and so in West’s case he was able to know exactly where all the subscribers came from, because he worked hard. Like, it wasn’t one source that gave him 1000 subscribers.

Steve: Right.

Nathan: He got that from 20 different sources, then there is another one just as a quick example, a lady in Apollo [ph] put together this great course on designing iPhone apps related to her book, and they call the mobile design book, and that course just went on product hunt and she picked up 3000 email subscribers in two days just out from product hunt.

Steve: Nice, so I’m curious this is actually a problem that I have with my email autoresponder sequence, so I have a sequence about 30 for this free course. Sometimes people don’t get certain steps, so the main guts of the course is in the first nine steps. Sometimes people don’t get step two, sometimes people don’t get step four, what are some best practices to make sure that everyone gets every single step?

Nathan: Like to make sure that the emails actually reach the inbox?

Steve: Yes.

Nathan: There’s a lot of things that go into deliverability. I mean the main things are, this is actually kind of random, but maybe you want to avoid trigger words that are going to– or like a high density of trigger words, it’s going to get things to go into spam.

Steve: Is there a list of these available online, of this trigger words or?

Nathan: You know it’s now a hard and fast thing.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: If you Google spam trigger words, I’m sure some good things will come up, because like officially like you shouldn’t use free and that sort of thing, but it’s more about the density of the words. Just read to the email and say like does this feel like something that’s a spam writing. Oddly enough a lot of profanity will trigger spam filters.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: And so a good friend Paul [inaudible 00:42:34] who writes some amazing content just happens to use a lot of profanity. If he uses too many F words, then his email will be more likely to go into spam, which is totally random.

Steve: F words in like the body of the email?

Nathan: Yeah, yeah.

Steve: Okay, interesting.

Nathan: Yup, there’s bunch of spam filter checkers, I think litmus has one and them a few others, they even put the content of your email in, and they’ll kind of say hey here’s what we think will happen. Other things– who you’re sending from is another is a really big deal whether the IP addresses are blocked by certain providers, and then every single company is different.

One thing that we do is we maintain a lot of email accounts with a lot of different Yahoo, Gmail and all that just constantly test, and we have those subscribe to random ConvertKit customers and so then we’ll check like, hey did that email actually show up in the inbox because companies like Gmail and others are just, they’re total black boxes as far as what’s happening. They’re not going to tell you, like they’re basically there is a code of delivered or accepted sorry, so your email provider knows that it was delivered, and then like Gmail will send a response back and say yup we accepted it.

Steve: Right okay.

Nathan: They accept everything, they don’t actually give you any information, so it’s all for testing and that sort of thing, but it’s one of those problems that it’s up to your email provider to solve, and so if you’re having issues with that talk to you email provider, it’s actually…

Steve: Well let me ask you this question, so does the open rate and the click to rate affect the deliverability of future emails?

Nathan: Mm-hmm.

Steve: It does, so if I blast out something to like let’s say 50,000 people and only a fraction of those people open. The next time I blast, but no one marked it as spam, the next time I blast a similar amount is it going to be even less in terms of deliverability?

Nathan: It’s one of those things where people don’t come– and by people I mean email account providers.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: Now like MailChimp and everybody I mean like Gmail and Yahoo and then they are not going to comment on it specifically and say for sure, but they’ve hinted many times that have you sent us 50,000 emails, and a bunch of our customers don’t engage with them, then we’re going to think less of you.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: Which makes sense, like another thing that we’ve seen have an impact is replies, and so if you get more replies to your email, future emails will be– get better deliverability.

Steve: That implies I should try to solicit replies whenever possible right, on my order responder sequence even?

Nathan: Well, I think it’s great just from a business perspective of triggering, getting ideas for future content. Like I’ve heard Brandon Dan teaches freelancing, and so he has this welcome series about how to be a better freelancer, and one of those emails it just says hey what is your biggest frustration as a freelancer right now? And then he categorizes all those responses in Gmail, and then when he needs– it’s like what should I write about today, he just taps over to that and he’s goes, oh there is 50 great ideas. I just have to answer that frustration and there’s a 2000 word blog post. Yeah it’s great for deliverability and it’s great for content ideas.

Steve: Would you recommend then like highly segmenting your list, and only sending out because it’s a lot more energy to do this right especially if you only sell like a single product. Do you not recommend blasting like your entire list for email that you think is relevant to most people?

Nathan: I am– I would send it out to everyone you think it’s relevant to. One mistake that I see a lot of people making is that they filter down, I guess they over segment and over complicate. They are less like ConvertKit gives you some amazing automation functionality like InfusionSoft, and others, and so I guess what I am saying is people can use it too much where they build so much sophistication into it that they don’t put their effort into the content and the growth, because then they are like, oh when this happens now also other magical things happen.

Steve: Right.

Nathan: I recommend people add like just the right amount of automation to make cool things happen without going crazy. I recommend sending most listing the book of your list, I would just recommend cleaning your list, and encouraging people to unsubscribe. Just say hey if you’re not getting a ton of value from it, just unsubscribe.

Steve: How often do you this, just curious for yourself?

Nathan: Like every six months or so.

Steve: Every six months and then you just target no opens within the last six months, and then you send out an email saying here click here if you’re still interested?

Nathan: Yeah you do, yeah no open or clicks, you have to know that like open is not a reliable metric.

Steve: Right.

Nathan: Because in all providers it’s based on whether that image– whether the one [inaudible 00:47:46] transparent, Jeff was displayed. You just need to like don’t just delete them, like send them an email and say hey you haven’t been committed to this relationship like I have– it’s not me, it’s you. I think it’s time that we start seeing other people, but if you’re willing to put in some effort and read my emails, click this link, and won’t delete you.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: Yeah, so I recommend keeping a nice clean list, that’s one thing about ConvertKit that’s great. Now since we’ve grown and we have all these customers that are sending really great emails. We get really high open rates, and so we’re able to maintain much higher deliverability. Like if you ever use MailChimp it will tell you like put the average open rate by industry, and I would always use it and then say you’ve got 35% open rate. The average for your industry is 1.7%, and I was always like you’re kidding, right. Across all of email marketing open rates tend to be really-really low, but we could…

Steve: Yeah so what are they like for bloggers for using your tool, what is the average open rate and click through rate?

Nathan: Average we– so click through rate depends on so many things, I don’t think it’s…

Steve: Sure.

Nathan: Worth focusing much on, but open rate I would say between 20 and 30%.

Steve: Amazing.

Nathan: To be average, and then we’d consider good anything over 35 to 40%.

Steve: Wow, that is quite high actually, I wasn’t expecting to hear it to be that high, interesting, okay.

Nathan: Yeah we like to send emails that people actually want to read, and so bloggers tend to create lots of content and all that, and then we recommend that people clean their lists because your subscribers some of them will lose interest, and or change emails account, so we recommend you clean up those non engaged people.

Steve: Do you have any stats on just like deliverability, like just the email even reaching their inbox?

Nathan: There is not a good what– because the email provider, like Gmail and Yahoo don’t report that back.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: There’s, you can’t like put a nice metric on it.

Steve: Okay, and actually you know what Nathan, I didn’t realize we’ve been chatting for quite a while, so I’ll just limit to a couple of more questions here, just curious what your take is on single verses double opt-in. I kind of asked this to some of the other email providers I had interviewed and I was just curious what you take was on it?

Nathan: Yeah so the more steps you have someone go through in order to opt in, the fewer you’re going to get, they’re like a few total people, but the more engaged and motivated they will be. It’s just do you want a larger list of less engaged people, or do you want a smaller list of highly engaged people. That’s, I don’t think there is a right answer, it’s up to you on single versus double opt-in. In other countries like Canada has some rules about double opt-in, so if you are in Canada sending email you do double opt-in. Otherwise it’s up to you if you– personally I’d rather have a smaller list of highly engaged people, and so I do double opt-in on almost everything.

Steve: Okay interesting, and do you guys personally do anything to prevent like one dude from like sighing up 100 different people?

Nathan: Yeah, so because like to prevent spammers, because everybody pays to sign up, we don’t have a free plan or any of that. Then at this point we get I don’t know 10 customers a day, so you can tell right away when someone signs up you know like something seems fishy about this.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: We have all these triggers where like there is no free plan that people can send through, and so that discourages tons of spammers already.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: We had two spam accounts and we caught them before they sent an email, so it was just one of those things we were like, why are you talking so much about Paypal, you seem to be acting as if you are Paypal. It was one of those sort of things, and so they were still importing subscribers and looking at that one. It was a bummer because they were paying $250 a month, but we deleted them and we…

Steve: Yeah I mean it could ruin your service right if you let them stay and spam everyone right?

Nathan: Right especially because we maintained such high open rates, because we don’t have, like there’s is this whole range between sending an email that people really want, and then also sort of the spectrum that were on, but then there is the email that gets 5% open rates that’s not technically spam. It’s just some company sending out an email to everyone who’s ever made a purchase from them over the last decade. That’s what a lot of email marketing industry is doing. It’s getting terrible open rate, a decent number of spam complaints, but it’s all technically legal and fine and there not spammers. We don’t have any of that on our system, and so we get high deliverability arcos the board.

Steve: Any plan on maintaining these strict standards going forward?

Nathan: Yeah the…

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: We can– bloggers produce great content, that’s who our customers are, and it doesn’t help us in any way to compromise on that.

Steve: Okay, hey Nathan thanks a lot for coming on the show, I learned a lot about email marketing and how to kind of launch a sass company in a slow and steady way and getting feedback all on the way, so thank you for that.

Nathan: Yeah I guess I should mention a little bit so we talked about the like the very beginning times of ConvertKit that ever since making that full time switch, it’s been growing like crazy, and now we’ve got people like [inaudible 00:53:37] and we have about many other top bloggers using us. We sent 7.5 million emails last month, so now we’re growing very-very quickly and a substantial player in the market, but it’s kind of fun to go over the beginning times too and remind people to stick with their projects even if they haven’t like been overnight success.

Steve: Totally and hey Nathan where can people find you and where can they sign up for your service?

Nathan: You can find me at NathanBarray on Twitter nathanbaray.com. Barray is B-A-R-R-Y, but ConvertKit is just at convertkit.com, and that is everything I’m working on these days.

Steve: Awesome, well thanks a lot for coming on the show Nathan, great talking to you again man.

Nathan: Thanks.

Steve: All right thank you.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. As I have mentioned many times in the past, email marketing makes up 90% of the money I make on my blog. Now ConvertKit is a serious contender to replace my existing service, and I am actually carefully evaluating it right now. It also helps that I know and trust the CEO, and I have faith that he will treat his customers right.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode95, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the best complement that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 k in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page and I will send you the course right away. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!